User Guide

Featuring:

iGrafx® 2006 User Guide

The contents of this iGrafx user guide and the associated iGrafx Process software are the property of Corel Corporation and its respective licensors, and are protected by copyright. Any reproduction in whole or in part is strictly prohibited. For more complete copyright information about iGrafx Process, please refer to the About iGrafx section in the Help menu of the software.

© 2005 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved. iGrafx, iGrafx FlowCharter, iGrafx Process, iGrafx Process for Six Sigma, iGrafx Process for Enterprise Modeler, iGrafx IDEF0, and iGrafx Process Central are all trademarks or registered trademarks of Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the U.S. and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and WindowsNT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Java and JavaScript are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Other product, font, and company names and logos may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Microsoft SQL Server 2000© Copyright 2005, Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1iGrafx 2006 Family of Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1System Requirements and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Installing iGrafx 2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Activating Product License Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Managing iGrafx License Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Adding New License Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Enabling Product Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Managing Multiple License Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Learning About Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Using Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Getting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

iGrafx 2006 Uses and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Understanding the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Toolbox Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13iGrafx Explorer Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Accessibility Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21iGrafx Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Documents vs. Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Creating a Basic Diagram, Process, or Organization Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Placing Shapes in the Diagram Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Using the Toolbox Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Moving Shapes Around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Drawing Lines to Connect Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25About Attachment Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25About the Direction of Connector Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26About Multiple Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Modifying Connector Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Selecting and Connecting Lines to Different Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Moving a Connector Line to a Different Attachment Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Selecting, Adding, and Canceling the Selection of Shapes and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Selecting and Adding One or More Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Canceling and Removing Items from Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

iGrafx 2006 User Guide i

Adding Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Text In Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Text Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Text Area Borders and Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Text Area Anchoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Importing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

About Departments and Floating Departments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Adding Departments and Child Departments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Changing Names and the Appearance of Departments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Moving a Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

What Else Can You Do with Shapes and Departments?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Changing the Size of a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Changing the Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Growing a Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Copying and Pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45Undoing, Redoing, Cutting, and Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Reducing or Increasing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Using the All Zooming Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Using the Best Fit Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Printing a Diagram or Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Saving and Closing a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Saving a New, Unnamed Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Saving a Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Closing a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Exiting iGrafx 2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Working with Shapes and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Placing Shapes in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Placing a Shape Using the Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Placing an Intelligent Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Working With Container Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Creating Container Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Adding Graphics and Shapes to a Container Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Copying and Deleting Container Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Ordering Container Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Using Container Shapes in Departments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

About Connector Lines and Line Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Adding a Vertex to a Connector Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

ii iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Connecting Shapes with Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Connecting Two Shapes with Automatic Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Connecting Two Shapes Using the Connect Shapes Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Adding Connected Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Working with Case Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Attaching Graphics to Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Using the Line Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Adding a New Line Library Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Editing an Existing Line Library Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Attaching a Graphic to a Line Library Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Adding a Graphic to the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Adding a Toolbar Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Restoring a Deleted Line Library Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Editing Connector Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Moving a Line End from One Point to Another on a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Adding Text to a Connected Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Reversing Line Ends Between Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Replacing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Fitting Shapes to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Connector Line Intersections and Skips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Changing the Connector Line and Arrow Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Adding Manual Connectors to a Connector Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Using Spacing Options Between Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Setting the Line Spacing Between Shapes and Connector Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Changing the Border and Fill Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Changing the Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Changing the Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Adding a Shadow or 3D Effect to a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Creating Activities Spanning Departments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Placing a Cross-Department Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Excluding a Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Using Phase Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Inserting a Phase Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Formatting a Phase Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Labeling a Phase Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Coloring a Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Deleting a Phase Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

iGrafx 2006 User Guide iii

Numbering Shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Showing or Hiding Numbers on All Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79Showing or Hiding Numbers on Selected Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79Renumbering All Shapes Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80Renumbering Selected Shapes Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80Renumbering Shapes Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80Setting the Default Number Format for New Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80Changing the Number Format for Existing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Using Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Adding or Displaying a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81Moving a Shape Field In or Around a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Including a Shape Field Description with a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Setting Advanced Shape Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Deleting a Shape Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Using the Note Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Working with Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Using the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Adding a Shape to the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Adding a Shape to the Toolbox Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Removing a Shape from the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Editing a Shape in the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Duplicating a Shape in the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Arranging Shapes in the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Manipulating Shapes and Lines Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Align Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92Making Shapes the Same Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93Even Spacing Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Rotate/Flip Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Order Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96Combine Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Working with Default Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Setting Shape and Line Defaults Using the Defaults Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Creating a New Preset Shape Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Adding a Preset Shape Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Choosing, Renaming, or Deleting a Preset Shape Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Creating a New Preset Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Adding a Preset Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Choosing, Renaming, or Deleting a Preset Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Shapes vs. Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Opening Graphic Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104Drawing a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

iv iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Manipulating Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Adding Text to a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Moving a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Resizing a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Rotating a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Reshaping a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Converting a Graphic to a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Drawing Callout Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Connecting a Callout Line to a Shape from a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Formatting a Callout Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Working with Documents and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Opening and Creating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Opening a Document Using the Welcome Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Creating a New Document from the Welcome Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Opening a Document Using the Open Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Opening a Process Central Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Creating a New Document Using the New Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams, Files, Web Pages, or Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Linking and Subprocesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Linking a Shape to Other Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Linking a Shape to a File or Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Linking a Shape to a Repository File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Laying Out the Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Defining the Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Custom Headers and Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Adding a Header and Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Formatting Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Process Formatting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Border and Divider Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Indicator Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Off-Page Connector Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Aligning Shapes and Using the Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Aligning Horizontally or Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Working with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Adding a Layer to an Active Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Editing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Using the Layer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

iGrafx 2006 User Guide v

Working with the Diagram Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Rulers, Page Breaks, and Hidden Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139Master Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Using Other Document and Diagram Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Spelling and Using Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Finding and Replacing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141Protecting and Unprotecting a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142Setting the Automatic Recovery Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Viewing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143Viewing Different Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145Working with Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Working with Diagram Types and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Creating a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Creating a New Component from a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Deleting or Renaming a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Copying and Pasting a Component from one Document to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149Converting a Basic Diagram to a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Working with Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Creating Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Text in the Open Diagram Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152Text in a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152Text on Connector Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Text in Department Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Manipulating Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Selecting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Moving Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Attaching Text to Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Attaching Text to Another Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Detaching Text from a Shape or Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158Deleting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Editing Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Formatting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159Setting Bullet Styles for Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160Setting the Line Spacing for Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

vi iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Default and Preset Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Setting Text Defaults Using the Defaults Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Setting Text Defaults Using the Shape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Creating a Preset Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Applying a Preset Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Renaming a Preset Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Deleting a Preset Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

What Else Can You Do with Text?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Adding Secondary Text Areas to a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Deleting Secondary Text Areas from a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Aligning Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Setting Text Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Rotating Text Independent of Rotating a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Rotating a Shape and Text Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Troubleshooting a Printing Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Publishing a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Publishing a Word Processor File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Publishing a Slide Presentation File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Publishing a Web Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Sending a Document as an E-mail Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Exporting Diagrams and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Exporting a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Exporting a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Changing the Field View for Exporting a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Reordering Columns Before Exporting or Copying a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Removing Columns Before Exporting or Copying a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Modifying and Saving Predefined Sets for Exporting or Copying a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181How Do I Import Files? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182FlowCharter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Importing Custom Data in Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Using Other Applications with Your Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189Embedding Objects From Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Inserting an Embedded Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Editing an Embedded Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Converting an Embedded Object to a Different Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

iGrafx 2006 User Guide vii

Dragging and Dropping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Embedding an Object Into a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Creating Links to Specific Locations in Microsoft® Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Creating a Link To an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Editing Linked Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Controlling How Links Are Updated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195Viewing As an Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Customizing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Using Custom Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

The Default Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197Using Personal and Common Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Working with iGrids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Inserting an iGrid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199Editing an iGrid in the Diagram Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Working with Visual Basic for Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Using VBA with iGrafx 2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Using Data in Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Working with Custom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Adding Custom Data Fields to a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203Accumulating Custom Data Through Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206Deleting Custom Data Fields from a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Adding Advanced Custom Data Field Options to a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Inserting a Legend Displaying Custom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

The Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Viewing Data in Tabular Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209Adding/Editing Data Using the Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210Connecting Shapes Using the Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210Customizing the Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Formatting and Editing Cells in the Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

Working with iDiagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Creating a New Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213Deleting an Entity from a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214Running an iDiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Working with SPC Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Inserting a SPC Chart in a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Adding Data to a SPC Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215Deleting a SPC Chart from a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

viii iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using iGrafx Process Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Understanding Process Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

What are Repositories? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Using the Explorer Bar with Process Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Working with Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Opening a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Loading a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Unloading a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Closing a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Changing a Repository’s Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Managing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Adding a Document to a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Removing a Document from a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Viewing an Item In a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Checking Out an Item from a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Changing the Default Working Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Undoing a Check Out of an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Checking In an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Renaming an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Adding an External File to a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Adding Multiple Files to a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Copying and Sharing Items in a Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Searching for Text Among Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Working with Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Managing Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Viewing an Item’s History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Creating a New Version of a Document or Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Viewing a Specific Version of an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Labeling Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Labeling Using the History Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Using the Department Data Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Creating a Department Data Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Adding Departments to the Department Data Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Deleting Departments from the Data Department Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Renaming Departments in the Department Data Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Inserting Department Data Dictionary Departments into a Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Viewing Processes That Use a Managed Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Managing Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Links to Other Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Links to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Creating Process Central Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

iGrafx 2006 User Guide ix

Working with Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246About Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Using Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248Defining a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Editing a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Removing a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Customizing the Query Results Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

Security Rights Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Understanding Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252Understanding Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254Special Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255Assigning Roles and Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

Approving or Rejecting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Understanding Approval Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260How Voting Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261Managing Approval Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263Managing Item Approvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266Nominating a Document for Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267What Happens to a Document After It Is Nominated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Approving or Rejecting a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270What Happens to a Document After It Is Approved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Using Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Using Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Adding an Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279Editing an Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Deleting an Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

Process Central Tools and Menu Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Explorer Bar Icons and Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Process Central Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285

Using Enterprise Objects in iGrafx Process Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289What You Can Do with Synchronized Repositories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289About Linking to Enterprise Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Working with Enterprise Objects in Process Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Viewing Enterprise Objects in Process Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292Using the Department Data Dictionary with Enterprise Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Referencing Enterprise Objects from a Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293Using Templates with Activity Risks and Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

x iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Organization Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Creating Organization Chart Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Adding Shapes to Your Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Moving Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Removing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Customizing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Customizing a Chart Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Importing and Exporting Organization Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Outlook Address Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Organization Chart Diagrams Tools and Menu Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310OrgChart Builder and Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310OrgChart Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315Understanding Cause and Effect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Creating a Cause and Effect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Cause and Effect Diagramming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Editing a Cause and Effect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Adding Arrows To a Cause and Effect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Removing Arrows From a Cause and Effect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Working with Text in a Cause and Effect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Laying Out a Cause and Effect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Printing a Cause and Effect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Exporting FMEA (Failure Mode and Effect Analysis) Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324What is a FMEA Diagram? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Exporting a FMEA Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Using Value Stream Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327Creating a Value Stream Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Understanding the Default Lean Value Stream Map Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Value Stream Map Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Adding Shapes and Flows to the Value Stream Map Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Creating the Material Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Creating the Information Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Using Lines With Attached Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Adding a Supermarket with Kanban Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Setting Value Stream Map Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Entering Data on Shapes in a Value Stream Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

iGrafx 2006 User Guide xi

Working with Lean Custom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Data Elements with Entered Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338Data Elements with Calculated Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339Creating Additional Lean Custom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339Renaming Data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340Lean Custom Data in the Default Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

Exporting and Importing Lean Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341A Lean Six Sigma Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Defining the Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341Measuring and Analyzing Value Stream Effectiveness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343Analyzing Data with Cause and Effect Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343Using Lean Pick Charts to Improve a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343Controlling a New Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344

Using BPMN Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345A BPMN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Understanding BPMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345If You’re Already Familiar With BPMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346If You’re Already Familiar with iGrafx Process Modeling and Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347Differentiating BPMN Diagrams From Process Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348

Creating BPMN Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Using BPMN Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Understanding BPMN Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Using BPMN Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350Using BPMN Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353Using Embedded Subprocesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353About Exception Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354Using BPMN Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355Using the BPMN Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356Using BPMN Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357Understanding Connector Lines in BPMN Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

Checking for BPMN Modeling Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Converting Process Diagrams to BPMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Understanding BPMN Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367Process Mapping Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Activities in a Process Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368Directed Connector Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368Departments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

xii iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Process Modeling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372The Process Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

The Modeling and Simulation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374The Process Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375The Scenario Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376The Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Process Data Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Shape Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Resource Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Task Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Shape Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Hierarchy Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Managing Process Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Running Simulation and Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393How Simulation Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Describing the Simulation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Defining Process Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397About the Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397More on Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Joining Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Duplicating Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Transaction Flow Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Transaction Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Defining Activity Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403About Start Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403About Input Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Batching Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Joining Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Gating Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Grouping Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416Queueing Transactions at Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Working with Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Defining a Message Exchange Between Two Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Broadcasting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

iGrafx 2006 User Guide xiii

Defining Activity Resources Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424Resource Assignment Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428Resource and Value Class Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428Resource Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430Resource Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430Resource Wait Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433About Resource Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433

Defining Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439Task Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440Task Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440Process Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442Task Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445Task Capacity, Schedule, and Overtime Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445Excluding Departments from Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446Defining On Completion Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447Duplicate On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448Duplicate By Member On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449Discard On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449Unbatch On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449Message On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450Fault On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450Cancel On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451Compensate On Completion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

Defining Activity Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452All Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453Decision Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455Named Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459Available Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

Defining Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462Defining an Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462Assigning Attribute Values at an Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463Priority and Preempt Transaction Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464Duration and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466Last Simulation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467General Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467Custom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468About Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469

Working with Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470Attribute Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471Attribute Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473Attribute Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474

xiv iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474User Defined Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475Distribution Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477Mapping Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Working with Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484The Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Using Strings, Functions, and Arrays in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Using Functions on Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491Using Custom Data-Related Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Defining the Simulation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495What Happens During Simulation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496About Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

The Scenario Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Working with Multiple Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Run Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502Defining Simulation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503Initialization and Report Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Defining Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Using Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511Working with Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513Defining Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516Defining a Completion Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517Defining a Demand Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518Defining an Interarrival Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519Defining an Event Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522Defining a Timetable Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523Defining an Attribute Change Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529Initializing Attributes for Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530Using External Data for Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Using Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533Resources and Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Using Calendars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534About Schedules and Overtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535Working with Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535Working with Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538Working with Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540Working with Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Using Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544When Monitors are Evaluated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544Viewing Monitor Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544Working with Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

iGrafx 2006 User Guide xv

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551Running the Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Using Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552Using Trace Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553The Trace Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554Running a Simulation in Trace Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557Randomizing Simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561

Reviewing Simulation Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563The Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564About Simulation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565About Report Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567Defining Custom Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577Logging Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580Log Transactions Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581

Simulation Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582Transaction Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582Activity Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587Resource Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597DOE and Simulation Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597The Six Sigma Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599Process Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Defining a New Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601Editing an Existing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602Deleting an Existing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602Importing an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602Exporting an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602

Fitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603Fitting Data To Parametric Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605

RapiDOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605Controlling Process Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606Modifying Process Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609

Logging Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611Log Transactions Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612

Export Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613Exporting Report Elements To An External File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613

xvi iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Introduction 1

Welcome and thank you for buying iGrafx 2006, an intelligent business diagramming and modeling

solution designed for knowledge workers, managers, and IT professionals.

With the intuitive ease of use of iGrafx 2006, it has never been easier to create process, free-form, structured, software, presentation, and network diagrams.

The iGrafx FlowCharter 2006 User Guide contains documentation on iGrafx FlowCharter and the iGrafx Process Central client. The iGrafx 2006 User Guide contains documentation on iGrafx Process, iGrafx Process Central client, iGrafx Process for Six Sigma, and iGrafx Process for Enterprise Modeler (a component of iGrafx Enterprise Central). For additional documentation on these iGrafx products, see the iGrafx 2006 Help available from the iGrafx Help menu. iGrafx Process Central System Administrator, iGrafx IDEF0, iGrafx Enterprise Central, and iGrafx API help are documented in separate help systems.

iGrafx requires an active license for all products. Please contact iGrafx to purchase an upgrade if you want to use functionality not included in your licensed product.

iGrafx 2006 Family of ProductsiGrafx® FlowCharter™ Easy-to-use business graphics solution that provides professionals throughout your organization an intuitive solution to create process maps, network and software diagrams, organization charts, free-form, structured, and presentation diagrams. Includes BPMN compliance features.

iGrafx® Process™ The ideal tool for brainstorming and creative thinking around process improvement. Process readily displays where process bottlenecks occur and where resources may be under utilized, helping you make the right choice for your business.

iGrafx® Process™ for Six Sigma Companies can use Process for Six Sigma to eliminate errors or defects, realize increased customer satisfaction, and attain a distinct financial and competitive advantage in the form of reduced costs, improved efficiency, and increased profitability.

Introduction 1

iGrafx IDEF0® Integrated into the innovative iGrafx process management platform that enables companies to improve their business processes, iGrafx IDEF0 provides a simple, straightforward, and powerful tool that gives you the ability to quickly build consistent and comprehensive IDEF0 business models. Corporations can leverage these models to reduce operational costs and gain a competitive edge in today's business environment.

iGrafx® Process Central® Change is a daily companion to any enterprise business environment. To stay competitive, your processes must be fully optimized and effectively managed. Process Central is a central process repository that provides a team-based, collaborative environment for Enterprise Process Management. By employing Process Central, your organization is better able to manage change, share work, and sustain process improvement projects.

iGrafx® Enterprise Central™ Develop integrated models of business strategies, processes and IT with this strategic planning tool. iGrafx Enterprise Central extends the capabilities of iGrafx® Process Central™ 2006 to further enable compliance management, risk management, enterprise architecture and quality improvement initiatives. Its client application, iGrafx® Enterprise Modeler™, enables capture of enterprise strategies, goals, risks, systems and resources and their relationships in enterprise models.

2 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

System Requirements and InstallationThe minimum system requirements for installing and running iGrafx 2006 are listed below:

• Windows® XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, Windows NT® 4.0 (SP6 or higher required), or Windows 98

• Pentium® II, 200MHz or greater

• 64 MB RAM

• Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 or higher

• 100 MB or greater hard disk space

• Set Display Properties color quality to a minimum of Medium (16 bit)

• Set Display Properties screen resolution to a minimum of 800x600 pixels

• CD-ROM drive

• Mouse or tablet

Note

See the Process Central Administrator Guide for Process Central server system requirements.

To install this product, you must be an administrator or have this product approved by an administrator. Contact your administrator for more information.

Installing iGrafx 2006

1 Insert the Application disc into your CD-ROM drive. The Setup program starts automatically.

2 Follow the instructions on the screen. The Setup program guides you through the installation.

• The Typical installation option installs all applications included with your iGrafx 2006 product and is the recommended installation type.

• The Custom installation option lets you choose which applications and filters to install. To enable Process Central client, you must specify it in the Custom installation.

If you do not activate iGrafx and enter a license key, iGrafx 2006 invokes as a read-only viewer.

Note

If you do not have enough disk space to install your selection, you can clear off more disk space or change to a location on your hard drive where more disk space is available.

Introduction 3

Activating Product License Keys

Some iGrafx license keys require product activation. If you are new to iGrafx, you may be required to complete a one-time registration on the iGrafx web site to activate iGrafx 2006 before you can use an iGrafx product without restrictions. Once you have activated, you do not need to repeat the activation process for any existing or future iGrafx 2006 license keys you add.

If you have unactivated product license keys and you didn’t activate iGrafx 2006 while installing, you are prompted to activate the product every time you start an iGrafx application until you obtain and enter an activation license key. After installation, you can activate iGrafx 2006 from the reminder dialog box.

Advanced users may choose to activate iGrafx using the iGrafx Licensing dialog box.

Unactivated iGrafx applications revert to the read-only viewer version if you do not activate within 20 invocations.

Activating iGrafx from the installation wizard

It is recommended that you use this method to activate iGrafx 2006 while you are installing. You must have Internet access to activate iGrafx 2006.

1 Insert the iGrafx 2006 product CD or double-click setup.exe. The iGrafx installation wizard appears.

2 Follow instructions for installing iGrafx 2006 in the installation wizard.

3 On the Select Installation Type page of the installation wizard, click the Activate Now button. This button will only appear if activation is required.

4 Complete the registration on the iGrafx web page. iGrafx e-mails an activation license key and returns you to the Licensing Information page of the installation wizard after you complete activation on the web site.

Note

If you are unable to wait for the activation license key to arrive by e-mail, you can complete installation without it and copy and paste it into the Add License Keys dialog box later. To access the Add License Keys dialog box, from the iGrafx Help menu, choose About iGrafx. In the About iGrafx dialog box, click the Add button.

5 Copy and paste the activation license key from the e-mail message into the Licensing Information page. If you choose to type in the activation key rather than copy and paste it, note that you must include dashes. Keys are not case-sensitive.

6 Click the Next button to proceed with your installation.

4 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Activating iGrafx from the reminder dialog box

If you did not access the iGrafx web site during your initial installation, you can activate iGrafx from the reminder dialog box.

You have a limit of 20 invocations to use an iGrafx product without activation. Each time you start iGrafx, it displays a dialog box reminding you to activate if you did not activate from the installation wizard when you first installed the product. You can continue to open the iGrafx read-only viewer from the viewer shortcut and use it without receiving a reminder dialog box even if these conditions exist.

iGrafx displays a dialog box reminding you to activate license keys

Introduction 5

To activate iGrafx from the reminder dialog box:

1 Click the Activate Now button in the reminder dialog box.

2 Complete the registration on the iGrafx web page. iGrafx e-mails an activation license key and returns you to the Add License Keys dialog box after you complete activation on the web site.

3 Copy and paste the activation license key from the e-mail message into the Add License Keys dialog box. If you choose to type in the activation key rather than copy and paste it, note that you must include dashes. Keys are not case-sensitive.

4 Click the Next button to proceed with your installation.

For more information, see the iGrafx 2006 Installation Guide.

Managing iGrafx License KeysFrom the iGrafx Licensing dialog box, you can quickly view all enabled and disabled feature components of a single license key, add license upgrades, activate products, and manage multiple license keys by enabling, disabling, or removing them.

You may not modify licenses if an administrator has performed an Administrative Point installation configured for read-only use.

6 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You can use the iGrafx Licensing dialog box to add or remove product license keys from an iGrafx installation after iGrafx products are already installed on a system.

To view the iGrafx Licensing dialog box:

1 From the Help menu, choose About iGrafx.

2 In the About iGrafx dialog box, click the Manage button.

Adding New License Keys

When you purchase an additional product or upgrade, you must enter the license key for it before it is available for use. You can quickly add additional license keys from the Add License Keys dialog box.

Introduction 7

1 From the Help menu, choose About iGrafx.

2 Click the Add button. The Add License Keys dialog box appears.

3 In the Add License Keys dialog box, enter one or more license keys. You can copy and paste license keys from any source or type them directly into the window. When entering multiple license keys, separate them by pressing the Enter key after pasting or entering each one.

4 Click OK. The new license keys appear in the Enabled License Keys list.

5 Click OK.

6 License keys must also be activated. For information about activation, see Activating Product License Keys on page 4.

Enabling Product Features

In the Enabled Features section of the iGrafx Licensing dialog box, selected check boxes next to licensed product features indicate which iGrafx features you are licensed to use. You may clear a check box to disable a feature and simplify the user interface.

Managing Multiple License Keys

iGrafx license keys appear in the Enabled License Keys list of the iGrafx Licensing dialog box after installation. Only a user with administrator rights can add and remove license keys that affect multiple users, such as with an Administrative Point installation.

You can disable or remove a license key for your own installation. Disabling a license key is a way to temporarily remove a feature that you may want to add later.

• To disable a license key, you select it in the Enabled License Keys list and click the Disable button to move it to the Disabled License Keys list.

• If you have an old product license key or an expired license key, you can remove it completely by selecting it and clicking the Remove button.

For more information, see the iGrafx 2006 Installation Guide.

Learning About HelpThe iGrafx 2006 product online help system is available through the Help menu or through the product dialog box Help buttons. It is designed so that you can easily find the information you want—from conceptual topics, to specific procedures, to detailed information on buttons, tools, and dialog boxes—with just a few mouse clicks.

8 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Through the Help menu, you also have access to iGrafx tutorials, the Tip of the Day, iGrafx sample files, and the iGrafx web site. Use the iGrafx Sample Files link on the Help menu to navigate to a tips and tricks download on the sample files page on the iGrafx web site.

ToolTips provide quick help references within the user interface. You can show or hide ToolTips using the Toolbars dialog box, available from the View menu.

The most up-to-date information regarding your iGrafx 2006 product is in the release notes file on the root of the CD.

Using Online Documentation

Online user guides in Adobe® Acrobat® .pdf format contain all reference materials in the printed user guides and most of the reference topics in the online help system (excluding API help, dialog box help, toolbar and menu reference, and new features overview). User guides are on the application CD-ROM as uncompressed .pdf files.

For information on new features, see the release notes.

Getting Technical Support

Getting the most out of your investment is central to your success. A fee-based support program that delivers fast, flexible, and comprehensive service is available for registered owners of iGrafx 2006 products. This program is backed by our commitment and all the resources necessary to provide the service you expect.

Our staff of experienced technical advisors are specialists in the critical areas and applications important to you.

Contact us through the Internet at www.igrafx.com.

Introduction 9

iGrafx 2006 Uses and FeaturesiGrafx 2006 can be used for a variety of process analysis activities.

• Creating high-quality process maps

• Cycle time analysis

• Activity-based cost management

• Resource utilization and balancing

• Measuring and optimizing throughput, quality, and profits

• Lean value stream mapping (manufacturing and transactional)

• Creating Business Process Modeling Notation (BPMN) diagrams for modeling and simulation or export to Business Process Execution Language (BPEL)

After you draw a process map, you can simulate it. This enables you to experiment with what-if scenarios and quantify the impact of changing a process. For example, what if you introduced a parallel path so two departments work concurrently? Or purchased another machine to increase your production capability? You can try increasing resources to find out if this reduces the cycle time. Or you can change the process map and see if a different process flow is better.

For information on new features, see the release notes.

10 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Understanding the User InterfaceThe look and feel of the user interface is similar to many other Windows applications. If you are familiar with Windows, you can begin working quickly. Some of the elements you may use the most are:

Choose a menu item, such as File or Edit, and select a command from the menu on the Menu bar.

Use the Standard toolbar for actions such as opening files, printing, and viewing.

Define the look of text, lines, and shapes using the Formatting toolbar.

The Menu Bar

The Standard Toolbar

The Formatting Toolbar

Introduction 11

Use the Toolbox toolbar, shown on page 13, as a shortcut to tasks such as managing departments, placing most-used diagram shapes from the Shape Library, creating custom lines in the Line Library, formatting text, numbering shapes, and so on.

Manage and manipulate components, repositories, and diagrams in the Explorer bar.

Place shapes, lines, text, departments, and other diagram elements in the diagram space.

Other window elements like the Gallery and Status bar help you place shapes, lines, and text, format them, and understand which tools to use and why you use them.

The Explorer bar

The Diagram Space

12 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Toolbox Toolbar

The Toolbox toolbar contains tools for selecting placed shapes and lines, adding departments, placing shapes, and connecting shapes together with lines.

If the Toolbox toolbar is not displayed on your screen, you can view it by clicking the Toolbars command on the View menu, and selecting the Toolbox in the Toolbars dialog box.

iGrafx Explorer Bar

A specialized tool called the iGrafx Explorer bar lets you organize and view diagram components you have added to your document. With the Explorer bar, you can manage and manipulate components, repositories, and diagrams by adding new ones. You can also rearrange, copy, paste, or

Toolbox Toolbar

Introduction 13

delete elements that already exist. The Explorer bar is a dockable tool you can resize or move around the application window. By default, it appears on the left side of the application.

To print or copy the Explorer tree view, right-click inside the Explorer bar and choose Print Tree to send the output to the printer, or choose Copy Tree to copy the contents to the clipboard.

The iGrafx Explorer bar with the Components tab in focus. The other tabs used are for iGrafx Process Central repository management, and Cause and Effect diagramming.

14 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Gallery

The Gallery is a formatting command center. From the Gallery, you can drag and drop shapes, change color, format text and lines, add shadows and 3D attributes, and change fonts and line ends. The Gallery is positioned on the right-hand side of the screen for easy access and the shapes appearing in the Gallery can be resized by clicking and dragging their corners inward or outward.

Status Bar

Use the Status bar for abbreviated help on toolbar tools and menu commands. Passing the cursor over items in the window displays a short description about the item.

The Basic tab is an example of a shape palette. Other subjects contain different shapes you can choose from.

You can also use the Gallery to format the shapes that you drop.

Status Bar and ToolTips

Introduction 15

Accessibility Options

iGrafx 2006 lets you access toolbar tools, menu commands, and objects several ways.

Accessing Toolbar Buttons Using the Keyboard

Press the Alt key to enter menu navigation mode. In this mode you can navigate through all the menu items using the arrow keys, then the Enter key to select an item. This is standard windows behavior. To move from toolbar to toolbar, press Ctrl+Tab to go forward to next, or Ctrl+Shift+Tab to move backward to the previous. Press Ctrl+Tab once to go back to the Standard toolbar. In the Standard toolbar, you can use the arrow keys to move from tool to tool. The tool with focus is highlighted.

Selecting Commands Using the Keyboard

To select a command, press Enter just as if you were navigating the menu. To access a control such as a zoom box, press the Enter key. At this point, the keyboard focus is on the control. Use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list, or just type in the edit control.

You can also expand popup tools, such as the Zoom Tool, using arrow keys. If a control is vertically oriented (docked to the left or right), use the left or right arrow key to open it. If it is horizontally oriented (docked to the top or bottom), use the up or down arrow key to open it. Enter also opens it.

The Open tool has focus.

The Zoom command on the shortcut menu is navigated using the arrow keys.

16 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

If it is a combo tool, such as the Connector Line tool, pressing Enter selects the default command. To close the popup and continue navigating, press the Esc key.

Selecting Objects Using the Keyboard

Press the Alt key to enter the navigation mode and navigate to the Toolbox toolbar using Ctrl+Tab. When you have enabled the Toolbox toolbar and the Selector tool is in focus, press Enter. You can now navigate from object to object in the diagram using the arrow keys. Whichever object you select last is highlighted. If this object is a shape or text, a black rectangle appears around the edge of it. If it is a line, a thicker black line is drawn along its length. While in this mode, you can select or deselect objects using the spacebar. Both the Enter and ESC keys cancel any selection mode.

Placing Shapes Using the Keyboard

Press the Alt key to enter the navigation mode and navigate to the Toolbox toolbar using Ctrl+Tab. When you have enabled the Toolbox toolbar, use the arrow keys to place focus on the shape you would like to place. After you press Enter, a blue outline of the shape appears in the center of the diagram. Use the arrow keys to control where it is placed, and press Enter again to place the shape.

Connecting Shapes with Lines Using the Keyboard

To connect shapes with connector lines using the keyboard, click the Connector Line tool on the Toolbox toolbar. It takes four steps to connect shapes using the keyboard. After selecting the tool, an object in the diagram is highlighted.

Navigating the Connector Line tool shortcut menu.

Introduction 17

1 Use the arrow keys to move to the shape from which you want to start the line. When you get to that shape, press Enter to select it.

2 Choose the exit direction from the start shape using the arrow keys. At this step, arrows appear around the shape as you press the arrow keys. To choose a direction, press Enter.

3 Use the arrow keys to move to the destination shape. Press Enter to select it.

4 Choose how the line enters the destination shape using the arrow keys. Press Enter to select the direction. A line is drawn between the source and destination shapes.

Graphics cannot be connected to or from objects with a connector line, but they can be attached to connection lines. For more information, see Attaching Graphics to Lines on page 62.

For information on

• shapes and graphics, see Shapes vs. Graphics on page 103.

• changing a graphic into a shape, see Converting a Graphic to a Shape on page 109.

Drawing Graphics Using the Keyboard

To draw a graphic, such as a square or a circle:

1 Choose the appropriate drawing tool from the Draw Tool menu on the Draw toolbar. The cursor appears in the center of the drawing area.

2 Using the arrow keys, move the cursor to the place where you want to draw.

• For a square, rounded square, rectangle, rounded rectangle, circle, or ellipse, press the spacebar and hold it, then move the cursor with the arrow keys. Release the spacebar when you are finished. Press the Esc key to cancel.

• For a polygon, curved polygon, polyline, or curved polyline, choose each point by pressing the space bar. Press Enter to finish the drawing.

18 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Accessing Child Windows Using the Keyboard

Pressing Ctrl+Alt+F6 cycles you through docked windows like the Gallery. The Components tab gets focus in the Explorer bar and the Shape Palette tab gets focus in the Gallery.

Note

There is not a great deal of feedback during this process so it can be difficult to determine where the focus is.

Once focus is in the Gallery or Explorer bar, pressing Ctrl+Tab lets you access the different tabs within that window. In the case of the Gallery, the available tabs include Fill, Font and Line, among others.

Introduction 19

20 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Getting Started 2iGrafx 2006 provides flowcharting and modeling capabilities to help you draw, analyze, and improve

processes. with what-if scenarios. The results provide statistical data for in-depth analysis of the work flow in an organization.

iGrafx DiagramsiGrafx 2006 has predefined diagram types that are optimized for creating unique diagrams, charts, and maps:

• Process Diagrams–Perform functions like adding activity information to shapes, placing activities into departments to show who is responsible for each task, and connecting these activities with lines and arrows to show the flow of the process. Process diagrams are recommended for flowcharting.

• Lean Diagrams–Draw a Lean value stream map of your current process, a Lean layout diagram of your current operation, use a Lean pick chart for identifying optimal choices and solutions, and create a SIPOC diagram for a high-level look at the roles of suppliers, inputs, process, outputs, and customers in your process.

• Basic Diagrams–Perform simple diagramming and drawing.

• BPMN Diagrams–Map, model, and simulate a process with compliance to BPMN standards.

• Cause and Effect–Analyze the source of errors in a process.

• OrgChart Diagrams–Create professional organization charts using tools that help you move from a single, top-level shape to every employee below.

• IDEF0–Build business process models based on the Integration Definition language 0. IDEF0 is a separate add-on product.

A built-in template is available for each of these specialized diagram types, which may be customized with special formatting or additional shapes and saved as a new template. The template may then be used as a personalized starting point for new diagrams.

Getting Started 21

Documents vs. DiagramsiGrafx refers to both documents and diagrams. These concepts are different because:

• Documents are files. A document is a container of diagrams that may contain any number of diagrams. When you create a document, it includes one diagram by default.

• Diagrams are an iGrafx component. In diagrams, you can place and connect shapes, and draw graphics. You can also view, edit, print, and link diagrams to other diagrams in a document (subprocess) or other files. Collecting and linking multiple diagrams in one document keeps corresponding information in one place.

Creating a Basic Diagram, Process, or Organization Chart

When you start iGrafx 2006, you have the option of creating different types of documents. Document types appearing in the list reflect which iGrafx 2006 applications you have installed.

For information about diagram types, see iGrafx Diagrams on page 21 and also see Opening and Creating Files on page 111.

Document types you can choose in the Welcome dialog box

22 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Placing Shapes in the Diagram SpaceYou place a shape by clicking it in the Toolbox toolbar, moving the cursor to the diagram space, and clicking. For a Basic Diagram, the default shapes in the Toolbox toolbar are an Activity and a Decision. For a Process diagram, the default Toolbox toolbar contains an additional Start shape. You can also add shapes from palettes in the Gallery.

These three shapes can be used interchangeably. That is, you may designate any shape on the Toolbox toolbar or in the Gallery to have any behavior you desire.

Container shapes are activities with the Container Shape property set on the General page of the Properties dialog box. Container shapes are indicated by a dashed-line border. For more information, see Working With Container Shapes on page 53.

Using the Toolbox Toolbar

The Toolbox toolbar contains tools and other elements used to create a diagram. These toolbar tools put you in “modes” with commands, cursors, and actions specific to each tool. For example, clicking the Text tool gives you a text cursor for typing text, and clicking the Shape Numbering tool lets you select from numerous numbering commands that you can perform on shapes that exist in your diagram. You stay in a particular mode until you choose another tool.

Placing a Shape Using the Toolbox Toolbar

1 Click the shape on the Toolbox toolbar you want to place.

2 Move your cursor to the diagram space and click where you want to place the shape.

Placing Multiple Instances of One Shape Using the Toolbox Toolbar

1 Double-click the shape on the Toolbox toolbar you want to place.

2 Move your cursor to the diagram space and click where you want to place the shape.

3 Move to an empty position in the diagram and click to place another shape.

4 Repeat step 3 until you have placed all the shapes you want.

Start Activity Decision

Getting Started 23

5 Click the Finished button.

Note

You can also click a shape, press Ctrl, and move it to create another instance of the shape.

Moving Shapes Around

After you place a shape, you can change its placement by selecting and moving it. A solid blue outline moves with the cursor to show the placement. Any lines connected to a shape re-route automatically after a shape moves. You can move the shape anywhere in the diagram space except in department headers.

1 Click the shape.

2 Place the cursor directly on any gray stippling that appears between the black sizing handles positioned on the sides and corners of a shape.

3 Click and hold the mouse button while you move the cursor.

4 After you have moved the shape where you want it, release the mouse button.

A shape being moved from left to right.

24 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Moving Multiple Shapes

1 Either draw a bounding box around the shapes you would like to move, or click each shape one at a time while pressing Shift. A bounding box is the box you draw around objects by clicking the Selector tool on the Toolbox toolbar, clicking the diagram space near the objects you want to select, and then dragging the box over the objects.

2 Place the cursor directly on any gray stippling, hold the mouse button while you move the cursor, and then release the mouse button after you have moved the shapes.

Drawing Lines to Connect ShapesA line connecting two shapes shows the flow and direction of a process. In iGrafx 2006, the routing of connector lines is calculated automatically. You choose the source shape and the destination shape, and iGrafx 2006 maintains the connection. If you move either of the shapes, the connector line is redrawn.

About Attachment Points

You can connect lines to shapes anywhere on the shape outline.

When grid snapping is turned on, lines connecting to shapes snap to grid locations. This makes it easier to keep lines straight. Also, there are pre-set attachment points, shown below, which have a stronger “pull” than the grid. If you place a line near one of these attachment points, it snaps to it. To override this pull, press the Ctrl key when you are connecting.

Multiple shapes being moved up.

Attachment points

Getting Started 25

For more information on grid snapping, see Grids on page 132.

As you are drawing a connector line, an image of the line shows which attachment point the line snaps to. This lets you preview how the line looks before you release the mouse button.

Graphics cannot be connected to or from objects with a connector line, but they can be attached to connection lines. For more information, see Attaching Graphics to Lines on page 62.

For information on

• shapes and graphics, see Shapes vs. Graphics on page 103.

• changing a graphic into a shape, see Converting a Graphic to a Shape on page 109.

About the Direction of Connector Lines

When you connect two shapes, an arrow appears at the end of the line. These arrows represent the flow.

iGrafx 2006 gives you a large amount of flexibility for drawing purposes. For example, you can change the format of an arrow to point to the opposite side or in both directions as a two-sided arrow. For more information on arrows, see Changing the Connector Line and Arrow Format on page 69.

Regardless of which way the arrows point, a connector line between two shapes always has a starting and an ending point. These points provide necessary information about the flow of the process. In other words, the movement of a process always continues along a defined path.

About Multiple Destinations

If there are multiple destinations from a single source, you can create them by drawing multiple lines. In the following illustration, two lines emerge from the decision shape. They represent distinct paths in the process.

More than one connector line can come from a shape.

26 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The “Yes” and “No” text are outputs dependent on decisions made in the diamond shape and are called case text. For more information on case text, see Working with Case Text on page 58.

Drawing a Connector Line

1 Move the cursor inside the source shape.

You can choose any shape to be a source shape.

2 Click and hold the left mouse button.

3 Drag the cursor inside the destination shape, near the desired attachment point, and release the mouse button.

The cursor must be inside the destination shape to connect automatically. To use a different attachment point than the standard four points, hold the CTRL key down as you drag the cursor.

Modifying Connector LinesConnector lines show the flow of control between shapes in the diagram space. After placing connector lines, you can move them to other attachment points on the same shape or to other shapes.

Selecting and Connecting Lines to Different Shapes

Before moving a placed connector line, you must select it.

Selecting a Connector Line

1 Place the cursor directly over the connector line.

2 Click the mouse button.

Connecting to a Different Shape

1 Click the connector line.

2 Move the cursor directly over the attachment point on the shape. The cursor changes to represent the line. For example, moving a right angle line displays the right angle line cursor.

Getting Started 27

3 Click and hold the left mouse button as you move the connector to a new shape. When the cursor is inside a shape near the desired attachment point, release the mouse button.

There are pre-set attachment points that are easiest to connect.

Moving a Connector Line to a Different Attachment Point

You can also move a connector line to a different attachment point on the same shape or delete the connector line all together.

Moving a Connector Line to a Different Point

1 Select the connector line.

2 Move the cursor directly over the attachment point. The cursor changes to represent the line mode.

3 Click and hold the left mouse button as you move the connector to a new attachment point.

4 Place the cursor next to the new attachment point, and release the mouse button.

Deleting a Connector Line

1 Select the connector line.

2 Press the Delete key.

Selecting, Adding, and Canceling the Selection of Shapes and LinesYou select an item by clicking it using the Selector tool on the Toolbox toolbar. Some actions in iGrafx 2006 require one or more selected items. For example, you must select a shape before you can move it or change it. You can recognize a selected item by its sizing handles and stippled border.

Selected shapes show side and corner handles.

Unselected shapes show the shape outline only.

28 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Selecting and Adding One or More Items

There are several ways to select or add items:

Procedure Action

Selecting an Item Position the cursor anywhere within or over the item and click.

Selecting Several Items If the cursor is not an arrow, click the Selector tool on the Toolbox toolbar. Position the cursor to mark the first corner of the selection rectangle, hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor diagonally across the items to select, and release the mouse button.

Make sure you start dragging on an empty portion of the workspace and that the selection rectangle completely surrounds the items to select.

Getting Started 29

Adding Items to the Selection

Select the first shape. Press and hold the Shift key and select each item you want to add.

Selecting All Items On the Edit menu, click Select All.

Selecting by Type You can use the Select dialog box to precisely specify which items in your diagram are selected. This is useful for large diagrams when you want to change the format, for example, of all decision shapes.

On the Edit menu, click Select to open the Select dialog box. Several list boxes under the Shapes box let you select more specific elements like a shape type, or a diagram or phase by name. If you open a Process diagram, three more list boxes appear for you to select from: Inputs, Task, and Outputs.

In the Select dialog box, choose the diagram item(s) that you want selected in the diagram.

Procedure Action

30 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Canceling and Removing Items from Selection

You can also cancel or remove items from a selection.

Adding TextYou can use text to provide labels and give information about your diagram. A full set of fonts and formats is available. After you have added text, you can later edit it or change its font family, size, or style.

Text In Shapes

Text is commonly used with shapes and with departments, or you can add text outside a shape.

Adding Text to a Shape

1 Click the shape, if it is not already selected.

Note

You do not have to click the Text tool on the Toolbox toolbar to type shape text.

2 Type the text.

The lines wrap automatically at spaces. You can press Enter to create a new line. If you make a mistake, use the back arrow or Delete key. If the text doesn't fit in the area, you can grow the width or height of the shape to change the line wrapping.

3 After you finish, click outside of the shape.

For information about text layout, see Manipulating Text on page 155.

Procedure Action

Removing Items from the Selection

Place the cursor directly over the item to remove from selection, press the Shift key, and click the mouse button.

Canceling Selection Click the Selector tool in the Toolbox toolbar or click in an empty place in the diagram space.

Getting Started 31

Text Areas

These steps create a text area outside a shape. The text area maintains the same position in the department or below all departments, regardless of other shapes around it.

You can predefine text by clicking the text tool I-beam on the diagram at the top-left corner of the desired area, holding down the mouse button and dragging to the lower-right corner to define limits. Releasing the mouse button results in a defined text area with a flashing text cursor to begin typing.

Creating a Text Area

1 Click the Text tool on the Toolbox toolbar.

2 Type text into the area. By default, the text area is left-aligned with the initial cursor position serving as the left margin.

3 After you have typed the text, click a blank area of the diagram space to unselect the text.

Note

The border line style for a text area is “hidden” by default. To show the border around text, click Hidden Lines on the View menu. The border displays as a gray dashed area around the text.

Text Area Borders and Fill Patterns

A text area has no fill pattern, by default, and the border is hidden.

Text Area Anchoring

Text may be anchored or tied to a shape or connector line. If the shape or line is moved, the text moves with it. The anchor can be hidden or displayed using the Hidden Lines command on the View menu.

Procedure Action

Changing the color, line style, or width of the border.

Click the text area, and click Line and Border on the Format menu.

Changing the fill pattern. Click the text area, and click Fill on the Format menu.

32 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Anchoring a Text Area

1 Create a text area.

2 Click and hold the left mouse button on the red box inside the selected text area.

3 Begin dragging the mouse and the resulting anchor line to the anchoring shape.

4 Release the mouse button.

Importing Text

You can add text or graphics as graphic objects from other Microsoft® Windows® applications such as Word or PowerPoint.

1 Open the application from which you would like to import text.

2 Select the text, and click Copy on the Edit menu.

3 Switch to iGrafx 2006, and click Paste on the Edit menu.

Note

To paste the text to a specific area, define the location using the text tool I-beam and draw a bounding box with it by clicking and dragging, then paste the text.

4 After you have imported a graphic object, you can anchor it following the same procedure as text areas.

About Departments and Floating DepartmentsDepartments and floating departments are visual containers that designate separate operations within a process. They are similar in construction, but floating departments have some different appearances and behaviors that are better suited for modeling and simulating BPMN diagrams.

When you create a new process diagram, the design uses departments by default. In a BPMN diagram, the default design uses floating departments called BPMN pools. You can use departments or floating departments on either diagram type.

Key differences between departments and floating departments are:

Anchoring text to a shape. Text and shape after anchoring with Hidden Lines turned on.

Getting Started 33

• Departments are connected together; top-level floating departments are separated from one another by white space.

• Shapes can span across multiple departments. You cannot place shapes between floating departments or spanning two or more floating departments.

• Lines can connect shapes between floating departments, but in a BPMN diagram, connector lines are translated into message lines that do not simulate a flow.

Each department is divided into two areas: a name area and a process area.

When you place a shape in a department, its residency is assigned to the department. Later, if you move the department's position, the shape moves automatically with it.

Department areas

34 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Departments and floating departments can have nested departments (also called parent and child departments). In BPMN pools, child departments are called lanes. You cannot place shapes in a top-level department that has child departments. It can only contain child departments.

You can change departments to floating departments on the Process tab in the Format Diagram

dialog box or using the Department Manager, available from the Departments tool on the

Floating departments in a process diagram. Dept. 1 contains nested departments.

Floating departments (pools and lanes represented by parent and child departments) in a BPMN diagram

Getting Started 35

Toolbox toolbar button.

For information on creating new departments and child departments or floating departments and lanes, see Adding Departments and Child Departments on page 36.

Adding Departments and Child Departments

You can use the Insert Department tool on the Toolbox toolbar, or the Department command on the Insert menu to add departments and child departments, or floating departments and lanes, to a diagram. Whether you add departments or floating departments depends on either the type of diagram you are using or whether you have specified to use one or the other in the Format Diagram dialog box, Process tab. Floating Departments is the default setting for BPMN diagrams.

Departments in a process diagram changed to floating departments

36 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

To add a department or floating department:

1 Click the Departments tool on the Toolbox toolbar and select Insert Department from the shortcut menu.or

Click the Departments tool on the Toolbox toolbar and select Department Manager from the shortcut menu.

• In the Department Manager dialog box, click the Add button. You may also choose to select a department orientation and select the Floating Departments check box to make separate the departments in the diagram.

2 In the Insert Department dialog box, select a new department name from the drop-down list of existing departments, or type a name for the department in the New Department Name field. If you are using the Department Data Dictionary in Process Central, the drop-down list may contain global departments. Global departments are managed by the Department Data Dictionary in Process Central and are indicated by a global icon.

3 Select the location of the new department. If you choose an option other than Top-Level, you also need to specify where it will be placed relative to another department in the diagram.

4 After you have inserted the desired departments, click OK.

To add a child department:

1 Click the Insert Department tool on the Toolbox toolbar.

2 In the Insert Department dialog box, enter the name of the new child department or select a name from the drop-down list of existing departments.

3 In the Location section of the dialog box, select the Child Of from the drop-down list.

4 Select name of the department in relation to the new child department from the drop-down list below.

5 Click OK.

Changing Names and the Appearance of Departments

After you have created your departments and child departments, you can edit them right on the diagram page, or use the Rename Department dialog box.

Getting Started 37

To rename a department on the diagram page:

1 Click the department name area that you would like to change.

2 Click behind the text to edit it.

3 Using the Backspace key, delete the text, and then type your new department name, or select the text and then type the new name.

4 Click outside of the department name area.

To rename a department using the Rename Department dialog box:

1 Right-click on the department header you want to rename and choose Rename Department.orSelect the department header you want to rename, click the Departments tool on the Toolbox toolbar, and choose Rename Department.

2 In the Rename Department dialog box, enter a name in the New Department Name text box to create a local department name (a name not included in the Department Data

Dictionary) indicated by a local icon.orChoose an existing department name from the Departments list. The Departments list displays a list of all local and global departments at the same level as the department header name selected in the diagram. Global departments are managed by the Department Data Dictionary in Process Central and are indicated by a global icon.

3 Click OK. The department is renamed.

For information about the Department Data Dictionary in Process Central, see Using the Department Data Dictionary on page 240.

Department name area selected.

Department name area selected and ready for text editing.

38 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Changing the Appearance of Departments

You can also change the way departments appear on the diagram page.

Procedure Action

Changing the font Click one or all (holding down the Shift key and clicking) of the department name areas. On the Format menu, click Font. (If a department is in the name-editing state, clear and then click to select again.)

Changing the department margins, minimum lane size, and offset from top

Select the department name area or areas. On the Format menu, click Diagram. In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Process tab. On the Process tab, click the Advanced button.

Rotating department names Select the department name area or areas. On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

Changing the color of the name area Select the department name area or areas. On the Format menu, click Fill. The process area fills with the same format if the Same as Name Area box on the Process Area tab is selected.

Changing the color of the process area Select the department name area or areas. On the Format menu, click Fill. In the Format Department dialog box, click the Process Area tab, clear the Same as Name Area box, and select a fill style.

Changing divider lines On the Format menu, click Diagram. In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Borders and Dividers tab. You can change all divider styles at once by selecting all department elements listed on the Borders and Dividers tab.

Changing from departments to floating departments (pools)

On the Format menu, choose Diagram. In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Process tab. Select or clear the Floating Departments check box.

Getting Started 39

Moving a Department

If you have several departments, you can change the order in which they appear in the diagram space by moving them.

1 Click the department name area for the department you would like to move.

2 Place the cursor directly over the stippling on the department name area for the department you want to move.

3 Click the stippling and drag the department up or down to the desired placement. The border around the department name area and process area is highlighted in blue, giving you a visual indicator for the moved department.

4 Release the mouse button to complete the move.

Overriding diagram formats for pools Right-click on a top-level department name and choose Format. The Format Department dialog box appears. On the Borders and Dividers tab, clear the Use Diagram Styling check box.

Rotating departments In the Department Manager dialog box, select horizontal or vertical department orientation

Changing department defaults In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Defaults tab and select Department Names. Set the fill and font options for all department headers.

Procedure Action

40 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

To move a department using the Move Department dialog box:

1 Right-click the header of the department you want to move and select Move Department from the context menu.orSelect the header of the department you want to move, click the Departments button in the Toolbox toolbar, and select Move Department from the shortcut menu.

2 In the Move Department dialog box, select a Move To location and specify a department in relation to the department you are moving.

3 Click OK.

To move a department using the Department Manager dialog box:

1 Select the header of the department you want to move and select Department Manager from the context menu.orSelect the header of the department you want to move, click the Departments button in the Toolbox toolbar, and select Department Manager from the shortcut menu.

2 In the Department Manager dialog box, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reposition the department in the diagram.

3 Click OK.

What Else Can You Do with Shapes and Departments?When you start placing shapes, a default size is drawn. If the size is not what you want, you can change it. You can change the size of a shape or a department by using its sizing handles or by adding elements. For example, shapes can grow if you add text to them and, in turn, a department can grow if you add a shape to it.

You can copy and paste shapes from the clipboard onto your diagram space as well. iGrafx 2006 also lets you copy entire departments and paste them above or below other departments. When copying and pasting, you can use the Cut, Undo or Redo commands if you happen to make mistakes or want to see something that you had placed in a certain position appear in the diagram again.

Changing the Size of a Shape

Sizing handles appear at the corners and on the sides of the selected shapes. Corner handles change the size of the shape as a whole, both vertically and horizontally. Side handles change the height and width independent of one another; side handles on the top and bottom change the height, and

Getting Started 41

handles on the side change the width. You can also press Shift while using the handles to grow or shrink the shape’s height and width proportionally.

1 Click the shape that you want to grow or shrink.

2 Position the arrow cursor over one of the black handles. The cursor changes to a double-arrow cursor.

3 Click the left mouse button and drag the handle. To grow the shape, drag the handle away from the shape. To reduce the size, drag the handle toward the middle of the shape.

4 After you are satisfied with the new size, release the mouse button, and click outside of the shape.

5 Cancel the selection.

Note

Text inside the shape wraps based on its new width. Also, the new height of the shape becomes its minimum height for a department if you are using one. The shape can still grow if more text is added, but if text is removed, then it shrinks no smaller than it’s minimum height.

42 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Changing the Text Size

When you change the size of a shape that contains text, its position adjusts to the change in size but the text size remains unchanged.

1 Click one or more shapes, or the departments that contain the text.

2 On the Formatting toolbar, click a new font size in the list, and click outside the shapes or departments.

Note

You can also use the Font command on the Format menu for other font options.

Growing a Department

There are several dimensions that can be taken into account when growing a department.

• Overall width–All departments have the same width. The width grows when you add shapes. It also shrinks, to a minimum width, when you move or delete shapes. The minimum width is defined to fit in a standard, portrait-oriented page that is being viewed at 100%.

• Department height–A department’s height grows automatically when you add or move shapes within its boundaries. You can change it manually by growing the department name area. The minimum height for a department depends on the shapes contained within the department. The shape can still grow if more text is added, but if text is removed, it shrinks to no smaller than its minimum height. The height of the department name area is always the same as the department height.

• Department name width–You can grow or shrink a department name area to accommodate text.

Getting Started 43

Changing the Department Name Height or Width

1 Click the name area of the department to resize.

2 Place the cursor over the sizing handle.

The cursor changes to a double-arrow cursor. Use the bottom handle to change the height; use the right handle to change the width.

3 Click the mouse button and drag the handle.

4 When you are satisfied with the new size, release the mouse button, and click outside of the department name area. If the width is changed, the text wraps appropriately. If the height is changed, the entire department grows or shrinks accordingly.

The text inside the department may wrap to a new line based on the new width.

44 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Copying and Pasting

The clipboard is used by many Windows applications as a method of exchanging data. iGrafx 2006 uses the clipboard for copying between departments and process maps, and exchanging data with other applications.

The clipboard keeps a copy of the last item copied to it. The next item copied replaces this current item, so there is only one item in the clipboard at a time. You can use Paste to paste as many copies as you want until the next time you use Copy or Cut.

Undoing, Redoing, Cutting, and Deleting

Undo is a multi-level operation that cancels the last changes you made to the diagram. By default, the last ten actions can be undone.

1 On the Tools menu, choose Options and click the General tab.

2 Change the value in the Undos and Redos Possible text box.

3 Click OK.

To delete a shape, you can either cut it from the diagram or use the Delete or Backspace keys. If you are intending to use the deleted shape elsewhere, use the Cut command on the Edit menu to remove it. This stores the shape on the Clipboard, and you can use the Paste command to insert it in another location.

Procedure Action

Copy Click the shape, department, or area, and click Copy on the Edit menu, or click the Copy tool on the Standard Toolbar.

Copying using the mouse Click the shape, move the cursor over the outline of a selected shape, press and hold the Ctrl key, and click and drag the mouse to create a copy. This action does not use the clipboard.

Paste On the Edit menu, click Paste, or click the Paste tool on the

Standard Toolbar.

Getting Started 45

In addition to the editing commands and tools, you can also use the following hot keys: Ctrl+Z (Undo), Ctrl+Y (Redo), and Ctrl+X (Cut).

Procedure Action

Undoing On the Edit menu, click Undo, or click the Undo tool on the

Standard toolbar.

Redoing On the Edit menu, click Redo, or click the Redo tool on the

Standard toolbar.

Cutting Click the shape(s) that you want to cut, on the Edit menu, click Cut, or click the Cut tool on the Standard Toolbar.

Deleting Click the shape(s) that you want to delete, and press the Delete key.

46 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

ViewingiGrafx 2006 includes tools for viewing and changing the view of the diagram space. This is particularly helpful when you are working with large diagrams.

Reducing or Increasing the View

You can reduce or increase the view in your diagram space any of three ways:

• On the View menu, click Zoom. In the Zoom dialog box, click a percentage, and click OK.

• On the Standard toolbar, click the Zoom control.

• On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Zoom tool.

Using the All Zooming Option

The All option gives you a progressive view of the diagram space. The view changes constantly to incorporate the addition or subtraction of elements. The more elements you add to areas beyond the range of your original document, the more the document will zoom out, keeping everything in view. Conversely, any elements you remove will likely zoom in the document as the boundaries shrink and all elements can be viewed at a higher percentage. To use the All option, click All using the Zoom control on the Standard toolbar.

Using the Best Fit Option

The Best Fit option gives you a shortcut for finding the largest viewing size that fits in the window without obscuring any data. Best Fit tailors to selection–your view changes based on what you have selected in the diagram space. To use the Best Fit option, click Best Fit using the Zoom control on the Standard toolbar.

Getting Started 47

PrintingThe first time that you print, you select a printer and print options. iGrafx 2006 can print on most printers and plotters, provided that you have a Windows driver for the device. For instructions on installing your printer, see your Windows documentation and your printer manual.

Using the Print Preview command on the File menu, you can view your diagram, size it correctly, and print it all at the same time. Also, use the options found in the Print dialog box to adjust page settings for the best printing results.

Printing a Diagram or Document

1 Open or display the diagram you want to print in the active window.

2 On the File menu, click Print, or click the Print tool on the Standard toolbar.

3 In the Print dialog box, make changes to the following selections according to how you want your diagram printed:

• To change the printer, click one in the list.

• Under Print Range and Print What, select what you want printed.

• Under Copies, select the number you want printed.

4 Click OK.

Choosing Print Components

iGrafx 2006 lets you print individual components or groups of components existing in your active document. Click Choose in the Print dialog box to manage which components you would like to print.

Saving and Closing a DiagramTo keep your latest work safe, you should periodically save the diagrams that you are working on. A recommended practice is to save after completing 10 to 15 minutes of work. If you save frequently, you will not lose much work in case of a power failure or other problem. It is also a good habit to save your work before you print or make major changes.

When you save a diagram, it remains open on the screen so you can continue working. If you finish a diagram, close it to keep your screen uncluttered with other diagrams. When you are closing a diagram and have not saved your changes, a message asks if you want to.

48 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Automatic Recovery

iGrafx 2006 includes a feature that saves the diagram or document that you are working on automatically at a set time increment. Automatic Recovery protects your work from an unexpected system or program failure. The default autosave is every 10 minutes.

To change the default setting:

1 On the Tools menu, choose Options and click the General tab.

2 Select the Save Auto Recover info every check box and change the value in the Minutes text box.

3 Click OK.

Saving a New, Unnamed Diagram

1 On the File menu, click Save.

2 Type the file name in the File Name box.

3 Choose the drive and directory in which you want to store the file.

4 Choose the file format in the Save as type box.

5 Click Save.

Saving a Workspace

You can also save a workspace which is a combination of multiple documents. When you save a workspace, you save the group of documents as an *.igw file, and then save each *.igx file individually. When you open the *.igw file, all of the documents you have saved as a workspace open automatically.

To save a workspace, click Save Workspace on the Tools menu.

Closing a Diagram

On the File menu, click Close.

If there are changes to be saved, you will see a “Save changes to?” message. “Yes” saves the changes and closes the file. “No” discards the changes and closes the file. “Cancel” returns you to editing in iGrafx 2006 without doing anything.

Getting Started 49

Exiting iGrafx 2006

On the File menu, click Exit.

This closes all windows. If there are changes to a diagram since the last time you saved it, a message prompts you to save changes.

50 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Shapes and Lines 3Shapes and lines and the interpretation of them give diagrams meaning. They represent the flow of

information which may take many different paths to the end of a process.

Shapes and lines serve two purposes in diagrams:

• Visual- Departments contain shapes. Lines represent the flow of information between activities and across departments.

• Informational- Data placed on the diagram and activities provide indications of process performance.

Placing Shapes in a DiagramIn Chapter Two you learned how to place default shapes using the Toolbox toolbar. The More Shapes tool on the Toolbox toolbar gives you access to more shapes using the Shape Library which is discussed in more detail later in this chapter.

In addition to the Toolbox toolbar, you can also use the Gallery to place shapes in your diagram.

Working with Shapes and Lines 51

Placing a Shape Using the Gallery

1 Click the Basic Subject tab in the Gallery. You can click other subjects in the list to view other palettes.

2 Click a shape in the palette.

3 Click the diagram where you would like to place the shape.

Placing an Intelligent Shape

You may add intelligent modeling and analysis shapes to your diagram to dynamically display information about simulation results while simulation is running.

When you run simulation, the intelligent shape updates to show the total defects.

1 Open the shape palette in the Gallery.

2 Open the Intelligent Shapes collection.

3 View the Modeling/Analysis shape palette.

4 Click a shape and place it on the diagram. The Intelligent Shapes dialog box appears.

5 Configure the shape behavior in the Intelligent Shapes dialog box.

6 Click the Apply button to apply changes before closing the dialog box.

The Basic Subject tab is one of many palettes from which you can choose.

52 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

7 Close the Intelligent Shapes dialog box when you are finished configuring the shape. To change the intelligent shape configuration after you close the dialog box, click the shape, The Intelligent Shapes dialog box appears.

Working With Container ShapesContainer shapes provide a powerful yet easy-to-use way of grouping diagram objects within an enclosing parent shape. They are used in BPMN-compliant embedded subprocesses and are available in any diagram type. For more information about BPMN, see Understanding BPMN on page 345.

A container shape contains any other shapes or graphics that lie within its bounds. When you move a container shape, all of its contained objects move with it. When you resize a container shape, its contained objects do not move.

It is possible to have multiple levels of nested containers when you create a container shape inside another container shape. Nested container shapes behave similar to any contained graphic or shape.

Container shapes cannot be rotated. They can have a non-rectangular symbol, but its container behavior ignores the symbol and uses only the shape’s rectangular bounding box. It is best to use rectangles, rounded rectangles, or similar near-rectangle shapes for container shapes.

Creating Container Shapes

If you are not using a BPMN template, use this procedure to create a container shape:

1 Double-click a shape. The Properties dialog box appears.

2 Select the General page, and select the Container Shape check box.

You can also make Shape Library items and Media Manager entries into container shapes.

To create a container shape in the Shape Library:

1 From the File menu, choose Shape Library.

2 In the Shape Library dialog box, select the item you want to make a container shape.

3 Click the Edit button.

4 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, click the Properties button.

5 In the Format Shape dialog box, select the General page.

6 Select the Container Shape check box and click OK.

Use a similar process for making shapes into containers in the Media Manager. Graphics cannot be made into container shapes.

Working with Shapes and Lines 53

Adding Graphics and Shapes to a Container Shape

You place graphics and shapes into a container by one of these methods:

• Insert a new shape or graphic into a diagram completely with the bounds of a container shape.

• Move a shape or graphic from outside a container entirely into a container.

The container adjusts its boundaries to maintain a minimum margin between itself and contained objects when the objects are placed inside the container or when they are resized. The container also adjusts its size when objects are removed.

Copying and Deleting Container Shapes

Copying a container shape copies the container, not its children. To copy and paste a container and all of its children, select all of them first.

Deleting a container deletes everything it contains. If you want to delete a container without deleting its contents, double-click the shape, select the General page in the Properties dialog box, and clear the Container shape check box before deleting the shape.

Ordering Container Shapes

Container shapes can only contain objects on the same layer. Non-container objects cannot be drawn behind a container in the same layer. In nested containers, the child container is always in front of the parent.

• If you want to draw an object behind a container, place it on a layer behind the container.

• If you want to draw an object that appears to be inside a container but is not actually contained, place it on a layer in front of the container.

To establish the draw order among multiple containers in the same layer:

1 Select the shape you want to rearrange.

2 On the Arrange menu, choose Order.

3 Select an ordering option.

For information about layering, see Working with Layers on page 133.

54 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Container Shapes in Departments

As with normal shapes, you can make a container shape cross-department by holding down the CTRL key as you stretch it. The container shape behaves like any other cross-department shape, but the shapes it contains are treated differently.

Shapes contained in a cross-departmental contains are also cross-department from a modeling viewpoint. Any departments included or excluded by the parent container are also included or excluded by all of the children. You can view excluded and included departments in the Exclude Departments dialog box, but you cannot edit any settings in the dialog box. The position of shapes within a cross-departmental container has no bearing on their department membership.

For more information about departments, see About Departments and Floating Departments on page 33.

About Connector Lines and Line RoutingWhen you connect two shapes, iGrafx 2006 automatically routes the connector line between them. Several factors are considered in the calculation of the routing, including where the shapes are placed in the diagram space and which attachment points you have specified.

If you make corrections to shapes in the diagram space, the automatic routing can save you a lot of time because the connector lines are redrawn automatically as you move shapes. The best route is recalculated if you change or move something in the diagram space that affects the routing.

Graphics cannot be connected to or from objects with a connector line, but they can be attached to connector lines. For more information, see Attaching Graphics to Lines on page 62.

For information on

• shapes and graphics, see Shapes vs. Graphics on page 103.

• changing a graphic into a shape, see Converting a Graphic to a Shape on page 109.

Two shapes connected by one right angle connector line.

The line is re-routed automatically when a new shape is dropped on the corner of the original connector line.

Working with Shapes and Lines 55

Adding a Vertex to a Connector Line

1 Click either the direct connector line or the right angle connector line between two shapes.

2 Click the right mouse button, and then click Add Vertex. An X appears on the connector line.

3 Slide the X on the line to the position you want.

4 Click the line. A black box appears at the vertex point.

5 To create the new line bend, click and move the black box.

6 Release the left mouse button.

Note

If you move connector lines manually, you can restore them to an automatically routed line by right-clicking the line, and clicking Route Line on the context menu.

Connecting Shapes with LinesThe type of line you draw is indicated by the Connector Line tool selected in the Toolbox toolbar. Select the line type you want to draw by clicking the arrow under the Connector Line tool, and then selecting the line from the shortcut menu.

You can use any of the six line (routing) tools to connect shapes:

The Line Library contains these lines and any custom lines you create. For more information, see Attaching Graphics to Lines on page 62.

Tool Example

Right Angle Line

Direct Line

Curved Line

Org Chart Line

Cause and Effect Line

Lightning Bolt Line

56 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Connecting Two Shapes with Automatic Routing

1 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Selector tool.

2 Place the cursor inside the shape where you want the line to begin, click and hold the left mouse button. The cursor changes to the Direct Line cursor.

3 Drag the pointer to the side of the shape where you want the line to end, and release the mouse button.

Connecting Two Shapes Using the Connect Shapes Command

1 Click and hold the left mouse button down, and draw a bounding box around the shapes you want to connect.

2 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the line type you want.

3 On the Arrange menu, click Connect Shapes.

Adding Connected Shapes

1 Click a shape in the Toolbox toolbar or Gallery.

2 Position the cursor inside the existing shape to display the place and connect cursor.

3 Press and hold the left mouse button. The cursor changes to display the outline of the shape and the move cursor.

4 Drag the new shape from the existing shape to the desired location, and then release the left mouse button.

If you click outside of a shape, you e ready to click and drag a shape out of another to create a connection.

Cursor placed inside the border of the first shape.

The result of dragging the cursor to another shape.

Working with Shapes and Lines 57

Working with Case Text

Some lines you create may display case text. Case text appears as labels on the respective outputs of shapes with decision behavior. By default, the diamond shape has a decision behavior specified.

Also by default, when you draw a line from a decision to another activity, it is labeled No. The second line drawn from the decision is labeled Yes, but each remains connected to the line at the point it connects to the decision.

Pressing the space bar toggles through all possible decisions.

Note

Any shape may have a decision behavior.

Decision Activities with Two Outcomes

When you place a decision shape, the default outcome is two cases.

1 Place an activity shape on the diagram.

2 Double-click the activity.

The diamond decision shape is a point where a decision is made.

58 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 In the Properties dialog box, select the Outputs page. The default Case Text is YesNo, with No being the first case used when drawing a line, and Yes being the second.

Default Decision Case

Working with Shapes and Lines 59

Creating Decision Activities with More than Two Outcomes

You can create an activity with many case output possibilities. The case text you specify is automatically assigned as a label for lines you create.

1 Place an activity shape on the diagram.

2 Double-click the activity.

3 In the Properties dialog box, select the Outputs page. In the Case Text list, click Other.

4 Click the Add button to display a third case option. A change to any of the three case option percentages changes one of the other two to total 100%.

Three cases equals three outputs.

60 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

Moving Case Text

You can move case text like regular text.

1 Click the case text connected to a shape.

2 Click and hold the left mouse button and move the text to its new position.

Moving case text. Notice the gray cross hairs help you position the text.

Working with Shapes and Lines 61

3 Release the mouse button.

Note

Although you can move case text to a different location, it remains associated with its original output connector line. To change the actual line association, you have to modify the properties on the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box.

Attaching Graphics to LinesWhen you drag and drop a graphic or shape from the Shape Gallery onto a line in a diagram, the graphic is not attached to the line. You can see this by dragging a shape on either side of the graphic to move the connector line out from under it.

iGrafx 2006 features a shortcut for attaching graphics to lines.

To connect a graphic to a connector line:

1 Start with two connected shapes.

2 Click a graphic in the Shape Gallery and move the cursor over the connector line where you intend to place the graphic. The cursor changes appearance, indicating that the graphic will be connected to the line.

3 Click to place the graphic. Notice that it has a red square in the center, indicating that the graphic is connected to the line.

62 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 If you move either shape, the graphic stays attached to the connector line.

If you want to remove the connection, right-click the graphic and choose Detach Graphic from Line from the context menu. To reattach it, move the graphic off of the line, and click and drag from the red square on the graphic to the connector line.

Using the Line LibraryThe Line Library stores a custom collection of lines for easy selection. In the Line Library you can:

• create new Line Library items

• remove Line Library items you don’t use

• modify existing Line Library items

You can also format lines with:

• routing options

• line styles

• standard graphics used in your operations

The Line Library is associated with a diagram type within a document. If, for example, you have three process diagrams and one basic diagram in your document, you will have one Line Library shared by the three process diagrams and another Line Library used for the basic diagram.

The Line Library is available from the shortcut menu on the Connector Line toolbar button.

Working with Shapes and Lines 63

Adding a New Line Library Item

To create a new line library item:

1 Click the right arrow below the Connector Line toolbar button.

2 From the menu, choose Line Library.

3 Click the New button. The Line Library Item dialog box appears.

4 Enter a name for your new Line Library item and choose the type of line routing.

You can further customize the line style by clicking the Style button and making format changes to the line.

Note

If the Use Diagram Default Style check box is clear, the diagram default line style will not override settings made in the Line Library Item and Format Line dialog boxes.

If desired, you can attach a graphic to the line or add an image to represent the new Line Library item in the Connector Line toolbox.

Editing an Existing Line Library Item

If you want to create a new Line Library item based on an existing Line Library item, or if you want to modify an existing Line Library item:

1 Click the right arrow below the Connector Line toolbar button.

2 From the menu, choose Line Library.

3 Select the Line Library item you want to edit.

4 If you want to create a new Line Library item based on this Line Library item, click the Duplicate button to preserve the existing line.

5 Click the Edit button. The Line Library Item dialog box appears.

6 In the Line Library Item dialog box, you can change the name, routing, and formatting of the line. You can also add, change, or remove a graphic for the line and add, change, or remove an image to represent the line on the toolbox toolbar.

7 Click OK to dismiss the dialog boxes.

Changing a Line Library item does not affect lines that have already been placed in a diagram.

64 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Attaching a Graphic to a Line Library Item

When you attach a graphic to a Line Library item, it appears every time you connect shapes using that line style. A graphic must be in the Shape Library before you can add it to the Line Library. If it is a shape–not a graphic–you must convert it to a graphic before adding it to the Line Library.

To add a graphic to a Line Library item:

1 In the Line Library Item dialog box, select the Attach a Graphic check box and click the Choose button. The Choose Graphic dialog box appears.

2 Select a graphic from the list of graphics. Graphics must be in the Shape Library before they are available in the Choose Graphic dialog box.

3 Choose a position at which to attach the graphic along the line when placed.

4 Click OK to dismiss the dialog boxes.

Adding a Graphic to the Shape Library

Graphics must be in the Shape Library before they are available in the Choose Graphic dialog box.

To add a graphic to the Shape Library, see Adding a Shape to the Shape Library on page 88.

To convert a shape to a graphic:

1 Select the shape.

2 On the Arrange menu, point to Convert To and choose Graphic.

Note

You can create a custom graphic using the Draw tools, drag and drop it into a custom palette in your Private Media Collection, then add it to the Shape Library. For more information, see the topics on creating your own collections in the Share Media help. (To access Share Media help, click the Option Menu icon on the palette, point to Help and choose Share Media Help.)

Adding a Toolbar Image

You can customize toolbar images on the Connector Line toolbar with any image you choose. The images are used to graphically identify the line in the Line Library and have no effect on lines created using the Line Library item.

The pixel in the top left corner of the bitmap is the dropout color for the toolbar image. All pixels that use the same color are masked and render as transparent in the toolbar image. This is important to consider if the dropout color is a prominent element in the bitmap image.

Working with Shapes and Lines 65

To add a toolbar image:

1 Choose a bitmap (.bmp) image to use for the toolbar image. A 16 x15 bitmap image is the best size and resolution.

2 In a graphics editor such as Microsoft Paint, add the image to the clipboard by right-clicking on it and choosing Copy from the menu.

3 In the Line Library dialog box, select the item to display the new image, or click the New button to create a new item.

4 In the Line Library Item dialog box, click the Paste button. The new image appears in a preview window next to the Paste button in the Toolbar Image section of the Library Line Item dialog box.

5 Click OK to dismiss the open dialog boxes.

Restoring a Deleted Line Library Item

Use caution when you delete a line style. If you unintentionally delete a line style, you can only restore it by recreating it.

Editing Connector LinesThere are several things you can do to edit lines and connect points. After placing a connector line, you can easily detach it and reattach it at a different point on the shape. When you move a shape, the lines remain attached. You can also add text to lines.

Moving a Line End from One Point to Another on a Shape

1 Select a line connected to a shape. Two red boxes appear on each end of the line.

2 Move the cursor over the end of the red box for the line end you would like to move.

Selected line connecting two shapes.

Cursor positioned over the line end that you would like to move.

66 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 Click and hold the left mouse button down, and then move the line end to a new connect point.

4 Release the left mouse button.

Adding Text to a Connected Line

1 Select the line.

2 Type the text you want.

3 When you finish typing, click outside the text block. By default, text appears next to the line you select. However, you can have text appear on lines instead of next to them. On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Connector Lines tab. Under Default Text Line Style, click On the line.

Reversing Line Ends Between Shapes

1 Click the line with ends you would like to reverse.

2 On the Arrange menu, click Reverse Ends.

Replacing Shapes

1 Click the shapes in the diagram you want to replace.

2 On the Arrange menu, click Replace Shape.

3 In the Replace Shape dialog box, find and click the shape you want to use as a replacement.

4 Click Replace.

5 Click OK.

Note

Any manually resized shape or shape that has been fitted to text must be resized after you replace the shape. When you replace a shape, the new shape connects to the lines formerly attached to the shape that was replaced. The program automatically chooses the closest connect points on the new shape. iGrafx automatically preserves shape numbers, colors, borders, patterns, and text size when it replaces the shape.

Point moved to the new position.

Working with Shapes and Lines 67

Fitting Shapes to Text

1 Click the text block or the shape that contains the text.

2 On the Arrange menu, click Fit to Text.

Note

Press F8 to fit a shape or a text block to text.

Connector Line Intersections and Skips

When connector lines cross over each other, you can specify special formatting to differentiate which connector lines are connected and which merely cross over each other.

You can specify the crossover style of individual connector lines using the following styles:

Though each line may have a unique crossover style, it is best to use one style throughout your diagram.

Note

When you draw a connector line that crosses any existing lines or shapes it goes over the lines and is displayed. To send the connector line to the back, click it, point to Order on the Arrange menu, and click Send To Back.

Crossover Style Example Description

Solid Line These lines cross with no indication.

Broken Line These lines do not intersect.

Crossovers These lines do not intersect.

68 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Setting the Line Crossover Style

1 On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

2 In the Format Line dialog box, click the Arrows and Crossovers tab.

3 In the Crossover section, click a crossover style, and then click a crossover size.

Changing the Connector Line and Arrow Format

You can use a number of styles for connector lines, including solid and dashed lines. Line styles are commonly used in flowcharts to convey the following information:

Line Width and Color

You can choose different connector line weights, colors for each connector line, and arrowheads.

1 In an active diagram, click the connector line you want to format.

2 On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

3 Select from the various line types, styles, widths, and colors available.

4 Click OK.

Arrows

Source and Destination arrows may be unique.

1 Click the connector line you want to add an arrowhead to.

2 On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

Line Style Meaning

Solid lines with arrows Show data flow.

Dashed lines Represent multiple transitions and optional steps.

Filled Lines Show emphasis using arrows combined with formatting.

Working with Shapes and Lines 69

3 In the Format Line dialog box, click the Arrows and Crossovers tab.

4 Choose either a Source Arrow line end, a Destination Arrow line end, or both.

5 Click OK.

Note

You cannot change arrowhead styles on filled lines.

Formatting Filled Lines

1 Click the connector line you want to fill.

2 On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

3 In the Format Line dialog box, click the Line and Border tab. From the Effect drop-down list, choose Filled.

4 Change the line width under Outline Size to make the line more pronounced.

5 Click the Shadow/3D tab to add color, depth, and 3D effects to the line.

6 Click OK.

To open the Format Line dialog box, click a connector line, and click Line and Border on the Format menu.

70 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Adding Manual Connectors to a Connector Line

The Arrows and Crossovers tab also contains a Connectors option which lets you display a line with page connectors. Select this option to display the individual line as two separate connectors with labeled page connectors. You may need to move the shapes further apart if there is not enough room between them for the connector to be drawn. If you move a shape that has a connector, the connector moves with it. For a general discussion about connectors, see About Connector Lines and Line Routing on page 55.

1 Click on a line.

2 Click the right mouse button, and click Format.

3 In the Format Line dialog box, click the Arrows and Crossovers tab, and then select the Connectors box.

4 Click OK.

Note

You can also set automatic page connectors for all lines that start on one page and end on another. On the Format menu, click the Diagram command, and then click the Off-Page Connectors tab. In the Off-Page Connectors tab, you can set automatic connectors and choose options such as directional symbols and page numbering.

Using Spacing Options Between ShapesWhen you connect shapes with right angle connector lines, you can choose how far right-angle connector line segments are offset from the shapes. Line spacing specifies the distance between a shape and the nearest right angle of the connector line. Spacing options can only be set within physical limitations allowed, and only affect right-angle connector lines.

You can set the spacing options in the Connector Lines tab on the Options dialog box, available from the Tools menu.

Horizontal Spacing- The Horizontal shape spacing option lets you set the amount of horizontal space between connector lines and shapes.

Vertical Spacing- The Vertical shape spacing option lets you set the amount of vertical space between connector lines and shapes.

Setting the Line Spacing Between Shapes and Connector Lines

1 On the Tools menu, click Options.

2 If necessary, click the Connector Lines tab.

Working with Shapes and Lines 71

3 Click the Horizontal box, and type the distance you want between the shape and the nearest right angle of the connector line.

4 Click the Vertical box, and type the distance you want between the shape and the first right angle of a vertical connector line.

Note

The unit of measure used (inches or centimeters) is displayed next to the Horizontal and Vertical boxes in the Connector Lines tab on the Options dialog box. This unit of measure applies to the whole diagram. To change the unit of measure used, right-click the ruler, and click the measurement type you want, inches or centimeters. You can also create a toolbar with inches and centimeters buttons. To do this, click Tools, click Customize, and click the View category. In the Buttons section, scroll to the bottom of the list and click, drag, and drop the Inches button outside the Customize dialog box. Repeat the same steps with the Centimeters button, but drop it directly on top of the Inches button. That way, it gets added to the same toolbar instead of creating a second toolbar with one button in it. Now that you have a toolbar with the inches and centimeter buttons, you can click them to change the unit of measure.

Changing the Border and Fill FormatYou can choose different line styles for shape outlines. There are many useful line styles for outlines, including solid, dashed, and center lines. Shape lines include not only the outside part of a shape, but also any interior lines used in the shape and any exterior lines connected to a shape.

You can also use different colors and fill patterns to differentiate flows and to identify individual shapes. For example, you could use a cross-hatched gray fill to identify incomplete processes and a solid yellow fill to identify completed processes.

Changing the Border

1 In an active diagram, click the shape you want to format.

2 On the Format menu, click Line and Border.

3 In the Format Shape dialog box, select from the various line types, styles, widths, and colors available.

4 Click OK.

Note

You can also use the Gallery to apply lines and borders.

Changing the Fill

1 Click the shape whose fill you want to change.

2 On the Format menu, click Fill.

72 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 In the Format Shape dialog box, select a solid, pattern, or gradient from the available styles on the Fill tab.

4 Click OK.

Adding a Shadow or 3D Effect to a Shape

You can use shadows and 3D formats as indicators for shapes. For example, shapes with shadows can indicate that a linked diagram exists from a shape.

1 Click the shape you want to add an effect to.

2 On the Format menu, click Shadow/3D.

3 In the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow or 3D.

4 Select from the various styles, depths, and colors available.

5 Click OK.

Note

You can also use the Gallery to apply shadows and 3D effects.

Coloring a Shadow

1 Click a shape.

2 On the Format menu, click Shadow/3D.

3 In the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow.

4 Select a color from the Color list.

5 Click OK.

Note

Click Apply to see the results of your changes without closing the dialog box.

Changing a Shadow or 3D Depth

1 Click a shape.

2 On the Format menu, click Shadow/3D.

3 In the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow or 3D. Optionally, select a new depth from the Depth list.

4 Click OK.

Working with Shapes and Lines 73

Creating Activities Spanning DepartmentsPeople are often called on to participate in a group program or activity. This happens if a meeting is held with representatives from several departments, for example, or when people from two different functional areas work together to produce a report. In iGrafx 2006, these are called cross-department activities.

Cross-department shapes are not allowed across top-level floating departments.

Placing a Cross-Department Activity

1 Open a diagram containing departments that includes an activity shape you would like to span across multiple departments.

2 Select this shape and hold down the Ctrl key.

3 Place the cursor over one of the four grow handles on the activity and click the left mouse button. The cursor changes to a cross-department cursor.

4 Grow the shape so that it spans all of the departments that participate in the activity.

Selected shape showing the cross-department cursor.

74 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

When you are satisfied with the placement, release the mouse button, and then the Ctrl key.

Note

Cross-department shapes are not allowed across top-level floating departments.

Excluding a Department

If the cross-department activity spans departments which do not participate in the activity, they may be excluded. To exclude a department:

1 Double-click the activity.

2 In the Properties dialog box, click the Task page, and then click the Exclude Depts button.

Selected shape spanning departments.

Working with Shapes and Lines 75

3 In the Exclude Departments dialog box, double-click any name in the Departments list you would like to exclude. This moves the names to the Excluded list.

4 Click OK to close the Exclude Departments dialog box.

5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. The shape is drawn so that any excluded departments are shown with a dotted line.

Exclude Departments dialog box

Shape spanning departments showing exclusion.

76 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Phase LinesYou can add phases, or phase lines to identify important milestones in a process diagram. For example, you may want to add three phases to a production diagram. One phase could be pre-production, the next, production, and the final phase, post-production. Phase lines provide the visual break for seeing which shapes (and tasks) occur during which segment of the process flow. Phase lines may only be placed on a Process diagram, BPMN diagram, or a Basic diagram with departments.

Note

Phases work only with diagrams containing departments.

Inserting a Phase Line

1 On the Insert menu, click Phase.

2 Depending on the orientation of your departments, drag the line horizontally or vertically to place the phase.

3 Click the left mouse button.

4 Repeat steps 1-3 to place additional phases.

Formatting a Phase Line

1 Right-click a phase.

2 On the context menu, click Format Diagram.

3 In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Phases tab.

4 In the Phase Name Area list, click No Name, Name on Top, Name on Bottom, or Name Top and Bottom.

5 To change your end style to an arrow, select the button next to the arrow.

Dragging a vertical phase line over department lanes.

Working with Shapes and Lines 77

6 Click OK.

Note

You can also change the phase and phase header line type and width. To do this, click the Borders and Dividers tab in the Format Diagram dialog box, and select Phase and/or Phase Header in the Choose line styles for department elements list.

Labeling a Phase Line

1 Click the phase. The pointer changes to a text cursor.

2 Click before the word “Phase” and continue to press Delete until the text is deleted.

3 Type a new label.

Note

You can also change the color of the phase. To do this using the right mouse button, click the phase, click Format, and choose a fill style and color.

Coloring a Phase

1 Right-click a phase.

2 On the context menu, click Format.

3 In the Format Phase dialog box, select a Fill Style.

4 Depending on which fill style you choose, select a color, pattern, or gradient.

5 Click OK.

Deleting a Phase Line

1 Click the phase.

2 Press Delete.

78 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Numbering ShapesiGrafx 2006 has several options for numbering and renumbering shapes in a diagram. You can apply numbering commands to individual shapes, a group of shapes, or all shapes in a diagram.

Using numbering commands you can:

• Automatically number shapes.

• Manually number shapes.

• Show or hide shape numbers.

• Change the default number format.

• Set an area in a shape where you would like the number to appear.

Note

Shape numbering is turned off by default. Before you can make any changes to shape numbers, you must select a shape and show its shape number, or for all shapes, show all shape numbers.

Showing or Hiding Numbers on All Shapes

On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Show All Shape Numbers or Hide All Shape Numbers.

Note

This feature only affects shapes numbered with the Numbering feature. If you type a number as text in the shape, the number will not be shown or hidden using this method.

Showing or Hiding Numbers on Selected Shapes

1 Select the shapes whose number you want to show or hide.

2 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Shape Numbering tool.

3 Click Show Shape Number or Hide Shape Number.

Working with Shapes and Lines 79

Renumbering All Shapes Automatically

1 On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Auto Renumber.

2 In the Automatic Renumber dialog box, select All Shapes.

3 Type a starting number in the Starting Number dialog box.

4 Select a renumber style.

5 Click OK.

Renumbering Selected Shapes Automatically

1 Select the shapes in the diagram you want to renumber.

2 On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Auto Renumber.

3 In the Automatic Renumber dialog box, select Selected Shapes.

4 Type a starting number in the Starting Number box.

5 Click OK.

Renumbering Shapes Manually

1 On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Manual Renumber. The pointer changes to the Number pointer when you move it into the drawing area.

2 In the Renumber dialog box, type the next number you want displayed.

3 Click the first shape in the diagram you want to renumber.

4 Click the other shapes in the order you want them renumbered.

5 In the Renumber dialog box, click Finished.

Setting the Default Number Format for New Shapes

1 On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Default Number Format.

2 In the Shape Fields dialog box, click Format.

3 In the Numbering Format dialog box, select a new example number from the Example Number list.

Note

You can also type your own numbering schemes directly in this list.

4 If you selected a two-part example number, click either the left or right number or letter to increment.

80 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 Click OK to close the Numbering Format dialog box.

6 Click OK.

Changing the Number Format for Existing Shapes

1 On the Format menu, point to Numbering, and click Number Format.

2 In the Shape Fields dialog box, click Format.

3 In the Numbering Format dialog box, select a new example number from the Example Number list.

4 If you selected a two-part example number, click either the left or right number or letter to increment.

5 Click OK to close the Numbering Format dialog box.

6 Click OK.

Using FieldsFields display information about the shape on the diagram. Creating fields let people reading your diagram understand additional data is contained in shapes.

A field can contain something simple like a date and time, or something more complex, like a duration for the activity. The New Field dialog box contains all the data you can display in the field. This dialog box is dynamic. Depending on what data type you choose, more information appears on the right side of the dialog for selecting or changing. After choosing data, you can position it at different places inside the shape or outside the shape's border.

Adding or Displaying a Field

1 Click the shape you want to add a field to.

2 On the Format menu, click Fields.

3 In the Shape Fields dialog box, click New Field.

Working with Shapes and Lines 81

4 In the Field Type list, click the plus signs next to the field types, and click the field you want to insert.

5 Click OK.

6 In the Shape Fields dialog box, move the mouse pointer over the Location box. A black dot follows the pointer.

7 Click the field box within the outline of the shape.

8 Click the diamond shape at the desired position. The field box is repositioned after you click OK.

Moving a Shape Field In or Around a Shape

1 Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2 On the Format menu, click Fields.

3 In the Shape Fields dialog box, select the desired field in the Current Fields box, then move the mouse pointer over the Location box. A black dot follows the pointer.

Inserting the Save Date/Time field on your shape.

82 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Click the field box within the outline of the shape.

5 While holding the left mouse button down, move the field box to the desired position.

6 Release the left mouse button.

7 Click OK.

Including a Shape Field Description with a Shape

1 Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2 On the Format menu, click Fields.

3 In the Shape Fields dialog box, select Include Description.

This places the name of the shape field you use before the actual shape field. For example, if you include a field code for page number, PageNumber: appears prior to the page number with the selected shape.

4 Click OK.

The small rectangle surrounding the black dot can be moved around or inside the shape to set the position of the field.

Field in its default position. Field moved to a new location.

Working with Shapes and Lines 83

Setting Advanced Shape Field Options

1 Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2 On the Format menu, click Fields.

3 In the Shape Fields dialog box, click Advanced.

• To wrap the shape field description, select Limit Text Width and change the Width.

• To hide the shape field from view in or around the shape, select Hide Text.

• To prevent a shape's field text string from being updated if the field type is changed, select Freeze Text.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Shape Fields dialog box, click OK.

Deleting a Shape Field

1 Click the shape that contains the shape field.

2 On the Format menu, click Fields.

3 In the Shape Fields dialog box, select the field to be deleted from the Current Fields list.

4 Click Delete Field, and click OK.

Using the Note WindowThe Note window displays text attached to a shape. You can hide notes containing detailed information about a step or process you do not want displayed in a diagram. Note text can also be copied from one shape and pasted into another.

For information on using note indicators, see Indicator Options on page 127.

84 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Notes

You can type and change notes inside the Note window. The Note window displays the shape number of the selected shape (if any), and the note text contained in the shape. In a diagram, shapes with notes attached are marked by default with the letter N. You can display rich text tool tips for any text you attach to a shape using the Note window by positioning the mouse over the shape.

Note

In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Indicators tab to change the indicator for notes.

You can also display text attached to a note by adding a Note field to the shape. For more information about fields, see Using Fields on page 81.

Opening the Note Window

On the View menu, click Note.

Note

You can press F6 to open and close the Note window.

Attaching a Note to a Shape

1 If the Note window is not displayed, click Note on the View menu.

2 Select the shape to which you want to attach a note.

3 Click in the Note window, and type the information you want. (Notes are limited to 4,000 characters.)

4 Close the Note window.

ToolTip displaying note text.

Working with Shapes and Lines 85

Hiding Note Indicators

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram.

2 In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Indicators tab.

3 Clear the Note check box.

4 Click OK.

Displaying Rich Text Note ToolTips

On the View menu, click Note Tooltips.

Deleting Text in the Note Window

1 If the Note window is not open, click Note on the View menu.

2 Select the shape to which the note is attached.

3 Point inside the Note window. The pointer changes to the I-beam pointer.

4 Select the text you want to delete.

5 On the Note menu, click Clear or press Delete.

Printing a Note

1 On the View menu, click Note.

2 Select the shape to which the note is attached.

3 On the Note menu, click Print.

4 Choose the print options you want.

5 Click OK.

86 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using the Shape LibraryThe Shape Library is a custom collection of shapes that you can select. In the Shape Library, you can store shapes that you use most often. By default, the Shape Library has the Start, Activity, and Decision shapes in it.

In the Shape Library you can:

• Add additional shapes

• Modify the properties of the shapes

• Remove shapes

• Duplicate shapes

• Change the order of the shapes (move up or down)

• Update shape properties

Any shapes defined with attributes and formatting that you add to a diagram become part of the Shape Library. Shapes you add to the Shape Library using the Toolbox toolbar are also unique to each diagram. Saving a diagram saves the shapes that you add to the Library. Also, saving a diagram as a template is a good way to use an extensive Library more than once.

As you work with a diagram, you might find that you use some shapes more than others. In this case, you can have these shapes appear in the most convenient areas of the Shape Library. You also might want to organize related shapes together in the Library. You can easily arrange shapes any way you want by moving them up or down.

Working with Shapes and Lines 87

Adding a Shape to the Shape Library

1 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the More Shapes tool.

Note

This tool appears under the last shape you added in the Toolbox toolbar.

2 To open the Shape Library dialog box, click Shape Library on the shortcut menu.

3 In the Shape Library dialog box, click Add Shapes.

4 Select a subject from the Shape Gallery list.

5 Use the scroll bar in the Shape Gallery area to scroll through the shapes in the subject.

6 Click the shape you want to add, and then click Add.

7 To add more shapes, repeat steps 4 through 6.

8 Click Close.

Adding a Shape to the Toolbox Toolbar

1 On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2 In the Shape Library dialog box, click the box to the left of the shape you want to add to the Toolbox toolbar.

3 Click Close.

Removing a Shape from the Shape Library

1 On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2 In the Shape Library, click the shape you want to remove.

3 Clear the checkbox to the left of the shape you selected.

4 Click Remove.

5 Click Yes.

6 Click Close.

Note

Only a shape added to the Shape Library using the Add Shapes button can be deleted with the Remove button. If you place a shape in the diagram, you cannot remove it from the Shape Library unless you first delete it from the diagram.

88 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Editing a Shape in the Shape Library

After you have added shapes to the Library, you can modify them by editing connect points, adding text layouts, adding VBA code, adding modeling properties, and changing default formats and fields.

Editing Connect Points Between Shapes

1 In the Shape Library dialog box, select the shape you want to edit.

2 Click Edit.

3 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, click Symbol.

4 In the Edit Symbol dialog box, click the Connect Points tab.

5 Use the Mode or Actions options to add or delete connect points.

6 Click OK.

7 Click OK.

8 Click Close to close the Shape Library dialog box.

Adding Text Layouts

1 In the Shape Library dialog box, select the shape you want to add a text layout to.

2 Click Edit.

3 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, click Symbol.

4 In the Edit Symbol dialog box, click the Text Layout tab.

5 Under Shape Margins, change the margins for your text placement.

Click Select under Mode to move existing connect points around the shape.

Click Add under Mode to add new connect points to the selected shape.

Working with Shapes and Lines 89

6 Under Secondary Text Areas, add or remove any secondary text areas.

7 Click OK.

8 Click OK.

9 Click Close.

Adding VBA Code

1 In the Shape Library dialog box, select the shape you want to add VBA code to.

2 Click Edit.

3 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, click Add VBA. VBA opens automatically letting you add code for the shape you have selected.

4 Add your VBA properties, and either close VBA or leave it open and return to iGrafx 2006.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Close.

Adding Default Modeling Properties

1 In the Shape Library dialog box, select the shape you want to add modeling properties to.

2 Click Edit.

3 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, click Properties.

4 In the Format Shape dialog box you can add a start point, set the decision text, and rename a shape using the Inputs, Outputs, and General pages.

5 After adding your properties, click OK.

6 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, click OK.

7 In the Shape Library dialog box, click Close.

This shape has a text margin set at 25% on the right and the dark border to the top left is a secondary text area.

90 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Changing Default Formats and Fields

1 In the Shape Library dialog box, select the shape you want to change the formats of.

2 Click Edit.

3 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, clear the Use Diagram Default Format or Use Default Fields boxes. Click Format, and select either Font, Fill, Line and Border, or Shadow/3D to open a related dialog box where you can apply desired formatting changes to the shape.

Click Fields to open the Shape Fields dialog box where you can set field properties.

4 Click OK.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Close to close the Shape Library dialog box.

Duplicating a Shape in the Shape Library

1 In the Shape Library dialog box, click the shape you want to duplicate in the Shapes list.

2 Click Duplicate. The new shape is added to the bottom of the Shapes list.

Arranging Shapes in the Shape Library

1 In the Shape Library dialog box, click the shape you want to move in the Shapes list.

2 Click Move Up or Move Down.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the shapes are in the order you want.

4 Click Close.

Manipulating Shapes and Lines TogetheriGrafx 2006 uses several commands to organize the look and position of shapes in a diagram. You can find the following commands on the Arrange menu:

• Align

• Make Same Size

• Space Evenly

• Rotate/Flip

• Order

• Combine

Working with Shapes and Lines 91

Align Command

iGrafx 2006 offers two ways to align objects. You can align objects based on the last object selected, or based on an overall selection boundary.

Some custom alignment options, such as the ability to make shapes the same size according to the widest or tallest, are available as custom toolbar buttons. To add custom toolbar buttons, from the Tools menu, choose Customize. In the Customize dialog box, click Align and choose a command.

Click the objects you would like to align. The last shape selected is an anchor shape, designated by a white-filled side and corner handles. Other shapes will be aligned with the anchor shape. To change the last shape selected, hold the Shift key and click the last shape selected, then click the shape you want to designate as the anchor shape.

To use align features, click the objects you would like to align, point to Align on the Arrange menu, and click one of the following options:

Box 3 with the white corner handles is the last selected.

Therefore, the other shapes are aligned to it.

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Align Left Aligns objects vertically on their left edges based on the last object selected.

Click point to

Align, and click the tool.

Align Center Aligns objects vertically on their centers based on the last object selected.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

92 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Making Shapes the Same Size

Click the objects you would like to make the same size. The last shape selected is an anchor shape, designated by a white-filled side and corner handles. Other shapes will be resized to the same size as the anchor shape. To change the last shape selected, hold the Shift key and click the last shape selected, then click the shape you want to designate as the anchor shape.

After selecting shapes, on the Arrange menu, point to Make Same Size, and click one of the following options:

Align Right Aligns objects vertically on their right edges based on the last object selected.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Align Top Aligns objects horizontally on their top edges based on the last object selected.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Align Middle Aligns objects horizontally on their middles based on the last object selected.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Align Bottom Aligns objects horizontally on their bottom edges based on the last object selected.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Make Same Width

Makes all selected objects the same width.

Click point to Make Same Size, and

click the tool.

Make Same Height

Makes all the selected objects the same height.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Working with Shapes and Lines 93

Even Spacing Command

Click the objects you would like to space evenly, on the Arrange menu point to Even Spacing, and click one of the following options:

Make Same Size, Both

Makes all the selected objects both the same width and height.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Make Same Size, Fit to Text

Makes the selected objects the same size based on their text.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Across, Centers Spaces the selected object or objects evenly across the diagram based on their centers.

Click point to Even Spacing,

and click the tool.

Down, Centers Spaces the selected object or objects evenly down the diagram based on their centers.

Follow the same steps, and click the

tool.

Across, Edges Spaces the selected object or objects evenly across the diagram based on their edges.

Follow the same steps, and click the

tool.

Down, Edges Spaces the selected object or objects evenly down the diagram based on their edges.

Follow the same steps, and click the

tool.

94 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Rotate/Flip Command

Click the object(s) you would like to rotate or flip, on the Arrange menu point to Rotate/Flip, and click one of the following options:

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Rotate Right Rotates the selected object or objects 90 degrees to the right.

Click the tool.

Rotate Left Rotates the selected object or objects 90 degrees to the left.

Click the tool.

Flip Horizontal Flips the selected object or objects horizontally.

Click the tool.

Flip Vertical Flips the selected object or objects vertically.

Click the tool.

Angle Selects the angle and direction for the object you want to rotate.

There is no Angle tool on the Draw toolbar.

Working with Shapes and Lines 95

Order Command

Click the object(s) you would like to order, on the Arrange menu point to Order, and click one of the following options:

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Bring to Front Moves the selected object or objects in front of other objects in the diagram.

Click the tool.

Send to Back Moves the selected object or objects behind other objects in the diagram.

Click the tool.

Send Backward Moves the currently selected object one level toward the back.

Click the tool.

Bring Forward Moves the currently selected object one level toward the front.

Click the tool.

96 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Combine Command

Click the object(s) you would like to combine, on the Arrange menu point to Combine, and click one of the following options:

Command Description Corresponding Draw Toolbar Tool

Group Groups together objects that you select as a single group.

Click and click the

tool.

Ungroup Separates a grouped set of objects into individual objects.

Click and click the

tool.

Connect Closed Connects the ends of a joined line of two or more segments into a closed object that can be filled. Connect Closed can also apply to a curved line.

Click and click the

tool.

Connect Open Connects multiple lines or joined lines without closing the ends into an object that cannot be filled.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Disconnect Disconnects the selected objects. Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Join Creates a new shape by joining the selected objects together.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Intersect Creates a new shape from the intersection of the selected objects.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Outline Creates a new shape from the outline of the selected shapes.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Slice Slices the selected closed shape with the selected open shape.

Follow the same steps, and click the tool.

Working with Shapes and Lines 97

Note

Combine commands (except for Group and Ungroup) can only be used for graphic objects that you create using the Draw tool and not shapes.

Working with Default FormatsAs you create diagrams, you can reuse the same shape and line styles. For example, you can use the same border style and fill pattern for decision shapes in a certain flow. You can choose the styles you want to reuse and store them in a list. These styles are called preset styles. After saving new preset shape and line styles, you can open them by clicking the Shape Style or Line Style lists on the Preset Styles toolbar.

You can set and apply shape and line defaults three ways:

• Defaults tab on the Format Diagram dialog box

• Preset shape and line styles

• Shape Library

This list is arranged in order of override capabilities: Preset shape and line styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar override shape and line settings you create using the Defaults tab. Defaults you create for individual shapes appearing in the Shape Library override styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar and defaults you create using the Defaults tab.

98 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Setting Shape and Line Defaults Using the Defaults Tab

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram, and then click the Defaults tab.

Note

You can set several defaults in this tab. This procedure explains how to set one type.

2 In the Select Defaults For list, select Shapes, then click the Fill button.

Default tab selected in the Format Diagram dialog box. Your selections on the left determine which buttons are enabled on the right.

Working with Shapes and Lines 99

3 In the Format Fill dialog box, choose a fill style or a foreground color.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Defaults tab, click OK.

Note

Click Edit to change the gradient type and attributes of the Gradient Style you select.

6 All shapes that you place in the diagram after changing the default appear with the fill style and color you selected. In this case, the style selected above. Any shapes existing in the diagram before the change are not affected.

Selecting a fill style.

Default gradient fill appears in each shape placed.

100 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Creating a New Preset Shape Style

1 If the Preset Styles toolbar is not open, click Toolbars on the View menu, and Preset Styles, and click OK.

2 Click the Edit Shape Styles tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

3 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click New.

4 In the Format Fill dialog box, select the shape options that you want.

5 Click OK.

6 Type a new name for the shape style.

7 Click OK.

8 Click OK.

After the new shape style is added, it appears in the Shape Style list on the Preset Styles toolbar for easy selection.

Adding a Preset Shape Style

1 Click the shape in the diagram.

2 Click the Add Shape Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar. The shape is added to the

Shape Style list.

Choosing, Renaming, or Deleting a Preset Shape Style

You can also choose, rename, or delete existing preset shape styles.

Choosing a Preset Shape Style

1 Select the shape(s) to which you want to apply the style.

2 Click the Shape Styles list on the Preset Styles toolbar.

3 Click the shape style you want.

Note

If no shape is selected, the preset style appears in the Sample tool and becomes the current shape style. If you select a shape before you choose a shape style, the style is applied to the selected shape.

Working with Shapes and Lines 101

Renaming a Preset Shape Style

1 On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Edit Shape Styles tool.

2 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the preset shape style you want to rename, and click Rename.

3 Type a new name.

4 Click OK.

5 Click OK.

Note

You can also edit an existing preset style in the Preset Styles dialog box by double-clicking it, and making your changes in the corresponding Formatting dialog box.

Deleting a Preset Shape Style

1 On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Edit Shape Styles tool.

2 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the shape style you want to delete.

3 Click Remove.

4 Click OK.

Creating a New Preset Line Style

1 On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Edit Line Style tool.

2 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the Line tab.

3 Click New.

4 In the Format Line dialog box, select the line options that you want.

5 Click OK.

6 Type a new name for the line style.

7 Click OK.

8 Click OK.

Adding a Preset Line Style

1 Click the line in the diagram.

2 Click the Add Line Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar. The line style is added to the

Line Style list.

102 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Choosing, Renaming, or Deleting a Preset Line Style

You can also choose, rename, or delete existing preset lines styles.

Choosing a Preset Line Style

1 Select the line(s) to which you want to apply the style.

2 Select the Line Styles list on the Preset Styles toolbar.

3 Click the line style you want.

4 If no line is selected, the preset style becomes the current line style.

5 If you select a line before you choose a line style, the style is applied to the selected line.

Renaming a Preset Line Style

1 On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Edit Line Style tool.

2 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the Line tab, and then click the preset style you want to rename.

3 Click Rename.

4 Type a new name.

5 Click OK.

6 Click OK.

Note

You can also edit an existing preset style in the Preset Styles dialog box by double-clicking it, and making your changes in the corresponding Formatting dialog box.

Deleting a Preset Line Style

1 On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Edit Line Style tool.

2 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the line style that you want to remove.

3 Click Remove.

4 Click OK.

Shapes vs. GraphicsSo far we have discussed shapes that are placed in the diagram space. iGrafx 2006 also contains drawing capabilities for creating graphics which may be added to the diagram to enhance the

Working with Shapes and Lines 103

information communicated. Understanding the differences between a shape and a graphic helps you create effective diagrams.

In iGrafx 2006, shapes and graphics serve different purposes: Shapes are intelligent and graphics serve as communication aids. The following table describes some differences between shapes and graphics:

Things you can do with graphics include:

• Adding text

• Reshaping

• Rotating

• Attaching to shapes using callout lines

• Converting to a shape

Graphics add value to diagrams by communicating additional information about the diagram or activity. Graphics may be connected to shapes.

Opening Graphic Toolbars

You can draw graphics of squares, circles, rectangles, and lines using tools found on the Draw toolbar. All graphics have the same attributes. After drawing a graphic, handles (black boxes) appear around it and a red square appears inside it.

Opening the Draw Toolbar

To open the Draw toolbar, click the Draw tool on the Standard toolbar.

Shapes Graphics

Place from the Toolbox toolbar or the Gallery.

Draw using Draw Tool options.

Intelligent connector lines with automatic routing identify the flow.

Do not use connector lines. Use callout lines to attach graphics to other objects.

Are intelligent objects. You may add fields, custom data, and VBA code to a shape.

Are simple objects.

104 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Viewing Drawing Options

To view drawing options, click the Draw tool on the Draw toolbar.

Drawing a Graphic

1 On the Draw toolbar, click the Draw Tool tool.

2 Click a draw option.

3 Move the pointer to the diagram space, click the left mouse button, and drag the corner of the graphic down and to the right.

4 Release the left mouse button.

Drawing a Polygon, Smoothed Polygon, Jointed Line, or Curved Line

These four graphics require additional mouse clicks since you are making a non-uniform shape. Each click of the mouse identifies a vertex or inflection point in the diagram object. After you have finished drawing one of these shapes, click the Finished button.

Selecting the Square option on the Draw tool menu.

Drawing the square.

Working with Shapes and Lines 105

Manipulating GraphicsAfter drawing a graphic, you can move it or resize it. You can also arrange and combine a series of graphics, and reshape a graphic using points and convert a graphic to a shape.

Adding Text to a Graphic

1 Select the graphic.

2 Type the text in the graphic.

3 To complete typing, click outside of the text box.

Note

You can also click Add Text on the context menu.

Moving a Graphic

1 Click the graphic.

2 Move the pointer to the gray hatched area surrounding the graphic.

3 The pointer changes to four arrows.

4 Click the gray hatched area and drag the graphic to a new position.

5 Release the mouse button.

106 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Resizing a Graphic

1 Click the graphic.

2 Click any of the black squares surrounding the graphic.

Note

To resize the graphic proportionally outward from a common central anchor point, click any one of the corner squares and hold down the Shift key. To resize the graphic proportionally, click any one of the middle squares on the top, bottom, or a side and hold down the Shift key.

3 Without releasing the mouse button, drag the square.

4 Release the mouse button.

5 Click outside of the graphic.

Rotating a Graphic

1 Click the graphic.

2 On the Draw toolbar, click the Rotate tool.

3 Click one of the green circles.

The pointer changes to four arrows and four green circles appear the corners of the graphic.

Green corner handle with the Rotate tool selected.

Working with Shapes and Lines 107

4 Without releasing the left mouse button, rotate the graphic to the desired position.

5 Release the left mouse button, and then click the Finished button.

Reshaping a Graphic

1 Select the graphic.

2 On the Draw toolbar, click the Reshape tool. The pointer changes to a white arrow. When

you move the pointer over a reshape point (white circle), it changes to a black arrow.

3 Click one of the white circles.

4 Without releasing the left mouse button, drag the reshape point to a new position.

5 Release the left mouse button, and then click the Finished button on the Reshape toolbar. When you click the Reshape tool, the Reshape toolbar opens. You can use the tools on the Reshape toolbar to edit the curve of the shape, add reshape points to the shape, or remove reshape points from the shape.

Graphic rotated ninety degrees to the right.

Pointer after clicking the Reshape tool.

Pointer on a reshape point.

Shape with point moved in.

108 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Converting a Graphic to a Shape

1 Click the graphic.

2 On the Arrange menu, point to Convert to, and click Shape.

Note

You can also convert a shape to a graphic. When you convert a shape to a graphic, any data attached to the shape, such as field codes, VBA, or other shape properties, is lost.

Drawing Callout LinesGraphics used as notes or descriptions help highlight important information about shapes in a diagram. You can attach graphics as notes to shapes using callout lines. You can also attach graphics to connector lines or other graphics. After you attach a graphic to a shape using a callout line, its position is relative to the shape. If you reposition the shape in the diagram, the graphic moves with it.

Connecting a Callout Line to a Shape from a Graphic

1 Click the graphic.

2 Move the pointer over the red square in the graphic. The pointer changes to a white arrow.

3 Click the red square.

4 Without releasing the left mouse button, drag the line from the red box to the shape.

A shape and a graphic selected. The red box identifies the graphic.

Dragging a callout line from the graphic to the shape.

Working with Shapes and Lines 109

5 Release the left mouse button. A red box appears on the shape where the callout line is connected. To turn on hidden lines, click Hidden Lines on the View menu.

6 Click outside of the shape.

Formatting a Callout Line

1 Click the graphic with a callout line attached to it.

2 On the Format menu, click Callout Line.

3 In the Format Callout Line dialog box, select formatting options in the Line tab.

4 To add an arrow to the line and change arrow formatting, click the Arrow tab.

5 Click OK.

If you want to view lines connecting graphics to shapes, click the Hidden Lines command on the View menu.

Connected callout line. Connected callout line with Hidden Lines turned on.

110 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Documents and Diagrams 4

Understanding the basics of placing shapes and lines is the first step in diagram building. For more

details about using shapes and lines in diagrams, see Working with Shapes and Lines on page 51.

Opening and Creating FilesiGrafx 2006 offers three ways to open or create new documents:

• The Welcome dialog box is the first entry point into iGrafx 2006. This dialog offers a graphical point of reference for creating new documents and opening existing ones.

• The New command creates a new document with or without using a template. You can use the New command on the File menu during any part of your session, including start-up to open any of the following:

Process Creates a new document with a Process diagram containing a department and a default Start shape.

BPMN Diagram Creates a new document with a process diagram containing a pool and default start event shape.

OrgChart Creates a new document with an Organization Chart diagram and a default shape set at the top of the diagram space.

Cause and Effect diagram Creates a new document with a cause and effect diagram opening in the diagram space and populates the iGrafx Explorer tool with cells.

Lean Value Stream Map Creates a new document with placeholder shapes and connector lines for value stream mapping of a process.

Basic Diagram Creates a new document with an empty diagram space.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 111

• The Open command on the File menu opens an existing *.igx file.

For more information on the differences between documents and diagrams, see Documents vs. Diagrams on page 22.

Opening a Document Using the Welcome Dialog Box

1 On the Windows Start menu, point to Programs and choose iGrafx 2006.

2 In the Welcome dialog box, click Open File, and then browse to the folder containing your document.

Note

This dialog box will not appear if you have selected the Don’t Show This Startup Screen Again check box.

Creating a New Document from the Welcome Dialog Box

1 On the Windows Start menu, point to Programs and choose iGrafx 2006.

2 In the Welcome dialog box, click New Document, and then click to select the type of map, chart, or diagram you want to create.

Opening a Document Using the Open Command

1 On the File menu, click Open.

2 In the Look in box, choose the drive where the document resides.

3 Double-click the folders to open the folder where your document resides.

4 If necessary, choose the type of file you want to open in the Files of type box. You can open iGrafx Documents, Micrografx FlowCharter Files, Micrografx Optima 2.5 Files, iGrafx Template, Workspace, and iGrafx Business Files, and Visio®Files.

Layout Diagram Creates a new document with an empty diagram space and opens the Lean Layout-Manufacturing palette in the Gallery.

Pick Chart Creates a new four-quadrant pick chart pre-populated with labels.

SIPOC Diagram Creates a new SIPOC diagram with frames for mapping relationships between Suppliers, Inputs, Process, Outputs, and Customers.

From Template Opens the New dialog box for selecting a template file.

112 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 Click the document you want to open. You can also use the shortcut key: Ctrl+O or the Open tool on the Standard toolbar.

Opening a Process Central Document

You must open a repository before you can access its contents. You can navigate a repository from the iGrafx Explorer bar.

For information, see Opening a Repository on page 221.

Creating a New Document Using the New Command

On the File menu, point to New, and then click on a diagram type. You can also choose to create a new document from a template.

Linking Shapes to Other Diagrams, Files, Web Pages, or RepositoriesYou can link shapes to other diagrams, files, Web pages, or files in repositories using iGrafx 2006. Linking shapes to other diagrams or external files gives greater flexibility for information sharing. For example, a diagram containing marketing goals can have linked shapes to more in-depth diagrams explaining sales divisions and the goals of each person within the division which, in turn, can be linked to a spreadsheet file showing sales and quota figures.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 113

You add links using the Add Link dialog box. You can manage and display them using the Links option found in the list on the top of the Explorer bar.

Linking and Subprocesses

There are at least two uses for linking. One is to “attach” something such as a document, spreadsheet, or web location. The second is for establishing hierarchy using a subprocess. On the Links page in the Properties dialog box, you create and modify both usages. In addition, you can create hierarchy using the Task page in the Properties dialog box.

Note

You must have at least one diagram to create a subprocess.

Linking a Shape to Other Diagrams

Shapes can be linked to diagrams you create from the Add Link dialog box, or to diagrams that already exist.

1 Open a diagram containing shapes that you would like to link to another diagram.

2 Right-click the shape you would like to link, and click Properties.

3 On the Links page in the Properties dialog box, click New.

4 In the Add Link dialog box, select a diagram from the Diagram Name drop-down list on the left. If you are creating a new diagram, type a name for your new diagram in the Diagram Name field.

Add Link dialog box

114 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 Select a key modifier in the Key Modifiers field by pressing Shift, Ctrl, or Alt. The key modifier is used together with a double-click to activate the link. You can also link to existing diagrams if you have more than one that exists in your document. Instead of typing in a new name, click the existing diagram from Name list.

6 Click OK. A message opens asking if you would like to create the new diagram. Click Yes.

7 If you would like to include this link in a subprocess, click the subprocess in the Subprocess list.

8 In the Properties dialog box, click OK.

9 Press the key modifier you selected and double-click the linked shape. The link jumps to the new diagram you created.

This diagram contains a linked shape indicated by the shadow.

The linked shape in the diagram to the left opens this diagram.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 115

Linking a Shape to a File or Web Page

Linking to a file or web page is a good idea when it could be helpful to describe an activity or process. Good examples include linking a shape to a web page that explains the significance of the activity or why it is used in a particular process, or maybe linking the same activity to a word processing document that may contain in-depth descriptions or definitions about when and why certain shapes are used.

Linking to a File or Web Page

1 Click the shape that you want to link to a file or web page.

2 On the Insert menu, click Link.

3 In the Add Link dialog box, click File or Web Page in the Link to: list on the left. To link a shape to a file, type the path in the Path or URL box. You can also click the Open File button and browse to the file you would like to link. To link a shape to a URL, type the

relative path in the Path or URL box. Auto-completion technology helps populate this box with links you have already used. As you type, the box completes with similar choices. You can also click the Open Web Browser button and browse to the URL you would like to link.

4 To add a description for the link, type a description in the Description box.

5 Click OK.

Linking a Shape to a Repository File

You can also link to a Process Central® repository using the Add Link dialog box.

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click the Process Central tab, and click a repository to select it.

2 In the diagram space, click the shape that you want to link to a repository.

3 On the Insert menu, click Link.

4 In the Add Link dialog box, click Process Central Link in the Link to: list on the left.

5 In the Link list, click the + sign to expand the files in the repository you would like to link to, and click the file.

6 Click OK.

116 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Laying Out the PageWith almost unlimited diagram space on the screen, you can create very large, in-depth diagrams to get a clear idea of what you have and where. With such diagrams, orientation, page breaks, and margin size help determine not only how the diagram looks, but how it prints.

Use the Page Setup dialog box to adjust page options such as scaling and page order so a diagram prints as desired. Within the Page Setup dialog box, you can also set custom headers and footers.

Defining the Page Setup

On the File menu, click Page Setup.

Page Tab

Options on the Page tab set the overall look of a diagram page for printing purposes. When defining the page setup, make sure you have page breaks turned on by clicking Page Breaks on the View menu. Page breaks outline where one page stops and another begins based on the page size you set

• Orientation- Select Portrait or Landscape.

• Scaling- Select Adjust to: to scale by percentage. Scaling by percentage means that at 100% a 10 point font prints at 10 points on a printer. Select Fit to: to scale by pages wide by pages tall. Scaling means that an entire diagram fits onto specified pages. As objects are added to a diagram, page breaks adjust automatically to fit the new information. However, printed information is scaled down as well; 10 points on the screen adjusts down to much less than 10 points on a printed page.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 117

• Paper Size- Click a paper size in the list, or set a specific width and height.

Page tab on the Page Setup dialog box

118 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Margins Tab

Options on the Margins tab make the page wider or taller, or shorter and more narrow. Click each of the Margin boxes individually and type the margin you want.

Header and Footer Tabs

The drop-down list of preset data objects on the Header and Footer tabs automatically places data objects in the header or footer. Click a section tab to specify the position of text or preset data when entering text or selecting from the menu of data objects, available when you click the Insert button.

Margins tab on the Page Setup dialog box

Working with Documents and Diagrams 119

Change the text font, color, size, and other formatting by selecting the text and clicking the Font button.

Options Tab

Options on the Options tab help you prepare diagrams that you can then print and use away from your computer.

• Poster Mode- Use to print out large multi-page diagrams as tiles that you can cut and tape together. Increase the overlap to have extra room to tape pages together after printing. You can also choose to show the header and footer in the diagram in this mode.

• Book Mode- Use to print out multi-page diagrams that you can bind in a book. By default when you print, department names only appear once. Click Print Department Headers on

Header tab on the Page Setup dialog box. The Footer tab looks the same.

120 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Every Page and Print Phase Headers on Every Page if you would like them to appear on every page of your printed diagrams.

• Print Frame- Works with Book Mode only. Prints a frame around the diagram page.

• Print Notes- Use to print notes that you have appended to objects in your diagram. Notes print after the pages of the diagram print. Notes use shape numbers to reference back to shapes in the diagram, and are printed in shape number order.

• Page Order- Refers to the order of pages printed and corresponding page numbers in Poster Mode–either down and then across, or across and then down.

Options tab on the Page Setup dialog box

Working with Documents and Diagrams 121

Custom Headers and Footers

The Header and Footer tabs on the Page Setup dialog box let you customize the look of your diagram. You can position text in the Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section of either the Header or Footer tab and add predefined data objects such as page numbers or the current date.

The Font button opens the Format Text dialog box. You can preview the header or footer in the Preview window at the bottom of the dialog box.

The Header dialog box showing the Insert menu. The Footer dialog box looks the same.

122 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Click the Insert button to choose data objects for the header or footer.

Adding a Header and Footer

As soon as you change a header or footer, it becomes a custom header or footer. You can change it back by selecting a format from the drop-down list of preset formats.

1 On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2 Click the Header or Footer tab. The Header tab is preset to add the File Name to the center section of the document. If you want to use this default setting, click OK.

To add a custom header or footer:

1 On the File menu, click Page Setup.

2 Choose one of the following:

• Select preset data objects from the drop-down list to insert in the header or footer and click OK.

• Click the Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section tab to specify the position of the text or data object in the header or footer.

This menu item... Inserts this data object...

Page Number Page number of the current page.

Number of Pages Total number of pages in the document.

Current Date Date the file is saved.

Current Time Time the file is saved.

File Name Name of the document.

Path + File Name Complete path and name of the saved file.

Diagram Name Name of the diagram.

Field Opens the New Field dialog box, where you can select a field from the diagram to insert in the header or footer.

Picture Opens the Insert Picture dialog box, where you can select a picture from the Shape Library, Shape Gallery, or Clipboard to insert in the header or footer.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 123

3 If you clicked a section tab,

• enter text and click the Font button to apply text formatting, or

• click the Insert button to add pre-defined information from data objects.

4 Click OK.

Formatting DiagramsUsing the formatting options helps you create professional looking diagrams, but also lets you and highlight important aspects of your diagram.

Formatting options appear on the Format menu, the Formatting toolbar, the Gallery, and the Shape Library. You can also use the Defaults tab on the Format Diagram dialog box and preset styles you create to set formatting options.

For information on:

• setting diagram defaults, see Working with Default Formats on page 98.

• formatting phase lines, see Using Phase Lines on page 77.

Note

To copy the formatting of selected text, shapes, or lines to other text, shapes, or lines in one step, use the Format Painter tool on the Standard toolbar.

Process Formatting Options

One of the many things you can do with departments is change the way they appear in a diagram. By changing individual department lanes, you give separation to particular groups or functions while changing the look of the entire diagram.

Department Name Area

Department names can be positioned on the left side of the department lane, right side, both, or neither. The top is not an option. You set the formats on the Process tab in the Format Diagram dialog box.

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram.

2 In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Process tab.

3 In the Department Name Area list, select the position of the department name.

124 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Click OK.

Choosing Colors and Styles for All Departments

This procedure makes all department names and lane areas the same color and pattern.

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram.

2 In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Process tab.

3 Click the Process Fill button. The Process Fill dialog box appears.

4 In the Process Fill dialog box, click either Solid, Pattern, or Gradient.

5 Depending on what style you select, choose additional options and click OK.

Area Description

No Name Department name areas are omitted. You can still name the departments, for simulation purposes, but the names are not displayed in the process map.

Name on Left Department names are displayed on the left side of the process map.

Name on Right Department names are displayed on the right side of the process map.

Name Left and Right

Department names are displayed both on the left and right sides of the process map.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 125

Changing the Color of Individual Department Lanes

1 Click the department name area of the lane that you would like to color.

2 On the Format menu, click Fill.

3 In the Name Area tab on the Format Department dialog box, click a Fill Style. If you want the Process Area to be a different color from the Name Area, click the Process Area tab, clear the Same as Name Area box, and select a different color.

4 Click OK.

Changing Departments to Floating Departments (Pools)

You can change departments to floating departments using the Format Diagram dialog box or the Department Manager dialog box.

To change departments using the Format Diagram dialog box:

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram. The Format Diagram dialog box appears.

2 Click the Process tab.

3 Select the Floating Departments check box.

4 Click OK.

To change departments using the Department Manager dialog box:

• Click the Departments toolbox and choose Department Manager, or

• Right-click the Department name area on a department swimlane and choose Department Manager from the menu.

Border and Divider Options

Borders and dividers work together to separate departments and elements used within departments. A border can be up to five points thick, solid or dashed, and colored. The default Department Frame setting is 1 point.

You can look at the sample picture in the tab as you make your selections to see what options look best.

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram.

2 In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Borders and Dividers tab.

3 Select a department elements and set the line styles. Hold the Ctrl key and click to select multiple department elements to apply the same line style settings for all selected elements.

126 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Select a Line Type, Style, and Color.

5 Click OK.

Indicator Options

Indicators are icons, text, or styling effects added to shapes indicating special conditions exist.

Indicators can show that a shape contains a note, a link, a subprocess, or any one of several BPMN diagram elements.

Styling effects can also indicate that a shape is a container shape, used for grouping diagram objects within an enclosing parent shape, or for expanded subprocesses in BPMN diagramming.

Setting and Changing Indicators

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram.

2 In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Indicators tab.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 127

3 Select the type of the indicator you want to set up for the shape. You can select more than one item to set at one time.

4 Select a Specific Indicator from the drop-down list.

• Text provides options to create or modify textual indicators. You can type any brief textual indicator you choose in the text box.

• Icon provides options to select or modify an icon. Use the default icon, or replace it with an image from the Shape Library, Shape Gallery, or clipboard.

• None suppresses display of an indicator. With this options selected, you can still set the border, fill, or shadow effect display on a shape that has an indicator.

128 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 Set appearance of shapes that have an indicator. Select the check box and click the:

• Borders button to add or modify lines and borders.

• Fill button to add or modify fill patterns and colors.

• Shadow button to add or modify the shadow or 3D effect.

6 Click OK.

To set or change an icon indicator, click the Change button. You can select a different graphic to use for the icon, modify the icon height and width, or reset to use the default icon settings. When you make a change, the new icon appears in the preview window.

Note

To choose a graphic from the clipboard, you must have selected it in a graphics editor such as Microsoft Paint and used the Copy command.

Off-Page Connector Options

When a diagram spans more than one page, you can have iGrafx 2006 automatically create connectors for all lines that cross page boundaries. Connectors are matching symbols and line segments that indicate the line’s source and destination. These connectors are useful because they provide symbolic information about the flow of the process when you print diagrams out in Book Mode. After placement, you can move any connectors, if desired. You can also specify that a connector is used for a selected line, regardless of whether it crosses a page boundary. For more information, see Adding Manual Connectors to a Connector Line on page 71.

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram.

2 In the Format Diagram dialog box, click the Off-Page Connectors tab.

3 Choose from the following options and reference numbering selections:

Automatic Connectors- A connector is always inserted when a line crosses a page boundary. Connectors are drawn next to their source and destination shapes. You can click and move a connector to a different position, for example, near a page boundary, if desired.

A connector is inserted automatically when a line crosses a page boundary.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 129

Shared Destination Connectors- The same destination connector is used if more than one line is connected to the same attachment point on a shape.

Connectors that share a destination always have the same reference numbering.

View Page Breaks- The page breaks are shown with gray, dashed lines. This option is selected if you clicked Page Breaks on the View menu. Page Breaks indicate the exact place where a new page begins when the diagram is printed. The page size is set by the print options you select. The size can be specific units like inches, or relative to the requested pages of output. A small page overlap is always present when you print a multiple-page diagram. This lets you put the different pages together easily by matching the overlapping areas.

Directional Symbols- Directional symbols give you another shape option besides a circle to show the relationship between the source and the destination.

Shared Connectors–Two lines moving from the shapes on the left connect to one point on the shape to the right (1,1 to 1).

Connectors Not Shared–Two lines moving from the shapes on the left connect to different points on the shape to the right (1 to 1 and 2 to 2).

Using Directional Symbols

130 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Include Page Numbers- The page number is printed as part of the connector. The To/From Page Font button lets you set the font for the page number.

Reference Numbering- Select Numeric or Alphabetic.

Note

You can also specify the font, fill pattern and border of the connectors and associated text. These formats apply to all connectors in the process map.

4 Click OK.

Aligning Shapes and Using the GridYou can use the Align menu items to line up shapes both horizontally and vertically. You can also use the grid to make placement of shapes easier by keeping objects aligned and lines straight.

The Snap to Grid feature overrides specified alignment settings. Be sure to turn off Snap to Grid to set alignment.

Directional Symbols with page numbers

Working with Documents and Diagrams 131

Aligning Horizontally or Vertically

Professional diagrams not only look better, they communicate information more effectively. A professional, organized look shows others that what you are presenting is important. Also, aligning multiple shapes as you place them makes it easier to connect lines to them.

Grids

Grids also help you with alignment by snapping shapes to a series of snap points on the diagram space. With snapping, every shape that you move locks on to these points. Grid snapping is turned on by default, and you can change the grid spacing.

Changing the Grid Spacing

1 On the Tools menu, click Options.

2 Click the Alignment tab.

3 In the Alignment tab, adjust the grid spacing in the Grid Spacing list.

4 Click OK.

Showing Grid Dots

To show the grid dots you are snapping to in the diagram space, point to Grid on the Arrange menu, and click Show Grid Dots. You can also select the objects you would like snapped to the grid, and click the Snap Objects to Grid command on the same menu to organize these objects in your diagram.

Shapes before aligning. Shapes after aligning.

132 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

en,

Working with LayersWith iGrafx 2006 you can organize your diagrams in layers. You can place some objects on one layer and others on another layer such as layering several overhead transparencies.

Layers help you do the following:

• Manage complex diagrams with many overlapping objects.

• Categorize objects that logically belong together by layer.

• View certain objects in your drawing while hiding others.

• Easily select and change objects.

• Protect objects from accidental changes.

• Print only certain objects.

By default, each diagram has one layer. The default name of the layer is Layer1. Layer1 is the back layer by default. At the bottom of each diagram window is a layer tab bar that shows a tab for each layer defined for that diagram. The tabs show the names of the layers and the order for the layers. A white tab indicates the current layer. When you hide or lock a layer, the name on that tab is gray. When the tab bar contains more tabs than can be shown at once, scroll arrows appear at the left of the layer tab bar.

Shape 1 is on Layer 1, shape 2 on Layer 2, and shape 3 on Layer 3. The Layer 1 tab is white, indicating the active layer.

Shape 2 on Layer 2 is missing because that layer is hiddand now Layer 3 is the active layer.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 133

Adding a Layer to an Active Diagram

1 On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Add Layer.

2 In the Name Layer dialog box, type a name for the new layer in the field.

3 Click OK. The new layer is added in front of the current layer and becomes the new current layer.

Note

To display a shortcut menu that lets you add a layer, click a layer tab using the right mouse button.

Editing Layers

Several commands exist on the Arrange menu for working with layers.

Editing All Layers

Edit All Layers lets you select, move, and change all objects in the active diagram, regardless of the layer on which they are located. When changing all layers, you cannot move an object on a lower layer in front of an object on a higher layer.

1 On the Arrange menu, point to Layers.

2 Choose Edit All Layers.

Moving an Object to a Different Layer

1 Click the object.

2 On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Move To Layer.

3 Click the layer to which you want to move the object.

4 Click OK.

Moving an Object Forward or Back One Layer

1 Click the object.

2 On the Arrange menu, point to Layers, and click Move Forward One Layer or Move Back One Layer.

134 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using the Layer Manager

The Layer Manager command on the Arrange menu opens the Layer Manager dialog box that lists the layers defined for the active diagram and lets you perform layer operations. In the Layer Manager you can change the visible, print, and lock properties of layers. It also lets you select the current layer; add, delete, and rename layers; change the order of layers; and specify whether you want to change the current or all layers.

The Layer Manager

Procedure Procedure

Deleting a Layer Click the name of the layer you want to delete, and click Delete.

Renaming a Layer Click Rename, type the new name, and click OK.

Changing the Order of a Layer

Click Move Up or Move Down as necessary to position the layer in the list where you want it, and click OK.

Showing or Hiding a Layer

Clear the box under the bulb icon for the visible layer. To show a layer, select the box under the bulb icon for the layer and click OK.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 135

Working with the Diagram SpaceRulers and page breaks serve as positional indicators for the diagram space. They can help to align shapes and determine logical points that break up the page especially in large diagrams where you must use the Zoom Control to view everything. With the exception of guidelines, all of these tools can be enabled or disabled using the View menu. Guideline commands are found on the Arrange menu.

Hidden lines serve as “callout lines” for text and graphical objects that are connected to other shapes and lines in the diagram space. These are for display only. These lines do not print unless you change the format of them.

You can use guidelines to align objects. When you drag a shape near a guideline, the shape's sides and center snap into alignment with the guideline. Guidelines only help you align shapes of different sizes to achieve an attractive, organized look; they do not appear in the printed diagram. For more information, see Guidelines on page 139.

While in Book Mode, master pages also help give you an organized look. They represent information that you would like to display on each printed page, yet not clutter your viewable, working diagram space. For more information, see Defining the Page Setup on page 117.

Making a Layer Printable or Nonprintable

To make a layer printable, select the box under the printable icon for the layer and click OK.

To make a layer nonprintable, clear the box under the printable icon for the layer and click OK.

Locking or Unlocking a Layer

To lock a layer, select the box under the locked icon for the layer and click OK.

To unlock a layer, clear the box under the locked icon for the layer and click OK.

Procedure Procedure

136 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Rulers, Page Breaks, and Hidden Lines

Rulers

Leaving the rulers on in particular is helpful not only for aligning elements, but clicking a horizontal or vertical ruler also gives you context menu options.

On the context menu you can change the increments from Inches to Centimeters as well.

Page Breaks

Page breaks outline where one page stops and another begins based on the page options you set on the Page tab in the Page Setup dialog box. The visual “dotted” line is oftentimes hard to see when your diagram is set at 100% view. It is best when placing lots of shapes in the diagram space to

Ruler context menu

Working with Documents and Diagrams 137

reduce the view. This helps you see how close to the page boundary you are and if the page would look better if some shapes were moved to another page.

Hidden Lines

Each piece of text you type in the diagram space and each graphical object you draw can be connected to shapes and lines in the diagram space. A line is drawn automatically from the text or graphic to the shape or line when you connect the two. These lines are visible when you have hidden lines turned on.

A gray dotted outline indicates one 8 1/2 x 11 diagram page. The view is set at 25%.

When you move a shape past a page boundary, another page is created automatically. In this case, the shape was moved from left to right.

Selected text. Click on the red square and drag it to shape where you want to connect the text.

Text being connected to the shape. When Hidden Lines are turned on, Callout lines appear as dotted gray lines.

Text connected to the shape, indicated by a callout line. Now if the shape is moved, the text moves with it.

138 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Guidelines

Guidelines work with rulers as a visual marker for arranging shapes on the diagram page. Like grids, you can snap shapes to guidelines.

Creating Guidelines

1 Click either the horizontal or vertical ruler.

2 While holding down the mouse button, drag a guideline down or across, and then release the mouse button. Repeat this procedure to create as many guidelines as you like.

To remove guidelines, click them, and while holding down the mouse button, drag them back to their respective rulers or off the opposite side of the window.

Note

Guidelines are only visual aides. They do not appear when you print your diagram.

Master Pages

A master page can be a useful tool when you want something to appear on every diagram page like a watermark, notation, or maybe a list of people working on the diagram with their phone numbers or emails included. What makes master pages so effective is that they do not clutter the immediate diagram space you are working in, yet the information that you place on master pages is always there, but hidden on the screen.

Two important conditions exist when working with master pages:

• To use them, you must have your diagram pagination set to Book Mode. You can set your pagination to Book Mode by clicking Page Setup on the File menu, clicking the Options tab in the Page Setup dialog box, and selecting the Book Mode option. Setting your pagination

With guidelines, placing shapes along set X and Y points is easier.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 139

to Book Mode lets you view your master page by clicking Master Page on the View menu, and then add elements to the master page itself.

• Elements on a master page are “invisible” in Normal view. The only time they are visible is in Print Preview. A good exercise to follow when using a master page is to click Print Preview on the File menu from time to time to view where your master page elements appear in relation to the rest of the diagram page. You may have to rearrange your master page elements to keep diagrams that you print clean looking.

Using Other Document and Diagram OptionsAfter you have placed shapes, connected lines, and set your page layout options, iGrafx 2006 provides other tools that are useful for improving a diagram that is a work in progress or near completion. These “post production” tools include spell checking and diagram protection.

Spelling and Using Dictionaries

The spell checking feature checks spelling by comparing words in your document with words in a dictionary. The default dictionary is a file containing thousands of words. If a word is found that is not in the dictionary, the word is considered a possible misspelling.

The program displays a list of words similar to the misspelled word. You can select one of the words, type the correct spelling yourself, ignore the word, or add the word in question to the user dictionary.

You can customize the spell checker by:

• Defining user dictionaries for special purposes.

• Specifying that the program ignore words with numbers and all caps during spell checking.

Diagram in Normal view. Master page elements exist, but you do not see them.

Diagram in Print Preview. The master page elements appear at the bottom of the page in this case.

140 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Checking Spelling

1 Select the elements you want to spell check. If no elements are selected, the entire diagram is spell checked.

2 On the Tools menu, click Spelling or click the Spelling tool on the Standard toolbar.

Misspelled words are displayed in the Not in Dictionary box. A suggested replacement is shown in the Change To box.

3 Type a replacement or choose another replacement from the list.

4 Click Change or Change All. If the word is not misspelled, click Add to add the word to the user dictionary and continue, or click Ignore or Ignore All to ignore the word or every instance of the word.

Choosing Spelling Options

1 On the Tools menu, click Options.

2 Click the Spelling tab.

3 Select a version of the dialect to use from the Dictionary Language list. For example, English (Australian).

4 Use the default path and file name of the dictionary, or choose one from the drop-down list if more than one dictionary is available. You may choose to ignore words with numbers and words in all caps.

5 Click OK.

Finding and Replacing Text

Use the Find command to search text in active documents and active diagrams. You can search for exact words or variations of a word. For example, select the Match case option on the Find dialog box, type the word “auto” and the search finds auto and automobile.

Finding Text

1 On the Edit menu, click Find.

2 In the Find dialog box, type the text to find in the Find what field.

3 Click the options to search through. You can choose any combination of Text, Custom Data, or Notes.

4 Select where you would like to look for text from the Look in list.

5 Click Find Next.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 141

Replacing Text

1 On the Edit menu, click Replace.

2 In the Replace dialog box, type the text you want to find in the Find what box.

3 Type the text you want to use as replacement text in the Replace with box.

4 Click the options to search through. You can choose any combination of Text, Custom Data, or Notes.

5 Select where you would like to look for text from the Look in list.

6 Click Replace to replace that one instance of the word, Replace All to replace all instances of the word. If you click Replace, click Find Next to find the next instance of the word.

Protecting and Unprotecting a Document

At times, you might want to prevent other people from modifying a diagram. You can protect a diagram by assigning it a password. If the diagram contains hidden data fields, they are hidden from view until the password is entered correctly. iGrafx 2006 uses the following cursor to indicate a protected document.

You can use password protection to manage linked files. By assigning each person in a work group a different password, you can ensure that each person has access to the proper diagrams.

Protecting a Document

1 On the Tools menu, click Protect Document.

2 In the Password field, type a password.

3 In the Verify field, type the same password again.

4 Click OK.

Note

If you open a protected diagram a message reminds you that you have to type the password before you can make changes to the diagram.

Protect Cursor

142 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Unprotecting a Document

1 On the Tools menu, click Unprotect Document.

2 Type the correct password.

3 Click OK.

Note

If you enter the wrong password, a message appears telling you that the password is incorrect. Click OK and type the correct password. If you do not know the password, click Cancel. You can change the diagram only after you enter the correct password. The iGrafx support team can help you recover lost passwords.

Setting the Automatic Recovery Time

iGrafx 2006 includes a feature that saves the document you are working on automatically at a set time increment. Automatic Recovery protects your work from an unexpected system or program failure. This feature is turned on by default. If the application does fail, a message appears when you open the document again indicating where you can recover the document.

1 On the Tools menu, click Options.

2 In the Options dialog box, click the General tab.

3 Select Save Auto Recover info every.

4 In the Time select box, enter an increment.

5 Click OK.

Viewing Modes

iGrafx 2006 offers several ways to view new diagrams you are creating, or view documents you have already created.

Normal View

Normal is the most popular view for editing diagrams. In Normal view you work with a diagram space, or the area containing shapes, graphics, text, and lines. This space is set by default at 100%. Use the Zoom control to change the view percentage to view more or less of the diagram space.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 143

Tabular View

The Tabular view can be used for viewing data contained within the diagram. This includes departments, shapes, and connector lines.

Note

You can edit data in both the Normal and Tabular view.

Full Screen View

Use the Full Screen view to show someone the diagram and do a chalk talk about it. While in full-screen mode, you can draw on the screen using the mouse buttons to draw using different colors.

• To draw in red, click the left mouse button and drag.

• To draw in green, click the right mouse button and drag.

• To draw in yellow, click both mouse buttons and drag.

When you finish, press Esc to return to the previous view.

You can use the following keys when working in Full Screen view:

Master Page View

Master Page view shows you what elements appear on the Master Page. Anything placed on the Master Page appears on every page of the diagram when printing or using the Print Preview command. Your pagination must be set to Book Mode to enable the master page view. For more information on setting your page to Book Mode, see Defining the Page Setup on page 117.

Use this keyboard shortcut... To do this...

Delete, Spacebar, E Erase diagram annotations

Tab, Page Down, N Go to the next diagram window

Shift+Tab, Page Up, P Go to the previous diagram window

144 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Viewing Different Toolbars

iGrafx 2006 uses toolbars to provide much of its functionality. Toolbars contain icons that provide a set of related tools. For example, the Formatting toolbar contains tools for changing the appearance of elements in the diagram or model.

1 On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2 In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbars you would like to view, and click OK.

Toolbar Description

Standard Contains tools to perform basic functions in iGrafx 2006. Most of these functions appear as commands in the File and Edit menus.

Formatting Contains tools to define the way text, lines, and shapes appear in your diagrams. Additional formatting options are available on the Format menu.

Toolbox Contains tools to create and change diagrams. It is the most used toolbar.

Draw Contains tools that create and modify drawing objects.

Preset Styles Contains the styles that you use most frequently for text, shapes, and lines.

Custom Data Lets you add and modify custom data on shapes.

iDiagram Contains tools to help you set up and run iDiagrams.

Visual Basic Lets you add or edit Visual Basic properties and code to iGrafx 2006 objects such as documents, diagrams, and shapes.

Connector Line Contains tools for connecting shapes.

Zoom Lets you change the view of areas in your diagram, or the entire diagram.

Controls Lets you insert Visual Basic controls in your diagrams.

Arrange Contains tools to manage alignment, sizing, spacing, ordering, and grouping of shapes and objects.

Process Central Contains tools to create and edit both repositories and components contained within repositories.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 145

Working with Windows

Window menu commands help you manage the layout of your windows in the work space. The New Window command opens a duplicate window of the active window. You also find these commands on the Window menu.

A list of all open windows appears at the bottom of the Window menu.

Process Central Queries Contains tools to define, delete, modify, and customize queries in repositories.

Model Contains tools needed to set up a process model for simulation. Most of the tools on this toolbar also appear as commands on the Model menu.

Trace Contains tools used to manage the trace mode of a simulation.

Cause and Effect Contains tools used to manage cause and effect diagrams.

Toolbar Description

Tile Vertically

On the Window menu, click Tile Vertically.

Tile Horizontally

On the Window menu, click Tile Horizontally.

Cascade

On the Window menu, click Cascade.

Split

On the Window menu, click Split.

146 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Diagram Types and ComponentsCreating multiple diagrams and saving them in a single document is a good way to organize, package, and store diagrams.

The following list of components can be used together for the purpose of creating a model:

• Basic Diagrams- Basic Diagrams contain shapes, connector lines, departments, graphics, and text describing ideas.

Note

You cannot simulate Basic Diagrams.

• Process Diagrams- Process Diagrams contain the same functionality as Basic diagrams. In addition, you can add modeling data and simulate the process.

• Scenario- Contains set up information for simulating a process model using iGrafx Process.

• Report- Contains the results of simulation using iGrafx Process.

When working with components, use the Explorer bar with the Components tab in focus.

The iGrafx Explorer tool with the Components tab in focus.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 147

The following icons designate component types:

Within a document, it is possible to have more than one of any particular type of component.

Creating a New Component

1 On the File menu, point to Insert Component, and click the component type you want.

2 In the New Component dialog box, type a name for the component in the Name field, and click OK.

Note

You can also create a new component by adding a subprocess to an existing process from the Task page on the Properties dialog box. To do this, double-click a shape in the process diagram that you would like to add a subprocess to, click Task in the Modeling Properties list. On the Step tab, select Process from the list, and click the New Process button. The new subprocess appears as a component in the Explorer tool.

Creating a New Component from a Template

1 On the File menu, point to Insert Component, and click the component type you want.

2 In the New Component dialog box, type a name for the component in the Name field.

3 Click the Templates button.

4 Click the tab containing the template you would like to use, click the template name, and then click OK. The template opens in the diagram space and the component is added to the Explorer bar.

Deleting or Renaming a Component

Deleting

1 In the Explorer tool, click All Components, Diagram Hierarchy, or Diagrams by Contained Departments to view the component you wish to delete.

2 If necessary, click the "+" symbol to expand the components.

3 Right-click the component, and click Delete. The component is removed from the Explorer bar and the document.

Diagram Component

Scenario Component

Report Component

148 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Renaming

1 Right-click the component, and click Rename.

2 Type the new name over the existing name.

3 Click outside of the text box.

Copying and Pasting a Component from one Document to Another

1 In the Explorer bar, click All Components, Diagram Hierarchy, or Diagrams by Contained Departments.

2 In the tree hierarchy, click the "+" symbol to expand the components.

3 Right-click the component you want to copy, and then click Copy.

Note

You can select multiple components for copying by pressing SHIFT and clicking the components.

4 On the File menu, click Open, navigate to another document, and then click OK.

5 In the Explorer bar, select the Components tab, right-click an empty area, and click Paste. Depending on what type of component you paste, it is added to the diagram set. You can also paste the component into the same document it came from to create another copy.

Converting a Basic Diagram to a Process

With a basic diagram open, point to Change Diagram Type on the Tools menu, and click Process.

Working with Documents and Diagrams 149

150 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Text 5

Text is one of the most important elements in a diagram. Text gives the shape meaning and

direction.

The following types of text exist in iGrafx 2006:

For more information on text functionality, see Formatting Text on page 159.

Creating TextYou can create and edit text in an open diagram space, within shapes, text areas, and department name areas.

Text Type Description

Shape Text you type directly in a shape. As you type text, the shape resizes automatically to fit the text.

Department Name Text you type directly into the department name area.

Decision Text generated from case text selections on the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box.

Line Text you create by selecting and typing on it.

General Text you create using the Text tool on the Toolbox toolbar.

Field Text that appears as a field in or around a shape.

Working with Text 151

Text in the Open Diagram Space

1 Click the Text tool on the Toolbox toolbar.

2 Click in the open diagram space (not on a shape or line).

3 Type your text.

4 When you finish typing, click away from the text. The text block is created.

Note

You can also draw a text bounding box by dragging the cursor. By drawing a bounding box, you can predefine the text width, establish line wrapping, and allow for text formatting such as alignment and using bullets.

Text in a Shape

1 Click the shape you want to add text to.

2 Type the text you want in the shape. The text wraps automatically. If you would like to manually start a new line, press Enter.

3 When you finish, click outside the shape.

Note

iGrafx automatically implements a useful text zooming feature when you add text to a shape if the diagram view is set at 50% or less so you can see what you are typing.

Setting Text Margins Inside Shapes

1 Click the shape.

2 On the Format menu, click Text Layout.

3 Select Fixed, or Percentage from the Shape Margins list.

The shape grows automatically to fit the text.

152 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Type the shape margins for the top, bottom, left, and right.

5 Click OK.

Text on Connector Lines

1 Click the connector line.

2 Type the text you want. To wrap additional text to a new line, press Enter and continue typing. By default, text that you type appears above the line.

Margins set using the Percentage option. The blue square in the middle indicates where the text appears in the shape.

Text appearing above the line.

Working with Text 153

Creating Text that Appears On Connector Lines

You can also have text appear by default on the line instead of above it.

1 On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Connector Lines tab.

2 On the Connector Lines tab in the Options dialog box, click On the line under Default Line Style.

3 When you finish, click outside the text block.

Note

Text on a connector line can also be repositioned manually. Click the text, then click the gray stippled border, and drag the text to the desired position.

Creating Text on Graphic Lines

1 Click a graphic line you created using either the Jointed or Curved line tools on the Draw toolbar.

2 Type the text you want.

3 When you finish, click outside the text block.

Text appearing on the line.

154 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Text in Department Headers

1 Click the department header.

2 The pointer changes to a text cursor.

3 Modify the text as necessary.

4 When you finish, click outside the department name area. The department name is modified. If the department is used in other process diagrams in the document, iGrafx 2006 prompts you to change all departments with this name.

Manipulating TextText you create exists as a stand-alone element, or part of an element. You can manipulate existing text in both instances.

Selecting Text

Text in the Open Diagram Space

Click the text block.

Text in Shapes

1 Click the shape (including the text block) that contains the text you want to change.

2 Click at the beginning of the text you want to select.

Deleting text in a department header using the Backspace key.

Working with Text 155

3 Click and hold the left mouse button, and drag across the text you want. To select multiple lines of text, drag up or down.

4 Release the mouse button when you are finished.

Moving Text

Text in the Open Diagram Space

1 Click the text block you want.

2 Drag the text block to its new position.

Note

To select more than one object, press Shift and click each object. iGrafx applies any text options you choose to all the text in the selected objects.

Text in Shapes

1 Click the shape containing the text you want to move.

2 Drag the shape to its new position. The shape and its text move together.

Dragging the Text cursor across the text block.

156 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Attaching Text to Shape

1 Click the text block that you would like to attach to a shape, and position the cursor over the red box.

2 Click the red box and, in this case, drag the red box to the outside border of the shape.

3 Release the mouse button, and click away from the shape.

Attaching Text to Another Line

1 Click the text that you would like to attach to a line, and position the cursor over the red box.

2 Click the red box, and drag it to the line.

3 Release the mouse button, and click away from the line.

Cursor positioned over the red box in the selected text.

Connecting the text to the shape.

Text connected to the shape.

Working with Text 157

Detaching Text from a Shape or Line

1 Right-click the text block that you would like to detach.

2 On the context menu, click Detach Text from Shape.

Note

If you are detaching text from a line, the context menu command is Detach Text from Line.

Deleting Text

1 Select the object containing the text.

2 Click to place the text cursor where you want to begin deleting text.

3 To delete text to the left of the text cursor, press Backspace. To delete text to the right of the cursor, press Delete.

158 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Editing TextWhen you edit text, you are changing two things: text appearance and text functionality.

Text Appearance

Editing text includes changing the way the text looks. By changing a font size or color, you change the way text appears on the screen or in a printed diagram. Fonts and point size establish the look of text. A font is a set of characters with its own design. Each font comes in a range of sizes, measured in points. A point is a typographical measurement equal to 1/72 inch.

The Fonts dialog box displays a list of all iGrafx 2006-enabled fonts. When you start using iGrafx 2006, you should install a default printer driver for your printer if it isn't installed already, and select the correct printer setup options in iGrafx 2006.

Text Functionality

When editing, you are also determining how text relates to other text. Adding bullets and line indents to a text block can set it apart from other text in a diagram and give emphasis to specific items.

Formatting Text

1 Select the text you want to change.

2 On the Format menu, click Font.

Working with Text 159

3 In the Format Text dialog box, scroll through the font list, and select the font you want.

4 To change the font size, scroll through the size list and select the size you want.

5 To turn Font Styles on or off, select or clear the check box next to Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough, Superscript and Subscript. (You can select more than one.)

6 To change the text color, select the Color list and select a color.

7 To set the background of the text to opaque, select the Opaque box.

8 Click OK.

Setting Bullet Styles for Text

1 On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

2 In the Format Text dialog box, click the Paragraph tab, and select the bullet style from the Bullet Style list. To change the spacing between the bullet and the text, click the Block tab, and adjust the Tab Size.

3 Click OK.

Format Text dialog box

160 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Setting the Line Spacing for Text

1 On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

2 In the Format Text dialog box, click the Paragraph tab.

3 Under Interline Spacing, click Lines or Points in the Spacing Units list, and click the units to space in the Spacing box.

4 Click OK.

Note

You can also use the Decrease Line Spacing and Increase Line Spacing tools on the Formatting toolbar.

Working with Default and Preset Text StylesiGrafx 2006 enables you to create a text default unique to each specific element type in your diagram. For example, you can set a default for text appearing only in shapes and another default for text appearing on connector lines. Setting defaults for different text elements helps the creator and users of a diagram to make quick visual associations and distinctions for ease of reading, as well as giving a professional appearance. A diagram style can be created using text defaults, and they can be applied consistently and easily on future diagrams.

You can set and apply text defaults three ways:

• Defaults tab on the Format Diagram dialog box

• Preset text styles on the Preset Styles toolbar

• Modifying shapes and graphics in the Shape Library

This list is arranged in order of override capabilities:

• Preset text styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar override text settings you create using the Defaults tab.

• Defaults you create for individual shapes appearing in the Shape Library override styles you create using the Preset Styles toolbar and defaults you create using the Defaults tab.

Working with Text 161

Setting Text Defaults Using the Defaults Tab

1 On the Format menu, click Diagram, and then click the Defaults tab.

Note

You can set several defaults in this tab. This procedure explains how to set one type.

2 In the Select Defaults For list, select Shapes, then click the Font button.

3 In the Format Preset Text Style dialog box, click a font in the Font list. Also, Size, Font Style, Color, and Opaque Background can be set, if desired.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Defaults tab, click OK. All new shapes created will have the default font style applied.

Setting Text Defaults Using the Shape Library

1 On the File menu, click Shape Library.

2 In the Shape Library, select a shape in the Shapes list.

3 Click Edit.

4 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, clear the Use Diagram Default Format box under Shape Defaults.

5 Click Format, and select Font.

Note

You can select several formatting options in the Format Preset Text Style dialog box. This procedure explains how to set one type.

6 On the Font tab, click a font in the Font list, and then click OK.

7 In the Edit Shape Library Item dialog box, click OK.

8 In the Shape Library, click Close.

Note

New shapes added to the diagram space using this shape default to this text style.

162 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Creating a Preset Text Style

1 Select the text with the styles you want (font, size, style, and color).

2 On the Preset Styles toolbar, click the Add Text Style tool.

Note

To display the Preset Styles toolbar, right-click in a toolbar area, and click Preset Styles.

Applying a Preset Text Style

1 Select the text you want to apply the style to.

2 On the Preset Styles toolbar, select a style from the Text Styles list.

Renaming a Preset Text Style

1 Click the Edit Text Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

2 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the style you want to rename.

3 Click Rename.

4 In the Rename Style dialog box, type the new name.

5 Click OK.

6 In the Preset Styles box, click OK.

Note

You can also edit an existing preset style in the Preset Styles dialog box by double-clicking it, and making your changes in the corresponding Formatting dialog box.

Deleting a Preset Text Style

1 Click the Edit Text Style tool on the Preset Styles toolbar.

2 In the Preset Styles dialog box, click the text style you want to delete.

3 Click Remove.

4 Click OK.

Working with Text 163

What Else Can You Do with Text?iGrafx 2006 includes several text features that you can use after you have added text to either the open diagram space or to a shape.

Adding Secondary Text Areas to a Shape

1 Click the shape.

2 On the Format menu, click Text Layout.

3 In the Format Text Layout dialog box, click Add.

4 Click Left, Top, Right, or Bottom. The secondary text area appears as the box with the solid border around it in the preview shape.

5 In the Size box, select the size of the text area.

6 Click OK.

Note

You can also format secondary areas in the Format Text Area dialog box by clicking Format under Selected Text Area.

Deleting Secondary Text Areas from a Shape

1 Click the shape.

2 On the Format menu, click Text Layout.

3 In the Format Text Layout dialog box, click the secondary text area in the preview shape you want to remove.

4 Click Remove.

5 Click Yes.

Aligning Text Blocks

1 Click a text block.

2 On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

3 In the Format Text dialog box, click the Block tab.

4 To change the horizontal block alignment, click Center, or Right.

5 To change the vertical block alignment, click Middle, or Bottom. The default is Top and Left.

6 Click OK.

164 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Setting Text Orientation

1 Click a text block.

2 On the Format menu, click Text Alignment.

3 In the Format Text dialog box, click the Block tab.

4 Under Text Orientation, click the direction you want your text oriented.

5 Click OK.

Rotating Text Independent of Rotating a Shape

1 Click a text block or shape that contains the text you want to rotate.

2 Click the Rotate Text Left or Rotate Text Right tool on the Formatting toolbar.

3 Repeat step 2 to continue rotating the text until it is in the position you want.

4 Click outside the text area.

Rotating a Shape and Text Together

1 Click the shape containing the text you want to rotate.

On the Arrange menu, click Rotate/Flip, and then click Rotate Right, Rotate Left, or Angle.

Working with Text 165

166 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 6

Creating functional, content-rich documents is the first step in information sharing. Communicating

this information to others is most important.

With iGrafx 2006, you can package and deliver these documents several different ways:

Printing and Publishing- iGrafx 2006 printing and publishing tools enable you to deliver hard copy printouts and electronic versions for use in other applications and web browsers.

Importing and Exporting- Helps you utilize information contained in other applications, and package new information for use in other Windows applications. With importing and exporting, for example, you can take information from an earlier version of FlowCharter, include it in your new document, and then export that document to a spreadsheet.

PrintingWhen you print a document, you can choose many options such as selecting specific diagrams, page ranges, and numbering configurations.

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 167

Print Command

The Print command on the File menu opens the Print dialog box where you can select or change printing options.

Element Description

Printer Lets you choose the printer, and using the Properties button change printer properties.

Print What Lets you print the active component, or multiple components of the active document. Click Choose to add components to or remove components from this list.

Print Range Lets you print all pages in the component, or type a print range for printing a select group of pages. This option is available only when printing the active component. You can use various page range strings like 2, 4-9, 11-15, 17, and 22.

Copies Lets you select the number of printed copies.

Restart page numbering for each component

Select to restart page numbering for each component in the list. This option is available only when printing multiple components. If you leave this check box empty, then the entire multiple-component print job shares one set of page numbers.

Start page numbering at Type a number for starting your page numbering.

168 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Choose Print Components Dialog Box

You can include or exclude components using the Choose Print Components dialog box.

Available components appear in the Print list. Depending on which components you would like to print, you can move components back and forth between the Print and Don’t Print lists using the Add and Remove buttons.

Page Setup Command

The Page Setup command on the File menu opens the Page Setup dialog box where you can select additional print options in the Options tab. For more information about the Options tab, see Options Tab on page 120.

Viewing Page Breaks

It is a good idea to have page breaks turned on so you can see what will be printed before you print your diagram. By default, page numbers are displayed.

On the View menu, click Page Breaks.

Choose Print Components dialog box

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 169

Viewing Page Numbers

To show page numbers for printing:

1 Click Page Setup on the File menu.

2 Click the Header or Footer tab.

3 Click the Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section tab, and click to place your cursor in the field.

4 Click the Insert button and select Page Number.

Quick Print

On the Standard toolbar, click the Print tool to print using the current defaults.

Canceling Printing

Click Cancel in the Print dialog box, or press ESC.

Troubleshooting a Printing Problem

The printing environment on any system can be very complex because it requires different applications, operating systems, and printing devices to work together synchronously. If you encounter a printing problem, the following are useful troubleshooting techniques that can help clear up the problem quickly:

• Try printing from another application. This can narrow the scope of the problem, i.e., by pinpointing if the problem happens with several applications or just iGrafx 2006.

• Try rebooting the printer and the computer. Sometimes the system needs to be rebooted to clear up an existing problem that may or may not be related to printing.

• Check that you have the correct and most recent printer driver for your printer. Even if you have already installed the correct printer driver, it may be out-of-date. A printer driver update contains bug fixes and enhancements from the vendor. You can obtain the most recent printer driver from your vendor’s website.

170 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

PublishingAfter you create a document in iGrafx 2006, you can output it to several formats. “Publishing” documents is ideal for information exchange especially when:

• Distance or size of an organization warrants sharing information using tools such as a web browser.

• A graphical element like a diagram is one part of a document being shared such as one page in a 25-page Word document.

• Those who do not have iGrafx 2006 installed on their machines would still like to view a document.

Publishing a Web Page

iGrafx 2006 can publish a file as a series of HTML web pages, along with shape notes and links. Publish as Web Page additionally supports multiple output formats, basic HTML, Java applets, and SVG. The Publish As Web Page feature is a one-shot, non-progressive task; use the Publish Web Project feature for documents you update and publish frequently.

HTML

The basic HTML files can be viewed in any web browser that supports images, client-side image maps and tables.

Note

If the entire diagram does not display in the browser, open the Page Setup dialog box (from the File menu) and set page scaling to fit to 1 page wide by 1 page tall.

Java Applets

Benefits of the Java applet include the ability to zoom and pan, to view shape notes as rich formatted ToolTips, to ‘Find’ text within a diagram, and to print full page.

Java 1.3 or later is recommended for use with this feature.

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 171

Limitations

• Hairline / 1pt dashed and dotted lines currently render as solid lines if running an earlier version than Java 1.3.

• Bitmap images containing more than 256 colors are dithered on publish.

• Applet Print functionality is only available when running Java 1.3 or later, or with the Microsoft® Virtual machine version 1.1.

• Fill patterns appear differently when you zoom in, as the pattern scale is fixed.

Minimum Requirements

Publishing diagrams as Java applets requires a Java-compliant web browser running at least Java 1.1, such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.01 or later, or Netscape 4.08 or later.

SVG

Scalable Vector Graphics is a XML-based publishing format.

Limitations

• SVG only supports ONE link per shape. Because of this, all SVG output utilizes the same HTML multi-link mechanism as HTML output.

• SVG does not support ToolTips.

Minimum Requirements

SVG may require the installation of a Viewer plug-in if your Internet browser is not SVG enabled. If your browser does not support SVG, you will be prompted to download one when you view the output.

Publishing As a Web Page

1 On the File menu, point to Publish As, and click Web Page.

2 In the Publish as Web Page dialog box, browse to the location in the Publish to Folder field to save the page(s).

3 In the Check the Components to Publish list, set the view mode, and select the diagram(s) and components you would like to publish.

4 Select the Output Shape Notes and Publish Linked iGrafx Documents check boxes if you would like shape notes and linked documents included in your output. Selecting Linked iGrafx Documents also publishes all child linked documents.

172 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 In the Output Format list, select the format you want to publish your diagrams. Based on the format you choose, your secondary options change:

• HTML- Set the scaling based on how you would like to view the output. Click the Save Multiple-Page Diagrams to a Single HTML Page check box if you want multiple page diagrams to appear on a single page.

• Java Applets- Click an output size in the Output Size list. If you are using Netscape, you must have version 4.6 or later for dynamic sizing to work correctly.

• SVG- Click an output size in the Output Size list.

6 Choose where you want the navigation links in your output to appear by clicking a location in the Link Tables list.

Note

If you are publishing as HTML, you can save multiple-page diagrams to a single HTML page by selecting the Save Multiple-Page Diagrams to a Single HTML Page check box. However, if you want to publish a single, overall composite view of a multiple page diagram, this option is not for you. To do this, make sure your diagram fits on one page, or click Page Setup on the File menu, and change the scaling to fit to 1 page by 1 page on the Page tab.

7 Click OK. The Publish as Web Page- Finished dialog opens.

8 Click Close, or click View to view the page(s) in your Web browser.

Publishing a Word Processor File

You can also publish your document for use in Microsoft Word. This feature requires Word for Windows 97 or newer.

1 On the File menu, point to Publish As, and click Word Document.

2 In the Publish As Document wizard, check which components you would like to save, and click Next.

3 In the Save to Folder field, type or browse to the location you want to save your files to and click Finish. When viewing the Word document, you must use the Print Layout view to see the process.

Publishing a Slide Presentation File

Publishing slide presentation files is similar to publishing word processing files. iGrafx 2006 lets you publish in PowerPoint using the Publish As wizard.

1 On the File menu, point to Publish As, and click PowerPoint Presentation.

2 In the Publish As Presentation wizard, check which components you would like to save, and click Next.

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 173

3 In the Save to Folder field, type or browse to the location you want to save your files to and click Finish.

Note

The titles for your slides correspond directly to the contents of the center header in your Page Setup settings. You can set or change this header by clicking Page Setup on the File menu and clicking the Header tab. The Center Section tab contains the slide heading.

Publishing a Web Project

iGrafx 2006 lets you create and manage a “web project” based on a collection of iGrafx files stored in a specified folder tree, the “source folder.” The Web project publishes the selected files to the location specified during project creation, the “publishing folder.”

The major benefits of a Web project, over the one-shot Web page publishing mechanism are:

• “Intelligent” re-publishing of files. Files are published only if they have:

• Changed since the last publish.

• A linked file that has been removed since the last publish.

• Previously generated a warning during publishing.

• Been changed in/deleted from the “publishing folder” outside of the project.

• File links are ‘fixed up’ if components change in a linked document.

• “Tree-view” navigation

• Synchronized navigation of links.

• Links appear in tree.

• Managed files

• Warnings are generated for problem diagrams or components.

• “Publishing folder” directory structure mirrors “source folder.”

• Protection against accidentally using “reserved” filenames.

Java 1.3 or later is recommended for use with this feature.

174 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Limitations

• Publish Web Project only supports diagram output in Java applet format.

• Linked iGrafx files are always published. Clearing a linked file from the Project tree does not remove it from the project if it is still being referenced by another selected file.

• Linked documents outside of the “source folder” are published purely as links and are not managed or copied to the “publishing folder.”

• After a project has been created, you cannot change the “source folder” or “publishing folder.”

• Only one project can exist per “publishing folder.”

• Modifications should not be made to files in the “publish folder.” It is recommended that files are copied to a “development folder” if you plan to edit any of the output before deployment.

For other Java Applet limitations, see Publishing a Web Page on page 171.

Minimum Requirements

Publishing files as a Web Project requires a Java 1.1 compliant web browser with HTML 4 compliant FRAME support, such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.01 or later, or Netscape 4.6 or later.

Creating a Web Project

1 On the Tools menu, click Publish Web Project. The Publish Web Project dialog box opens.

2 In the New tab, create or browse to the folder containing your iGrafx documents. The New tab is only visible when you create a new project. On subsequent uses, click Publish to enable it.

3 Create the folder where you would like to publish the iGrafx documents.

4 Click Open.

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 175

5 In the Publish Web Project dialog box, select the check boxes next to the folders or individual documents that you would like to publish. Selecting a folder automatically selects the documents in it.

The Publish Web Project dialog box

176 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

6 Click Publish. The Publish Web Project-Finished dialog box opens, detailing the number of files added. Click View to see the results in the browser.

Updating a Web Project

After you have created your initial set of published files, you can make changes and then republish them. iGrafx 2006 remembers where you have stored both the source and published files.

1 On the Tools menu, click Publish Web Project. In the Publish Web Project dialog box, you have a number of options:

• To remove any existing documents from the republish, clear their check boxes.

• If you have added any new documents to the source folder and want to publish them, then select them.

• If you have made enhancements or corrections to existing files, leave them checked.

2 Click Republish. The Publish Web Project-Finished dialog box displays the number of updates, additions, or deletions.

The Browser view

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 177

Sending a Document as an E-mail Attachment

iGrafx 2006 works with any MAPI E-Mail system, such as Microsoft Outlook, allowing you to send documents as attachments with e-mail messages. The Send command automatically opens your e-mail and attaches the open document, so you can address and send the mail as you would any other message. To send a document via email:

1 Open the document you wish to send.

2 On the File menu, click Send.

3 Address the e-mail and create a message as appropriate.

Note

This feature works with any MAPI E-mail system. MAPI e-mail systems include Microsoft Mail, Microsoft Exchange, and Lotus cc:Mail. If the mail system is not running, it starts when you click the Send command.

Exporting Diagrams and TablesYou can use iGrafx 2006 to export diagrams and tables to other image editing and database management applications. Both options are useful, but produce different results.

Image Editing- Preserves how the diagram looks on the page. You can save elements such as shapes, lines, and text along with their formatting and position as file types you can view in other image editing applications.

Database Management- Preserves the information contained within the shapes as tab-delimited data. You can save field information such as links, IDs, coordinates, and shape numbers in a table format for exporting or copying into databases and other applications.

Exporting a Diagram

1 On the Tools menu, click Export Diagram.

2 In the Export Diagram dialog box, type a name for the diagram in the File Name box.

3 Choose the drive and directory in which you want to store the diagram.

4 Select what export format you would like to save the diagram as in the Save as Type box.

5 Click Save.

Note

Depending on what type you want to save your diagram as, another dialog box may appear where you can select additional options before saving.

178 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Exporting a Table

1 On the Tools menu, click Export Table.

2 In the Export Table dialog box, expand the field lists in the box. To view the fields in alphabetical order, select the Alphabetical option.

3 Drag the fields contained in your diagram from the list down to the window at the bottom of the dialog box, and drop them.

Note

If you are in the tabular view when you open the Export Table dialog box, the set of columns are not identical to, but contain the same data as, the visible tabular view columns.

The Export Table dialog box before fields are added to the sample output.

The Export Table dialog box after fields are added to the sample output.

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 179

4 To save your field selections as a predefined set, click Save As, and type a name for them in the Predefined Sets select box. The set is saved and appears in the Predefined Sets select list. The set will also appear as a selection the next time you open the Export Table dialog box.

Note

You can also select the Include Headers box to label columns appearing in your table. Selecting this option labels the first row of each column the same as header rows. To edit the header labels, click on the first row in each column and type a new name.

5 Click Export- Opens the Save As dialog box where you can save the fields you dragged and dropped as a tab-delimited text file. When you open an application like Excel, it recognizes that you have saved a tab-delimited file and organizes your fields accordingly. XML format is available as a file type to save as.

or

Click Copy- Copies your fields to the clipboard for pasting into another application that recognizes tab-delimited information.

Changing the Field View for Exporting a Table

1 On the Tools menu, click Export Table.

2 In the Export Table dialog box, select either Alphabetical or By Group. Alphabetical sorts all the fields from A-Z. By Group is sorted by Connection, Graphical, or Shape with corresponding fields grouped with them.

Reordering Columns Before Exporting or Copying a Table

1 On the Tools menu, click Export Table.

2 In the window at the bottom of the dialog box, click a column, and drag it left or right. Repeat this procedure to reorder other columns appearing in your table.

3 Click Export.

or

Click Copy.

180 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Removing Columns Before Exporting or Copying a Table

1 On the Tools menu, click Export Table.

2 In the Export Table dialog box, select an existing predefined set from the Predefined Set select box, drag an existing field out from the window at the bottom of the dialog box and drop them in the list box above the window. You can also select the set and press Delete to remove it.

3 Repeat this procedure to remove other columns from the table.

4 Click Export.

or

Click Copy.

Modifying and Saving Predefined Sets for Exporting or Copying a Table

1 On the Tools menu, click Export Table.

2 In the Export Table dialog box, select an existing predefined set from the Predefined Set select box, drag an existing field(s) from the window at the bottom of the dialog box back up to the field list, and drop. You can also select the set and press Delete to remove it.

3 Click Save As.

4 Rename the predefined set.

ImportingiGrafx 2006 lets you import and convert data from older file formats into iGrafx 2006 documents. Shapes and lines are automatically converted along with text and graphical information.

You can import:

• Older file versions of iGrafx FlowCharter, iGrafx Professional, Process, and Process for Six Sigma (*.igx)

• Older file versions of FlowCharter (*.flo, *.abc, *.af3, *.af2)

• Optima! 2.5 files (*.pfd)

• Visio® files (*.vsd) versions 4, 5, 2000, and 2002

• Database files

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 181

How Do I Import Files?

The Open command on the File menu is the easiest way to import most files into iGrafx 2006, with the exception of database files which use the Database Import command on the Tools menu.

1 On the File menu, click Open.

2 In the Files of type box, click the file type you would like to open. By default, all older iGrafx, FlowCharter, and Optima! files are visible. You can refine your filter, or change it completely by choosing another File Type option.

3 In the Look in box, choose the drive where the file resides.

4 In the box, double-click the folders until you open the folder where your file resides.

5 Click the file, and click Open.

FlowCharter Files

When importing FlowCharter version 4, 6, and 7 files, you may notice a few enhancements over previous versions:

• Horizontal swimlanes are converted automatically to iGrafx 2006 departments, and their shapes are converted into activities within the appropriate departments.

• If iGrafx 2006 finds links to other FlowCharter files, you receive an Import Options message which asks if you would like to convert the linked diagram.

If you choose Yes, the shapes are converted to Activities and the contents of the linked files are converted into subprocesses (as other process diagrams in the file). If you choose No, the link remains and the documents remain separate.

The following table helps you understand the conversion of Process elements:

Element Description

Shapes During conversion, any shape that is connected by a line to another shape is automatically converted to an activity.

Graphics and lines Any shape that is not connected to another shape is converted to a graphic. Also, any line that does not connect shapes is converted to a graphic. Any line that connects shapes is automatically converted to a connector line.

182 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Database Files

You can import database files from several different sources into iGrafx 2006. A database file maps directly to information already contained in your diagram. Your diagram should already contain shapes for mapping. Depending on what database driver you select, the Shape Properties wizard helps you map specific shape properties in your diagram to the information contained in the database file. The following example uses Microsoft Excel as the database and a Basic diagram (containing seven shapes) as the diagram type. However, you can use any diagram type for data importing.

The Excel file used in this example contains seven rows and five columns. The rows correspond to the number of shapes used and the columns correspond to the shape properties used.

1 On the File menu, point to New, and click Basic Diagram.

2 On the Toolbox toolbar, double-click the Process shape, and place seven instances of the shape in the open diagram space.

3 On the Tools menu, click Database Import.

4 On the first page of the Select Data Source wizard, click Excel Files, and click Next.

5 In the Select Workbook dialog box, browse to the Excel file you would like to use, and click OK.

Decisions and duplicates

A shape that has more than one labeled output is converted to a Decision activity. A shape that has more than one unlabeled output, and is not a diamond shape, is left as an activity.

Text Any text object, other than text that labels an output line from a symbol, is converted to a text graphic.

OLE Any OLE object is converted to an OLE graphic.

Element Description

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 183

6 On the next wizard page, click the table name in your Excel file. In this example, a table named Developers exists. This table was created in Excel prior to starting the database import. Click Next.

7 On the Map Database Columns to Shape Properties wizard page, map the fields contained in your Excel file by first clicking a property in the Shape Properties list, and then clicking a column element in the Fields list. After both are highlighted, click the right arrow to create

The Select Table page in the Select Data Source wizard.

184 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

e

the mapping. In this example, you have five fields to map: Border Color, Description, Fill Color, ID, and Name.

8 After populating the Mapping used to import table list, click Next.

The Shape Properties and Fields lists displayed before mapping. The Fields list contains the columns in your Excel file.

The Shape Properties and Fields lists after mapping. Notice the Fields list is empty and the Mapping used to import tabllist is populated.

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 185

9 On the Select Database Record to Shape Mapping wizard page, create an association by mapping a unique field from your Excel file to a shape property. You can do this two ways:

• Database Field Option- The Database Field list contains the fields (columns) in your Excel file. By default, each shape placed in the open diagram space contains a shape number, with the first shape placed being 1. Therefore, if you map ID to Shape Number, a record is created from the first shape placed to the last. Other mapping combinations require you to modify your shapes in the open diagram space. For example, if you want to map Name to Shape Text, then you must type each name from the Name column in your Excel file in each shape existing in your diagram.

• No mapping. Import records as they are fetched from the database- This option reads directly from your Excel file and places the shape properties on your shapes from the first shape placed to the last.

10 Click Finish.

Importing Custom Data in Database Files

The Database Import feature includes default Shape Properties that you map to fields. You can also map any custom data you add to shapes in your diagram as a property. Custom data is data you define and add to shapes. This data includes information like text, dates, and even currency and percentages that you can accumulate. For more information on custom data, see Working with Custom Data on page 203.

Mapping Custom Data

In this example, a shape contains a custom data field for Cost and is mapped using the same Excel file described earlier in the chapter.

1 On the File menu, point to New, and click Basic Diagram.

2 On the Toolbox toolbar, double-click the Process shape, and place seven instances of the shape in the open diagram space.

3 On the Tools menu, click Database Import.

4 In the first panel of the Select Data Source wizard, click Excel Files, and click Next.

A shape containing a custom data field.

186 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 In the Select Workbook dialog box, browse to the Excel file you would like to use, and click OK.

6 In the next wizard panel, click the table name in your Excel file. In this example, a table named Developers exists. This table was created in Excel prior to starting the database import. Click Next.

7 In the Map Database Columns to Shape Properties wizard panel, scroll the Shape Properties list to find the custom data you want to map. Any custom data you add to a shape appears in the Shape Properties list with the name you gave it enclosed in brackets.

8 After you have mapped the fields, click Next and move to the next panel.

9 Click Finished.

The Cost property is enclosed in brackets.

Printing, Publishing, Exporting, and Importing 187

188 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Other Applications with Your Documents 7

OLE is a protocol that is used by many Windows applications to exchange information. iGrafx 2006

acts as an OLE container application.

You use OLE to include information from other programs into your diagrams. When you include OLE information, you choose whether to embed or link it. The main difference between linking and embedding is where the data is stored.

Embedding Objects

The advantage to embedding is that one diagram contains all the information. If you copy the file to a floppy disk or another computer system, all of the objects are stored within it. The disadvantage is that size and performance are affected as the number of embedded objects increases.

Linking Objects

The advantage to linking is that you ensure that the most recent information prepared by other users or computer systems can be kept up-to-date in your file. The disadvantage is that the linked objects could be moved or become unavailable.

Note

You can create an OLE link to any Windows application that acts as an OLE server. To link to other iGrafx documents, use the Link command on the Insert menu.

Embedding Objects From Other ApplicationsIf you have a source application that supports drag and drop and OLE, you can create an embedded object by copying from a source file and pasting into a diagram. You can either drag and drop a selected area or use the Paste Special command on the Edit menu.

Using Other Applications with Your Documents 189

When you embed an object, you can specify either that its contents appear in the diagram or that an icon be displayed. For example, you can put the contents of a Microsoft Excel chart in the diagram, or you can display the Excel icon.

Inserting an Embedded Object. When you create a new object, it is automatically an embedded

object because there is no file to link it to. An embedded object becomes part of the iGrafx 2006 diagram.

You insert an object using the Insert Object dialog box.

Insert Object Dialog Box

Element Description

Create New Invokes an application and creates a new occurrence of one of its objects. For example, you can open Microsoft Word, copy an entire page, and insert it into the diagram.

Object Type Displays a list of all applications registered on your computer as OLE objects. The list varies from installation to installation, depending on the software that is available.

Create from File Inserts an object that already exists. This option changes the dialog box. Type the full path name for the object or use the Browse button to locate the file. If you choose Link, the object is linked; otherwise, the object is embedded.

Display as Icon Represents the object in the diagram as an icon. This option changes the dialog box so that it displays the current icon. You can change it by clicking on the Change Icon button.

190 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Inserting a New Embedded Object

1 On the Insert menu, click OLE Object.

Note

The registration database is the source of information used by applications that support OLE. This is the database used by iGrafx to determine which objects are registered on your computer for OLE purposes.

The database is set up and maintained by Windows and Windows applications. If iGrafx does not recognize an application object, it may be due to a problem in this database.

2 In the Insert Object dialog box, select the object type, and then click OK.

3 When you finish creating or editing the object that you want, close the application.

Note

Some applications ask you to confirm that you want to close and update the diagram; others do not. If you are satisfied with the object, be sure to choose Yes or OK to update the diagram.

Convert To Dialog Box

Element Description

Convert To Permanently converts the object to the new object type, and displays a list of valid types for your computer system. For example, if the object is a graphic, then the list includes the graphic editors that recognize the current type (and therefore can be used to edit it).

Activate As Temporarily activates all embedded objects of the selected type. For example, converts all PowerPoint drawings to a different graphic editor. When you edit the object, you use the application you choose, but changes are saved in the PowerPoint format. This option is available only if there are two or more embedded objects of the same type.

Display as Icon Displays the object as an icon. You may want to change the icon at this point to correlate to the new format.

Using Other Applications with Your Documents 191

Editing an Embedded Object

1 Select the OLE object in the diagram.

2 On the Edit menu, point to [Type] Object, and click Edit. (The [Type] of object may appear in the menu. For example, the menu item for a document might be Document Object.) This opens the application that created the object. For example, if you have embedded a CorelDraw drawing, you can open CorelDraw and edit the drawing by double-clicking it in the iGrafx 2006 diagram.

Converting an Embedded Object to a Different Format

1 Select the OLE object in the diagram.

2 On the Edit menu, point to [Type] Object, and click Convert. The current type of object is listed at the top of the Convert dialog box.

3 In the Convert dialog box, select a new object type from the list, and click OK.

Dragging and DroppingIf you have a source application that supports drag and drop and OLE, you can create an embedded object by copying from a source file and pasting into a diagram. You can either drag and drop a selected area or use the Paste Special menu.

Links Dialog Box

Element Description

Update Now This updates the linked object. If the source has changed since you opened the diagram or last updated the link, this option loads the new version.

Open Source This opens the source file in its source application.

192 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Embedding an Object Into a Diagram

1 Open both the source file and the iGrafx 2006 diagram, and adjust the window sizes so that both applications are fully displayed on the screen.

2 Select the area in the source file that you want to link.

3 Drag the area into the diagram. To move the area, use the mouse to drag the area into the diagram. The cursor indicates that the selected area is being moved.

To copy the area, press and hold the CTRL key while you use the mouse. The cursor changes to indicate that a copy is made of the selected area.

4 Release the mouse button.

Creating Links to Specific Locations in Microsoft® Applications

1 Open a source application like Word or Excel, and select the information you want to link. For example, you may want to highlight an entire paragraph in the middle of a document.

2 On the Edit menu, click Copy.

3 Switch to iGrafx 2006, and click Paste Special on the Edit menu.

4 In the Paste Special dialog box, select Paste Link. To display the link as an icon, select Display as Icon.

Change Source This opens the Change Source dialog box so you can change the source file. You can choose a different file by entering a new path or using the Network button to set the location.

Break Link This breaks the link and disconnects from the application. When you break a link, the linked information remains in your diagram. However, it can no longer be updated. The link becomes a standard graphic. Once you break a link, you cannot reconnect it.

Element Description

Using Other Applications with Your Documents 193

5 Click OK.

6 Click the link, and drag the red square located in the center to the shape where you want to attach it. Release the mouse button.

7 Right-click the link, and click Collapse on the context menu.

8 Drag the collapsed icon to a desired position on the shape. In this example, double-clicking the icon opens Microsoft Word.

Creating a Link To an Object

1 On the Insert menu, click OLE Object.

2 In the Insert Object dialog box, select Create from File.

3 Type the path to the object or use the Browse button to locate it.

4 Select the Link box.

5 If you want to display the contents of the object as an icon, select Display as Icon.

Note

If you do not display as an icon, then the contents of the object are shown. For example, the first page of a Word document is displayed.

Editing Linked Information

Click the shape, and click OLE Links on the Edit menu. The Links dialog box opens, and each link is displayed with its path, type, and update method.

An OLE link before it is collapsed and added to a shape.

The collapsed icon appears in the bottom right-hand corner.

194 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Controlling How Links Are Updated

1 On the Edit menu, click OLE Links.

2 Select the link that you want to update.

Note

You can select multiple links by holding down the CTRL key while you click each link.

3 For Update, select one of the following:

Automatic- Updates linked information every time there is a change in the source file.

Manual- Updates linked information only when you save the source file yourself.

Viewing As an Icon

1 Click a linked object.

2 On the Edit menu, point to [Type] Object, and click Convert.

3 In the Convert dialog box, select the Display as Icon box.

4 To change the type of icon displayed, click Change Icon.

5 Click OK.

Using Other Applications with Your Documents 195

196 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Customizing Documents 8

The goal of all information developers is to create documents that are both useful and can be

extended.

Add the ability to use these documents more than once, extend their usefulness with specialized templates, and add custom VBA code, and you can transform what is a normal document into a powerful, information-sharing tool.

Using Custom TemplatesiGrafx 2006 lets you create and save custom templates with tools, shapes, and preferences that you use most often when creating documents. You can also use the dynamic pre-defined templates which come standard for customizing anything from dataflow practices to network diagramming.

The Default Template

All template files use the extension *.igt. iGrafx 2006 contains common templates which reside with the application files. These template files can be used as the basis for new documents in iGrafx 2006.

Default templates may be created for several document types. When the default templates exist for a document type and are saved in either the common or personal templates directory, they are automatically used when you create a new document using the File menu or the Welcome dialog box.

Creating a Default Template for Basic Diagrams

1 Create a new basic diagram document in iGrafx 2006. Include the tools, shapes, lines, departments, or any other feature you will use often.

2 On the File menu, click Save As.

3 In the Save As dialog box, type Default in the File name field, and click iGrafx Template (*.igt) in the Save as Type list. By default, the template saves in your Personal Templates

Customizing Documents 197

directory. If you save the template to a different location, the template will not be used automatically when you create a new basic document.

Note

You can change the location of the default template directory by clicking Options on the Tools menu, clicking the Files tab, clicking Personal Templates under File Types, and then clicking Modify.

4 Click OK. Whenever you create a new basic diagram document using the File menu or the Welcome dialog box, it will be based on your template.

You can also use this procedure to create default template files for process diagrams (Process.igt), BPMN diagrams (BPMN.igt), and Lean value stream maps (LeanVSM.igt).

Using Personal and Common Templates

You can create and save templates in your personal template directory. These files are always saved in the iGrafx *.igt format. Browsing to and using these personal templates is just as easy as using the predefined, common templates in iGrafx 2006.

To browse for and use these templates:

1 On the File menu, point to New, and click From Template.

2 In the New from Template dialog box, click either the Common Templates or Personal Templates tab.

3 Click the template you would like to open, and click OK. The new document is based on selected template.

Note

You will not see a Personal Templates tab unless you have created an initial personal template.

Working with iGridsiGrids are graphical templates that you can use to diagram hierarchies, matrices, comparisons, schedules, timelines, and checklists. Each iGrid has corresponding options for adding or removing elements, sizing, placing, and aligning. After choosing from these options, the iGrid appears in the diagram space.

Depending on which iGrid you select, a new subject tab opens in the Gallery. Use the clip art in these tabs to add graphics and color to your iGrids. When you drag and drop these graphics into an iGrid, they “snap” to the grid boundaries in which they are placed.

198 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The following table describes the iGrid templates in iGrafx 2006:

Inserting an iGrid

1 On the Insert menu, click iGrid.

2 In the Insert iGrid dialog box, click the iGrid icon you want to insert.

3 Click OK.

iGrid Description

Pyramid Shows hierarchical lists, such as those illustrating business values and goals or customer requirements.

Basic Shows a grid of squares in the diagram. The grid enables you to place objects in precise positions.

Block Shows a graphical matrix or gives a brief overview of a process.

Cascade Shows items in a sequence, such as steps in a process.

Process Shows the details of a process so that it can be readily understood.

Deployment Shows the flow of information and materials among different organizational units.

Comparison Shows comparisons of items in columns and rows, such as products and features. These charts can represent yes/no relationships (using check marks or thumbs up/down) or multiple-value relationships (using filled bullets).

Timeline Shows schedules for tasks, projects, and procedures.

Circle-Spoke Shows items in a circular arrangement, connected to a center shape. Spoke charts are useful for illustrating business principles, the key benefits of a product, or a product line.

Target Shows concentric rings of focus, such as with increasingly focused customer groups and business objectives.

DrawBar Shows general relationship and conceptual quantitative relationships (for example, something is smaller than or larger than something else).

Checklist Shows single or multiple-column visual checklists.

Customizing Documents 199

4 Edit the options you want to change.

5 Click OK.

Editing an iGrid in the Diagram Space

1 In the diagram space, right-click the iGrid.

2 On the context menu, click Edit iGrid. Yellow sizing diamonds appear on edges of the iGrid in the diagram.

3 To change the size of the iGrid, click the diamonds and drag the iGrid to a new position.

4 To finish the positioning, click the Selector tool on the Toolbox toolbar, and then click

outside the diagram space.

Working with Visual Basic for ApplicationsiGrafx 2006 contains Microsoft’s Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), version 6.0 as its integrated development environment. VBA provides a programming interface to the powerful features that comprise iGrafx 2006.

Using VBA with iGrafx 2006

VBA is a widely used programming language and is integrated into Microsoft’s Office products. If you have any experience customizing or extending these applications, then you have a head start in developing with iGrafx 2006. Even without prior experience, you have the advantage of using a widely accepted and standardized development tool.

Running a VBA Macro

1 On the Tools menu, point to Visual Basic, and click Macros.

2 In the Macros dialog box, select a macro from the list.

3 Click Run.

Note

This procedure assumes that you opened a document containing VBA macros. If no macros exist in the document you are creating or opening, the Macros command on the Tools menu will not be active.

200 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Opening a VBA Extension Project

1 On the Tools menu, point to Visual Basic, and click Extension Projects.

2 Click Open.

3 Navigate to a iGrafx Extension Project (*.flx), and click Open. The project is added to list in the Extension Project dialog box.

4 Select the box next to the project, and click Open.

Modifying VBA Security Settings

1 On the Tools menu, point to Visual Basic, and click Security.

2 In the Security dialog box, select:

High- Prevents any unsigned macros from automatically running.

Medium- Lets you choose whether or not to run macros. This is the recommended setting.

Low- Lets all macros run. This is not a recommended setting.

3 Click OK.

Customizing Documents 201

202 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Data in Documents 9

Collecting data on shapes, manipulating shapes and lines in tabular format, and using advanced

diagramming tools with VBA and DataAnalyzer takes you from simple diagramming to more complex operations.

Several features exist in iGrafx 2006 which enable you to do “pre-modeling” tasks such as data gathering.

Working with Custom DataiGrafx 2006 lets you add custom data fields to individual shapes in a document. Each data field for a shape has its own name and function. You can accumulate data using selections in the Setup Custom Data dialog box for a shape to analyze, for example, the cost of activities along the critical path of a process.

A custom data field can contain up to 255 characters.

Adding Custom Data Fields to a Shape

The following example describes adding custom data to a shape labeled Packaging.

1 Right-click the shape to which you want to add custom data.

2 On the context menu, click Properties and select Custom Data.

3 In the Custom Data page, click the Setup button.

4 In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click the New button and type Cost in the Custom Data Name box. To add the rest of the data:

• Click Currency in the Type list.

Using Data in Documents 203

• Click $1234.00 in the Format list.

• Click Sum in the Accumulation Method list.

5 Click OK. The field is added to the Custom Data page.

204 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

6 In the Custom Data page, type 14.00 in the Cost row.

7 Click OK. The custom data is applied to the shape. Any information that you change in these fields at a later time updates automatically in the document. You can display both the descriptions and the actual fields around shape for informational purposes.

To display the Cost value and field description, from the Format menu, choose Fields and specify what to display in the Shape Fields dialog box. For more information about formatting fields, see Using Fields on page 81.

Using Data in Documents 205

Accumulating Custom Data Through Links

You can update custom data on shapes linked between two diagrams by pointing to Custom Data on the Tools menu, and clicking Update From Linked Diagrams. The following example explains how to create a link, add custom data, and update the data.

Creating the Link

1 On the File menu, point to New, and click a diagram type.

2 Place a shape in the diagram space, and leave it selected.

3 On the Insert menu, click Link.

4 In the Add Link dialog box, click Advanced.

5 In the Advanced Link Settings dialog box, select the Accumulate Custom Data check box, and click OK. Click OK to close the Link dialog box.

6 Click Yes in the message that appears asking if you would like to create another diagram.

Adding Custom Data

You should now have two diagrams within the same document–Document 1- Diagram 1 and Document 1 - Diagram 2.

1 Double-click the linked shape in Diagram 1 to open Diagram 2.

2 In Diagram 2, place a shape in the diagram space.

3 Right-click the shape, and click Properties on the context menu.

4 In the Custom Data page, click Setup.

5 In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click new and type Cost in the Name field under Custom Data, and click OK.

6 In the Custom Data page, type 10 for the value, and click OK.

Viewing Custom Data

It is helpful to view custom data attached to a shape, especially data attached to shapes getting updated.

1 On the Format menu, click Fields.

2 In the Shape Fields dialog box, click New Field.

3 In the New Field dialog box, click + in the Field Type tree control for Custom Data.

4 Click Cost, and click OK.

206 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 In the Shape Fields dialog box, select the Include Description check box, and click OK. Follow the same procedure for the linked shape in Diagram 1.

Updating Data

1 Open Diagram 1 which contains the linked shape.

2 On the Tools menu, point to Custom Data, and click Update From Linked Diagrams.

Note

Links do not accumulate data automatically and accumulation is enabled on an individual basis.

Shape in Diagram 2 showing the custom data field.

Linked shape in Diagram 1 before updating.

Linked shape in Diagram 1 after updating.

Using Data in Documents 207

Deleting Custom Data Fields from a Shape

1 Right-click the shape that you want to delete a field from.

2 On the context menu, click Properties.

3 In the Custom Data page, click Setup.

4 In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click the field in the Custom Data box, and then click Delete.

5 Click OK.

6 In the Properties dialog box, click OK.

Adding Advanced Custom Data Field Options to a Shape

1 Right-click a shape containing field(s).

2 On the context menu, click Properties.

3 In the Custom Data page, click Setup.

4 In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click Options.

5 Edit hours per day and days per week, and then click OK.

6 In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click OK.

7 In the Properties dialog box, click OK.

Inserting a Legend Displaying Custom Data

On the Tools menu, point to Custom Data, and click Insert Legend. The Summary box displays custom data added to shapes.

The Tabular ViewProcess diagrams can be viewed using the normal (graphical) view or the tabular view. Both views contain the same data and can be used to define a process diagram. Use the tabular view for the following:

• If you prefer entering or editing data using tables instead of graphics.

• If you have a large amount of data to enter.

208 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Viewing Data in Tabular Format

You can click the Tabular command on the View menu to change the view of the active process diagram from normal to tabular. The tabular view consists of a process table containing the process diagram data. A unique cell name (row name) is assigned for each department and activity (for example, A1and B1) in the table.

Connections to other symbols appear in the last column of the table as references to other cell names (A1 to B3).

A monitor appears in the tabular view as a small clock character to the left of the cell name. A start point appears as rounded rectangle inside the cell name.

View of the first few columns and rows in tabular for a particular process.

View of the last few columns showing connections.

Elements in the tabular view.

Using Data in Documents 209

Adding/Editing Data Using the Tabular View

You can create a process diagram by entering all the data in the tabular view instead of in normal view, however, most people use the tabular view for editing large documents containing lots of shapes and data. To create a new process diagram in the Tabular view, perform the following steps:

1 On the File menu, point to New, and click Process.

2 On the View menu, click Tabular. The first cell (A1) appears above the Start symbol.

3 Click the A1 cell and bring the arrow down below the Start symbol.

4 Press Ctrl+Enter to create a new row for an activity. The dark border indicates that an activity is selected. The second cell is A2.

5 Type the text you want for the symbol.

6 After you finish typing your text, press Ctrl+Enter to create a new activity. The placement of the symbols is set automatically for a connector line between symbols. You can change the symbol placement in the normal view.

7 To edit the activity properties, double-click in the selected activity area.

8 In the Properties dialog box, change the activity type, set attributes, or specify functions, and click OK.

Connecting Shapes Using the Tabular View

You can connect shapes in the tabular view much like connecting shapes in the diagram space–by dragging. Instead of dragging connector lines from shape to shape in Normal view, you drag connector lines from cell to cell in Tabular view. To connect shapes in the Tabular view, perform the following steps:

1 With a process diagram open in Tabular view, scroll to the last column. For this example, we have a Start shape, an Activity shape, and a Decision shape.

2 Make sure you do not have any cells already selected.

Shapes before connecting. The square highlights the Start, Activity, and Decision shapes.

210 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 Click inside Start shape and, while holding down the left mouse button, drag your cursor to the Activity shape.

4 Release the left mouse button.

Customizing the Tabular View

The information is stored in columns sorted by modeling topics such as inputs, outputs, and other information. Each topic can have multiple columns (for example, the Task topic display has nine columns of data). You can choose which topics to display using the Columns command on the View menu. This makes it easier to find the information that you need. To customize the view, perform the following steps:

1 On the View menu, click Columns. The Show/Hide Columns dialog box opens.

Note

The Columns command is not available unless you are in Tabular view.

Shapes during connecting.

Tabular view after connecting. The connection from cell A1 to A2 is in place.

Using Data in Documents 211

2 In the Show/Hide Columns dialog box, select and/or clear the selection of options you want to view.

3 Click OK. The view changes to reflect the options selected or cleared.

Formatting and Editing Cells in the Tabular View

Most menus are available in either normal or tabular view, and the method for editing is usually the same after you select items.

Selecting One or More Cells In the Tabular View

1 Click a single cell to select it. The heavier border indicates that the cell is selected

or

Drag and release the mouse button to select a range of cells.

2 Hold the SHIFT key, and click to select additional cells. To cancel a selection, click in an empty place outside the table.

Changing the Fill, Line/Border, or Shadow For an Element In the Tabular View

1 Right-click the cell area, and click Format on the context menu.

2 In the Format dialog box, change your formatting options using the Fill, Line and Border, or Shadow/3D tabs.

3 Click OK.

The Show/Hide dialog box

212 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Changing the Font For an Element In the Tabular View

1 Right-click the cell area, and click Font on the context menu.

2 In the Format Text dialog box, change your text options using the Font, Block, and Paragraph tabs.

3 Click OK.

Working with iDiagramsAn iDiagram is a diagram that runs like a program. iDiagrams walk you through shapes containing VBA code, letting you make decisions as you go. These decisions move you along a path from shape to shape where custom data is collected.

After you place shapes in an iDiagram, you can add code to them using Visual Basic. Using the iDiagram Entity Manager, you can step though, stop, and pause an iDiagram using entities. Entities are elements which move through a process. You can also add or delete entities from shapes using the Manager.

For more information about developing custom code for use with shapes, view the help file provided with Visual Basic.

Creating a New Entity

1 Click the shape for which you would like to add an entity.

2 On the Tools menu, point to iDiagram, and click Entity Manager.

3 In the Entity Manager, click the New Entity tool. The entity is added to the shape.

Using Data in Documents 213

Deleting an Entity from a Shape

1 On the Tools menu, point to iDiagram, and click Entity Manager.

2 Select an entity.

3 Press the Delete key.

Running an iDiagram

On the Tools menu, point to iDiagram, and click Execute. This causes the entity to move through the diagram, executing the VBA code at each shape.

Working with SPC ChartsiGrafx 2006 lets you create different kinds of charts that support quality and process re-engineering. To implement these processes, quality charts are needed for relaying complex data in easy to understand formats.

With SPC charts, you can:

• Identify unstable processes

• Visualize extent of variation in a process

• Improve decision-making

• Identify special cause variation in a process

• Predict progress of a process

• Determine current ability of a process

• Analyze processes over time

• Compare data

• Organize data into recognizable categories

• Set priorities of a process

• Illustrate impacts of individual affects

• Show relationship between paired data

To select and place SPC charts in a diagram, use the DataAnalyzer Chart wizard. After selecting which chart you want to use, you can type information into an active spreadsheet in the document space. DataAnalyzer then graphically converts the data for display in the diagram.

214 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

For more information on specific SPC chart types, select a chart in the DataAnalyzer Chart wizard, and click More. To get information on DataAnalyzer functions, view Datalyzr.hlp located in iGrafx\Pro\11.0\1033.

You can create the following charts using iGrafx 2006 and DataAnalyzer:

• Process charts

• Organization charts

• Deployment charts

• Pareto charts

• Histograms

• Run charts (trend charts)

• Control charts

• Scatter charts

• Pie charts

Inserting a SPC Chart in a Diagram

1 On the Insert menu, click SPC Chart.

2 In the DataAnalyzer Chart wizard, click Next.

3 Select a chart type, and click Finish.

Adding Data to a SPC Chart

1 Insert an SPC chart in the diagram.

2 In the active spreadsheet, type x and y axis labels in the cells.

3 Click the Data Import Wizard tool.

4 Follow the steps in the Data Import wizard.

5 After you have imported the data, click outside of the SPC chart. The SPC chart is inserted in the diagram.

Using Data in Documents 215

Deleting a SPC Chart from a Diagram

1 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Selector tool.

2 Click the SPC chart.

3 Press Delete.

216 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using iGrafx Process Central 10

Process Central® is a companion tool for most iGrafx products including iGrafx 2006 and iGrafx

Process for Six Sigma. Process Central lets you store documents in a central location for enabling team-based, collaborative process improvement efforts.

Consider the challenges of managing and maintaining your iGrafx 2006 documents:

• Where do you store your documents so that they can be quickly and easily retrieved?

• How do you provide access security for your documents? How do you share components between documents?

• How do you maintain multiple versions of a document? Can you track changes made to your documents?

• How do you maintain the integrity of links to external documents?

You can do these things with Process Central.

Using iGrafx Process Central 217

Understanding Process CentraliGrafx Process Central® helps you meet these challenges by providing the following capabilities:

• Central Storage–Stores your documents in a central database referred to as a repository. This gives you quick, yet controlled, access to your documents.

• Versioning–Lets you store multiple versions of a document in a repository. This enables you to make changes to a document without losing prior versions of the document.

• Labeling–Lets you assign a text label to a version of a document.

• Link Management–Manages a wide variety of links between documents and components. It also lets you identify linked documents and assess the effect of changes to these documents.

• Data Dictionary–Facilitates department building and department name management throughout the repository.

• Audit Trails–Provides audit and history information that let you track changes made to your documents.

• Querying–Lets you create database queries to extract information and data from your repositories.

• Security–Lets you control what users are allowed to do with documents existing in a repository based on what role they are assigned, and what permissions are set for the role in which they belong.

• Approval–Lets you control how and by whom documents are approved.

• Voting–Lets you gather consensus on changes from specific individuals or groups.

• Annotations–Lets you document changes, updates, and other messaging at a document or shape level.

What are Repositories?

A repository is a database for storing your iGrafx 2006 documents and any other process related files that you want to manage. Process Central supports the SQL Server 2000 and Oracle 8i and later database formats.

With Process Central you can have multiple repositories. For example, you may want to have a repository for each category of processes that you are working on.

218 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using the Explorer Bar with Process Central

The Explorer bar is your primary interface to Process Central. Use it to navigate, select, view, and perform tasks on repositories and their contents.

When the Repository tab is in focus on the iGrafx Explorer bar, it displays a list of available repositories containing iGrafx documents that, in turn, contain components (e.g., diagrams, reports). Following this hierarchical approach, you click the (+) sign next to an icon to expand its document(s), and then double-click a document to view its diagrams and components.

Note

Click the plus (+) sign next to an icon to expand the list of items under the icon.

Repositories may also contain folders. Folders may contain subfolders, documents, and external files. To view the contents of a folder, click the (+) sign next to the folder icon.

To perform tasks on an item in the Repository tab, right-click the item’s icon, and select a command from the context menu. Alternatively, you can click an item’s icon and then select a command from

The iGrafx Explorer bar with the Process Central tab in focus.

Using iGrafx Process Central 219

the ProcessCentral menu or toolbar. For more information on ProcessCentral menus and toolbars, see Process Central Tools and Menu Reference on page 281.

Note

Changes made to a repository by another user do not appear in your iGrafx Explorer bar automatically. You may need to refresh the window periodically to see the latest updates to a repository.

Displaying the Process Central Explorer Bar

On the View menu, click Explorer Bar.

or

On the ProcessCentral menu, click Show Window.

or

On the Process Central toolbar, click the Process Central Window tool.

Refreshing the Process Central Window

On the ProcessCentral menu, click Refresh Window.

or

On the Process Central toolbar, click the Refresh Window tool.

220 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with RepositoriesRepositories are databases that contain your iGrafx documents and related files. Process Central® provides commands for these repository tasks:

• Open Repository–Opens an existing repository and places the appropriate icons in the iGrafx Explorer bar.

• Load Repository–Opens an unloaded repository.

• Unload Repository–Closes a repository but keeps the icon in the iGrafx Explorer bar for easy reloading.

• Close Repository–Closes the repository and removes its icon from the iGrafx Explorer bar.

• Repository Properties–View and change the properties for a repository.

Opening a repository gives you access to a repository that is currently not displayed in the tree in the Explorer bar. You must select a server, database, username, password, an so forth as described in Opening a Repository.Opening a Repository on page 221. Once a repository is open in the tree, you can unload it.

The unloaded repository still appears in the tree, but it is not connected, so you cannot drill down into it or change its contents in any way. Unloading a repository allows you to load it, which means you do not have to specify the server login information when you want to reconnect to it.

The ability to unload and load a repository provides a shortcut for detaching from a repository when you do not need it and reattaching when you do. Unloading repositories can shorten start-up time, improve server performance, and reduce the number of server connections.

Closing a repository detaches the repository and removes it from the tree in the Explorer bar.

Opening a Repository

You must open a repository before you can access its contents. You can navigate an open repository from the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Note

A repository must be created, and you must be granted access before opening it. Contact your system administrator to gain access privileges to repositories in your organization.

You can open a repository using either SQL Server or Oracle. The Open Repository wizard remembers which kind of repository you last opened and opens to that tab.

Using iGrafx Process Central 221

Opening an SQL-Server-Based Repository

The SQL Server tab in the Open Repository wizard lets you open a repository using either Windows or SQL Server Authentication.

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, click Open Repository.

or

On the Process Central toolbar, click the Open Repository tool.

2 In the Open a Repository wizard, click a server name in the Server list (or type the server name).

3 Click either Use Windows authentication or Use SQL authentication.

4 If you click Use SQL authentication, type your name in the Name field, and type your password in the Password field. Click Next.

5 Click a repository in the Choose a repository list, and click Open.

The SQL Server tab

222 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Opening an Oracle-Based Repository

iGrafx does not install the Oracle drivers that Oracle-based repositories require. See your system administrator for required setup.

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, click Open Repository.

or

On the Process Central toolbar, click the Open Repository tool.

2 In the Oracle tab, click one of the following options:

• Use ODBC DSN (Open DataBase Connectivity Data Source Name)- See the documentation that comes with your Oracle ODBC drivers for information about setting up a DSN.

• Specify Server and Database- This option is enabled if your machine has Oracle OLE DB drivers installed. After you specify a server and database, type your name in the User Name field, and your password in the Password field. Process Central will then attempt to connect to the specified server using the TCP/IP server. You can also specify/change the TCP/IP port. The default port for Oracle database installations is 1521.

• Use Oracle TNS name- This option is enabled if your machine has Oracle OLE DB drivers installed. TNS names connect you to Oracle databases on the network, and are usually set up by your Oracle administrator or by using tools like Oracle’s SQL*Net Easy Configuration.

3 Click Next. Click a repository in the Choose a repository list, and click Open.

Note

Oracle connections always use SQL accounts not Windows integrated authentication.

Loading a Repository

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click an unloaded repository icon, and click Load Repository.

Unloading a Repository

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a repository icon, and click Unload Repository.

When you unload a repository rather than close it, you can avoid having to enter server login information when you want to reconnect to it. To reconnect an unloaded repository, use the Load command.

Using iGrafx Process Central 223

Closing a Repository

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a repository icon, and click Close Repository.

Changing a Repository’s Properties

You must have the Edit Policies right to change all repositories properties except Load When Process Central Window Is First Shown.

1 In the repository window, right-click the repository whose properties you want to edit and choose Repository Properties.

2 In the Repository Properties dialog box, click Edit to change the Description field.

3 Select the Load When Process Central Window Is First Shown check box to change the startup behavior.

Note

By default, repositories load automatically on startup.

4 To add specific administrative preferences, select the corresponding check boxes.

5 Click OK.

Managing Documents You can think of Process Central® as an iGrafx document management system. Process Central helps you manage and maintain many documents, multiple versions of these documents, links between documents, other non-iGrafx files, and links to other non-iGrafx files.

Adding a Document to a Repository

You can add your currently active iGrafx document to any open repository. When you add a document to a repository, Process Central® copies the document and all of its components to the repository database. Icons representing the document, diagrams, and components appear in the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Note

It is important to remember that Process Central copies your document into the repository. You then have two copies of the document: the original document and the document in the repository. If you plan to continue using Process Central to manage your documents, it is probably best to archive or delete the original document.

224 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a repository or folder icon, and click Add <document name>.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click a repository or folder icon, and click the Add Document tool on the Process Central toolbar. The Add Document dialog box opens.

2 In the Name field, type a new document name or keep the current name.

3 In the Comment field, type a brief description of the document.

4 To automatically check out the document, click the Check Out box.

Note

If the document contains linked files, a list of linked files appears in the dialog box with the Add check box selected. Click the appropriate check boxes for applying the comment and properties to the linked files.

5 If you want to change the document’s custom properties, click the Properties button. Use the Repository Item Properties dialog box to change custom property values.

Note

The Properties button appears only if the Repository has custom properties, which are defined using the Process Central Server Administrator. For more information, see the iGrafx Process Central Administrator Guide or online help.

6 Click OK.

Removing a Document from a Repository

Removing a document deletes the document and all of its diagrams and components from the repository database, and removes the document’s icons from the iGrafx Explorer bar.

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click the document icon to select it.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Item, and click Delete From Repository.

A message box opens asking you to confirm removal of the document.

3 Click OK.

Viewing an Item In a Repository

There may be times when you want to view an item in a repository without making changes to it. Process Central® lets you view an item in a read-only state. You can view a document or you can view individual diagrams or components. Process Central always views the whole document but displays the component you select. When you view a document, the document’s process diagram

Using iGrafx Process Central 225

appears in the iGrafx 2006 window. When you view a diagram or component, that item appears in the window.

You can view items, but cannot change them. The iGrafx 2006 pointer icon indicates that the item is locked so you cannot modify it.

Note

By default, you view the most current version of an item.

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click an item’s icon, and click View Current Version.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, double-click a document icon.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click a document icon, and then click the View tool on the Process

Central toolbar.

Checking Out an Item from a Repository

Before you can modify a document, diagram, or component you must check it out from the repository. You can check out an entire document or individual diagrams and components from a document. When you check out an item, Process Central® extracts the item from the repository and places a copy in a working folder on your local drive. It is this working copy of the item that you make changes to.

Note

The default working folder for items is C:\My Documents\Process Central\. You can change the default folder using the Options command on the ProcessCentral menu.

Upon checkout, an item’s icon in the iGrafx Explorer bar changes state to show that the item is checked out, indicated by a red check mark. For items that you check out, the item name is listed in bold text. For items checked out by other users, the item name is listed in normal text.

Checking out an item prevents other users from making changes to the item while you are working on it. (Only one user may have an item checked out at a time.) When you have completed your changes to the item, you must check it back in to the repository.

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click an item’s icon, and click Check Out.

or

226 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click an item’s icon, and click the Check Out tool on the Process

Central toolbar.

Link Management

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click an item’s icon, and click Check In.

or

Click the Check In tool on the Process Central toolbar.

2 In the Check In dialog box, type a comment in the Comment text box.

3 If you want to keep the item checked out, click Keep Checked Out.

4 Press Shift and select multiple links under the Filename heading. After selecting multiple links, you can click any highlighted check box row to toggle all selected rows.

Note

The Repository Location heading is relative to the root of the repository only; however, if you would like to see the full path, rest the mouse pointer on the filename to view a ToolTip.

5 Click OK.

Changing the Default Working Directory

1 In the ProcessCentral menu, click Options. The Process Central Options dialog box opens.

2 In the Local Repository Folder field, type a folder name or click Browse to locate a folder.

3 Click OK.

Undoing a Check Out of an Item

You may decide not to make any changes to an item that you have checked out. In this case, you can undo the checkout of the item without creating a new version in the repository.

When you undo the checkout of an item, the item’s icon in the iGrafx Explorer bar returns to its normal state. The original version of the item in the repository is not affected by undoing a checkout.

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click an item icon, and click Undo Check Out.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click an item icon, and click the Undo Check Out tool on the

Process Central toolbar.

Using iGrafx Process Central 227

Checking In an Item

After you have changed a document or its components, you can save the changes while the item is checked out, but you must check it in to place the saved version in the repository. When you check in an item, Process Central® creates a new version of the item in the repository.

The original version of the item in the repository is not affected by the check in. Therefore, you now have two copies of the item in the repository: the original version you checked out, and the modified version you checked in. You can view the different versions of the item through the History dialog box.

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click an item’s icon, and click Check In.

or

Click the Check In tool on the Process Central toolbar.

2 In the Check In dialog box, type a comment in the Comment text box.

3 If you want to keep the item checked out, click Keep Checked Out.

4 Click OK.

Renaming an Item

You can change the name of any item (document, diagram, component, folder, or file) in the iGrafx Explorer bar. You do not have to view or check out a document, folder, or file to rename it. You must check-out a document to rename its diagrams and components.

When you rename a diagram or component, the name change appears in the iGrafx Explorer bar when you check in the document.

Note

Any links to a renamed item automatically update to reflect the name change.

Change the Name of a Document, Folder, or File

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click a document, folder, or file icon.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Item, and click Rename.

3 In the Rename dialog box, type the new name for the item.

4 Click OK.

228 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Change the Name of a Diagram or Component in a Repository

1 Check out a document from a repository.

2 Click the Component tab on the iGrafx Explorer bar.

3 Right-click the name you would like to change, and click Rename on the context menu.

The component name is highlighted.

4 Type the new name for the component.

5 Check in the document to the repository.

Adding an External File to a Repository

In addition to iGrafx documents, you can add any external file to a repository. For example, you may have word processing documents or spreadsheet files related to your iGrafx document that you would like to store in the same location.

External files added to a repository are treated similarly to iGrafx documents. You must check them out in order to modify them and you must check them in to save your modifications. You can also view the history and properties of these files.

Note

You can also add external files to a repository when you add a document containing links to external files.

Using iGrafx Process Central 229

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Add to Repository, and click External File.

or

Click the Add External File tool on the Process Central toolbar.

2 In the Add External File dialog box, locate the file or type a file name and file type.

3 In the Comment field, type a brief description of the file.

4 To automatically check out the file, click the Check Out box.

5 Click Open.

Adding Multiple Files to a Repository

You can add multiple iGrafx documents or external files to a repository at one time. This is useful for initially populating a repository. In other words, if you have a large number of files that you want to add to a repository, you can add them all at once rather than one at a time.

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click a repository or folder icon.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Add to Repository, and click Add Multiple. The Add Multiple dialog box opens.

3 In the Look in Folder field, type a folder name or click Browse to locate a folder.

4 In the Add these File Types field, click the type of files to add to the selected repository.

Note

You can also type a file filter of your choice and specify multiple files (e.g.; *.txt,*.doc,*.pfd).

5 Click the appropriate check box to search nested folders, add linked files, or stop adding on errors.

6 Click Go. The dialog box displays progress on the number of files added, the total number of files to add, the current file being added, and the number of errors encountered.

7 Click OK. The OK button enables only after you finish adding multiple files.

8 Click Close.

230 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Copying and Sharing Items in a Repository

You may find it useful at times to reuse portions of a document in other documents. Process Central® lets you copy diagrams or components of documents in a repository to other documents in a repository. You can also share diagrams or components between documents in a repository.

Note

While you can copy items to documents in other repositories, you cannot share items between documents in separate repositories.

When you copy diagrams or components to other documents, the copies are independent of each other. Changes you make to one copy do not appear in other copies.

When you share diagrams or components between documents, there is only one copy of the shared item in the repository. Changes made to the item are reflected in all documents that share the item.

Shared items appear as links in the iGrafx Explorer bar. In the following example, Document1 and Document 2 of Repository1 share a diagram called Process2. Below each occurrence of Process2 is a

Using iGrafx Process Central 231

list of links called Parent Documents. This list contains the name of each of the documents that share the diagram.

Note

When you delete a shared item from a document, the link list disappears from the document.

Copying an Item to a Document

1 Check out a document from a repository.

Note

The checked out document is the destination document for the item to be copied.

2 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click an item from another document to be copied into the destination document.

3 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Item, and click Copy Into Active Document.

4 Check in the document to the repository. The copied item appears in the iGrafx Explorer bar under the document icon.

Process Central tab showing shared documents.

232 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Sharing an Item Between Documents

1 Check out a document from a repository.

Note

The checked out document is the destination document for the item to be shared.

2 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click an item from another document to be shared with the destination document.

3 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Item, and click Share Into Active Document.

4 Check in the document to the repository. A link list called Parent Documents appears in the iGrafx Explorer bar under the icons for both documents.

Searching for Text Among Multiple Files

You can search for text in any part of any document in the repository. Search strings are not case-sensitive.

You can use “*” and “-” wildcards in search strings. For example, if you search for “sea*” in a document, the search may return documents containing words like “sea,” “search,” and “searching.”

Similarly, a wildcard search string such as “auto* -diesel” returns all documents with words like “auto,” “automotive,” and “automobile,” but only if they are not in a document that also contains the word “diesel.”

Using iGrafx Process Central 233

1 In the text search box at the bottom of the Explorer bar, enter the text you want to find in the search text box and press the Enter key to use defaults. This example shows a search for the word “start.”

2 To constrain your search, click the Search In icon to select which areas of the document you want to search, such as notes or departments.

3 Click the Search icon to finish the search. Any files containing the text string you entered are listed in the search results box by file name and checkout user.

234 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Folders

You can add folders to a repository as a convenient way to organize your documents. Folders may contain subfolders, documents, and external files.

Note

When you place a document in a folder, all of its diagrams and components are moved to the folder. You cannot place individual diagrams or components in a folder.

To view the contents of a folder, click the plus sign next to the folder icon.

Adding a Folder to a Repository

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a repository icon, and click Add Folder.

Adding the Currently Active Document to a Folder

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a folder icon, and click Add <document name>.

Moving a Document to a Folder

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click the icon of the document to be moved. You can move documents to other folders residing in the same repository, but cannot move documents to folders residing in other repositories.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Item, and click Move. The Move dialog box opens.

3 In the New Location box, select a folder

Note

Click the plus (+) sign next to a repository name to expand its list of folders.

4 Click OK.

Managing VersionsThere are times when you may want to keep more than one version of an iGrafx document. For example, you may want to perform a what-if analysis on a process by executing slightly different versions of the process. Process Central® lets you create and retrieve multiple versions of a document through its version and history features.

Using iGrafx Process Central 235

Viewing an Item’s History

Process Central® keeps a record of changes made to any document item. Anytime you create, check in, label, or rename an item, an entry is recorded in the item’s history. You can view a document’s history using the History dialog box.

The History dialog box describes what actions were performed on an item, what version of the item was affected, who performed the action, the item’s label (if any) and when the action was performed. You can also use this dialog box to view any version of an item and to add or delete labels for an item.

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click any icon, and click History.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click an icon, and click the History tool on the Process Central toolbar.

To print or copy the history of an item, right-click inside the History dialog box and choose Print Table to send the output to the printer, or choose Copy Table to copy the contents to the clipboard.

Creating a New Version of a Document or Component

Process Central® automatically creates a new version of a document each time you check a document into a repository. To create a new version of a document, check out the original document, make your changes, and check the document back into the repository.

The History dialog box

236 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

For example, the graphic below shows the history for a document that has been checked into a repository. The initial version of the document is shown as version 1 in the Version column.

To create a new version, check out the document, make your modifications, and check it back into the repository. A new version of the document, version 2, appears as shown above. You can use the History dialog box to view either version of the document.

Note

If you undo the checkout of a document, a new version of the document is not created.

Creating a New Version Based on an Older Version

It is possible to create a new version based on a version older than the current version.

1 Check out the document. This will always be the current version.

2 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click the checked out document, and click History in the context menu.

3 In the History dialog box, click the earlier version desired for check out, and click View.

4 Click OK when you see the resulting message “You currently have this item checked out. Continuing will replace the checked out version. Would you like to continue?”.

The earlier version replaces the current version in the checked out state so changes can be made specifically to it.

5 In the History dialog box, click Close.

Version 1 is at the bottom of the list showing that it was the initial item in the history

Using iGrafx Process Central 237

6 Make changes and check in.

Note

The prior current version will not be affected or replaced, but the newly checked in version based on the earlier version becomes the current version.

Viewing a Specific Version of an Item

Normally, Process Central® views the most current version of an item for you. You can view earlier versions of an item through the History dialog box. You can view any version of the document by selecting a document from the History list and clicking View.

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a document icon, and click History.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click a document icon, and click the History tool on the Process Central toolbar.

2 In the History dialog box, click a document version.

3 Click View. Versions acquired using View are locked and cannot be modified.

Labeling Versions

You can assign a label to any version of any document in a repository. Labeling lets you provide a meaningful name to a version of a document and view the document based on its label. Document labels apply to all diagrams and components of a document.

Assigning Labels

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a document icon, and click Label Current Version.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click a document icon, and then click the Label Current Version tool on the Process Central toolbar.

2 In the Label Current Version dialog box, type a label in the Name field.

Note

If you type a label that is already used by another version, you are given the option of assigning the label to the new version. This is a convenient method for moving a label from one item to another.

3 Click OK.

238 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Labeling Using the History Dialog Box

In the History dialog box you can view document labels, view a document based on its label, and add or delete item labels.

Labeling an Item From the History Dialog Box

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a document icon, and click History.

2 In the History dialog box, click the version of an item to be labeled.

3 Click Label.

4 In the Label dialog box, type a label in the Name field.

5 Click OK.

Deleting an Item Label From the History Dialog Box

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a document icon, and click History.

2 In the History dialog box, click the labeled version to be deleted.

3 Click Delete Label.

4 Click OK.

Labels in the History dialog box.

Using iGrafx Process Central 239

Viewing a Labeled Document

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a document icon, and click History.

2 In the History dialog box, click the labeled version to view.

3 Click View.

Using the Department Data DictionaryThe Department Data Dictionary helps you create a hierarchy of departments and facilitates building of departments in a map or diagram. Departments and child departments in the Department Data Dictionary are available in the Insert Department dialog box when you add a new department, but they are only interrelated in a diagram that is retained in the repository. For example, when you use the Department Data Dictionary to manage renaming of departments, all departments using the same names are synchronized at check-out. If you insert a child department from the Department Data Dictionary into a diagram, it maintains the hierarchy from the Department Data Dictionary by always inserting the parent department into the diagram.

Each repository has its own Department Data Dictionary that appears as the first item in the repository.

The Department Data Dictionary allows only one user at a time to check it out and modify it. Any changes made to the Department Data Dictionary affect current versions of documents in the repository. Documents sharing the modified department name display the new department name the

Department Data Dictionary

240 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

next time they are checked out or viewed. Historical documents are not affected by changes to items in the Department Data Dictionary.

The Department Data Dictionary globally manages names of departments in diagrams throughout

the repository. An item in the Department Data Dictionary is indicated by a in the Insert Department dialog box when you select a new department name from the drop-down list.

When you are working with departments in a diagram, you must use the Department Data Dictionary to maintain its links and continue to let the data dictionary manage it. If you rename a department that is currently managed by the Department Data Dictionary to a name that is not in the Department Data Dictionary, Process Central displays a warning that you will break the link to the Department Data Dictionary. If you continue, the new department (and any child departments) will no longer be managed by the Department Data Dictionary. You will maintain the link only if you change the name in the Department Data Dictionary. For more information, see see Renaming Departments in the Department Data Dictionary on page 243.

Other documents throughout the repository that share the changed department name display the new department name when the document is checked out of the repository or viewed.

Because departments in the Department Data Dictionary are hierarchical, you must use the entire hierarchy when you add a child department to a diagram. For example, if East is a child of Sales in the Department Data Dictionary, East can only be a child of Sales in any diagrams that are created using the Department Data Dictionary department names. It is not possible for East to be a top-level department.

For information about adding child departments to a diagram, see Inserting Department Data Dictionary Departments into a Diagram on page 243.

East is always a child of Sales in the Department Data Dictionary.

Using iGrafx Process Central 241

For information about the Department Manager, see Adding Departments and Child Departments on page 36.

Creating a Department Data Dictionary

On the Process Central menu, point to Repository and choose Create Department Data Dictionary. A new item called Departments appears at the top of the repository. To make any changes to the Department Data Dictionary, it must be checked out.

Adding Departments to the Department Data Dictionary

1 Right-click Departments in the repository and select Check Out. The Department Data Dictionary dialog box appears.orIf the Department Data Dictionary is checked out, double-click Departments in the repository to view the Department Data Dictionary dialog box.

2 Use the Add button in the Department Data Dictionary dialog box to create a hierarchy of new department names that can be used globally throughout the repository.

Deleting Departments from the Data Department Dictionary

When you delete a department, it is not removed from diagrams that use the department. However, the link that maintains a connection between departments and child departments is broken, and they are no longer managed by the Department Data Dictionary.

1 Right-click Departments in the repository and select Check Out. The Department Data Dictionary dialog box appears.orIf the Department Data Dictionary is checked out, double-click Departments in the repository to view the Department Data Dictionary dialog box.

2 Use the Delete button in the Department Data Dictionary dialog box to removed the selected department and all of its children from the repository.

242 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Renaming Departments in the Department Data Dictionary

1 Right-click Departments in the repository and select Check Out from the context menu. The Department Data Dictionary appears.orIf the Department Data Dictionary is checked out, double-click Departments in the repository to view the Department Data Dictionary dialog box.

2 If necessary, click the plus (+) sign to expand parent departments.

3 Select the department you want to rename and click the Rename button.

4 Type the new name and click OK. All diagrams in the repository that use this department will display the renamed department the next time they are viewed of checked out. Historical diagrams remain unchanged.

Inserting Department Data Dictionary Departments into a Diagram

1 Right-click a department from the Department Data Dictionary list in the repository.

2 Choose Add Department to Diagram.orRight-click the child and choose Add Department to Diagram to add a child and its parent department to the diagram.

The department appears after the selected department in the diagram. If no department is selected, the new department appears after the last department in the diagram.

Viewing Processes That Use a Managed Department

One of the management features of the Department Data Dictionary is its ability to query for all processes that use a department that is stored in it.

1 Right-click a department from the Department Data Dictionary list in the repository.

2 Choose Show Processes that use this Department. All process diagrams that use the selected department appear in the query window of the repository.

Managing LinksiGrafx 2006 includes a linking feature for linking diagrams to other diagrams, and linking diagrams to external files. Process Central® helps you manage these links by displaying them in the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Using iGrafx Process Central 243

Links to Other Diagrams

Links between iGrafx diagrams show up as Parent-Child links in the iGrafx Explorer bar. For example, the following iGrafx Explorer bar shows a document, called Document1 in Repository3. This document contains two processes: Process1 and Process2. Process1 contains a link to Process2. iGrafx Explorer bar shows this link as a Child Diagram link under Process1. It also shows the same link as a Parent Diagram link from Process2 to Process1.

When adding a document containing links to a repository, Process Central® prompts you whether you also want to add the linked documents to the repository.

You do not have to do anything special to check in a file containing diagram links. Process Central determines if your document contains diagram links and adds the appropriate icons to the iGrafx Explorer bar.

You can use the link icons to navigate the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Process Central tab showing links to other diagrams.

244 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Navigating Diagram Links

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click a link icon, and click Follow Shortcut.

or

Double-click a link icon.

Links to Files

Links from iGrafx diagrams to external files show up as Linked Files in the iGrafx Explorer bar. For example, the following shows a document, called BPMN.igx in the HQ Designs repository. The Collect Votes diagram in this document contains a link to an external file called externaldata.xls. This link appears as a Linked Files icon under the Collect Votes icon. The externaldata.xls file also appears in the window. Under its icon is a list of Linking Diagrams which shows that Collect Votes is linked to the file.

Note

You can use the link icons to navigate in the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Process Central tab showing a link to a file.

Using iGrafx Process Central 245

Creating Process Central Links

You can use the linking feature to create links to documents or files that are already in a repository. These links are called Process Central links. You can link a diagram to another document or file within the same repository.

Note

You can also link to documents or files in another repository, however, these links will not appear in the iGrafx Explorer bar.

1 Check out a diagram from a repository.

2 Click a shape in the diagram.

3 On the Insert menu, click Link. The Add Link dialog box opens.

4 In the Link to scroll area, click Process Central Link. A list of open repositories appears in the dialog box. Expand the list to display documents and/or file names.

5 Click a document or file name.

6 Click OK.

7 Check in the diagram to the repository.

Note

The new link does not appear in the iGrafx Explorer bar until you check in the diagram.

Working with QueriesProcess Central® provides a query facility for searching items in one or more repositories based on the value of certain properties. For example, you may want to search for all items created by a certain user or created on a certain date. This facility is useful if you have a large number of documents and you need to locate specific items.

About Properties

Every item in a repository has properties associated with it. Properties define characteristics of the item. The properties of a document, for example, define characteristics such as who created the document, when it was created, and when it was last modified. You can view, edit, and perform queries on properties.

246 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You can view the properties of any item in a repository with the Repository Item Properties dialog box.

If a repository has custom properties defined, you can also use the Repository Item Properties dialog box to edit the custom properties for items in the repository. Custom properties are indicated by white space under the value for the property. You can type a value for the property in this space. See your server administrator about defining custom properties for a repository.

To print or copy the properties for a repository item, right-click inside the Repository Item Properties dialog box and choose Print Table to send the output to the printer, or choose Copy Table to copy the contents to the clipboard.

Note

You can only edit custom properties that have been defined for a repository, which are defined using the Process Central Server Administrator. For more information, see the iGrafx Process Central Administrator Guide or online help.

Viewing an Item’s Properties

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click any item and click Properties.

or

In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click an item and click the Properties tool on the Process Central

toolbar.

The Repository Item Properties dialog box

Using iGrafx Process Central 247

Using Queries

You can create queries that search for items in your repositories based on the value of certain properties of the item. To define a query, on the ProcessCentral menu, point to Queries and choose New. The Query Builder dialog box appears.

The following example shows a query called Query1 that searches all open repositories for items whose CheckedOut property is equal to TRUE. This means that the query locates all items that are checked out of all repositories.

Note

When query matching, use the “*” symbol to match anything, and the “?” symbol to match a single character.

The Query Builder dialog box

248 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

To narrow the query, specify one or more properties to search for or specify a repository to search. The results of a query appear in the Query Results window located at the bottom of the iGrafx Explorer bar.

The Query Results window contains a tab for each query you define. To view the results of a query, click the tab for that query. The results window lists items and their properties that match the query. Query results are dynamic meaning that they constantly update as you make changes to a repository. You can customize the output to the Query Results window by specifying which properties to display in the window.

Note

To perform tasks on items that appear in the Query Results window, right-click an item and select a command from the context menu. To sort items, click the column header for a property. To resize a column, drag a column edge in the column header.

You can define as many queries as you need, modify existing queries, and remove queries that you no longer need.

The Query Results window

Using iGrafx Process Central 249

To send query results to a printer, right-click in the Query Results window and choose Print Results from the shortcut menu.

To copy query results to the clipboard, right-click in the Query Results window and choose Copy Results.

Defining a Query

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Queries, and click New.

or

Click the New Query tool on the Query toolbar.

The Query Builder dialog box opens.

2 In the Show Items Where box, click a property name from the Property list.

3 In the Show Items Where box, click an operator (e.g., =, <, >) in the Operator list.

4 To the right of the operator, type a value for the property.

Note

To remove a clause from the query, click Remove.

5 Click OK. The results of the query appear in the Query Results window.

Editing a Query

1 In the Query Results window, click the tab for the query you want to edit.

2 Click the Edit Query tool on the Query toolbar.

or

Right-click the Query tab, and click Edit Query on the context menu.

3 In the Query Builder dialog box, make your changes to the query.

4 Click OK.

Removing a Query

1 In the Query Results window, click the tab for the query you want to remove.

2 Click the Remove Query tool on the Query toolbar.

or

Right-click the Query tab, and click Remove on the context menu.

250 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Customizing the Query Results Display

1 In the Query Results window, click the tab for the query you want to customize.

2 Click the Define Query columns tool on the Query toolbar.

or

Right-click the Query tab, and click Define Columns on the context menu.

3 In the Query Columns dialog box, click an item in the Available list, and click Add.

4 To remove a column from the display, click an item in the Show these columns list, and click Remove.

5 To change the order of display, click and item in the Show these columns list, and click Up or Down.

6 Click OK.

Note

You can also change the order of display in the Query Results window by clicking a column heading, dragging it left or right, and then dropping it in its new position.

Security Rights ManagementProcess Central® includes a security model for managing who can do what with items that exist in a repository. Rights, roles, and permissions determine what a user can do in a repository. Individuals and groups can act on items at the repository root level or at the item level, based on their assigned rights and permissions.

Repository-level rights are assigned to any user who has access to the current database using the Repository-Level Rights dialog box. You must have the right Edit Repository Rights to assign or remove rights. Right-click on the repository name and choose Repository-Level Rights to view this dialog box.

A user with the rights to change groups, roles, policies, and rights for the repository can change assignments for individuals or groups of users. A change to the special group called EVERYBODY assigns the change to all users with access to the database. Your administrator adds users to the database using a database enterprise management tool. For information on how users gain access to the database, see the iGrafx Process Central Administrator Guide.

Using iGrafx Process Central 251

At either the item level or the repository root level, you can change rights, add and modify roles, and assign permissions for any user or group that has access to the current database. In the Repository-Level Rights dialog box, the rights you can set are:

If you are using a SQL server, you can assign item roles and repository-level rights to Windows groups that have been added to the database. Instead of assigning rights to each user individually, you can save time assigning rights to users in the Windows group all at once.

While the security rights model allows assignment of rights to a large number of users simultaneously, you can also restrict individual users from inheriting the rights of a group at the respository level. In the Rights dialog box, set the check box for a user’s right to a red “x” to deny that right for that user, even if the user belongs to a group that has that right.

As an example: Cathy is denied the repository right Edit Approval Groups. On the ProcessCentral menu, the user who changed Cathy’s right pointed to Repository and chose Rights, then set the check box to a red “x” to deny Cathy that right. However, Cathy is a member of the group Champions, and that group has the Edit Approval Groups permission. Normally, Cathy would inherit the Edit Approval Groups right from her Champions group membership, but she has been specifically denied that right, so she is excluded.

Understanding Roles

You specify the permissions a user has for an item in a repository by assigning a role for that item from a list of roles maintained for each repository. A role is a name for a set of permissions. Example roles include Annotator and Author.

Right Description

Edit Approval Groups

Ability to edit named approval groups.

Edit Roles Ability to edit roles for the repository.

Edit Policies Ability to change the administrative preferences in the Repository Properties dialog box.

Edit Repository Rights

Ability to see the Repository-Level Rights dialog box.

Repository Superuser Full rights to all items in the database in addition to all rights within the repository.

252 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You can edit the list of roles, and the permissions granted to each role, if you have the right to edit roles. If the permissions granted to a role are changed, this immediately changes the permissions granted to any user currently assigned that role (for a particular item).

Separating the rights model into users and roles (rather than just assigning permissions directly to users) lets you manage policies separate from user-level access control. For example, if your organization decides that Annotators should be denied Print permissions, one change takes care of it.

Inherited Roles

When you set a user’s role for an item that has other items beneath it in the tree hierarchy, the user’s new role is said to be inherited on each item under that parent item. For example, if a user’s role is set to Annotator on a folder called Sales Processes, all of the items within Document1 would show the user’s role as Inherited [Annotator].

When new objects are created in Document1, the inherited role is the default role for all users. Changing users’ roles at the root level then changes their effective role for every item in the entire repository.

Default Role

The repository has one default role for a user accessing a document. The default role specifies the permission any user has on all items in the repository. Any user with the Edit Roles permission can change the default role for the repository. If a different role is specified for an item in the repository, the default role is overridden by permissions specified for that item and anything below it in the hierarchy.

For more information, see Assigning Roles and Permissions on page 256.

Using iGrafx Process Central 253

Understanding Permissions

For a specific repository item, permissions give a specific user the ability to do a specific thing. These things include:

Permissions Description

View Ability to see items in the tree and queries. If you do not have View permissions on a folder in the tree, you cannot see the folder, even if you have view permissions for some items within the folder.

Annotate Ability to add annotations to an item and edit your own annotations.

Print Ability to publish or print an item. Process Central® can control this only for items created using iGrafx.

See Unapproved

Ability to see and retrieve unapproved versions of an item. If you do not have this permission, you cannot see items that do not have any approved versions. If you have See History rights, you can only see previously approved versions.

See History Ability to see (and retrieve from) the history of an item. Depending on the See Unapproved permission, the history shows only approved versions, or all versions. This permission also enables the View Labeled Version command.

Modify Ability to check out and check in documents, diagrams, and components. Does not apply to folders.

Also lets you:

• Delete other users' annotations.

• Apply for approval for the item.

Note

If a user’s modify rights are revoked while an item is checked out, the user can choose the Undo Check Out command, but cannot check in the item.

254 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

If you are using a database created for iGrafx 2006, all rights and permissions are the same as they were in that release. For example, if you are using an iGrafx 2006 database and you do not have Administer permissions, you cannot add, delete, or modify approvers.

Special Users

When an item is created, its creator is assigned ownership, which can then be transferred at any point. The owner always has all rights to the item, every item has exactly one owner, and ownership is not inherited in any way.

A special superuser account has all rights to every item in the repository. Not to be confused with the Repository Superuser repository-level rights assignment, this super-user account is necessary for

Create Ability to create new items.

For folders, create permissions are needed to:

• Add any new items to the folder.

• Move any items into the folder.

For all items, create permissions are necessary to move the item.

Delete Ability to delete an item from the repository. Required for moving an item from a folder.

Rename Ability to rename an item in the repository.

Set Approvers Ability to add, change, or delete approvers in an approval group.

Administer Ability to:

• Change rights.

• Transfer item ownership.

• Revoke prior approvals.

• Cancel pending approval applications.

Undo check out for items not checked out by you.

Permissions Description

Using iGrafx Process Central 255

preventing users from assigning rights away to such an extent that they lose all access to them. For information about the Repository Superuser right, see Security Rights Management on page 251

Note

The superuser account is recognized by the name igxsuperuser. This account is created using your database enterprise management tool in the event that user rights and permissions have made the database inaccessible. If you need to create this account, be sure to delete it as soon as access is restored as having such an account poses a security risk.

Assigning Roles and Permissions

Individuals and groups with access to the database are assigned roles that carry specific permissions. Roles and permissions assignments are hierarchical. Whatever role you or your group is assigned at the repository root carries through all items in the repository unless the role is changed in the Rights dialog box at the item level. To change rights and permissions on items you did not create, you must have the Administer rights for the item.

Initially, all users are assigned a default role for a new item. Anyone who adds an item to a repository, is the owner of the item, meaning they have Administer rights for that item. If a user with Administer rights changes the rights on the parent item, users inherit the permissions from the parent item.

To change permissions for a role:

256 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 Right-click an item or the repository root in the Explorer bar and choose Rights. The Rights dialog box opens.

2 In the Rights dialog box, click the Roles button. The Roles dialog box opens.

Using iGrafx Process Central 257

3 Click the check boxes to add, change, or delete permissions and roles as needed in the Roles dialog box.

Note

The check boxes in the Rights, Roles, and Permissions dialog boxes scroll through settings with each click.A check mark indicates that the right or permission is assigned.A red X indicates that the right or permission is denied, regardless of other rights or permissions the user or role

may inherit from a group membership.A blank check box indicates that the right or permission is not assigned, but it can be inherited through

membership in a group with the right or permission.

4 Click OK.

To assign a role to one or more users:

1 In the Rights dialog box, select a user or hold the Ctrl key and click to select multiple users to whom you want to assign specific roles.

2 In the Roles column, click the down arrow to expand the drop-down list for a name, and select a role. If you have selected more than one user, the role you select applies to all selected users.

3 Click OK.

Denying Permissions

If you are a member of a group that has a specific permission, such as Delete, you will have that repository right unless your individually assigned role denies it. For example, you belong to a group called Managers that has the Modify permission through its Author role, and your individual user

258 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

role is Viewer, but that role has been set up to deny you the Modify permission. In that case, you will not have permission to modify any items in the repository.

In another example, you could also be restricted from modifying an item if your default or inherited role carries the Modify permission but the role you have been assigned for the item denies the Modify permission.

Approving or Rejecting DocumentsProcess Central® includes an Approval feature that you can use as a system of checks and balances for documents residing in a repository. With this feature, you can nominate a document and assign individuals or groups of users to review the nominated document and vote to approve or reject it. When users approve a document that shares a subprocess with other documents, the subprocess is not approved unless the nominated document is the primary document, indicated by a blue filled

Using iGrafx Process Central 259

circle. In the example below, approving Document4.igx would not approve the shared subprocess, Process1, but approving Document2.igx would approve the Process1.

For more information on shared subprocesses, see Copying and Sharing Items in a Repository on page 231. The security model in Process Central includes the ability to restrict users so that they may only see approved versions. Documents without approved versions do not show up in queries or in the Process Central tree for these users.

Understanding Approval Groups

The Process Central® security model provides two types of approval groups: Public (also called Named) and Private.

• Public- Named approval groups used to share documents in a repository. Each repository has one set of public, named approval groups.

• Private- Unnamed approval groups used for documents that are not shared.

Public and private groups can refer to users, other public approval groups, and nested, internal branches that act like private sub-groups. At each level of branching, you can specify whether the voting must be unanimous, whether a single vote is enough to pass the approval, or something in between. An empty approval group (with no users) automatically approves a document as soon as it is nominated.

Public approval groups are shared by multiple documents and can be reused within other approval groups, whereas private approval groups must be set up manually for each item. For more information on using named approval groups, see Managing Approval Groups on page 263.

Regardless of repository-level permissions, you automatically have Administer permissions for an item you add to the repository. This gives you permission to change approval groups for the item. These approval groups are private and must be set up manually for each item.

260 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Default Approval Groups

Every repository in Process Central has an approval group named Default. When you create a repository (or upgrade one from an earlier version), the Default group is created with one member: the user who is currently logged on. You cannot delete or rename this group, but you can change which users are members of the group.

Any new documents added to the repository are set to use the Default approval group. If you want most or all of your documents to share the same approval group, leave them assigned to the Default group, and edit the membership as desired.

Note

The Process Central client can attach to both Process Central and Process Central repositories. Approval Groups and other elements discussed in this section are only available when you are attached to a Process Central repository. Repository upgrade is done through the Process Central Server Administrator.

How Voting Works

Voting parameters are key in determining how and if documents get approved. You can define the voting requirements for approving a document when you create an approval group with more than one approver.

For more information on setting up approval groups, see Managing Approval Groups on page 263.

Some voting approval requirements you may choose include:

• All users or sub-groups need to approve; the approval fails if any one of them votes no.

• Only one of all users or sub-groups in the approval group need to approve; the document is approved if one or more vote yes, and it is rejected if all approvers vote no.

• All but one of the total number of users or groups in the approval group need to approve; if any two approvers vote no, the document is rejected.

• Any number of votes is required for approval.

• No users need to approve. If you use an empty approval group, approval of a nominated document is automatic.

In the example below, a nominated document will be approved if Cathy and Rick both vote yes, or if one of them votes yes and all of the users in the sub-group vote yes. If Cathy or Rick vote no and not all of the sub-group members vote no, the item is rejected. This structure could be useful if Cathy and

Using iGrafx Process Central 261

Rick were the primary approvers, but you wanted a group to be able to vote if one of them were unavailable.

Note

You cannot create a named approval group that includes itself, or one including another approval group that includes the original. For example, if the approval group Marketing includes the group Sales, and Sales includes Service, then Service cannot include Marketing because it would loop back to Marketing. However, iGrafx permits an approval group to be included indirectly multiple times within another group. It is not a case of looping when, for example, Marketing includes Sales and Service, and Sales and Service both contain another named approval group like Order Management.

In the following example, the approval group contains a named sub-group. This sub-group is a public, named approval group defined at the repository root level. The members of the sub-group are

262 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

not revealed, but it is set up like the private branch from the previous example and will work the same way.

Managing Approval Groups

When you create an approval group at the repository root level, it is a public named group. Private approval groups are created for an item. You can use the Approval Groups dialog box to:

• Create, name, and add members to a new approval group.

• Edit an existing approval group.

• Rename an existing approval group.

• Delete an existing approval group.

Creating a Named Approval Group

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Repository, and click Approval Groups.

2 In the Approval Groups dialog box, click New. The Approval Group dialog box appears. If you enter a group name and click OK now, you will create an empty approval group that will automatically approve nominated documents.

3 In the Approval Group dialog box, click the Add button and select an option from the drop-down menu:

• Users opens the Users dialog box, where you can select the users to add to the group.

Using iGrafx Process Central 263

• Existing Group opens the Choose an Approval Group dialog box, where you can select an existing group to add to the group.

• Selecting a group and clicking New Branch adds a sub-group to an existing group.

• Optionally, you can click the scroll left or scroll right button at the top left of the approver list to select voting parameters in the Approval Groups dialog box. The default for a new group is All users or sub-groups need to approve.

4 When your new approval group is complete, click OK.

To add a public approval group for an item:

1 In the repository, select the document for which you want to create an approval group.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval and click Item Approvers.

3 In the Item Approvers dialog box, click the down arrow. From the drop-down list, choose an existing group, sub-group, or Custom. If you create an empty Custom group, you will create a private approval group for the item.

4 Optionally, you can add or remove users, existing groups, or branches, and select voting parameters.

5 Click OK to add the new approval group.

264 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Editing a Public Approval Group

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Repository and click Approval Groups.

2 In the Approval Groups dialog box, select the group you want to edit from the list, and click Edit.

3 In the Approval Group dialog box, click Add or Remove to add or remove existing users or branches.

4 Select the newly edited group, change the voting threshold, if necessary, and click OK.

To edit a public approval group for an item:

1 In the repository, select the document whose approval group you want to change.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval and click Item Approvers. The Custom item approvers appear in the Item Approvers dialog box.

3 Select the element you want to change (for example, a voting parameter such as All users or sub-groups need to approve, or a sub-group or user name).

4 Click the Add, Remove, or Name button to specify the operation you want to complete.

5 Click OK.

Renaming or Deleting a Public Approval Group

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Repository, and click Approval Groups.

2 In the Approval Groups dialog box, select the group you want to rename or delete, and click Rename or Delete.

• If you are renaming, type the new name, press Enter, and click Close.

• If you are deleting, click OK.

Creating a Private Approval Group

1 In the repository, select the document for which you want to create an approval group.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval and click Item Approvers.

3 In the Item Approvers dialog box, click the down arrow. From the drop-down list, choose Custom and select Empty Approval Group for automatic approval. If you choose an existing group or the Default group, you will create a public approval group for the item.

4 Click the Add button and choose to add a user, an existing group, or a new branch.

5 Optionally, you can click the arrow to select a voting restriction in the Item Approvers dialog box. The default for a new group is All users or sub-groups need to approve.

6 When you have finished adding users and sub-groups to the approval group, click OK.

Using iGrafx Process Central 265

Changing a Private Group to a Public Group

If you are assigned the Edit Approval Groups repository-level right, you can change private approval groups to public approval groups. Naming a private approval group changes it to a repository-level public approval group, or named group.

1 In the Explorer bar, select the document with the private approval group you want to change.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval and click Item Approvers.

3 In the Approval Group dialog box, click Name.

4 In the Name Approval dialog box, type a new name in the Name field and click OK.

5 In the Approval Group dialog box, click OK.

Managing Item Approvers

You use the Item Approvers dialog box to associate approval groups with repository items.

Choosing a Named Approval Group

1 Select an item in a repository for associating with an approval group.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval, and click Item Approvers.

3 In the Item Approvers dialog box, select Custom from the drop-down list.

4 In the Item Approvers list, select Empty Approval Group and click the Add button.

5 Select Existing Group from the drop-down list.

6 In the Choose an Approval Group dialog box, select the group you want to associate with the repository item and click OK.

7 Click OK.

Adding an Item Approver to a Private Group

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval, and click Item Approvers.

2 In the Item Approvers dialog box, choose Custom from the drop-down list.

3 Click the Add button and select Users or Existing Groups from the shortcut list.

4 Select users or approval groups to add and click OK.

5 Click OK.

Changing a Private Group to a Named Group

The owner of a repository can change private groups to public groups.

266 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 Select a document in your repository with a private approval group that you would like to change to a public one.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval, and click Item Approvers.

3 In the Approval Group dialog box, click Name.

4 In the Name Approval dialog box, type a new name in the Name field, and click OK.

5 In the Approval Group dialog box, click OK.

Nominating a Document for Approval

1 In the repository window, select the document you want to nominate for approval. You must approve a document and all of its components, excluding shared item. You cannot approve individual components of a document. You can approve external files separately.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval, and choose Nominate for Approval. Documents nominated for approval are indicated by a yellow circle in the iGrafx Explorer bar tree view.

What Happens to a Document After It Is Nominated?

After the nominator has selected the approvers and nominated the document, it can no longer be checked out or modified. At this point, the nominator and approvers have several options:

The yellow circle is next to a document waiting for approval.

The Approval command on the ProcessCentral menu

Using iGrafx Process Central 267

The nominator of the document or the Administrator can cancel the nomination before it has received the required number of approval votes–even after an approver votes to approve it. To cancel a nomination, select the document in the Explorer bar, click the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval, and choose Cancel Nomination.

Voting Log

You can view the voting history on a document, including comments detailing voting decisions.

To view the Voting Log for an item in the repository:

1 Right-click the item in the Explorer bar and choose History from the menu.

2 In the History dialog box, click the Approval Log button.

3 In the Voting Log dialog box, you can view the signature of a digitally signed vote by clicking the Signature button.

To view the Voting Log for a currently nominated item:

1 Select the item in the Explorer bar.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval and choose Voting Log.

To print or copy the voting log for an item, right-click inside the Voting Log dialog box and choose Print Table to send the output to the printer, or choose Copy Table to copy the contents to the clipboard.

268 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Vote

Vote yes to approve the document, or vote no end the nomination of the document.

For information on

• digitally signing a vote, see Using Digital Signatures on page 273.

• voting to approve or reject a document, see Approving or Rejecting a Document on page 270.

Using iGrafx Process Central 269

Voting To-Do

To see what documents need your attention, on the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approvals and choose Voting To-Do List. The Voting To-Do window appears in the Explorer bar with any nominated documents for which you are an approver.

Right-click a document to see a menu of options for particular voting tasks.

Note

If you are using the Mail Central feature in Process Central Server Administrator, you will also receive an e-mail notification of new items on your Voting To-Do list.

Approving or Rejecting a Document

If a nominator of a document adds you as an approver, you may vote to either approve or reject the document.

270 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 Open the document in the repository indicated by the yellow circle.

Using iGrafx Process Central 271

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval, and click Vote.

If you approve the document:

• Your Yes vote and any comments you added appear in the Voting Log dialog box. Anyone in the approval list, people with Administer rights, or the nominator can view the Voting Log during the voting to see the status of a document.

• When the document has received enough yes votes to approve it, the yellow circle associated with the document disappears, and an entry appears in the History dialog box, flagging the document as approved. On the ProcessCentral menu, click Show Only Approved Items to view only those items that have been approved.

If you reject the document:

• Your No vote and any comments you added appear in the Voting Log dialog box.

• The document must be checked out, modified, and checked back in before it begins the review cycle again.

• A red circle replaces the yellow circle in the tree view.

For information on adding a digital signature to your vote, see Using Digital Signatures on page 273.

272 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

What Happens to a Document After It Is Approved?

If you have permission to view the history of an item, you can see the version number and status of the item in the History dialog box. A document that has multiple versions marked Approved also shows that history.

Users who only have permission to see approved versions always see the most recently approved version. The security model also includes the ability to prevent users from being able to get to the History dialog box. The History dialog box is filtered depending on whether a user has rights to see non-approved versions.

Using Digital Signatures

Digital signatures certify the identity of an individual who is making an assertion about a particular set of electronic information. When you vote on an item in Process Central®, you can include a digital signature to verify that you signed the vote, and that the item has not been altered since you signed your vote. Your administrator can obtain a certificate or digital ID to provide a trustworthy key that authenticates your signature.

Two related keys, or numeric codes, work together to validate a digital signature. One key, the private key, creates a unique “fingerprint” for the document you are signing. The other is a public key that can be used to match the signature and the document data. If the match fails, it could mean that the signature is a forgery or that the document has been tampered with since it was signed.

When you digitally sign a document, digital IDs encrypt the content using the private key. When someone views the signature, the content is decoded using the public key and compared for validation.

For more information about digital signatures, see definitions online from a reputable source such as Verisign.com.

Managing Certificates for Digital Signatures

Certificates are like digital identification cards. Your organization may obtain a trusted certificate from a Certificate Authority, such as Verisign® or Thawte®, or it may choose to issue its own certificate for employees to use. For more information about certificates, visit a Certificate Authority’s web site or Microsoft.com.

Process Central digital signatures require certificates that include both public and private keys. Certificates will not display if they are missing the private key, are not trusted, or have expired.

You can use Internet Explorer to see and manage your certificate stores.

Using iGrafx Process Central 273

1 In an Internet Explorer window, on the Tools menu, choose Internet Options.

2 Click the Content tab.

3 Click the Certificates button to view certificates in your certificate stores in the Certificates dialog box.

You can import a certificate with private keys into the system by double-clicking on a .pfx file to start the Windows Certificate Import Wizard.

Customizing Digital Signatures

You can require signatures on approval votes and customize the digital signature agreement statement for each repository.

1 In the Process Central Explorer, select the repository.

2 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Repository and choose Properties. The Repository Properties dialog box appears.

274 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 Select the Require Digital Signatures When Voting check box and click the Signing Statement button to view or customize the signing statement.

On the digital signature, the text %SIGNER% is replaced by the name on the signing certificate and %VOTE% is replaced by the voting choice Yes or No. You can use the Insert button to insert one of these special values into the text. Click the Default button to replace the text with the original signing statement.

Digitally Signing Votes

1 Follow the steps for voting on a document (see Approving or Rejecting a Document on page 270).

2 In the Vote on Approval dialog box, select the Digitally Sign This Vote check box. If your administrator requires that every vote is signed, the check box is selected and disabled.

3 Click the Choose button and select a certificate you want to use for your signature. You can click the View button to see the details of the certificate.

4 In the Select Certificate dialog box, click OK.

Using iGrafx Process Central 275

5 In the Vote on Approval dialog box, click OK. The Digitally Sign dialog box appears.

6 Select the I understand and agree to the above check box, then click the Sign button.

The certificate you choose will be the default choice the next time you digitally sign an item in Process Central.

Verifying Voting Signatures

To verify voting signatures for an item in the approval cycle:

276 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Approval and choose Voting Log. In the Voting Log dialog box, a digitally signed vote appears with a certificate icon next to the voter’s name.

2 Select the entry and click the Signature button to see the name of the voter as it appears on the signing certificate and verify the signature.

To verify voting signatures for an item with a completed approval cycle:

Using iGrafx Process Central 277

1 On the ProcessCentral menu, point to Item and choose History. In the History dialog box, the approval record appears with a green flag.

2 Select the approval record you want to view and click the Approval Log button. In the Voting Log dialog box, a digitally signed vote appears with a certificate icon next to the voter’s name.

3 Select the entry and click the Signature button to see the name of the voter as it appears on the signing certificate and verify the signature.

Using AnnotationsiGrafx 2006 includes a useful feature for Process Central® called Annotations. You can use annotations as a company-wide method for documenting changes, updates, and other messaging at a document or shape level. It is also helpful if you are nominating documents for approval or rejection. Oftentimes, a document making its way towards approval goes through revisions to correct errors and append new information via rejection. If a document is rejected by someone, annotations are an excellent way for the rejector to document what errors need correcting.

278 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Adding an Annotation

If you have Annotator rights, you can add new annotations.

1 In the Explorer bar tool, right-click the document awaiting approval, and click View Current Version.

2 On the Insert menu, click Annotation. The cursor changes to the annotation pointer.

3 Place the annotation in the diagram space. You can either place the annotation in close proximity to a shape, or “attach” it to the shape itself by placing the annotation cursor inside the shape, clicking the mouse button, and dragging the cursor away from the shape. If the shape is moved or repositioned, the annotation moves with it.

4 In the Annotation dialog box, type the annotation.

5 Click OK.

Note

To detach an annotation from a shape, press SHIFT, click and hold the annotation, and move it away from the shape.

An annotation connected to a shape.

Annotation appearing attached to the shape. Passing the cursor over the annotation enables a tooltip with the annotation text.

Using iGrafx Process Central 279

Editing an Annotation

If you have Annotator rights, you can edit existing annotations.

1 Double-click the annotation.

2 In the Annotations dialog box, click Edit Text. You can only edit the text of annotations you authored.

3 In the Annotation dialog box, type the new text.

4 Click OK to close the Annotation dialog box.

5 Click OK.

The Annotations dialog box

280 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Deleting an Annotation

If you have Modify rights, you can delete any existing annotations. If you have Annotator rights, you can delete your own annotations.

1 Double-click the annotation.

2 In the Annotations dialog box, click Delete.

Note

You can also click Delete All. This deletes every annotation that exists in the diagram.

3 In the message box that opens, click Yes.

4 Click OK.

Note

If you delete a shape containing an annotation, the annotation remains in the document. You have to delete the annotation itself.

Process Central Tools and Menu ReferenceProcess Central® provides two toolbars for quick access to commands. The Process Central toolbar contains basic repository commands while the Query toolbar contains commands for creating, editing, and running queries against a repository.

You can also use the ProcessCentral menu and Context menu when working with repositories.

Explorer Bar Icons and Toolbars

Explorer Bar Icons

Icon Item Description

Repository Represents an iGrafx repository. One or more repositories may appear in the window.

Folder Represents a folder. Each folder may contain one or more documents. Folders may also contain sub-folders.

Document Represents an iGrafx document.

Using iGrafx Process Central 281

Document - checked out

Represents an iGrafx document that is checked out from a repository.

Document - nominated for approval

Represents an iGrafx document that has been nominated for approval and has not yet been approved.

Document - approval failed

Represents an iGrafx document that has been voted on and was not approved.

Document - has a shared subprocess

Represents a primary iGrafx document that has a share to a subprocess.

Document - is shared subprocess

Represents a secondary iGrafx document that has been shared into a diagram.

Diagram Represents an iGrafx diagram. Diagrams are always components of documents.

Diagram - checked out

Represents an iGrafx diagram that is checked out from the repository.

Note

Diagrams and components are checked out automatically when you check out a document.

Non-diagram Component

Represents a scenario or report of a document.

Non-Diagram Component - checked out

Represents a scenario or report that is checked out from a repository.

Link List Represents a list of links to other documents, diagrams, or external files.

Document link Represents a link to a document.

Diagram link Represents a link to a diagram.

External File Link Represents a link to a non-iGrafx file within a repository.

Icon Item Description

282 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Process Central Toolbar

External File Represents a non-iGrafx file within a repository.

External File - checked out

Represents a non-iGrafx file that is checked out from a repository.

Tool Command Description

Show Window Opens the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Refresh Window Clears and displays the iGrafx Explorer bar.

View Views an item from a repository for viewing only. The item is read-only and cannot be modified.

View Labeled Version

Views an item from a repository by label.

Check Out Checks out an item from a repository. You can modify items that have been checked out.

You can check out a document or individual items. When you check out a document, all components of the document are checked out.

Check In Checks an item into a repository.

You can check in a document or individual items. When you check in a document, all components of the document are checked in.

Undo Check Out Undoes the checkout of an item.

Add Folder Adds a new folder to a repository.

Add Document Adds the currently active document to a repository.

Icon Item Description

Using iGrafx Process Central 283

Process Central Queries Toolbar

Add External File Opens the Add External File dialog box for adding a file to a repository.

Properties Opens the Repository Item Properties dialog box for viewing the properties of an item in a repository.

History Opens the History dialog box for viewing the modification history of an item in a repository.

Label Current Version

Opens the Label Current Version dialog box for adding a label to an item in a repository.

Queries Opens a submenu of commands for performing the following tasks:

• Creating a new query.

• Removing an existing query.

• Editing an existing query.

• Defining query columns.

Open Repository Opens the Open Repository dialog box for opening an existing repository.

Tool Command Description

New Query Opens the Query Builder dialog box for defining a new query.

Remove Query Deletes a query.

Edit Query Opens the Query Builder dialog box for modifying an existing query.

Define Query Columns

Opens the Query Columns dialog box for customizing query output.

Tool Command Description

284 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Process Central Menus

Command Description

Show Window Opens the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Refresh Window Clears and displays the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Show Only Approved Items

Displays only those items that have been approved in the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Repository Opens a submenu of commands for performing the following repository-level tasks that can be applied throughout the repository:

• Add, edit, delete, rename, and preview approval groups and their members. These approval groups are public, named groups.

• Set voting parameters for approval groups.

• Add, rename, and delete roles.

• Set default roles.

• Assign or deny permissions for specific roles.

• Assign or deny repository-level rights for users with access to the database.

• View repository properties.

• Add or modify a description of the repository.

• Set administrative preferences requiring users to comment on or digitally sign votes.

• View the digital signing statement.

• Create a new Department Data Dictionary for the repository.

Using iGrafx Process Central 285

Item Opens a submenu of commands for performing the following tasks on items in a repository:

• View the current version from a repository.

• View the labeled version from a repository.

• Check out from a repository.

• Check in to a repository.

• Undo the check out of an item.

• Label the current version.

• Copy an item into the currently active document.

• Share the item with the currently active document.

• Rename an item in a repository.

• Delete an item from a repository.

• Move an item to another folder.

• View the history of an item.

• Modify the rights of an item.

• View the properties of an item.

Command Description

286 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Approval Opens a submenu of commands for performing the following approval tasks on items in a repository:

Nominate for Approval–Nominates the item for approval.

Cancel Nomination–The nominator of the document can cancel the nomination before it has been approved by all approvers–even after an approver votes to approve it.

Voting Log–Lets you view the “history” of those approving or rejecting the document including comments detailing voting decisions.

Vote–Lets you vote yes to approve the document, or vote no end the nomination of the document.

Voting To-Do List–Opens the Voting To-Do window in the iGrafx Explorer bar.

Approvers–Opens the Approval dialog box.

Document Opens a submenu of commands for performing the following tasks on the currently active document in iGrafx 2006:

• Check out a document from a repository.

• Check in a document to a repository.

• Undo the check out of a document from the repository.

• Select the active document in the Process Central tree view.

Add to Repository

Opens a submenu of commands for adding the following items to a repository:

• A folder.

• The currently active document.

• An external file.

• Multiple documents or external files.

Command Description

Using iGrafx Process Central 287

Queries Opens a submenu of commands for performing the following tasks:

• Create a new query.

• Edit an existing query.

• Remove an existing query.

• Define query columns.

Open Repository Opens the Open Repository dialog box for opening an existing repository.

Close Repository Closes the selected repository.

Options Opens the Process Central Options dialog box for changing certain default settings.

Command Description

288 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Enterprise Objects in iGrafx Process Central 11iGrafx® Enterprise Modeler™ is a component of iGrafx® Enterprise Central™, a standalone product

with its own set of documentation available from the Enterprise Modeler Help menu. You must have installed Enterprise Modeler, an iGrafx client (such as Process for Enterprise Modeler), iGrafx® Process Central™, and iGrafx Process Central Synchronizer to be able to use all of the features described in this section. Optionally, you may install Enterprise Central to provide database storage and retrieval functionality from the Enterprise Central Server. To obtain any of these applications, contact iGrafx.

Enterprise Modeler is a full-featured application that addresses all aspects of enterprise modeling. Many of the enterprise objects it creates are linked to process models described by Process Central and the iGrafx graphical tools, such as FlowCharter.

With Enterprise Central, an iGrafx client and Process Central Synchronizer, you can manage import, export, and synchronization of object data in Process Central with enterprise object data in the Enterprise Central Server. Enterprise objects are Requirements, Goals, Strategies, Risk Templates, and Measurement Templates that contain information about things in the organization and the relationships between them. An activity that refers to Strategies, Goals, and Requirements in an enterprise model as well as its Risks and Measurements that refer to Risk Templates and Measurement Templates are all enterprise objects.

This section describes how to model enterprise-level strategies, goals, measurements, requirements, and risks with iGrafx graphical tools.

What You Can Do with Synchronized RepositoriesiGrafx® Enterprise Modeler™and the Process Central Synchronizer extend the capabilities of Process Central with the ability to create relationships from a shape or a diagram to enterprise objects in the enterprise model. These references can be to Requirements, Goals and Strategies, or in the case of Risks and Measurements, to Risk Templates and Measurement Templates. For example, from the Enterprise page of the Properties dialog box, you can create references to Requirements, Strategies and Goals, and you can add Risks or Measurements. When you add a Risk or Measurement, you can

Using Enterprise Objects in iGrafx Process Central 289

choose to link the Risk or Measurement to a template. For more information on linking Risks and Measurements to templates, see Using Templates with Activity Risks and Measurements on page 294.

About Linking to Enterprise ObjectsSynchronizing the Enterprise Central and Process Central repositories changes object data to the latest state. Updates are made to both repositories.

When you synchronize the Enterprise Central and Process Central repositories, the following objects are exported from Enterprise Central to Process Central:

These Objects... Are imported from this Folder in Enterprise Central...

And have this function...

Strategies Strategies Describe an overall strategy for the enterprise. In both repositories, they serve to group related Goals.

Goals Strategies A goal that is a component of a strategy. In Process Central, they serve to group related Measurement Templates.

Requirements Requirements Statement of an expectation to be fulfilled. Referred to from activities/processes.

Risk Templates Risk Catalogue Describe a type of risk and provide value limits. They may be referenced from activity or process Risks.

Measurement Templates Strategies Description of a type of measurement made in the organization, such as inventory level. Contains a default numeric range and limits for the measurement. Referred to by Measurements on an activity or process.

290 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Only activities or processes can link to enterprise objects from a Process Central repository.

When you synchronize repositories, documents in Process Central are imported into Enterprise Central as Processes and Activities.

When you select the check box Synchronize Roles and Groups to Process Central Department Dictionary in the Synchronizing With Process Central dialog box, Enterprise Modeler treats Roles and Groups as departments when they are imported into the Process Central Department Data Dictionary. This check box option automatically disables editing of Department Data Dictionary

Roles Resources Description of the activities of responsible individuals, and processes and activities in relation to that responsibility.

Group Resources An Organization type that contains Job objects, such as Staff Accountant.

These Objects... Are imported from this Folder in Enterprise Central...

And have this function...

When you synchronize these objects...

You get this in Enterprise Central...

Folders or Documents A folder with only the Name properties

Diagrams An Enterprise Modeler Process with the Name and Requirement, Strategy, Role, Goal and Group references. Diagram types are limited to Basic, Process, BPMN, and Value Stream Map

Activities Activities with Name, Shape Text (from Scope), Shape Note (from Objective) and Requirement, Strategy, Role, Goal and Group references

Risks Name, Description, Min Limit, Max Limit, High Limit, Low Limit, Current Value, and Risk Template linkage

Measurements Name, Description, Min Limit, Max Limit, High Limit, Low Limit, Target Value, Current Value, Higher values are better/Lower values are better, and Measurement Template linkage

Using Enterprise Objects in iGrafx Process Central 291

objects in Process Central while repositories are synchronizing. You can turn off the editing restriction in Process Central by clearing the Allow department data dictionary to be edited check box in the Repository Properties dialog box.

Working with Enterprise Objects in Process CentralBefore you can create relationships between objects in the Enterprise Central and Process Central repositories, you must set up repository sharing. For information, see the Enterprise Modeler Help.

Viewing Enterprise Objects in Process Central

In the Process Central repository window, new object trees appear above documents and folders after you synchronize the Process Central repository with Enterprise Central.

Enterprise objects in Enterprise Modeler. Roles, Groups, Requirements, Strategies, Measurement Templates, and Risk Templates are synchronized with the Process Central repository.

Process Central repository window synchronized with Enterprise Central repository. Enterprise objects appear above folders and documents.

292 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Process Central displays imported enterprise model objects in the repository window. Enterprise objects created in Enterprise Modeler can only be modified in Enterprise Modeler.

Links to Strategies and Goals also appear in the Process Central repository tree, but only from the activity that refers to the enterprise object. If you want to see bidirectional links on all objects, view objects in Enterprise Central.

Using the Department Data Dictionary with Enterprise Objects

When you edit the Department Data Dictionary in Process Central and then synchronize the repository with Enterprise Central manually (using the Synchronize Roles and Groups to Process Central Department Dictionary option), Enterprise Central checks out the Department Data Dictionary from the Process Central repository, overwrites the current version, and replaces it with the current version stored in Enterprise Central. Synchronizing with this option gives full control to Enterprise Central and restricts editing the Department Data Dictionary from the iGrafx client with Process Central until you select the option to edit the Department Data Dictionary again in the Repository Properties dialog box in Process Central.

If you are using the Process Central Synchronizer with Process Central, you should always edit and maintain dictionary objects in Enterprise Central to avoid mistakenly overwriting them on iGrafx Process Central.

Referencing Enterprise Objects from a Shape

You can apply Risks and Measurements to activities in a Process Central repository without having synchronized with Enterprise Central, but you will not be able to link them to templates. If you want to refer to enterprise objects, you must have synchronized with an enterprise model that contains Strategies and Goals, and other enterprise objects, and you must have the permission in Process Central to be able to view these objects.

To reference an enterprise object from an activity:

1 Double-click an activity in an iGrafx process diagram.

2 In the Properties dialog box, click Enterprise.

3 On the Enterprise page, click the tab of the enterprise object type you want to use.

4 Click the Add button.

• If you are adding a Risk or Measurement, the Risk Setup or Measurement Setup dialog box appears.

• If you are adding a Requirement, Goal, or Strategy, the Choose Object dialog box appears.

Using Enterprise Objects in iGrafx Process Central 293

5 Complete the setup dialog box or select an object and click OK. If you want to use a Risk Template or Measurement Template, see Using Templates with Activity Risks and Measurements.

To reference an enterprise object from a process:

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, right-click the diagram in the component view and choose Properties.

2 Follow steps 3 through 5 in the above procedure.

Using Templates with Activity Risks and Measurements

Enterprise objects include templates that you set up in Enterprise Modeler. You can use templates to apply preset Risks and Measurements to activities and processes stored in Process Central. You must synchronize Process Central with the Enterprise Central model that contains the template objects you want to use before you can work with those templates in the iGrafx client.

To use template settings with activity risks or measurements:

1 Follow the steps in Referencing Enterprise Objects from a Shape.

2 In the Risk Setup or Measurement Setup dialog box, click the Choose button in the Templates section. The Choose Object dialog box appears.

3 Select an enterprise object in the list and click OK. The object name is listed as the template in the Risk Setup or Measurement Setup dialog box.

4 Click the Pull setup from template button to specify the risk or measurement setup from the selected template. If you select the Include Name or Include Description check box, that data also appears in the setup dialog box and on the Enterprise page.

5 Click OK to dismiss the dialog boxes.

To remove template settings from a risk or measurement:

1 Select the risk or measure in the Enterprise page, then click the Edit button.

2 In the setup dialog box, click the Clear button, then click OK.

294 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Organization Charts 12

iGrafx 2006 lets you create and modify organization chart diagrams using a powerful set of tools and

commands. These diagrams combine data that you import with shapes that you can then export to the people with whom you work.

Use the following features to create the organization chart diagram that works best for you:

• Manual Chart Building- Provides tools that let you interactively create and edit an organization chart.

• Importing Organization Data- Provides an import wizard that lets you create an organization chart by importing data from a Text File, Access database, Excel spreadsheet, or Outlook address file.

• Exporting Organization Data- Lets you save your organization data to a Text File, Access database, Excel spreadsheet, or Outlook address file.

• Menus, Tools, and Commands- Lets you customize the look of your organization chart to suit your organization’s specific needs.

Creating Organization Chart DiagramsYou create organization chart diagrams much like other document types in iGrafx 2006 by using the New command on the File menu, or the Welcome dialog box when you first start the product.

Creating an Organization Chart Diagram Using the Welcome Dialog Box

1 On the Windows Start menu, point to Programs and choose iGrafx 2006. The Welcome dialog box opens.

2 In the Welcome dialog box, click New Document, and click OrgChart.

Creating an Organization Chart Diagram Using the File Menu

On the File menu, point to New, and click OrgChart.

Using Organization Charts 295

Adding Shapes to Your Chart

Each person in your organization is represented by a shape on your chart. Each shape includes text fields that describe the person (e.g., name, title) represented by the shape. You can use any shape or image to represent a person and you can define and edit the text fields that appear on the shape.

When you create a new organization chart, a single shape automatically appears in your diagram. This is the starting point of the diagram. This shape typically, but not necessarily, represents the top level person in your organization. The OrgChart Builder and the Data Editor also open for adding or editing shapes.

Adding an Assistant

An assistant shape appears below and slightly offset from its supervisor’s shape. An assistant shape typically represents staff personnel such as executive assistants, secretaries, and consultants. The selected shape in the following figure is an assistant shape.

1 Click the shape to which you want to add an assistant.

2 Click the Add Assistant tool in the OrgChart Builder. A new assistant shape appears

below the selected shape.

3 Click the new shape.

4 In the OrgCharter Data Editor, type the appropriate data for the person represented by the shape, and click Apply.

The selected shape is an assistant to the supervisor shape above it.

296 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Adding a Manager

Manager shapes usually appear above a subordinate shape and typically represent a supervisor to employee relationship. The highlighted shape in the following figure is a manager shape.

1 Click a subordinate shape in the organization chart diagram.

2 Click the Insert Manager tool in the OrgChart Builder. A new manager shape appears

above the selected shape.

3 Click the new shape.

4 In the OrgCharter Data Editor, type the new manager data in the appropriate text boxes, and click Apply.

Adding Subordinates

Subordinate shapes appear below a manager shape and typically represent a supervisor to employee relationship. The following diagram shows a manager shape with three subordinate shapes.

1 Click the manager shape in your diagram.

2 Click the Add Subordinate tool in the OrgChart Builder. The new subordinate shape

appears below the selected shape.

The selected shape is a manager to the supervisor shape below it.

Three subordinate shapes under a manager shape.

Using Organization Charts 297

3 Click the new shape.

4 In the OrgCharter Data Editor, type the new subordinate data in the appropriate text boxes, and click Apply.

Adding Coworkers

Coworkers are shapes that appear at the same level in the diagram and report to the same supervisor, much like subordinates. In fact, you can only use coworker shapes if a subordinate shape already exists in your diagram. The OrgCharter Builder lets you add a coworker to the left or right of a current shape.

1 Click the subordinate shape in your diagram.

2 Click the Add Coworker Left or Add Coworker Right tool in the OrgCharter

Builder. New shapes appear to the left or right of the selected shapes.

3 Click the new shape.

4 In the OrgCharter Data Editor, type the new co-worker data in the appropriate text boxes, and click Apply. Repeat the procedure for other co-worker shapes.

Moving Shapes

iGrafx 2006 lets you move a single shape or an entire branch of shapes in your organization chart diagram. You can simply reposition a shape or branch for display purposes, or you can move a shape or branch to report to a new supervisor.

You can move a shape using the OrgChart Builder or the cursor. The OrgChart Builder lets you move a shape to the left of right of a team member shape. The cursor lets you move a shape to any position on the chart.

The way shapes appear in your chart is important as well. iGrafx 2006 lets you change the appearance of shapes in your organization chart diagram using the Automatic Chart Layout

Co-worker shapes added to the left and right of a subordinate shape.

298 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

command found on the OrgChart menu. For the purpose of the examples in the following sections, All Horizontal Pyramid is used.

Repositioning a Shape or Branch

1 Click the shape, or the shape in a branch you would like to move.

2 Place the cursor directly on any gray stippling that appears between the black sizing handles positioned on the sides and corners of a shape.

3 Click and hold the left mouse button while you move the cursor.

All Horizontal Pyramid option

Moving shape(s) from one position to another.

Using Organization Charts 299

4 After you have moved the shape where you want it, release the mouse button.

Moving a Shape or Branch To a New Supervisor

1 Click the shape, or the shape in a branch you would like to move.

2 Place the cursor directly on any gray stippling that appears between the black sizing handles positioned on the sides and corners of a shape.

3 Click and hold the left mouse button while you move the cursor.

Not only does the shape move, but shapes attached to it move as well.

300 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Move the shape directly over the supervisor shape that you would like to move it to.

5 Release the mouse button.

Moving the shape directly over the supervisor (Mary Jones) shape.

The branch in its new position.

Using Organization Charts 301

Moving a Shape Left or Right Using the OrgChart Builder

1 Click a shape in your diagram.

2 In the OrgChart Builder dialog box, click the Shift Left Within Team or Shift Right

Within Team button. The selected shape moves to the left or right of the adjacent shape.

Note

If the moved shape has subordinate shapes, these shapes move with the shape.

Removing Shapes

iGrafx 2006 lets you remove a single shape or an entire branch of shapes from your organization chart diagram. If you delete a shape that has subordinate shapes, the subordinate shapes are promoted automatically.

Click a shape, and click the Delete From Chart tool in the OrgChart Builder.

Customizing Text

By default, each shape of your chart has the following text data fields associated with it:

• Name- The name of the person represented by the shape.

• Title- The associate’s title within the organization.

• ID- The associate’s identification number.

• Supervisor ID- The identification number of the associate’s supervisor.

Also, by default, the Name and Title fields are displayed with each shape automatically.

Note

iGrafx lets you change the value of each of these data fields. You can also add new data fields and can customize which fields to display and the order in which they are displayed.

302 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Editing Data Fields

1 Click a shape.

2 In the OrgChart Data Editor, type new values in the text boxes for the fields you want to change.

3 Click Apply.

Arranging Displayed Fields

1 Click a shape.

2 In the OrgCharter Data Editor, click the Display Fields and Change Fonts tool.

• To add a field for display, click the field name in the Available Fields list, and click Add in the Show/Hide Fields dialog box

• To remove a field from display, click the field name in the Display These Fields list, and click Remove.

• To change the order of displayed fields, click the field name in the Display These Fields list, and click Move Up or Move Down.

3 Click OK.

Adding New Data Fields

1 Click a shape.

2 In the OrgChart Data Editor, click the Add Custom Data Fields tool.

3 In the Setup Custom Data dialog box, click the New button.

4 In the added, highlighted field, type the new data field name and click outside the typed area. Make any other appropriate selections in the dialog.

5 Click OK.

Customizing a Chart Layout

iGrafx 2006 lets you customize the layout of your organization chart diagram to fit specific needs. You can choose from several layout styles and you can mix layout styles within the same chart. You can also break your chart up into multiple diagrams, and you can customize the style, size, and spacing of the shapes in your chart.

Using Organization Charts 303

Changing the Layout Style of a Workgroup

1 Click a shape, and click the Change Workgroup Layout Style tool in the OrgChart Builder.

2 In the Workgroup Layout Styles dialog box, click the option corresponding to the layout style you want.

3 Click OK. All shapes below the selected shape are redrawn in the new layout style.

Applying a Layout Style to Your Entire Chart

1 Right-click the diagram, point to OrgChart, and click Automatic Chart Layout.

2 In the Automatic Chart Layout dialog box, click the option corresponding to the layout style you want.

3 Click Apply.

4 Click Close.

Collapsing or Expanding Organization Chart Branches

1 Click a shape that has subordinate shapes.

2 In the OrgChart Builder, click the Collapse/Expand Branch tool. All shapes below the selected shape collapse or expand.

Selecting Branches, Levels, or All Shapes in an Organization Chart

Type Procedure

Branch Right-click a shape that has subordinate shapes, point to OrgChart, and click Select Branch.

Level Right-click a shape that has other shapes at the same level of your chart, point to OrgChart, and click Select Level.

Shapes Right-click the diagram, point to OrgChart, and click Select Chart.

304 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Sending a Branch to a New Diagram

Right-click a shape that has subordinate shapes, point to OrgChart, and click Send Branch to New Diagram.

Note

The top shape of the branch also appears in the original diagram. Its format changes to indicate that it has subordinates shapes on another diagram. Double-click the shape to display the other diagram.

Setting Shape Sizing Options

1 Right-click the diagram, point to OrgChart, and click Sizing Options.

2 In the OrgChart Sizing Options dialog box, click the Use Auto Box Sizing option, and then select the sizing options you want.

3 Click OK.

Changing Shape Spacing

1 Right-click the diagram, point to OrgChart, and click Shape Spacing.

2 In the OrgCharter Shape Spacing dialog box, type the new horizontal and vertical spacing values in the appropriate text boxes.

3 Click OK.

Cleaning Up a Layout

On the OrgChart menu, click Clean Up Layout.

Converting a Subordinate Shape to an Assistant Shape

Right-click a subordinate shape, point to OrgChart, and click Convert to Assistant.

Converting an Assistant Shape to a Subordinate Shape

Right-click an assistant shape, point to OrgChart, and click Convert to Subordinate.

Using Organization Charts 305

Importing and Exporting Organization DataYou can import organization data from a text file, an Excel spreadsheet, an Access database, or an Outlook address file. When importing data, you have the option of creating a new organization chart, overwriting an existing chart, or appending the data to an existing chart.

You can also export organization data already in a diagram to a text file, Excel spreadsheet, or Access database.

Text Files

Each line in your text file represents one person in your organization. When you create an organization chart, the application automatically assigns an associate ID for each associate and associate’s manager. These are relational numbers for shape association for export and import reconstruction. The ID numbers must be included in each line along with the associate’s name, as shown in the example below. You may include other fields as needed. The fields may appear in any order, but all lines must have the same order.

Fields may be of fixed length, or they may be delimited by a tab, a space, or any user defined character. One line of your text file may include field labels.

Importing Data from a Text File

1 On the OrgChart menu, point to Import Data, and click Text File.

2 In the OrgChart- Select Text File dialog box, browse to the text file you would like to import, and click Open.

3 In the Text File dialog box, review the options for field delimiters and data source arrangement, and make appropriate changes as necessary.

4 Click Next.

Sample text file for importing.

306 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 In the Import Data dialog box, click the column header Name, and then click Name’s Selected.

6 Repeat the same procedure for the ID and ManagerID columns.

7 In the Choose start point for new chart dialog box, click the level of the chart (top shape) you would like to view, and click Build Chart.

8 In the OrgChart Data Import Options dialog box, click the option you would like to use before building your chart, and then click OK. The Clear existing chart and add imported data option is the default.

Exporting Data to a Text File

1 On the OrgChart menu, point to Export Data, and click Text File.

2 In the Export Data to Text File dialog box, name or locate your output text file, and click Save.

3 In the Export Data to Text File dialog box, select the appropriate option to specify the field delimiter for your text data.

4 If you want to output field labels to your file, select the Output Data Field Names check box.

5 Click Export.

Spreadsheets

Each row in your spreadsheet represents one person in your organization. When you create an organization chart, the application automatically assigns an associate ID for each associate and associate’s manager. These are relational numbers for shape association for export and import reconstruction. The ID numbers must be included in each row along with the associate’s name, as shown in the example below. You may include other columns as needed. The columns may appear in any order, but all rows must have the same order.

Sample rows and columns for importing.

Using Organization Charts 307

Importing Data from a Spreadsheet

1 On the OrgChart menu, point to Import Data, and click Excel Worksheet.

2 In the OrgChart- Excel Worksheet Select dialog box, browse to the spreadsheet file you would like to import, and click Open.

3 In the OrgChart-Excel Worksheet Select dialog box, select the worksheet containing the data, and make appropriate changes as necessary to the data source arrangement.

4 Click Next.

5 In the Import Data dialog box, click the column header Name, and then click Name’s Selected.

6 Repeat the same procedure for the ID and ManagerID columns.

7 In the Choose start point for new chart dialog box, click the level of the chart (top shape) you would like to view, and click Build Chart.

8 In the OrgChart Data Import Options dialog box, click the option you would like to use before building your chart, and then click OK.

Exporting Data to a Spreadsheet

1 On the OrgChart menu, point to Export Data, and click Excel Worksheet.

2 In the Export Data to Excel File dialog box, name and select a location where to save your spreadsheet file, and click Save.

3 In the Export Data to Excel File dialog box, click the worksheet you would like to use, and click Export.

Databases

Each row in your database represents one person in your organization. Each row must contain a minimum of three fields: the associate’s name, the associate’s employee id, and the associate’s supervisor’s employee id. You may include other fields as needed. The fields may appear in any order, but all rows must have the same order.

Importing Data from a Database

1 On the OrgChart menu, point to Import Data, and click Access Database Table.

2 In the OrgChart-Select Access File dialog box, browse to the database file you would like to import, and click Open.

3 In the OrgChart-Database Table Select dialog box, select the table containing the data, and make appropriate changes as necessary to the data source arrangement.

308 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Click Next.

5 In the Import Data dialog box, click the column header Name, and then click Name’s Selected.

6 Repeat the same procedure for the ID and ManagerID columns.

7 In the Choose start point for new chart dialog box, click the level of the chart (top shape) you would like to view, and click Build Chart.

8 In the OrgChart Data Import Options dialog box, click the option you would like to use before building your chart, and then click OK.

Exporting Data to a Database

1 On the OrgChart menu, point to Export Data, and click Access Database.

2 In the Export to Access Table dialog box, name or locate your database file, and click Save.

3 In the Export to Access Table dialog box, click the table you would like to use, and click Export.

Outlook Address Books

Each entry in your Outlook database represents one person in your organization.

Importing Data from Outlook

1 On the OrgChart menu, point to Import Data, and click Outlook.

2 In the OrgChart-Outlook Import dialog box, select an address list, and click Next.

3 In the Choose start point for new chart dialog box, click the level of the chart (top shape) you would like to view, and click Build Chart.

4 In the OrgChart Data Import Options dialog box, click the option you would like to use before building your chart, and then click OK.

Using Organization Charts 309

Organization Chart Diagrams Tools and Menu ReferenceiGrafx 2006 includes a number of tools and menus for creating and editing organization chart diagrams. These tools and menus are available when you create or open an organization chart.

OrgChart Builder and Data Editor

OrgChart Builder

The OrgChart Builder is a dialog box that lets you customize your organization chart diagram. The OrgChart Builder opens when you open or create an organization chart diagram. You can also start the OrgChart Builder from the OrgChart menu.

The OrgChart Builder dialog box

Tool Item Description

Insert Manager Adds a new shape to your diagram above the current shape that represents the supervisor of the current shape.

Add Coworker Left Adds a new shape to left of, and at the same level as, the current shape.

Add Coworker Right Adds a new shape to right of, and at the same level as, the current shape.

Shift Left Within Team Moves the current shape to the left of an adjacent shape.

310 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Data Editor

The Data Editor is a dialog box that lets you customize the text fields of your organization chart diagram. The Data Editor dialog box opens when you start, open, or create a new organization chart diagram. You can also start the Data Editor from the OrgChart menu or the OrgChart Builder.

Shift Right Within Team

Moves the current shape to the right of an adjacent shape.

Add Assistant Adds a new shape to your diagram below the current shape that represents an assistant of the current shape.

Add Subordinate Adds a new shape to your diagram below the current shape that represents a subordinate of the current shape.

Change Workgroup Layout Style

Opens the Worksgroup Layout Styles dialog box that lets you select different layout styles for a workgroup in your diagram.

Collapse or Expand Branch

Executes the Collapse or Expand command which collapses or expands the display of shapes below the selected shape.

Delete From Chart Removes the currently selected shape from your organization chart diagram.

Data Editor Opens the Data Editor dialog box.

Clean Up Layout Refreshes the organization chart diagram layout.

The Data Editor dialog box

Tool Item Description

Using Organization Charts 311

This dialog box displays the current values of the text fields of a selected shape. You use it to change the field values and show or hide the display of fields.

OrgChart Menu

Tool Item Description

Add Custom Data fields

Lets you add or remove data fields.

Display fields and change fonts

Adds or Removes the display of data fields on your chart and changes fonts on shape text.

Command Description

Select Branch Selects a shape and all of its subordinate shapes.

Select Level Selects all of the shapes that appear at the same level in your organization chart diagram.

Select Chart Selects all of the shapes in your organization chart diagram.

Workgroup Layout Opens the Workgroup Layout Styles dialog box for changing the layout style of a workgroup. A workgroup consists of a shape and all its subordinate shapes. You can apply different layout styles to different workgroups in your chart.

Automatic Chart Layout Opens the Automatic Chart Layout dialog box for selecting a chart layout style to apply to your entire organization chart diagram.

Clean Up Layout Fixes problems with the layout of your organization chart diagram that may have been caused using the Automatic Chart Layout command.

Show/Hide Fields Opens the Show/Hide Fields dialog box for changing which text fields are displayed and the order in which they are displayed on shapes in your diagram. Also provides a font editing option for the fields.

312 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Add/Remove Fields Opens the Setup Custom Data dialog box for adding new data fields, removing fields, and changing the attributes of fields in shapes that exist in your diagram.

Shape Spacing Opens the Shape Spacing dialog box for specifying the horizontal and vertical spacing between the shapes in your diagram.

Sizing Options Opens the Sizing Options dialog box for specifying rules about the sizing of shapes and images in your chart. For example, you can set rules that make the height or width of shapes equal throughout the diagram, equal within the same level, or equal within the same team. You can also specify rules to allow or disallow text wrapping within a shape, and rules for handling the aspect ratio of images or symbols.

Send Branch to New Diagram

Moves branches of your organization chart diagram to a new diagram in your document. This command is useful for breaking up large organization charts into multiple smaller charts.

Builder Opens the OrgChart Builder. The OrgChart Builder lets you add, move, remove, and customize shapes on your chart.

Data Editor Opens the Data Editor for changing the values of any data fields associated with a shape.

Command Description

Using Organization Charts 313

Import Data Generates organization chart diagrams from data from four different sources:

• Text File–Each line of the text file must have a minimum of three fields: an employee’s name, an employee’s identification number, and an employee’s supervisor’s identification number. Fields can be fixed width, or delimited by tabs, spaces, or a user specified character.

• Excel Spreadsheet–Each row of the spreadsheet must have a minimum of three columns: an employee’s name, an employee’s identification number, and an employee’s supervisor’s identification number.

• Access Database–Each record in the database table must have a minimum of three fields: an employee’s name, an employee’s identification number, and an employee’s supervisor’s identification number.

• Outlook/Exchange Address File–Each record in your Exchange server database represents a person in your organization.

Each of these files may contain fields other than the minimum specified. For example, you may want to include fields that identify an employee’s title or department.

Export Data Outputs organization data from your chart to three different sources:

• Text File–Each line of the text file contains the fields for one shape of your organization chart. Fields can be fixed width, or delimited by tabs, spaces, or a user specified character.

• Excel Spreadsheet–Each row of the spreadsheet contains the fields for one shape of your organization chart.

• Access Database–Each record in the database table contains the fields for one shape in your organization chart.

Command Description

314 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams 13

iGrafx 2006 includes tools that let you create Cause and Effect diagrams. Cause and Effect diagrams

are specialized diagrams for analyzing the source of errors in a process.

Understanding Cause and Effect DiagramsThese diagrams consist of a series of labeled arrows called causes, that feed into a central arrow called the effect. For example, the following diagram shows the sources of product edge flaws in a manufacturing process. The central arrow, labeled Edge Flaws, is the effect being analyzed. Each of the arrows leading into the central arrow represents a cause of edge flaws in the product.

In the following example, the cause of edge flaws is divided into four categories represented by the arrows labeled: Machines, Methods, Operators, and Materials. These causes are further broken down into sub-causes. For example, the arrows labeled Stamping, Molding and Trimming represent sub-causes of the Machines cause.

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams 315

For each cause in a Cause and Effect diagram, you can assign the number of errors introduced by the cause into the process. The cumulation of the number of errors from all of the causes in the diagram

An example Cause and Effect diagram

316 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

represent the total number of errors introduced into the process. These errors are represented in an accompanying Pareto diagram such as the following:

This chart shows the different causes of errors for the Edge Flaws diagram. It shows the numbers of errors introduced by each cause and the cumulative number of errors introduced into the process.

Creating a Cause and Effect DiagramTo create a new Cause and Effect diagram on application start-up, click the New Document button and choose Cause and Effect diagram from the drop-down list in the iGrafx 2006 Welcome dialog

An example Pareto chart

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams 317

box. To create a Cause and Effect diagram after application start-up, point to New on the File menu, and click Cause and Effect diagram.

A template for a Cause and Effect diagram appears in the iGrafx 2006 diagramming window. You can use this template as a beginning for your own diagram.

Below the template an accompanying Pareto chart also appears. Use the scroll tools to scroll down and view this chart. The Pareto chart updates automatically when you edit the Cause and Effect diagram template.

Cause and Effect Diagramming Tools

Several tools are available in iGrafx 2006 that let you create and edit Cause and Effect diagrams.

Cause and Effect Diagram Tab

The Cause and Effect Diagram tab appears in the iGrafx Explorer bar. This tab contains a tree representing the diagram. You can change your diagram by adding, removing, and changing the

A template Cause and Effect diagram

318 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

contents of the tree. The following example shows the tree corresponding to the Edge Flaws diagram in the previous section:

The tree is where you assign errors to each cause in the diagram, and also where you add, modify, or remove causes and sub-causes. The tree represents the hierarchy of the diagram. Therefore, each entry appears below the entry to which it is subordinate. In the Edge Flaws example, the effect, Edge Flaws, appears at the top of the hierarchy. Each of the four categories of causes, Methods, Machines, Materials, and Operators is subordinate to the effect and therefore appears below it. The sub-causes appear below each cause.

Note

If the tree has focus, you can also use CTRL+Enter to add a sibling(same level) to the selected cause. Use SHIFT+CTRL+Enter to add a child (one level below).

The Cause and Effect diagram tab in the Explorer Window.

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams 319

Cause and Effect Menu

The Cause and Effect menu appears on the main menu bar and contains the following commands to let you edit the Cause and Effect tree:

Note

You can also right-click the tree to use the same commands on the context menu that are found on the Cause and Effect menu.

Command Description

Add Cause Adds a child of the currently selected cause.

Delete Cause Deletes the currently selected cause, and any sub-causes, or sub-sub causes associated with it.

Layout Diagram Redraws the Cause and Effect diagram after changes are made. Branches are replaced, rebalanced, and made consistent lengths. Also, your root Effect line remains the same length, and in the same position unless it is pointing to the left instead of the right, or has been moved up or down on an angle.

Insert Pareto Chart Enables you to recover the Pareto Chart in your Cause and Effect diagram if you deleted it.

Print Cause and Effect Window

Prints the Cause and Effect Window.

Export FMEA Diagram

Exports a FMEA diagram to Excel or to the Clipboard.

320 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Cause and Effect Toolbar

The Cause and Effect toolbar contains the following tools to let you edit the Cause and Effect tree:

The Cause and Effect Draw Tool

The Cause and Effect draw tool appears on the Toolbox toolbar. Use this tool to draw arrows directly on the diagram.

Editing a Cause and Effect DiagramSince iGrafx 2006 provides you with a template as a starting point for your Cause and Effect diagram, you simply edit the template to create your own diagram. Editing primarily involves adding new arrows, removing existing arrows, adding text, or relabeling arrows.

Tool Name Description

Add Cause Adds a child of the currently selected cause.

Delete Cause Deletes the currently selected cause, and any sub-causes, or sub-sub causes associated with it.

Layout Diagram Redraws the Cause and Effect diagram after changes are made. Branches are replaced, rebalanced, and made consistent lengths. Also, your root Effect line remains the same length, and in the same position unless it is pointing to the left instead of the right, or has been moved up or down on an angle.

Insert Pareto Chart Enables you to recover the Pareto Chart in your Cause and Effect diagram if you deleted it.

Print Cause and Effect Window

Prints the Cause and Effect Window.

Export FMEA Diagram Exports a FMEA diagram to Excel or to the Clipboard.

Cause and Effect Connector Line Tool

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams 321

Adding Arrows To a Cause and Effect Diagram

You can add arrows directly to your diagram using the Cause and Effect draw tool or through the Cause and Effect tree in the Explorer window. To add arrows using the Cause and Effect draw tool:

1 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Connector Line tool.

2 In the diagram space, click and hold the mouse at the start point for the arrow, then drag the cursor to the end point for the arrow and release it.

Note

For a cause or sub cause, drag the cursor until it intersects the arrow to which it is subordinate.

3 At the cursor, type a label for the new arrow.

The arrow is added to the diagram and an entry corresponding to the new arrow automatically appears in the tree in the Explorer window. To add a new arrow using the tree:

1 Click the cause or effect you want to add a sub-cause to.

2 On the Cause and Effect toolbar, click the Add Cause tool.

or

On the Cause and Effect menu, click Add Cause.

3 Type the label for the arrow.

4 Click the corresponding area in the #Errors column and type the number of errors for the entry.

Note

If you want to redraw the full diagram, click the Layout Diagram command on the Cause and Effect menu.

Removing Arrows From a Cause and Effect Diagram

You can remove arrows directly from your diagram or through the Cause and Effect tree in the Explorer window. To remove arrows from the diagram:

1 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Selector tool.

2 Click the arrow to be removed.

3 Press Delete.

322 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The arrow is removed from the diagram and the entry corresponding to the deleted arrow is removed from the table in the Explorer window. To delete an arrow using the tree:

1 Click the row of the entry to be deleted.

2 On the Cause and Effect toolbar, click the Delete Cause tool.

or

On the Cause and Effect menu, click Delete Cause.

or

Press Delete.

Note

If you remove an arrow with subordinate arrows, all of the subordinate arrows are removed from the diagram and their corresponding entries are removed from the tree.

Working with Text in a Cause and Effect Diagram

You may want to add descriptive text, such as Titles to your diagram or change diagram labels. To add text to your diagram:

1 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Text tool.

2 In the diagram space, click the location for the text.

3 Type the new text.

Changing Labels

You can change diagram labels directly in the diagram or through the Cause and Effect tree in the Explorer window. To change labels directly on the diagram:

1 On the Toolbox toolbar, click the Selector tool.

2 Double-click the label.

3 Type in the new text. The corresponding entry in the tree is automatically updated.

To change labels using the Cause and Effect tree:

1 Double-click the label you want to change.

2 Type the new label.

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams 323

Laying Out a Cause and Effect Diagram

After you have added your causes, sub-causes, and text to your Cause and Effect diagram, you may want to improve the look and feel of it. You can do this by selecting and then dragging and/or resizing your root Effect line. When you drag or resize your Effect line, all causes and sub-causes move with it to the new position you want.

You can also resize, move, or even delete your corresponding Pareto Chart. If you delete your Pareto

Chart and then decide later that you would like reinsert it, click the Insert Pareto Chart tool

on the Cause and Effect toolbar.

Printing a Cause and Effect Diagram

You can print the Cause and Effect window, the Cause and Effect diagram, and its corresponding Pareto chart. To print your Cause and Effect window using your default printer:

On the Cause and Effect toolbar, click the Print Cause and Effect Window tool.

or

On the Cause and Effect menu. click the Print Cause and Effect Window command.

To print your Cause and Effect diagram and Pareto chart:

1 In the File menu, click Print.

2 In the Print dialog box, select pages 1, 2, or both.

3 Click OK.

Exporting FMEA (Failure Mode and Effect Analysis) DiagramsFMEA diagrams evaluate the potential for failures. Used mostly in manufacturing, they help identify failure modes in machines or processes. By identifying failures, engineers can study what went wrong and why, and then potentially eliminate or minimize them.

What is a FMEA Diagram?

FMEA diagrams evaluate the potential for failures. Used mostly in manufacturing, they help identify failure modes in machines or processes. By identifying failures, engineers can study what went wrong and why, and then potentially eliminate or minimize them.

324 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Exporting a FMEA Diagram

1 On the Cause and Effect toolbar, click the Export FMEA Diagram tool.

or

On the Cause and Effect menu, click Export FMEA Diagram.

2 In the Export to FMEA Diagram dialog box, select the causes you want to export.

3 In the Export To: list, click either Clipboard or Excel.

4 Click OK.

Tips

• The Excel option is only available if you have Microsoft Excel installed on your machine.

• In the Export to FMEA Diagram dialog box, you can select and reorder (using the Move Up and Move Down buttons) causes so they are in the order you want to see them in the output.

• When you export your causes, no link is maintained in the Cause and Effect diagram, rendering changes you make in the diagram after exporting non-relfective in the FMEA.

Using Cause and Effect Diagrams 325

326 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Value Stream Maps 14The purpose of value stream mapping is to visualize all aspects of the flow of a product through a

process. Both the Value Added and Non-Value Added activity is captured and analyzed for optimization of lead time, work balancing, and fulfilling customer demand. Typically, you map the flow door-to-door, or from the supplier to the customer showing both the material flow (the flow of the product or item being produced) and the information flow (the flow of synchronizing information that directs the production).

The goal of Lean value stream mapping and analysis is to transform a process from a push model to a pull model. In a push model, a process has inventory staged at many points and pushes the product from one step to the next without regard for how fast the next step can consume it. A Lean process employs a pull model, where each step creates only what downstream steps need. In this model, your process stores less inventory at each step, and product changeover transitions are smoother with optimized lead time.

For more information on Lean value stream mapping, see Learning to See from the Lean Enterprise Institute.

Creating a Value Stream MapA value stream map (VSM) may be one of many diagrams contained within an iGrafx document (.igx file).

To create a new document with the first diagram being a value stream map:

From the File menu, point to New and choose Lean Value Stream Map.orFrom the Welcome dialog box, point to New Document and choose Lean Value Stream Map.

In both cases, a new document is created, and a single Lean value stream map is created. You can override the default template by saving a custom template named LeanVSM.igt in the default template directory. For more information, see The Default Template on page 197.

Using Value Stream Maps 327

If you want to add a value stream map to an existing document:

1 From the File menu, point to Insert Component and choose Lean Value Stream Map. The New Component dialog box appears.

2 Choose a name for the VSM diagram.

3 You may choose to select an alternate template to initialize the new diagram.

Understanding the Default Lean Value Stream Map TemplateIf you use the default template to create a new VSM diagram, you will already see existing shapes and lines to help you get started mapping your value stream. In particular, the template shows a skeleton for a door-to-door value stream, including shapes that represent the customer, the supplier, and the production control of the process. In addition, it starts the material flow inside the process with the first process step (with the potential for inventory created from the supplier) and the final production step before shipment to the customer. Finally, it presents a sample information flow between the customer, supplier, and production control as well as schedule data passed between production control and the default steps in the process.

Lean Value Stream Map default template

328 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Two default data items on the template are:

• The VSM timeline.

• A special shape that displays both the Customer Demand and Takt Time information specified on the Value Stream Map Properties dialog box. The shape, appearing near the upper right corner of the default template, uses field codes to display the information, and updates appropriately as you modify the Customer Demand and Takt Time values.

For information about:

• the Value Stream Map Properties dialog box, see Setting Value Stream Map Properties on page 332.

• the Timeline, see Setting Value Stream Map Properties on page 332.

• field codes, see Using Fields on page 81.

Value Stream Map Palettes

All of the shapes appearing in the default VSM diagram, as well as many others, are available on one of the two VSM palettes that ship with the product: VSM Standard and VSM All. By default, the VSM Standard palette displays at the right side of the screen when you create a new VSM diagram. From there, you can bring new shapes into the diagram as you build your value stream map.

The palette displays similar groups of symbols close together for easy access. The palettes contain factory, process, and control center shapes, a group of supermarket and VSM buffer/safety stock shapes. Also included are a group of inventory graphics, a set of Kanban graphics and shapes, and other commonly used VSM diagram graphics such as transport symbols.

Using Value Stream Maps 329

All of the shapes and graphics have predefined text locations if you want to annotate them with text. Some shapes, such as the process step, have multiple text fields.

In addition, the Shape Library in the diagram is initialized to contain a small subset of the most frequently used shapes, such as the Process step, Inventory, Outside Source, and Information when you use the default template.

Adding Shapes and Flows to the Value Stream Map DiagramOftentimes when first creating the Current State Map, the goal is to show the specific process steps with inventory between them. You would drop in one process shape per step in the process, then draw the push behavior of the material flow between the process steps with inventory represented on each push line.

The default template selects the Push Arrow with Inventory line in the Line Library, so dragging a connector line between the process shapes creates a push line with an inventory graphic. You can also drag a process shape from the previous step to create both the shape and the push line.

For more information about:

• creating shapes with connector lines, see Adding Connected Shapes on page 57.

• the Line Library, see Using the Line Library on page 63.

Graphics cannot be connected to or from objects with a connector line, but they can be attached to connector lines. For more information, see Attaching Graphics to Lines on page 62.

One of two Lean palettes

330 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

For information on

• shapes and graphics, see Shapes vs. Graphics on page 103.

• changing a graphic into a shape, see Converting a Graphic to a Shape on page 109.

Creating the Material Flow

1 Select the process step from the palette or the Toolbox toolbar and drop it between the initial step and the final production step.

2 Enter text in the title area or the body of the process step.

3 Draw push lines or create push lines with inventory when you add a connected shape.

Note

Process steps can be placed to represent parallel material flow, and you can draw multiple push lines into a process step to show merging of material flow. The timeline merges the data appropriately.

4 Continue creating process steps and flow until you are finished modeling the initial view of the material flow.

Creating the Information Flow

You can create the information flow while you are creating the material flow or separately.

Use the Line Library options in the VSM diagram to create flow lines like Electronic Information flow and Manual Information flow. In creating the diagram, you may choose to create special routing of information flow lines to improve readability. Right-click a line to add a vertex to it, then drag that vertex to another location to create an angled flow around an important part of the diagram. For information about custom line routing, see About Connector Lines and Line Routing on page 55.

Using Lines With Attached Graphics

One of the most useful features for creating Lean VSM diagrams is the ability to attach graphics to lines. When most standard flows are created, the default graphics appear automatically. However, if you want to use other graphics, you can easily attach them to lines by selecting them in the palette, moving the cursor over the line, and clicking the mouse. For more information on attaching graphics to lines, see Attaching Graphics to Lines on page 62.

Using Value Stream Maps 331

Adding a Supermarket with Kanban Flow

Oftentimes when creating a Future State map, you may want to introduce a supermarket pull system.

1 On the palette, click the supermarket shape and drop it between two process steps.

2 Use the Kanban flow from the Line Library to create the withdrawal and production Kanban flows.

3 Drop the Kanban production or withdrawal graphics from the palette onto the Kanban flow lines.

This gives you an idea of the diagramming functionality contained within the Lean value stream mapping feature of iGrafx.

Setting Value Stream Map PropertiesThe Value Stream Map Properties dialog box sets overall properties for the value stream map. On the Setup tab, you specify the Available Work Time and Customer Demand for calculating Takt Time (the rate of production required to meet customer demand given Available Work Time); Takt Time, including an attainable Takt Goal; and Inventory Lead Time. On the Map tab, you specify the display and layout of the Timeline, Distance Line, and Work Balancing Graph on the map.

Timeline

The Timeline displays Value-Added Time (time a customer is willing to pay for), and Lead Time (the amount of time it takes a piece to move through the process) using Lean data elements built into the diagram. This facilitates analysis of the material flow of the value stream.

Based on data entered on the shapes, Value Added Time displays on the lower segments of the timeline, and overall Lead Time (which includes Value Added and Non Value Added (NVA) Time,

332 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

the time a customer does not want to pay for) displays on the upper segments. Inventory shapes typically cause Inventory Time on the timeline, based on the time necessary to process all sitting inventory. This Inventory Time can be entered directly on the shape or, if inventory count is entered, the Inventory Time will be calculated based on the inventory calculation setting.

The summary box on the timeline shows the total Lead Time and Value Added Time of the process as well as optionally showing the Process Cycle Efficiency (PCE) %, which is Value Added Time / Total Lead Time.

Distance Line

The Distance Line helps you analyze the waste generated by unnecessary movement of work items. For example, if parts are moved around on a manufacturing floor, the Distance Line can help analyze this transportation waste by reporting the actual distances between work stations. The Distance Line totals custom data values of Lean type Distance Traveled for each activity displayed on the Timeline. If the Lean type Distance Traveled is not used, the result is zero on the Distance Line.

The Distance type can sum distance traveled values that use different units of measure, such as feet and inches.

Lead Time = Inventory Time + Inventory Count Time based on the Properties dialog box settings

Value-Added Time = Processing Time

This case occurs only if NVA Time exists on an activity.

Lead Time = Processing Time

Value-Added Time = Processing Time - NVA Time

(Processing Time is assumed to include Value-Added Time and Non-Value-Added time.)

Using Value Stream Maps 333

To set properties for the Distance Line:

1 From the Lean menu, choose Value Stream Map PropertiesorRight-Click the Lean value stream map and choose Value Stream Map Properties from the context menu.

2 In the diagram-level Properties dialog box, click the Map tab.

3 Select the Show Distance Line check box to display Distance Line information on the value stream map.

4 Use the default labels for Distance and Total Distance, or enter custom labels.

5 Use Automatic Units to let iGrafx select the best unit of measure, or choose a unit type from the drop-down list.

Work Balancing Graph

The Work Balancing Graph displays a graph of Takt Time of the process in relation to Production Time at each activity or step. The graph automatically updates when changes are made to the value stream map data. (Production Time at a step is the time between each piece being produced. For information about Production Time, see Working with Lean Custom Data on page 337.)

Diagram-Level Map Properties

You can set overall value stream map properties using the diagram-level Properties dialog box.

To set properties for a value stream map:

1 From the Lean menu, choose Value Stream Map PropertiesorRight-click the Lean value stream map and choose Value Stream Map Properties from the context menu.

2 Click the Setup tab in the diagram-level Properties dialog box.

334 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 In the Available Work Time section, enter values for Hours Per Shift, Break Minutes Per Shift, Shifts Per Day, Days Per Week, and Days Per Month.

4 In the Takt Time section, enter values for the Customer Demand or Takt Time. If you know customer demand, Takt Time is automatically calculated. If you know the Takt Time, customer demand is automatically calculated.

5 Select the Takt Goal check box and enter parameters to display a goal line on the Work Balancing Graph as a time or percentage of Takt Time.

6 Choose whether to show Inventory Lead Time based on Takt Time or activity capacity.

7 Click the Map tab.

8 If you choose to show a Timeline for the process, enter labels for the Timeline Summary and units of time to display for the Lead Time and Value-Added Time. Select the Process Cycle Efficiency check box to display the ratio of Value-Added Time to Total Lead Time in the timeline summary box. You may also chose to enter a label for PCE.

9 Select the Show Distance Line check box to display a Distance Line on the value stream map that reports data on distances traveled between work stations.

10 Select the Show Work Balancing Graph check box to display the Production Rate of each process step relative to the Takt Time in the process. If you want to display the names of the activities on the Work Balancing Graph, select the Display Names check box.

11 Click OK.

Using Value Stream Maps 335

Entering Data on Shapes in a Value Stream MapOne of the most important steps in value stream mapping is entering measurement data on steps and Inventory graphics that, when combined with data from the Value Stream Map Properties dialog box, help you analyze your current state and create ideas for a future state. Lean VSM diagramming leverages the custom data capability of iGrafx to enter important data, and the data block field capability to display it in the diagram. In iGrafx, the custom data block represents the Lean data box element and functionality in Lean value stream maps.

For each shape and graphic, you can use the Lean Data page of the Properties dialog box to enter specific data important to the analysis. Below each process step, a data block displays entered values in the diagram by default.

1 Double-click an activity shape. The Properties dialog box appears.

2 Select the Lean Data page.

3 Click a data element and enter the value and unit.

4 Click OK.

You can display calculated values as well as entered values on the value stream map. These calculated fields are indicated by a gray read-only field as shown below. They are not displayed in the data block by default. However, by using the drop-down menu in the Name area, they can display in the data block and be overridden (editable). You can also specify the effect of this shape on the timeline in the Lean Data page of the Properties dialog box.

For information about calculated fields, see Working with Lean Custom Data on page 337.

The Lean Data page of the Properties dialog box

Lean data block as it appears below the process step in the Lean map

The Operators value displays directly on the process step with an icon.

336 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Lean Custom DataBy using the custom data field capability in iGrafx, creating new Lean custom data fields to enter or show is a matter of defining new custom data fields in the Setup Custom Data dialog box. To use the Setup Custom Data dialog box, from the Lean Data page of the Properties dialog box, click the Setup button. For more information about creating custom data fields, see Working with Custom Data on page 203.

In addition to user-defined fields, you can use many predefined VSM properties available in the diagram. They are either enterable or calculated.

Using Value Stream Maps 337

Data Elements with Entered Values

The Setup Custom Data dialog box provides the following data elements. These values are manually calculated.

Data Element Lean Type Notes

Availability% Percent The percentage of time operators are available for this step in the process.

Processing Time Duration The time for one product to move through a process step. this is sometimes referred to as Total Cycle Time. When Processing Time is called Cycle Time, it can be confused with Production Time (the time between products leaving a process step. They are the same with one full-time operator and no defects.

Defect% Percent The percentage of flawed products discarded at a step.

Operators Number The number of workers at a step.

NVA Time Duration The time in a process step that a customer is not willing to pay for.

Change Over Time Duration The time taken to change from producing one type of product to another type of product. Assumed to be average accumulated C/O per shift.

Uptime% Percent The percentage of time machines are available for this step in the process.

Inventory Amount Number The number of pieces between or at a process step.

Inventory Time Duration Combined with Inventory Amount on the timeline if Inventory Amount is also entered.

Distance Traveled Distance Supports both imperial and metric distance units.

338 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Data Elements with Calculated Values

The Setup Custom Data dialog box provides the following data elements. These values can be calculated for you, or you can override the automatic calculation.

Note

Production Time is sometimes called Cycle Time or Net Cycle Time and is defined as the rate at which a new piece is completed by a process step.

Creating Additional Lean Custom Data

You can create new Lean custom data by choosing the appropriate Lean Type in the Setup Custom Data dialog box and setting Custom Data Options.

1 Select the Lean Data page and click the Setup button. The Setup Custom Data dialog box appears.

2 Click the New button and enter the name of the data element you are creating.

Lean Data Element Lean Type Calculation

Shifts Number Based on Diagram settings. This value can be overridden to affect capacity at a process step.

Available Time Time (default to sec.) Based on Diagram settings

Production Time Time (default to sec.) Processing Time / ((100 - Defect%) * (Operators * Availability%))

Takt Time Time (default to sec.) Available Time/Customer Demand

Capacity Number (per day) (Available Time - C/O) * #Shifts * Uptime% / Production Time

Using Value Stream Maps 339

3 Expand the Lean Types drop-down list and select a the type of data to use for this data element. For example, if you want to capture the percentage of defects at each process step, choose Defect %. The data type is automatically set to percent.

4 Click OK.

Note

For information about calculated and entered data element values, see Lean Custom Data in the Default Template on page 340.

Renaming Data fields

Default Lean data fields can be renamed if you choose.

1 On the Lean Data page of the Properties dialog box, click the Setup button. The Setup Custom Data dialog box appears.

2 In the Custom Data list, select the data field you want to rename and click the Rename button. The data field is highlighted, indicating that it is in edit mode.

3 Type the new name of the data field and click OK.

4 Click OK to dismiss the Properties dialog box.

Lean Custom Data in the Default Template

The default Lean Value Stream Map template provides Lean data elements, some of which are enterable and some that are calculated for you. You can override calculated values to enter your own data.

• Total C/T (Total Cycle Time) = Processing Time

• Defect%= The percentage of flawed products discarded at a step

• NVA (Non-Value-Added Time)

• Operators

• Shifts

• C/O (Changeover Time)

• Uptime%

• Pieces = Inventory Amount

• Inventory Time

For more information, see Data Elements with Entered Values on page 338 and see Data Elements with Calculated Values on page 339.

340 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Exporting and Importing Lean DataOn the Lean menu, choose one of the following:

• Export VSM Data to Text to export Lean data to a .txt or .csv file.

• Export VSM Table to Excel to export Lean data to a formatted Excel worksheet based on a template located in the Lean Export folder under the Template directory or a custom Excel template. The default Excel templates are located in the Templates directory in the Lean Export folder. iGrafx provides templates for exporting a Work Balancing Worksheet, VSM Data Table, and Kaizen Table.

• Import VSM Table from Excel to import data back into the iGrafx file. Data imported from a VSM table appears in the Lean value stream map. You cannot import ID values, names, and Lean Type changes made in the VSM table. You can re-import only non-calculated custom data.

In the VSM table, each row represents a Lean activity and each column represents a Lean attribute or Custom Data value on the activities. Units of measure are determined by the Lean data type exported.

For information on how to create your own custom Lean template, go to http://www.igrafx.com/resources/templates.

A Lean Six Sigma MethodologyLean and Six Sigma initiatives are helping companies successfully drive improvements throughout their organizations. Together, Lean and Six Sigma provide a powerful methodology for meeting the customer satisfaction challenge and exceeding customer expectations with quality and delivery. iGrafx 2006 provides the tools you need to perform a Lean Six Sigma improvement project and maintain it through the implementation and control stages.

This methodology is based on the Lean Six Sigma DMAIC (Define, Measure, Analyze, Improve, Control) model.

Defining the Process

Before you map where you are going with your Lean process, you can take a look at where you are with your current process by creating a SIPOC diagram and a Lean value stream map or a process map.

Using Value Stream Maps 341

A SIPOC diagram helps you look at your process from a high level by capturing these elements:

• Suppliers–Individuals or groups who supply the product or service that is further developed in the process.

• Inputs/Requirements–Any information or material used to develop the product.

• Process–What you do to create the product.

• Outputs/Requirements–The end product or service delivered to the customer.

• Customers–External customers.

A value stream map or a process map provides a more detailed look at processes and illustrates where improvements to processes can be implemented.

Using SIPOC Diagram Analysis

1 On the File menu, point to New and choose SIPOC Diagram.

2 Use the SIPOC Diagram palette in the Gallery to define suppliers, inputs, process outputs, and customers, and map flows between them.

342 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Reviewing Current-State Process Using Value Stream Mapping

Value stream maps are used frequently in Lean Six Sigma projects. By creating a map of process flow and assigning Lean data to the flow, you can more easily identify problem areas in the process and resolve them when you create a future-state map.

For information on creating a value stream map, see Creating a Value Stream Map on page 327.

You can export value stream map data to an Excel spreadsheet for comparison and analysis. For information, see Exporting and Importing Lean Data on page 341.

Measuring and Analyzing Value Stream Effectiveness

You can map a process with multiple methods, but you will get the added value of measurement and analysis when you use the Lean Value Stream Map template and add Lean data to the map. With iGrafx 2006, you can specify Lean data values, set the map to display special analysis graphics, map inventory build-up, calculate optimal resource time, and target inefficiencies for process improvement.

For information on creating a value stream map, see Creating a Value Stream Map on page 327.

Analyzing Data with Cause and Effect Diagrams

iGrafx FlowCharter provides a Cause and Effect diagram template for analyzing causes of problems in a process and their effects on the end results. A cause and effect diagram can help you document and visualize problems and potential problems in your process. It can also help you decide which causes should be looked at more closely.

The Cause and Effect diagram template includes a Pareto chart that updates automatically when you edit the cause and effect diagram.

For more information, see Creating a Cause and Effect Diagram on page 317.

Using Lean Pick Charts to Improve a Process

iGrafx FlowCharter provides a Lean Pick Chart template for evaluating possible solutions to problems identified in a process. The Lean Pick Chart template provides pre-defined quadrants, but can be customized to suit your needs.

Using Value Stream Maps 343

After entering solutions in the pick chart quadrants, you can easily see which solutions have the biggest payoff and are the easiest to implement.

1 On the File menu, point to New and choose Lean Pick Chart.

2 Insert text, shapes, or pictures to illustrate your solutions.

Controlling a New Process

Control charts plot data points in time order along with control limits. You can insert an SPC chart into any iGrafx document and plot pre- and post-process change data and Control data.

For information on using SPC charts, see Inserting a SPC Chart in a Diagram on page 215.

344 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using BPMN Diagrams 15iGrafx 2006 and Business Process Modeling Notation (BPMN) mapping and modeling features give

you power to model diagrams for simulation. The Gallery contains a BPMN palette with new BPMN standard icons and graphics. This chapter gives you an introduction to BPMN modeling and exporting features in iGrafx 2006.

BPMN diagrams are not different from other process diagrams except that the standard specifies certain restrictions on what you can draw in exchange for standard representation and clarity. iGrafx 2006 directly supports these restrictions.

A BPMN OverviewThis documentation presumes some familiarity with BPMN and does not explain BPMN rules and behaviors in great detail.

Before you get started creating BPMN process diagrams, take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with BPMN capabilities and features in iGrafx 2006.

Understanding BPMN

iGrafx Process 2006 and later supports version 1.0 of the Business Process Modeling Notation (BPMN) standard, first published in May 2004. The BPMN specification is available at www.bpmn.org.

Using BPMN Diagrams 345

BPMN is a standard for a set of diagramming conventions that extend traditional flowcharting. It specifies the appearance of activities in the diagram that have specific sequencing or synchronizing behaviors. For example, BPMN specifies the graphical appearance of events, activities, and gateways:

BPMN standards graphically represent several other specific behaviors such as subprocesses and activities that repeat.

Two important concepts in BPMN that are new to iGrafx 2006 are synchronizing messages between independent, cooperating processes, and exception flow from activities.

Many important aspects of modeling a process are not standardized by BPMN. These include resource characteristics and allocation, transaction flow interaction, resource contention, scheduling, and any details about how work is done at an activity or modeling its behavior. As a result, you will find the behaviors that BPMN does specify woven into the overall iGrafx modeling environment.

Several new diagramming features of iGrafx 2006 support specific BPMN requirements. These features include:

• floating departments (representing pools in BPMN)

• container shapes (representing embedded subprocesses)

• exceptions

• connector lines that terminate on department boundaries

Most BPMN behavior and conventions are included in process diagrams and models.

iGrafx 2006 uses some different terminology from BPMN. For a table of corresponding terms, see Understanding BPMN Terminology on page 361.

If You’re Already Familiar With BPMN

In iGrafx 2006 process diagrams, all shapes are activities. An activity can have elements of flow control and synchronization as well as acquiring resources and doing work. BPMN restricts what behavior is allowed at a given object in the diagram. Those restrictions are then used to determine the appearance of the object.

A BPMN event shape indicating a synchronizing or triggering event

A BPMN activity shape A BPMN gateway shape indicating sequence control

346 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

If you are primarily concerned with drawing the diagram, and less with modeling for simulation or BPEL export, the easiest way to create BPMN is to use a combination of the BPMN palette and the BPMN page of the Properties dialog box. On the BPMN page, you will find the standard BPMN terms mapped to the appropriate setting on the modeling pages.

The Decisions and Exceptions tabs on Outputs page of the Properties dialog box control the appearance and labeling of sequence flow out of an activity. Note that the appearance of a shape on a BPMN diagram reflects the behavior specified by the setting in the Properties dialog. When you drop a shape into a diagram or change it with the BPMN page, the settings are made by default so that the appearance is what you expect. However, if you make modifications on other pages of the Properties dialog box, you may change the meaning of the shape, and the graphic representing it. The graphical outline shape will not be changed by this; however, only the indicator in it or its border style might change.

iGrafx 2006 has extensive real-time and batch error checking to warn you if your diagram and specified behavior violate aspects of the BPMN specification. In general, it will create the diagram to be correct by construction. For example, message lines are automatically drawn for connections made between pools, and sequence lines for connections between activities.

If You’re Already Familiar with iGrafx Process Modeling and Simulation

BPMN standardizes the graphics that represent a certain limited subset of the behaviors that iGrafx 2006 can model. The standards focus on factors that determine the order in which activities are performed. It can graphically represent synchronizing messages between independent cooperating

Using BPMN Diagrams 347

processes, though it is not required. Some of the BPMN behaviors, notably exception flow, are new to iGrafx 2006, and are now available in process diagrams as well.

BPMN considers three main flow objects: activities, gateways, and events. All of these are activities in the vocabulary of process diagrams, restricted in various ways. BPMN activities are concerned with doing work. For the most part, they are not allowed to do synchronization or sequencing control such as gating at the input or making decisions on the output. A significant exception to this is that an activity can synchronize on the arrival of a message from a separate process, and can send a message to another process.

Gateways are strictly for flow control. They determine which activity or activities will be executed next. They handle both merging and diverging flow. As such, they can make joins at the inputs or have conditional flow on the outputs. This is reinforced by the adoption of the traditional decision diamond as the required shape.

For the most part, you may think of events as activities that do no work and require no resources. BPMN events either wait for something in particular to occur or cause it to occur. As such, they are primarily about synchronizing separate paths of execution in the same process or separate cooperating processes.

It is important to realize that BPMN does not address the interaction of separate transactions (called process instances in BPMN) in the process. You may want to think about this as if the only kind of generator in BPMN were a completion generator. Traditionally, process modeling and simulation have been about understanding resource contention and interaction of multiple transactions proceeding through the process together, whereas BPMN only considers a single initiating transaction at a time. However, the combination of BPMN with process modeling and simulation in iGrafx 2006 provides you with the best of both worlds.

BPMN often calls the transaction in Process a process instance. In process diagrams, a transaction is said to duplicate when multiple paths of execution exit an activity, and the transactions on the separate paths are called family members. In BPMN, the separate family members are called tokens or

threads of execution. As such, BPMN handles the merging and synchronization of separate transactions that are family members. However, the diagramming conventions of BPMN ignore the concepts of batch, group, and non by-family join, all of which address interactions among separate transactions. With iGrafx 2006 and BPMN diagramming, you can model both.

Differentiating BPMN Diagrams From Process Diagrams

Process diagrams are free-form connected graphics. You can adopt any diagramming convention you choose that can be supported by the powerful set of graphical features in the program. BPMN specifies a particular set of diagramming conventions, and iGrafx 2006 takes advantage of knowledge of these restrictions to help you more quickly create a correct-by-construction BPMN diagram.

348 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

BPMN stipulates that sequence flow cannot cross pool (floating department) boundaries, and that lines that cross, by definition, represent message synchronization. Process diagrams do not have a similar restriction.

Both process and BPMN diagrams have exactly the same modeling features. However, some diagramming behaviors are different.

• Connector line styles change to reflect the meaning of the shapes that are connected. This affects message lines, sequence flow lines, and compensation associations.

• Floating departments are the default in the BPMN template to support BPMN compliance.

• By default, indicators are different for certain behaviors. These include the styling of container shapes (embedded subprocesses) and the independent subprocess indicator. The message send and receive indicators are not on by default in BPMN diagrams. See the table in Using BPMN Eventson page 351 for the complete set of indicator graphics for events. To view the other indicators, from the Format menu, choose Diagram and click the Indicators tab in the Format Diagram dialog box.

Creating BPMN DiagramsLike other process diagrams, BPMN diagrams can be used for modeling and simulating a process. You create a BPMN diagram like any other process model. The Properties dialog box contains a BPMN page that you can use to model BPMN-compliant process elements conveniently.

To create a new document with the first diagram being a BPMN process diagram:

From the File menu, point to New and choose BPMN Diagram.orFrom the Welcome dialog box, point to New Document and choose BPMN Diagram.

In both cases, a new document is created, and a single BPMN diagram is created. You can override the default template by saving a custom template named BPMN.igt in the default template directory. For more information, see The Default Template on page 197.

If you want to add a BPMN diagram to an existing document:

1 From the File menu, point to Insert Component and choose BPMN Diagram. The New Component dialog box appears.

2 Choose a name for the BPMN diagram.

3 You may choose to select an alternate template to initialize the new diagram.

Using BPMN Diagrams 349

Using BPMN FeaturesiGrafx 2006 supports the BPMN specification for diagramming processes. It also supports many new modeling behaviors implied by the diagram conventions. BPMN shapes are included in the BPMN palette of the Shape Gallery, pools and swimlanes are included in the BPMN template. Diagram compliance with the standard is supported with correct by construction warnings and errors.

Understanding BPMN Shapes

When you create a process diagram using the BPMN Diagram template, the Shape Gallery opens to the BPMN palette, which contains flow shapes that are specified in the BPMN standard for representing events, activities, and gateways.

Using BPMN Events

Event shapes are always represented by circles. The type of border reflects the location of the event in the sequence flow. A start event has a single line border, an intermediate event has a double line border, or an end event has a heavy line border. Start events and most intermediate events have triggers that define the cause for the event, with multiple ways to trigger the events. End events and some intermediate events define a result or consequence of a sequence flow.

An event can be of a certain type, such as timer or fault (error), which you can set on the BPMN page of the Properties dialog box. The type of event is defined by the properties and is reflected by the indicator in the center of the event.

A BPMN start event shape A BPMN activity shape A BPMN gateway shape

Start Rule event shape. For example, start when inventory level drops below 1000.

Intermediate Timer event shape. For example, delay one day before order ships.

End Message event shape. For example, tell someone that the order has shipped.

350 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The following BPMN event types are supported in iGrafx 2006:

Event Type Start Intermediate End

Message

Timer Event Type Is Not Supported

Fault Event Type Is Not Supported

Cancel Event Type Is Not Supported

Event Type Is Not Supported

Compensation Event Type Is Not Supported

Rule Event Type Is Not Supported

Link Event Type Is Not Supported

Event Type Is Not Supported

Using BPMN Diagrams 351

The connection flow to an event in a diagram determines whether it is a start event, intermediate event, or end event. However, BPMN rules are specific about usage of certain events. For example, Terminate can only be an End event. The interactive checker warns you about invalid usage.

About Intermediate and Boundary Events

BPMN calls events that are attached to activity boundaries intermediate events, but in general, the modeling rules that apply to them are different from the rules applied to in-the-flow events. iGrafx 2006 uses the terminology border events to distinguish the two when necessary.

Border events represent events that can cause the normal execution of an activity to be stopped prematurely. If this kind of event occurs, the transaction (flow) out of the activity does not take the normal path out, but takes the exception path connected to the event instead.

Intermediate events represent either a point in the process where the flow is suspended until the event occurs, or where the flow through the event causes the event to occur.

By default, BPMN does not differentiate between events sending or receiving a message. In iGrafx, you can turn on indicators for sent and/or received messages.

To create a Link event in BPMN diagrams, you use off-page connectors. For more information, see Off-Page Connector Options on page 129.

Multiple

Terminate Event Type Is Not Supported

Event Type Is Not Supported

Event Type Start Intermediate End

352 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using BPMN Activities

iGrafx 2006 supports all of the indicators specified by the BPMN standard that can be displayed in a BPMN activity shape.

In addition to the standard activity behavior of specified duration or cost, you can specify an activity to be an independent or embedded subprocess. If you specify an embedded subprocess, other shapes may be placed in this activity, which is now a container shape.

Using Embedded Subprocesses

Embedded subprocesses are not sharable with other diagrams. You can model exception flows from an embedded subprocess, making the process model easier to visualize.

A loop is a sequential repetition of a task within an activity shape.

A parallel task is a simultaneous repetition of a task within an activity shape.

Ad-hoc specifies that activities in a subprocess are not controlled or sequenced in a particular order.

Compensation is reversal of actions taken that affect an outside entity.

An embedded subprocess

Using BPMN Diagrams 353

To create an embedded subprocess:

1 Double-click on a shape. The Properties dialog box appears.

2 Select the BPMN page and select Embedded subprocess from the Activity Type drop-down list.orSelect Task in the Process properties list to view the Task page and, from the subprocess type drop-down list, choose Embedded.

3 Make other selections as needed.

4 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

5 In the diagram, expand the activity border and create the subprocess inside the activity shape.

For information about container shapes, see Working With Container Shapes on page 53.

About Exception Flows

A key feature of BPMN standard is the representation of exception flow on an activity. Exceptions define events or conditions that, if they occur while the activity or subprocess is working, will cause the activity to immediately terminate its work and be routed out of the activity down the exception path instead of out of the normal path or paths.

As an example, consider a call center process in which a caller must wait for an operator. Callers are willing to wait for a caller-specific amount of time before they hang up, or renege.

You can conveniently create a single exception flow on the BPMN page of the Properties dialog box for an activity. If you want more than one exception case, you can use the Exceptions tab of the Outputs page on the Properties dialog box.

354 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

When you create an exception on an activity, it is not shown until you connect a sequence flow connection out of the activity for that exception. You can choose whether a line drawn is an exception instead of normal flow in these ways:

• When you are drawing the line, you can press the space bar to cycle through all the exceptions and normal flow on an activity. Decision cases are normal flow, so if you have both exceptions and decisions, the space bar will cycle between all of them.

• After the line has been drawn, you can right-click on the line and select among the available exceptions (and decision cases, if any) on the activity.

Each line you draw from the activity will automatically use the next unconnected exception or decision case until all are used. You can use the space bar to modify this behavior.

Using BPMN Gateways

BPMN diagrams use decision shapes called Gateways that are used for choosing tasks by decision case or by model actions. Gateways in iGrafx 2006 support the BPMN specifications, including exclusive and inclusive behaviors, decision functionality, and parallel outputs. You can also specify merge behavior in gateways in the BPMN page of the Properties dialog box.

The following table describes the BPMN Decision and Fork gateways and their behaviors, available in iGrafx 2006.

Gateway Type Example Decision/Fork Behavior

Exclusive

The sequence flows from one decision case based on a single condition.

Inclusive

The sequence flows from one or more decision cases based on whether each decision case’s condition is met. When none of the condition are met, the path takes the defined default case. Otherwise, the flow is terminated.

Using BPMN Diagrams 355

Using the BPMN Guide

The BPMN page of the Properties dialog box is a shortcut page for BPMN diagramming called the BPMN Guide. The BPMN Guide provides all the modeling parameters you need in one place for constructing a BPMN diagram. The Details button takes you to another page in the Properties dialog box where you can view more specifics about the choices made in the BPMN Guide.

1 Right-click on a shape and choose Properties.orDouble-click a shape.

2 In the Properties dialog box, select BPMN in the Guide section of the properties list on the left, if not already selected.

3 Modify the BPMN properties on the shape as desired.

Parallel

The sequence forks, and flows from all output paths.

Event-Based

The sequence does not flow from the event-based gateway until one of the target events occurs.

Gateway Type Example Decision/Fork Behavior

356 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Click the Details button to view the properties in detail on the other modeling pages.

5 Click OK.

Using BPMN Pools

BPMN diagrams use the terms Pool and Lane to indicate separate entities containing interacting yet independent process flows on the same diagram. This corresponds to departments and subdepartments in process diagrams.

A pool contains exactly one process and may also be subdivided into lanes. For example, a BPMN lane can represent an organization subdivision in a single process, and a BPMN pool can represent a completely separate organization. In BPMN diagrams, pools are floating departments separated by white space that restricts the sequence flow across pools. A sequence flow can traverse lanes in a pool, but cannot flow between pools.

The following diagram displays two BPMN pools: Marketing and Service. This suggests that the two organizations do not take direction from each other, but that they function cooperatively through a

Using BPMN Diagrams 357

formalized messaging protocol. The Marketing BPMN pool is also sub-divided into two lanes: Collateral and Customer Relations.

In iGrafx 2006, departments represent both BPMN concepts. In a BPMN diagram, if you specify floating departments in the Department Manager dialog box, each of the top-level separated departments is interpreted as a BPMN pool. Child departments are BPMN lanes. For more information about the Department Manager, see About Departments and Floating Departments on page 33.

By definition in BPMN, sequence flow cannot connect between two independent processes, and synchronizing message flow cannot connect within a single process. The result is that in BPMN, sequence flow lines cannot pass across the space between two pools on a BPMN diagram.

Probably the most common use of a BPMN pool is to represent an external business partner with whom a primary BPMN pool and the process in it communicate. The primary process is the subject of the diagram, and the pattern of message exchange with the partners is part of what is captured in it. Typically, the partners have no activities in them, or have activities that suggest or model the ordering of messages and the relationship between them when diagrammed this way. The partners do not contain any details of how the messages are implemented and handled, or how the work is done. These are called abstract processes.

358 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

For purposes of the Properties dialog, available messaging partners are defined slightly differently in BPMN diagrams than in process diagrams. Each process diagram is considered to be a single messaging partner, although not all of them may be intended that way, especially subprocesses. In BPMN diagrams, if there are more than one BPMN Pool defined, each Pool is considered a messaging partner; otherwise, the diagram is treated the same as a process diagram is.

Understanding Connector Lines in BPMN Diagrams

Connector lines represent sequence flows when they connect two objects in the same BPMN pool. By definition, objects in different BPMN pools cannot be connected by sequence flow. They can only synchronize via message flow. A connector line between two objects in different pools represents a message flow displays with a dashed line. Moving an object from one pool to another also breaks the sequence flow and converts the connection to a message.

Checking for BPMN Modeling ErrorsMany diagramming rules must be followed to keep your model compliant with the BPMN specifications published by BPMI.org. The correct by construction feature supports these rules, preventing you from creating some modeling violations. However, in some cases, it is not possible or

This connecting object...

has these properties...

Sequence Flow

Solid line arrow connecting two shapes in the same BPMN pool. The sequence flow lines define the flow of transactions through the model.

Message Flow

Dashed line arrow providing communication between two pools, from a source to a possible target within another pool. Message flow lines send information, not transactions. They may connect to pool edges as well as shapes in the target pool.

Association

Dotted line that annotates a shape, similar to a callout. Association lines are also used for compensation flow, which is not part of the sequence flow. Associations are for annotation only.

Default Sequence Flow

Slash on a sequence flow line that indicates the default path when conditions exist on the flow out of an activity or gateway.

Using BPMN Diagrams 359

desirable to enforce correct-by-construction modeling. For these situations, BPMN diagrams have extensive checking features. You can disable BPMN model checking and allow a diagram to deviate from the standard by turning off the Real-Time Checking setting on the View menu.

Model checking optionally shows you real-time errors as you place shapes in a diagram. For example, start events cannot have incoming sequence flow. If you place a message start event after an activity, correct by construction redraws the message event with a heavy border indicating that it is an end event. If errors cannot be corrected, they are represented with shading inside of the event shape and an error message appears when you place the cursor over the shape that causes the error. These rules are part of the correct by construction feature in iGrafx 2006

.

To enable or disable real-time checking:

1 On the View menu, see the Real-Time Checking command. If the icon appears with a light gray background, real-time checking is enabled.

2 Choose Real-Time Checking on the View menu to enable or disable the setting.

You can run the BPMN checker from the Model menu to check for additional modeling errors. Runtime model checking can find and display construction and simulation errors in all components of the document. These checks include everything that real-time checks do, as well as additional checks that are inappropriate to do during diagram creation. It also checks for a variety of simulation model inconsistencies.

To run a model check:

360 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 On the Model menu, choose Check. In the Check dialog box, select the scope of errors to be checked. All error messages appear in the Output Window at the bottom of the iGrafx window.

2 Double-click an error message to highlight the source of the error in the diagram.

Converting Process Diagrams to BPMNYou may decide to convert an existing process diagram to use BPMN characteristics and rules. On the Tools menu, point to Change Diagram Type and click BPMN Diagram. The process diagram changes to the closest representation of BPMN possible, and you can benefit from all the correct-by-construction and error-checking automatically built into the BPMN diagramming feature.

Understanding BPMN TerminologyBPMN modeling and simulation is added functionality for the Process modeling and simulation features in iGrafx 2006. As such, it has introduced new terms and functionality available in both BPMN and process diagrams. Because BPMN is a new initiative with its own terminology, it is important to understand how those terms are used or not used in iGrafx BPMN modeling and simulation to avoid conflict with established terminology in process modeling and simulation.

See other references to these terms in the help system or user guide.

BPMN Terminology

iGrafx Reference

Definition

artifact graphical object, graphic

An object in the diagram that does not affect process behavior or sequence flow, but that is used for documenting, illustrating, or decorating the diagram.

association callout A relationship between two objects on a diagram that is not sequence or message flow. It is represented graphically by making the callout line visible and dotted. The compensation association is an exception; it is implemented with a specially formatted connector line.

Using BPMN Diagrams 361

intermediate event on the activity boundary

boundary event, exception

A connection to an activity that marks the path that will be taken if the event occurs during the execution of the activity. They are represented with circles on the activity border that contain an indicator of what type of event it is in both BPMN and Process diagrams. Exception is the modeling concept; boundary event is the diagrammatic representation of it.

lane child department

A subdivision of a parent department, often used to represent organization boundaries within it.

expanded subprocess

subprocess A subprocess shape on a diagram that displays the details of the implementation of the process within it. In iGrafx 2006, embedded subprocesses display as expanded. See collapsed subprocess.

compensation compensation Mark and implement a reversal or undo of an action that was taken by an activity that has already completed, should the process itself not complete normally. For example, the compensation for “Charge customer card” activity might be Reverse charges.” Compensation activities are indicated by being connected to a compensation exception on the normal activity that it will compensate. The connection is a compensation association.

container shape

expanded embedded subprocess

A container shape in iGrafx 2006 is a shape that surrounds other shapes and their connections. Container shapes own the contained shapes in the sense that they move when the container moves, and they are deleted if the container is deleted. Container shapes are used to implement expanded embedded subprocesses for BPMN.

BPMN Terminology

iGrafx Reference

Definition

362 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

error fault Faults are usually used to signal an anticipated but not handled condition has occurred in the process, in the environment it is executing within, or in a partner to whom a message was sent. For example, a fault could be used to signal that the Order Book activity failed because the Out of Stock condition was encountered. Faults can be sent by the process itself to break out of a hierarchy of subprocesses, but they are usually used to represent unusual or undesirable conditions that occurred in the outside world. Faults are caught by an activity with a Fault exception–a fault that occurs while the activity is executing will immediately terminate the activity and the fault exception path will be taken.

pool floating department

In iGrafx 2006, the first level of department hierarchy can have space separating them. This is used to represent BPMN pools. Connector lines can terminate or originate on a floating department boundary, representing message flow in BPMN.

flow container department A generic term for either a BPMN pool or lane.

gateway activity-constrained function

In BPMN, separate flows are typically created or merged at gateways. Gateways are represented as diamond shapes. Modeling concepts such as merge, duplicate, join, and decision typically are represented by gateways.

independent subprocess

subprocess A subprocess that is called from a parent that is independent of the parent process and that may be invoked from multiple places in the same parent or from multiple parents.

Note: The definition of BPMN includes join at end behavior

join at end The specified behavior of a BPMN process is that all parallel paths must be terminated or completed before the process itself is completed. iGrafx 2006 supports the separate paths, or transaction family members, completing the process independently. Join at end, the default in iGrafx 2006 for new processes, means that all paths are completed before the process is completed.

BPMN Terminology

iGrafx Reference

Definition

Using BPMN Diagrams 363

lane department A department that is not a floating department. Also called Swimlanes.

process instance

transaction, family

A transaction in Process is one instance of the execution of the process. If parallel paths of execution exist, the transaction duplicates into a family of transactions that can be synchronized later at a collection by family. In BPMN, a family member is usually referred to as a token.

loop loop A shortcut to represent that the work at an activity is repeated sequentially for a specified number of times, or until a condition occurs. It is equivalent to a loop created by a decision after the activity that sends the transaction back to the activity until the count or condition occurs.

message flow connector line (dashed)

A connector line drawn between two BPMN pools or activities within them. These lines are intended to document a message synchronization between the process in the BPMN pools. Messages themselves are defined in the Define Messages dialog box and their use is specified in the Properties dialog box.

multi-instance activity

parallel activity

A modeling concept in which the work at an activity is duplicated multiple times. It is represented with an indicator on the diagram.

entity partner An independent process, service, business partner, and so on that can receive, send, or reply to messages. BPMN pools are interpreted as partners by iGrafx 2006, as are separate process diagrams within the same document.

parent lane, parent pool

parent department

A department that has been subdivided into child departments.

sequence flow connector line A connection between two activities that represents passing control from one activity to another. Contrast message flow, which is a synchronizing signal sent between two independent processes.

BPMN Terminology

iGrafx Reference

Definition

364 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

event activity (constrained)

An activity that waits for or generates an event. Examples are faults, messages, expression values (BPMN rules). Activities that generate these or respond to them are represented as circles. Indicators in the circle show what type of event it is.

timer (TimeDate)

event An absolute point in time, for example Friday at 4:00. In iGrafx 2006, events are defined on the Model menu in the Define Events dialog box.

rule expression (in a by expression input constraint)

A condition occurs in the model that is defined by an expression reaching a value. In iGrafx 2006, any non-zero value for the expression is considered True, and the rule is considered satisfied when the expression is True.

cancel cancel A signal that is sent by a partner in a business transaction and that is received by all partners. They are sent by a cancel action in an activity (a BPMN cancel intermediate in-the-flow event or end event) and caught by a cancel exception.

process property

transaction attribute

An unfortunate confusion in terminology is that the word process is often used to refer to a process instance. In iGrafx 2006, a process attribute is a global value that is common to all instances of the process (transactions). See attribute

message message A named synchronizing signal between two partners that can carry data values.

BPMN Terminology

iGrafx Reference

Definition

Using BPMN Diagrams 365

transaction business transaction

In BPMN, transactions refer to a pattern of message exchange between cooperating partners that is not considered complete until all partners agree that it has completed successfully. Any partner can cancel the business transaction, and all partners must be prepared to reverse any action taken by the transaction that was cancelled. The term was most likely derived from the notion of a database transaction, and can be compared to it. iGrafx 2006 refers to these as business transactions to distinguish them from simulation transactions. See transaction.

ad-hoc ad-hoc An activity, usually a subprocess, that is marked as not proceeding in a predetermined order. While the activity cannot be sequenced in any predefined way, a condition is defined so it can be determined when the ad-hoc activity is completed. Typically, ad-hoc subprocesses will have no or limited sequence flow.

BPMN Terminology

iGrafx Reference

Definition

366 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 16iGrafx 2006 is a software environment for process mapping, process modeling, and process

simulation.

The mapping, modeling, and simulation features of iGrafx 2006 let you draw a process diagram, create a process model, define one or more simulation scenarios, simulate the process, and then review the process results in a simulation report. This chapter gives you a brief introduction to process mapping, modeling, and simulation concepts and briefly introduces some of the iGrafx 2006 capabilities.

Process Mapping OverviewIn process mapping you graphically describe a process through the creation of a process diagram (sometimes referred to as a process map or flowchart). A process diagram is a graphical representation of a process containing activities, directed connector lines, and departments. The generator start point is indicated with a in the Start activity by default.

A simple process diagram

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 367

Activities in a Process Diagram

In a process diagram, activities represent the work performed by the process and can be configured to do anything. Activities appear as shapes in a diagram where certain shapes can represent specific kinds of activities in a process.

Container shapes are activities with the Container Shape property set on the General page of the Properties dialog box. By default, container shapes are indicated by a dashed-line border. For more information, see Working With Container Shapes on page 53.

Directed Connector Lines

Directed connector lines are lines with arrows on one end. They connect activities together and represent the flow of the process in the direction of the arrow. Lines entering activities are inputs to the activities. Lines exiting activities are outputs from the activities.

Departments

Departments, sometimes referred to as swimlanes®, describe areas of responsibility within a process. A department consists of a name area containing the department name and a process area containing the department’s activities. Activities that appear in the process area of a department are the

A shape representing the starting activity of a process.

A shape representing an activity or a subprocess.

A shape representing a decision activity.

Directed connector lines show process flow.

368 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

responsibility of that department. Activities that cross department boundaries represent shared responsibility between the departments.

For more information about departments, see About Departments and Floating Departments on page 33.

Process Modeling OverviewIt is important to understand that during process simulation, activities process transactions and use resources. Therefore, in process modeling, you expand your process diagram by describing how each activity processes transactions and by identifying the resources they need to process the transactions.

When you run a simulation on your model, each activity behaves according to its assigned properties. The results of a simulation are recorded in a simulation report. You can view the simulation report to determine the impact of each activity (as well as several other factors) on the overall cycle time and cost of the process.

Activities

Activities, represented as shapes in the process diagram, are the steps of the process. The directed connector lines between the activities represent the flow of transactions between activities and therefore show the sequencing of the activities during simulation. In process modeling, you describe

Department areas

Activities process transactions and use resources.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 369

how activities process transactions by assigning properties to each activity. Some of the key properties you assign to an activity are:

• Task–Describes the basic behavior of tasks within an activity. Activities can perform work, insert delay in the process, or represent other processes. You can also specify how a task is handled when it leaves an activity.

• Resources–Describes the labor, equipment, or other resources needed by the activity to perform its task.

• Inputs–Describes what conditions need to be true before transactions enter an activity.

• On Completion–Describes what actions are taken after the activity completes but before the transactions leave.

• Outputs–Describes how transactions exit an activity and specifies exceptional output flows.

Transactions

The primary behavior of a process model is that the activities of the model perform work on transactions. Transactions are objects that flow through a process and represent such things as an order form in an order entry process, or a component in a manufacturing assembly line.

Transactions are introduced into processes by generators. They flow from activity to activity along paths represented by directed connector lines. Transactions are inputs to and outputs from an activity. The outputs of one activity are input transactions to the next activity.

As transactions flow through a process, they may be transformed by the activities of the process. For example, in an automobile assembly process, input transactions to the Assemble Engine activity are the parts needed to assemble the engine. The output of the activity is the assembled engine. The assembled engine may then serve as an input transaction to an activity that assembles the auto.

Activities may take time to process a transaction. Time costs money. One of the primary objectives of process modeling and simulation is to measure the time and costs associated with a process. With iGrafx 2006 you can define length of time (duration) that each activity takes to process a transaction and assign costs both to activities and to the resources used at the activities. You can also specify exceptions to the output flow, such as throwing a fault under certain abnormal or unexpected conditions.

Activities process transactions.

370 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

When an activity completes normally, the transaction moves to the next activity or activities along one or more of the normal output paths, depending on decisions the activity makes or parallel work opportunities that may exist. However, sometime the activity may need to be ended prematurely because something happens. For example, an activity may have a deadline it needs to meet, and if that doesn’t happen, it is terminated and the transaction is escalated to a manager’s attention. In this case, the activity is immediately stopped, the normal output path or paths are not taken, and one exceptional path is taken instead.

Resources

Activities may need resources to process transactions. A resource is a person, machine, or other asset used to process a transaction. When multiple transactions are processed, activities can contend for resources.

In your model, you can define resources to represent such things as labor and equipment, and also define which resources are used by which activities in the model. For each type of resource in your model you can define the quantity of the resource available, the resource behavior, and resource schedule.

Time

One of the most common objectives of process modeling and simulation is to measure the time a process takes to execute. In a simulation, time is usually measured as the time required for a transaction to move through a process. These time measurements typically include the time required for each activity to process a transaction, and the time a transaction spends waiting in a queue to enter an activity, or waiting for a necessary resource to become available. This is usually referred to as cycle time.

With iGrafx 2006, you can simulate a process to determine the resulting range of cycle times. You can then make changes to your model and run additional simulations to determine the impact of your changes on cycle time.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 371

Cost

Another common objective of process modeling and simulation is to measure process or transaction cost.You can assign costs to activities and to resources. Activity cost is usually a fixed cost while resource cost can be fixed, per hour, per use, or a combination of the three. During a simulation, costs are accumulated and reported by transaction, by activity or group of activities (department/process/overall), and by resource.

Time and cost are closely related and you may find yourself trading one off for the other. For example, if you want to reduce processing time, you may add additional resources, but this may have the effect of increasing processing cost. On the other hand, you may reduce cost by reducing resources, but this may increase processing time. One of the great benefits of iGrafx 2006 is to easily make these trade-offs and determine their impacts.

The Process Guide

If you are new to modeling in iGrafx 2006, the Process Guide can help you simplify the task of building your model. The Process Guide, available from the Properties dialog box, provides simple shortcuts to setting the type of activity.

The Process Guide

372 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Process Guide offers shortcuts to setting the following activity types:

Using the Details button on the Process page of the Properties dialog box, you can quickly jump to the more extensive modeling pages for enhanced definition in context.

This activity type... Sets these parameters...

Activity Duration, Cost, and Resource options

Decision Path information

Delay Duration and Cost options

Subprocess Process Name

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 373

The Modeling and Simulation EnvironmentThe interface to the iGrafx 2006 mapping, modeling, and simulation facilities is through three main windows:

• The Process window

• The Scenario window

• The Report window

The relationship between these three windows is shown in the following diagram:

When you run a simulation, iGrafx 2006 takes as input, the information you define through the Process and Scenario windows, executes a simulation and displays the results in the Report window.

Relationship between windows.

374 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

In iGrafx 2006 you can define multiple processes, multiple scenarios, and multiple reports in a single file. The following diagram shows the three windows in a single iGrafx session:

The Process Window

You use the Process window to define, view, and edit your process diagrams.

A process model may consist of one or more process diagrams. You can view each process diagram in separate Process windows. You can view process diagrams in either graphical or tabular form.

The Process, Scenario, and Report Windows

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 375

The Scenario Window

You can view scenario information using the Scenario window. This window contains a section for each category of data in a scenario. Click on a labeled + button to expand the information under a category. You can double-click specific entries in a category to display a dialog box for modifying scenario data.

You can define one or more scenarios for your process model and you can view each scenario in separate Scenario windows. However, in contrast to process diagrams, only one scenario–the current scenario–is used for simulation.

Note

You can access information in the current scenario window directly using the Model toolbar or the Model menu. You can also view generators and monitors in the Model bar.

The Report Window

You use the Report window to view and edit simulation reports. You can create separate simulation reports for each simulation run or you can place the results of multiple simulations into a single report.

The Report window displays portions of the statistical results as tables or graphs in various ways you specify. The provided default set of report elements is often useful, but you can add, remove, or modify them as needed.

A Report window opens automatically after each successful simulation run. You can also reopen and display one or more Report windows via the iGrafx Explorer bar.

376 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Process Data OverviewThis section discusses basic data entry. Basic data is the type of data you might capture as you initially create a process diagram. When reading this section, refer to the following sample process diagram.

Shape Properties

Each shape in a process diagram may have behavior. You describe the behavior for each shape by entering data through the Properties dialog box.

A sample process diagram.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 377

Viewing the Properties Dialog Box

To open the Properties dialog box, double-click an activity shape.

or

Right-click an activity shape, and click Properties on the context menu.

The Properties dialog box has several pages in separate categories for defining basic and complex activity behaviors.

• Guide:

• Process–A modeling shortcut for users who are new to simulation.

Note

Other diagram types, such as Lean, may have specific pages that appear. For more information, see Using Value Stream Maps on page 327.

The Properties dialog box

378 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• Modeling:

• Inputs–An activity has some number of paths of information that arrive by way of incoming connector lines. The inputs may be joined, batched, or not collected, but gated by a variety of input conditions.

• Resources–A resource is a person, machine, or other asset that may be used at the activity. An activity can use several resources at one time, or none (by removing all resources).

• Task–The Step tab specifies task information covering the duration of time the transaction is processed. The On Completion tab describes a final action, such as duplicate transactions or unbatch a set of transactions.

• Outputs–The Normal tab creates decision cases or conditional outputs from an activity. The Exceptions tab creates exception outputs, such as Timer or Fault, that specify conditions under which the activity is not completed and an alternative output is taken.

• Attributes–Attributes store data, and may be examined, defined, or modified in an Activity.

• Last Simulation–Displays information about previous model results.

• Basic:

• General–Specifies general information about the shape, such as resizing and note text.

• Custom Data–User defined data that can be accumulated for a diagram or between linked diagrams.

• Links–Indicates links and specifies changes and additions to links from the selected shape.

• Enterprise–Displays Risks, Measurements, Requirements, Goals, and Strategies added to a shape or diagram. Enterprise objects are imported from an enterprise model using the iGrafx Process Central Synchronizer. Risks and Measurements can be added without referencing objects from an enterprise model.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 379

The Properties dialog box supports the description of basic and complex behaviors. This section focuses on basic behaviors and the most common forms of shape data. These fundamental forms of data may be displayed on the process diagram as fields and they may be used for analysis.

• Resources (Resource page)

• Activity Duration (Task page, Step tab)

• Activity Value Class (Task page, Step tab)

• Decision Information (Outputs page, Normal tab)

• Case Text (Outputs page, Normal tab)

• Exceptions Flow (Outputs page, Exceptions tab)

Even if you do not execute simulation you may receive a file with simulation data in it, in which case you will want to understand the implications of the data.

Diagram-Level Properties

Properties can be set at the shape level, as described above, or at the diagram level. For example, when you right-click on a Lean value stream map and choose Value Stream Map Properties from the context menu, the Properties dialog box opens. When you set diagram-level properties using the Properties dialog box, the diagram name is included in the title bar of the dialog box.

Resource Data

Every activity shape placed in the diagram specifies by default that one resource named Worker must be used to perform the task. Worker is a special labor type resource built into the model. To learn more about resources and how to define your own resources, see Defining Activity Resources Requirements on page 424.

Resources are not required to be used at an activity; all resources may be removed if desired. Decision shapes and start shapes on the toolbar already have the resource removed. It is also usually undesirable to have a resource on an activity that you connect into a subprocess.

380 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Viewing Resource Data

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Resources page.

Note

To remove a resource, click Delete.

Task Data

This section focuses on basic and the most common forms of Task data.

• Task Duration

• Task Value Classification

The Resources page in the Properties dialog box

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 381

Viewing Task Data

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page and click the Step tab.

Work Duration

The duration of an activity is the time the activity consumes. The duration is applied to Work or to Delay. The time units may be in seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, or years. The smallest resolution is one microsecond. You can mix different time units on different shapes (for example, one task can take three hours and another four seconds) and they will be calculated correctly. By default, the duration is zero.

Work and Delay are managed and reported independently in simulation results.

• An example of Work duration is the time it takes a person to send a fax (e.g. 5 Minutes)

• An example of Delay is the time it takes to get a response from a fax (e.g. between 2 and 4 Hours).

Defining a task as Work is the most common use of Duration.

The Step tab on the Task page in the Properties dialog box

382 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Specifying a Work Duration

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Task page and select the Step tab.

3 In the Task list, click Work. To define a constant duration, enter a number and unit of time. For example: 2 minutes. To conveniently define a distributed duration, click Distributed, enter a number and unit of time. For example, between 1 and 3 minutes. You may also choose the type of distribution. A distributed duration may be a uniform distribution or a normal distribution. In a uniform distribution, all values have an equal chance of occurring. A normal distribution follows a normal distribution (or “bell”) curve. A more extensive range of distribution is available using the expression.

4 To define a duration using an expression, click Expression and enter the desired expression or use the expression builder. For more information, see The Expression Builder on page 486.

5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

For more information about functions you can use, see System Defined Functions in the iGrafx help system.

Delay Duration

You can specify that a Task is Delay, which also has a Duration associated with it. A Delay duration is counted as blocked time by default. As with Work, you may choose whether the Delay is a constant or distributed value.

• Constant- Fill in a delay value and the unit of time. For example: 10 minutes.

• Distributed- Set the range and the unit of time (for example, between 1 and 4 hours). The uniform and normal distributions are the same as for Work; equal chance or bell curve.

• Expression- Use an expression to specify the delay value and unit of time.

Specifying a Delay Duration

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Task page and select the Step tab.

3 In the Task list, click Delay. To conveniently define a constant duration, enter a number and the unit of time. To conveniently define a distributed duration, click Distributed, enter a distribution type number, and the unit of time. Just like Work duration, you can choose a type. For a complete description, see Work Duration on page 382.

4 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 383

Value Class

Each Task may be assigned a Value Class. General definitions for Value Class are:

• VA (Value Added)- The activity is required and contributes to the creation or delivery of a product or service.

• BVA (Business Value Added)- The activity is required by the business, but the task does not contribute directly to the product or service.

• NVA (Non Value Added)- The activity is not required for the creation or delivery of the product or service.

Different people use different reference points for defining Value Class. You are free to use whatever definition or reference point you desire in determining whether a task is Value Added, Business Value Added, or Non Value Added.

In iGrafx 2006, you can mark a resource used at an activity by Value Class. When simulation is run, cost information is segmented into VA, BVA, and NVA value classes.

Assigning a Value Class to an Activity

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Task page.

3 In the Value list, click VA, BVA, or NVA.

4 Click OK.

Viewing Value Class

1 On the View menu, click Value Class. The View Value Classifications dialog box opens.

2 Click the classifications you would like to display and select a corresponding color.

3 Click OK.

The View Value Classifications dialog box

384 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The value class assigned to each shape may be displayed on each shape as a color filled on the shape. This fill overrides any format fills you may have placed on the shape; however, it may be turned on and turned off.

Output Data

You can use the Normal tab of the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box to display simple and complex output behaviors.

Decision Data

Use the Normal tab on the Outputs page to define a decision for an activity shape. By default, the diamond shape on the Toolbox toolbar is a decision activity; however, any shape you desire can be defined as a decision.

Defining Decision Percentages

To define the percentage chance a transaction will take a particular decision case:

1 Double-click a decision shape such as Examine Patient and Classify.

2 Select the Outputs page and click the Normal tab.

3 Choose Decision from the drop-down list.

4 To specify custom case labels, click Other in the Case Text list.

Note

You can create a custom case text type by clicking the Create/Modify Types icon next to the Case Text drop-down list and entering the information in the Define Types dialog box. For more information, see see Decision Output Option on page 455.

5 Enter each custom case label as desired.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 385

6 Enter the percentage for each case. iGrafx calculates the percentages for any cases not entered. The sum of the statistical percentages must always add up to 100%.

7 Click OK.

Note

Using the example above, you can specify multiple cases and use a scroll bar to navigate and enter the remaining percentages.

Conditional Outputs

Named outputs specify that transactions leave an activity following one or more named output and can be paths based on specified conditions.

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Outputs page and click the Normal tab.

3 Choose Named Outputs from the drop-down list.

4 In the Case Text list, click Other if you do not want to use pre-defined labels.

5 Select the Conditional check box if paths should only be taken based on an expression. If the Conditional check box is not selected, all paths are taken as the transaction leaves the activity, which is to say they are duplicated.

The Normal tab on the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box

386 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

6 Enter an expression and optionally assign attributes for each path as required. For a path that should always be taken, you can enter True as the value of the expression. For more information, see The Expression Builder on page 486.

7 In the Default drop-down list, select the default path of the decision output.

Shape Data

Data contained within the Properties dialog box of each shape or activity is referred to as shape data. You can display shape data on the process diagram as field text.

Displaying Shape Data

1 Select one or more shapes.

2 On the Format menu, click Fields.

3 In the Shape Fields dialog box, click New Field.

A shape with shape number and duration.

The Shape Fields dialog box

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 387

4 In the New Field dialog box, select a field category from the Field Type menu by clicking the + symbol in front of a category name.

or

Double-click the category text.

5 Click a field name.

6 Click OK to return to the Shape Fields dialog box.

The New Field dialog box

388 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

7 To select a location for the field, click a position indicated by the small diamonds in the Location box

Note

The rectangle in the Location section of the dialog box represents the selection rectangle for the shape on the process diagram. If the field is positioned outside that rectangle, you can move the field on the process diagram by clicking and dragging on the field text.

8 To include a predefined description of the field, click the Include Description box.

9 Click OK.

Hierarchy OverviewiGrafx 2006 allows multiple diagrams or processes in a single file. For purposes of discussion in this section, a process is a single Process type diagram.

You may have multiple diagrams in a single file; there is no practical limit. Diagrams in the same file may be linked such that transactions move from one diagram to another during simulation. The

The Shape Fields dialog box with shape numbering and duration selected.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 389

diagrams have a hierarchical structure and the lower-level diagram is a subprocess to one or more higher-level processes.

Conceptually, hierarchy might be depicted as a tree or graph. Processes and subprocesses might be displayed on the screen at the same time. You can use the Properties dialog box to create hierarchy in a process diagram.

Managing Process Diagrams

There are several ways to manipulate processes in a file. The Explorer bar in the application and the Task page in the Properties dialog box let you view, create, and assign processes in a file.

Viewing Diagram Hierarchy

1 From the View menu, choose Explorer Bar to display the Explorer bar if it is not visible.

2 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click the Document Components tab.

3 Click one of the following:

• All Components–Shows all the components.

• Diagram Hierarchy–Shows a hierarchical view.

• Diagrams, by Contained Departments–Shows a view of diagrams sorted by the departments each contains.

• Links–Shows diagrams containing links.

Hierarchy of Processes

390 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Creating a New Process Using the Task Page

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Task page and click the Step tab.

3 In the Task list, click Process.

4 Click the New Process button.

5 In the New Component dialog box, type a new process name.

6 Click OK. The new process is created and linked to this shape.

7 Click OK. The shape now has an indicator of the link. By default, this link style is a shadow in process diagrams.

Displaying Subprocesses

Press the Shift key, and double-click a subprocess shape.

or

Right-click the shape, and click the name of the process at the bottom of the context menu.

Renaming a Process

1 In the Explorer bar, right-click the process to be renamed, and click Rename on the context menu.

2 Type a new name, and press Enter.

Creating a New Process Using the Explorer Bar

1 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click the Document Components tab.

2 Right-click the component area in the Explorer bar, point to New, and click Process on the context menu.

3 In the New Component dialog box, type a new process name.

4 Click OK.

Note

Processes that are created using the Explorer bar are not linked to the hierarchy. To link processes together so that a process may be made a subprocess of another process, use the Step tab of Task page in the Properties dialog.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 391

Copying a Process Within A Document

1 In the Explorer bar, right-click the process to be copied, and click Copy on the context menu. The process is copied to the clipboard.

2 In the Explorer bar, right-click the component area, and click Paste. The copied process appears in the Process list with a new name, such as Process2.

Copying a Process Between Documents

1 In the Explorer bar, right-click the process to be copied, and click Copy. The process is copied to the clipboard.

2 On the File menu, click Open, and open another iGrafx document.

3 In the opened document, right-click the component area in the Explorer bar, and click Paste on the context menu. The copied process appears in the Process list.

Note

The copied process is renamed only if there is a conflict with an existing process in the file.

Deleting a Process

1 In the Explorer bar, right-click the process you want to delete, and click Delete. A message box opens warning you deleting a process is not undoable; it cannot be undone.

2 Click OK.

392 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Running Simulation and Viewing ResultsAfter you create the process model, you are ready to define your simulation environment and run the simulation.

How Simulation Works

Before running a simulation, it is a good idea to understand how a simulation works and why it is so useful. The iGrafx 2006 simulator is a discrete-event simulator meaning that it performs tasks based on the occurrence of specific simulation events which occur at points of time on a simulation timeline.

The simulator moves from event to event and processes each event until all events are processed. This simulates events happening in real time. Since the intervening time between events is skipped, simulation compresses real time dramatically. The real time represented during a simulation is called “calendar time.” The time a simulation actually took to complete all events reported in calendar time is called “simulation time.”

There are two types of simulation events:

• Scheduled Events- These events occur only at scheduled times. The introduction of a transaction into a process is a good example of a scheduled event. Scheduled events can cause conditional events to occur.

• Conditional Events- These events occur only when certain conditions have been met, or certain other events have occurred.

Note

Simulation events are internal to the iGrafx simulator and should not be confused with modeling events.

In discrete event simulation, there is a distinction between calendar time and simulation time (sometime referred to as the clock). For example, a process may contain activities whose total duration is in minutes hours, days, months, or even years. This is the calendar time for the process. Obviously, it would not be practical for an actual simulation to run in calendar time. A discrete event simulation only runs as long as is necessary to process all of the simulation events.This is the simulation time.

Simulation events move along a predescribed path in real time.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 393

For example, you might specify a step which takes two weeks. When you run the simulator, it may only take two seconds to complete and get results. Therefore, calendar time = two weeks, and simulation time = two seconds. To allow analysis, the results provided in the report are based on calendar time.

During simulation, the iGrafx simulator uses the model data to establish a timeline of scheduled events. The simulator then moves down the timeline to the first scheduled event, processes it, and updates any relevant statistics. The simulator checks for and processes all conditional events and then moves on to the next event in the timeline. The simulator continues moving down the timeline processing events and until the final event is reached, at which point it generates a final report and ends the simulation.

Describing the Simulation Environment

To simulate a process you must define a simulation scenario which describes the environment in which the simulation runs. It is often useful to keep more than one scenario in the model, perhaps as-is and a proposal versions. The key data in the scenario include the following:

Simulation Process Flow

394 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Generators

Generators introduce transactions into the process at designated start points (usually the first activity). A start point with a generator attached is indicated in the diagram with a lightening bolt in the upper left corner. With generators you can set the rate at which transactions enter the process. You can think of the generator as the driving force behind the process. For example, each generated transaction can represent a customer submitting an order or a another product being manufactured.

Resources

For each simulation scenario you can vary the number, availability, and cost of resources. When you run the simulation, you can view the simulation results to analyze the impact of resources on process cycle time and cost.

Run Setup

Run Setup is a section of the scenario that controls the simulation calendar duration, directs where to store simulation results and defines snapshots. A snapshot is a defined time when data accumulation in the report occurs. By default, data is captured in the report at the end of simulation. Using snapshots enables you to capture data at other points during simulation.

Simulation

When you run a simulation, the iGrafx 2006 simulator uses information from the process model and one process scenario to execute the simulation. The output of the run is a report containing statistical results of the simulation

You have your choice of two simulation modes:

• Trace mode–Lets you interact with a simulation. The simulation time is tuned so that you can watch the movement of transactions through the process during simulation. This represents a simple form of animation.

• Run mode–The simulation runs in the background and executes in true simulation time (i.e., much more quickly than trace mode.)

Reports

The results of a simulation run are placed in a simulation report. The report contains a sampling of the statistics accumulated during the simulation run. You view a sampling of the report through the Report window.

Process Mapping, Modeling, and Simulation 395

Statistics are sorted by category and appear on separate tabbed pages of the report. The report includes five categories of statistics:

• Time–Time measurements such as cycle time and working time.

• Cost–Cost measurements such as transaction costs and resource utilization.

• Resource–Measurement related to cost and use of resources.

• Queue–Queuing or bottleneck measurements such a number of transactions waiting in a queue at an activity.

• Custom–A scratchpad area to copy or create desired report elements.

These categories are only suggestions and categorize the default Report window. You can place any report element on any tab of the report.

Statistics appear on a report as a report element. A report element is a table of data with a descriptive header.

Each report contains a set of predefined report elements. You can customize the appearance of the predefined report elements or you can create your own report elements. You can also create graphs to display the results of a simulation.

A report element–Passing the cursor over the table headings enables descriptive tool tips.

A pie graph representing the same information.

396 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining Process Behavior 17

Your process model consists of a set of activities that process transactions. Transactions can be a

person performing a task or an object moving through a process, such as a loan application in a bank loan process. These transactions flow from activity to activity through the directed connector lines that create a path through the process.

Defining a process involves first graphically describing the process through the creation of a process diagram or map. For more information on creating process diagrams, see Creating a Process Diagram (Map or Flowchart) in the iGrafx online help system.

About the Properties Dialog BoxAfter you have created a process diagram, you begin creating a process model by describing the behavior of the process. Behavior is associated with the activities of the process. To define activity behavior, use the Properties dialog box. The Process page provides a shortcut for setting properties for shapes in a process diagram. Use the Process page, also called the Process Guide, as a quick start for setting Task Step, Task On Completion, Resource, and Outputs properties at a high level.

Defining Process Behavior 397

Note

If you are creating a BPMN-compliant process model, the BPMN Guide is available to help you accomplish basic modeling. For more information, see Using the BPMN Guide on page 356.

If you are creating a Lean VSM diagram, the Lean Data page is available for easy entry of basic data elements. For more information, see Using Value Stream Maps on page 327.

The Properties dialog box

398 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

To open the Properties dialog box, double-click an activity shape, or right-click an activity shape, and click Properties on the context menu.

The Properties dialog box contains a separate page for each of the behaviors that you can assign to an activity. For each activity in a process you can define the following:

Opening the Properties dialog box from the shape context menu

Behavior Purpose

Inputs Every transaction entering an activity, using one or more connector lines, is an input to that activity. Transactions can be collected at the input step prior to being processed by the activity.

Resources A resource is a person, machine, or other asset used to process a transaction. When multiple transactions are processed, they can contend for resources.

Task Task refers to how an activity processes a transaction. Task Step information includes the activity’s duration, cost, and capacity. Task On Completion information specifies what will occur when the transaction completes the task.

Defining Process Behavior 399

More on TransactionsTransactions are entities that move through the process model representing people performing tasks or objects in a process. Because a transaction can represent different things at different times in the process, you have the ability to duplicate it into multiple transactions and join duplicated transactions back together. Transactions have specific constraints and can be treated as part of a family of transactions.

Use the Properties dialog box to specify the behavior of transactions when they enter or leave an activity, such as joining or duplicating transactions.

For more on transactions, see the following discussions on page 400 through page 402.

Joining Transactions

Transactions join when an activity takes multiple transactions as inputs and collects them into one transaction. When transactions join, they are collected and combined into a new single transaction. The new joined transaction inherits the attribute values from the transaction at the top of the input queue. Statistics from the original transactions are aggregated into the new joined transaction. Joined

Outputs Outputs are transactions that leave an activity. Every transaction leaving an activity, through a connector line, is an input to another activity. If no connector line leaves an activity, the transaction completes. You can specify both Normal and Exception output paths.

Attributes Attributes are variables used to communicate information and manage the flow of transactions through a process.

Last Simulation Provides summary statistics about activities during a process simulation run. They are available only after you run a simulation.

General General data describes shape properties and behaviors. Enter or edit notes, view the Object ID, and specify shape behaviors on the General page of the Properties dialog box.

Links Create a link from a shape to a diagram, file or web page, or Process Central repository item.

Custom Data You can define custom data to collect statistics, for example, to perform a statistical analysis on a process.

Behavior Purpose

400 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

transactions enter an activity when join conditions are met. For more information on joining inputs, see Joining Transactions At an Activity on page 413.

Duplicating Transactions

A transaction is automatically duplicated when any activity, other than a decision activity, has more than one output path. Copies of the transaction are sent out each output path. In BPMN diagrams, activities with duplicate transactions following more than one output path are called forks, whereas activities with duplicate transactions that follow one output path are called decisions.

Duplicating transactions is done explicitly by specifying the Duplicate or Duplicate by Member options on the On Completion tab of the Task page in the Properties dialog box of an activity (Creating Duplicate Transactions On Completionsee Creating Duplicate Transactions On Completion on page 448).

When you duplicate transactions, the following happens:

• One or more duplicate transactions are created.

• All of the transactions are assigned to the same family.

• The duplicate transactions have the same attribute assignments as the original transaction, except when the Duplicate by Member option is used.

• The new transactions share any resources previously acquired.

It is important to know that when you explicitly duplicate transactions, a copy of each duplicated transaction is sent out each Normal output path of the activity. For example, if you specify Duplicate with a count of two for an activity with two output paths, a transaction entering the activity is first duplicated into two transactions, and then each duplicate is sent out both output paths so that four transactions actually leave the activity.

Note

Because of this behavior, you do not normally both duplicate a transaction at a single activity.

Defining Process Behavior 401

Transaction Flow Constraints

A transaction ordinarily moves as far along the process from activity to activity as it can. However, transactions can be held up due to any of the following conditions.

• The transaction has work to do (at an activity, for example)

• The transaction must wait for a resource to continue

• A transaction must wait for some other constraint (e.g., waiting in an activity input queue)

A transaction is finished when one of these conditions is met:

• A transaction reaches an endpoint. A transaction moves until it reaches an activity that does not have any outgoing connector lines. (In the case of a transaction that is in a subprocess, the transaction returns to its original process until it reaches an endpoint.) A transaction finishing at an endpont is considered a completed transaction.

• When the simulation time runs out. Any transactions left in the middle of the process flow are stopped and do not count as completed transactions. However, a transaction stopped in this manner is still counted as part of the statistical calculations for any activity or resource that processed it before the simulation time ran out.

• A transaction is manually discarded. On the Outputs page in the Properties dialog, you can specify that an activity discards transactions. Discarded transactions are still included in the statistics for any activity or resource that processed them.

Transaction Families

A transaction family is a set of transactions originating from the same transaction. For example, in an order entry process, a copy of the order form may be sent to the manufacturing, shipping, and billing departments to be processed in parallel by those departments. When a transaction is duplicated in this manner, all of the newly created transactions are assigned to the same family as the original transaction. This designation lets you manipulate the members of a family.

After a family is created, any duplicate transactions in the process flow creates new members of the original transaction family. Transactions typically stay in the same family unless you duplicate them into a new family.

402 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining Activity InputsEvery transaction entering an activity is an input to that activity. Transactions enter an activity in one of three ways:

1 by way of incoming connector lines;

2 by start point (either a generator is assigned to a start point name, or a parent process sends transactions to an activity with the start point name in the child process);

3 or by generating transactions using the current shape.

The Inputs page in the Properties dialog box lets you define an activity as a starting point where transactions can be introduced into a process. It also lets you define how transactions are collected after entering an activity and the Queuing Rules that set the order in which transactions are collected.

About Start Points

A start point is an activity in the process diagram where transactions are introduced. When you create a new process diagram, a shape labeled Start automatically appears as the first activity in a

The Inputs page in the Properties dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 403

department named Dept. 1. This is the default starting point for introducing transactions into the process.

A generator for introducing transactions into the process is automatically created and assigned to this start point. You can modify this generator to suit the needs of your model (see Modifying a Generator on page 514).

A process may have multiple start points. For example, suppose you want to simulate the introduction of transactions from different locations and at varying rates. To do this you could create multiple start points and assign a generator to each one. You must give each starting point a unique name. Generators are assigned to start points based on the start point name.

Note

Only the default start point has a generator automatically assigned to it. If you add additional start points, you must define and assign generators to them.

You can move the start point to a different department or location, or, like other shapes, you can change its text, shape, or activity data.

Note

Every process must have a least one start point. If you delete the default start point, you must define a new one.

Defining a Start Point Using a Generator

1 Double-click the activity that represents the start.

2 Select the Inputs page.

3 Choose Using a Start Point from the Introduce Transactions drop-down list.

4 Expand the Start Point Name list to view a list of start points already defined.

The default start point

404 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 Type a new start point name or choose a name from the list. If you choose a name already in use, the activity labeled with that start point is no longer defined to be a start point.

6 Click the Modify Generator Attributes button and use the Generators dialog box to set up the generator. For more information, see Using Generators on page 511.

7 Click OK.

Normally, you would define and assign a generator to a new start point. In some instances you would not assign a generator to a start point. For example, suppose you have a subprocess that is called by a parent process. Transactions are passed from the parent process to the subprocess, therefore, a generator is not needed at the start point of the subprocess (see Calling a Subprocess, Concurrent Process, or Private Subprocess on page 444).

Generating Transactions Using the Shape

When you introduce transactions using the current shape, you create and introduce transactions into the activity when the specified condition is triggered. For example, By Expression option generates a transaction at this activity when the specified expression results to true.

Using a generator to define a start point

Defining Process Behavior 405

You can use this method of defining a start point to specify correct BPMN simulation behavior of a Start event.

1 Double-click the activity that represents the start.

2 Select the Inputs page.

3 Choose Generate Here from the Introduce Transactions drop-down list.

4 Choose an option from the Create Transactions At Input drop-down list. Dialog box options change when you specify a different trigger for creating transactions.

• A condition must evaluate to true to trigger creation of a transaction by expression.

• An event (such as every Monday) or a period of time (such as every 20 minutes) can trigger creation of a transaction by time.

• A message received by the current shape can trigger creation of a transaction by message.

5 Click OK.

You can use the Inputs page to collect transactions after input. Collecting transactions by expression, for example, specifies that the transactions continue through the process when a condition is true. However, you cannot collect transactions when you choose to introduce transactions on the activity (for example, when Introduce Transactions is set).

Using the current shape to introduce transactions by expression

406 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Locating a Start Point

Often the start is the first shape in the first department, although any shape or activity can be a start point. Also, a process can have multiple start points. Shapes with start points display a start indicator.

To locate a particular start point by name:

1 On the Model menu, click Find Start.

2 In the Find Start Point dialog box, select the name of the starting point that you are verifying.

3 Click OK.

About Input Collections

Input collections specify the method of collecting transactions at the input to an activity. Transactions do not enter an activity until the conditions of the input collection are met. There are four types of input collections: join, batch, group, and gate.

You can specify how incoming transactions are collected:

All–Collects incoming transactions, regardless of family.

Same Family–The input applies to the transactions in the same family.

Once per Family–Limits the number of transactions collected to the number of transactions specified and only once per family. All subsequent family members to reach this step are consumed.

Note

If you do not specify an input collection, transactions enter an activity immediately upon arriving.

Defining Process Behavior 407

Collection Description

Batch Collects transactions into a single master transaction. The master transaction enters an activity when a batch condition is met. The individual transactions are preserved and can later be unbatched.

The new master transaction takes on the attribute values of the transaction at the top of the queue. The master transaction also owns any shared resources. If an unbatch occurs before the resources are released, then the individual transactions share the resources.

Examples:

• Send all orders after twenty are accumulated

• Collect six cans into each carton

Join Collects multiple transactions into one transaction. The single transaction enters an activity when a join condition is met. The other individual transactions are eliminated, and any transaction attribute information on these transactions is lost.

Examples:

• Combine related work back together

• Submit all completed items at one time

• Combine all approved documents back into one

• Assemble subsystems into a whole system.

Gate Collects transactions until a gating condition is met. When the condition is met, the gate opens and each transaction (starting with the current head of the queue) enters the activity.

Examples:

• Hold all money orders until they are processed individually once a week

• Hold all shipments until 4:00 p.m. when they are loaded on appropriate trucks based on destination.

Group Collects transactions into a named group of transactions. Transactions are allowed to enter an activity individually, but are tagged with a group name, that may be collected later, or used to acquire resources as a group.

408 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Batching Inputs

Use batch collections to queue incoming transactions before processing them as a single transaction. Batching allows all transactions to maintain their identity whereas Joining eliminates individual transactions. Batched transactions can be unbatched later and processed individually. Batching is one of the most common methods of collecting inputs because it models so many real world situations. For example:

• Placing clay pots in an oven to fire.

• Placing documents in a folder.

• Loading automobiles on a rail car or trailer for shipment.

Batched transactions can also be further batched. In this case, each individual transaction still maintains it’s identity. For example:

• Placing cans of soda in a carton and then loading cartons of soda on a palette.

• Loading cars on a rail car and then collecting rail cars into a train.

Creating a Batch Collection

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Inputs page.

3 Select the Collect Transactions At Input check box.

4 In the Input Collection list, click Batch.

Defining Process Behavior 409

5 In the adjacent list, click a collection method.

There are several methods for collecting transactions into a batch collection.

The Inputs page of the Properties dialog box with Batching options selected

410 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Collection Method Description

By Count Transactions are collected until a number is reached, then all transactions enter the activity as a unit. The number can be a constant or an expression.

This option also lets you specify a Maximum Wait Time and a Minimum Count. Maximum wait time specifies the length of the time the activity will wait for the specified count to be reached. If the wait time expires, the minimum count specifies the minimum number of transactions to allow to proceed into the activity. If the minimum count is not reached, any transactions in the queue will continue to wait.

By Expression Transactions are collected until the condition given by an expression is met, then all transactions enter the activity as a unit. The expression is evaluated for each transaction in the collection. The condition for the expression may change for each transaction evaluated (see Working with Events on page 543).

Note

The number of queues at the activity vary based on the contents of the expression. If the expression contains only transaction attributes, there is a separate queue for each family of transactions. If the expression contains no attributes, or contains other types of attributes (e.g., scenario, process), then only a single queue exists and all transactions wait in a single line for the top transaction to enter the activity.

By Time Transactions are collected until a specified time is reached, then all transactions enter the activity as a unit. You specify time by choosing an event list.

By Message Transactions are batched until a specific message is received.

By Attr Member Transactions are collected until all of the members of a specified type associated with a specific transaction attribute are received, then all transactions enter the activity as a unit. Each transaction collected must have a unique value for the specified transaction attribute that matches each different member of the type.

The transaction attribute must have a type other than Value because the type must have a finite set of members.

Defining Process Behavior 411

Entire Family Transactions are collected until all transactions from the same family, or all transactions resulting from a duplicate, are received, then all transactions enter the activity as a unit.

Note

Transactions are collected until all family members that can arrive at the activity actually do arrive. Transactions in the family that can never arrive are ignored.

Entire Group Transactions are collected until all members of a named group are received, then all transactions enter the activity as a unit.

Input Paths Transactions are collected until one transaction from each input path to the activity is received, then all transactions enter the activity as a unit.

Collection Method Description

412 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Joining Inputs

Use joining when you want to collect and then combine transactions. You may join inputs:

• After parallel work has been performed on duplicate transactions.

• When you want only one transaction to be considered as complete. If the duplicate transactions represent a single product or outcome, then you want to join the transactions back together.

Joining Transactions At an Activity

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Inputs page.

3 Select the Collect Transactions At Input check box.

4 In the Input Collection list, click Join.

The Inputs page in the Properties dialog box with Joining options selected

Defining Process Behavior 413

5 In the adjacent list, click a collection method.

Note

Join collection methods are the same as for the Batch option. See the table in the Batching Inputs section.

When transactions join, multiple transactions are collected and combined into a single transaction. The remaining single transaction, with aggregated statistics and merged or overwritten attribute information, enters the activity when the join condition is met.

For example, suppose an auto parts company receives an order and payment for a specific part. The transaction is duplicated so that it can be processed simultaneously. The order is joined for processing when both duplicated transactions are received.

Joining differs from batching in that the individual transactions are not preserved when they are joined into a single transaction. Collection methods for joining inputs are the same as for batch inputs. For more information about collection methods, see Batching Inputs on page 409.

Gating Inputs

Gated transactions are collected at an activity until a gating condition is met and the transaction at the head of the queue is allowed to enter the activity.

Use gating when you want to hold a number of transactions before processing each transaction individually. For example, shipping companies send all packages to a central processing facility where the packages are held until a certain time. Each package is then processed individually and sent to its appropriate destination.

Duplicating and joining transactions

414 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Creating a Gate Activity

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Inputs page.

3 Select the Collect Transactions At Input check box.

4 In the Input Collection list, click Gate.

5 In the adjacent list, click a collection method.

The following collections methods are available for gating inputs:

Collection Method Description

By Count Transactions are collected until a number is reached. When the number is reached, collected transactions enter the activity individually starting with the head of the queue. The number can be a constant or an expression.

By Expression Transactions are collected until the condition given by an expression is met. Individual transactions then enter the activity individually starting with the head of the queue.

The expression is evaluated for each transaction in the collection. The condition for the expression may change for each transaction evaluated.

Note

The number of queues at the activity vary based on the contents of the expression. If the expression contains only transaction attributes, there is a separate queue for each family of transactions. If the expression contains no attributes, or contains other types of attributes (e.g., scenario, process), then only a single queue exists and all transactions wait in a single line for the top transaction to enter the activity.

By Time Transactions are collected until a specified time is reached. Individual transactions then enter the activity individually starting with the head of the queue.

Defining Process Behavior 415

Grouping Inputs

Grouping is similar to batching but it creates a loose collection of transactions, under a common name, that can be re-collected later in the process. The transactions in the collection are still separate transactions. Grouping is a convenient way of collecting the same set of independent transactions in multiple places. However, it is worth noting that in most common modeling examples, you would use Batching instead of Grouping.

iGrafx 2006 provides a default group name that you can use for most common cases. However, you create a specific group name using the Define Transaction Groups dialog box. Later, you can re-collect the same set of transactions by using the Entire Group collection method.

By Attr Member Transactions are collected until all of the members of a specified type are received. Individual transactions then enter the activity one at a time. Each transaction collected must have a unique value that matches a different member of the type.

Transactions must have a type other than Value because the type must have a finite set of members.

Entire Family Transactions are collected until all transactions from the same family, or all transactions resulting from a duplicate, are received. When the entire family is collected, individual members (transactions) enter the activity individually starting with the head of the queue.

Note

Transactions are collected until all family members that can arrive at the activity actually do arrive. Transactions in the family that can never arrive are ignored.

Entire Group Transactions are collected until all members of a named group are received. Individual transactions then enter the activity individually starting with the head of the queue.

Input Paths Transactions are collected until one transaction from each input path to the activity is received. Individual transactions then enter the activity individually starting with the head of the queue.

Collection Method Description

416 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Adding or Deleting a Transaction Group

1 On the Model menu, click Transaction Groups. The Define Transaction Groups dialog box opens.

2 To create a group, type a name (up to 32 characters), and click Add.

3 To delete a group name, select the name from the list, and click Delete. You create a group collection at an activity using the Inputs page in the Properties dialog box. Transactions enter the activity individually and are marked with the group name as they leave the activity.

Creating a Group Collection

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Inputs page.

3 Select the Collect Transactions at Input check box.

4 In the Input Collection list, click Group.

5 In the adjacent list, click a collection method and appropriate options.

6 In the Create Group list, click a group name.

The Inputs page in the Properties dialog box with Grouping options selected

Defining Process Behavior 417

Queueing Transactions at Activities

When transactions collect at an activity, they do so in a queue. There are several factors that affect how transactions are queued at an activity and how they are released from the queue. These factors include:

• Task Capacity - Task capacity specifies the number of transactions that can enter an activity at any one time. When this capacity is exceeded, transactions are queued until other transactions leave the activity. You define the task capacity through the Task page of the Properties dialog box (see Task Capacity, Schedule, and Overtime Behavior on page 445).

• Resource Availability - Transactions may also queue at an activity until certain resources become available. In this case, the queueing rules for that resource apply (see Resource Wait Options on page 433).

• Priority - Transactions can be assigned a priority. The highest priority transactions are at the head of the input queue (see Priority and Preempt Transaction Attributes on page 464).

• Preemption - Preemptive transactions can preempt the use of resources from transactions with equal or lower priority. However, they cannot preempt any capacity from an activity. In other words, a preemptive transaction must still wait in the queue until capacity becomes available (see Priority and Preempt Transaction Attributes on page 464).

• Queueing Rules - When you create an input collection, you can specify rules for how the transactions are collected in and leave the input queue.

Queuing rules let you specify the order in which transactions leave the queue and how to account for the time a transaction spends in a queue. You set the queuing rules under Queuing Rules on the Inputs page in the Properties dialog box.

Queuing Rules

418 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Queuing order determines which transaction leaves an activity input queue first. You can specify one of the following queuing orders:

The time an activity spends waiting in an input queue is collected as part of the process statistics. You can assign this waiting time to one of two categories: Blocked or Inactive. Blocked and Inactive times are tracked separately. Blocked time is counted as part of the Transaction Time statistic (see About Simulation Data on page 565).

Working with MessagesA message is used to synchronize and pass information between two related processes that execute separately. For example, if a Customer process places an order (transaction) with the Vendor process whose order ID is 123, the customer may later send a message to cancel order ID 123. This message does not cancel all orders; just ID 123.

Some of the ways you can use messages in a process are:

• Collect transactions at input.

• Create a new transaction in the process when a message arrives.

• Send or broadcast a message when transactions complete in a selected activity.

• Interrupt the process of an activity and take an exception path if a message arrives.

It is important to realize that the optional message flow lines can be used to visually indicate expected message flow, but do not carry information used by the simulator. The simulator reads data from the message properties on each activity.

If you model a fault in your process, the exception path can trigger a message sent to a messaging partner or another activity in the process.

Queuing Order Description

First in, first out The first transaction to enter a queue is the first transaction to leave the queue.

Last in, first out The last transaction to enter a queue is the first transaction to leave the queue.

Minimum of attribute The transaction with the smallest value for a specified transaction attribute is the first to leave the queue.

Defining Process Behavior 419

Defining a Message Exchange Between Two Activities

The following example defines a message sent between activities in two related processes or within a process. The message line from the Book Dealer process to the Bookstore1 process is a visual indicator and does not affect the simulation.

Note that in this example, we do not show details of the "Give Bookstore1 Quote" or "Bookstore1 Accept Order" processes in the Bookstore1 partner (or the corresponding processes in the Bookstore2 partner.) These processes are represented, and their behavior modeled, by single activities for the purposes of simulation. In this example, we are primarily interested in exploring the behavior of the Book Dealer partner.

420 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 If you were to double-click the Get Bookstore1 Quote activity in the Book Dealer process, you could view its properties shown below. The On Completion properties of this task specify the message Bookstore1GetPrice message is to convey data between this activity and an activity in another pool. Note that the messaging partner is Bookstore1. For information about partners, see Understanding BPMN Terminology on page 361 and see Using BPMN Pools on page 357.

2 If you were to double-click Give Bookstore1 Quote activity in the Bookstore1 process, you could view its properties shown below. The On Completion properties are the same as on the Get Bookstore1 Quote activity, except that now Book Dealer is listed as a messaging partner. This is the return value for the Bookstore1GetPrice message. If you were to click the Message icon, you would see that the message is defined to send the ISBN number of the book, and expects to receive the price of that book in reply. See step 4 below for more information about the message definition for both activities.

The Inputs page shown in step 3 represents the receiving of the message. It is not necessary to both receive and reply to a message in the same activity. After a process receives a message that expects return data and before the process has replied, the simulator treats any send of that

Defining Process Behavior 421

message from the process to the partner that initiated the earlier message of the same name as the reply.

3 In this example, a new transaction is generated in the Bookstore1 partner process when it receives the message, so we choose Introduce Transactions Using this Shape. A generator icon is placed on the shape to indicate that this is a starting point for transactions in the process. If the transaction already existed and was being synchronized by the incoming message, such as a CancelOrder message, you would choose None from the Introduce Transactions drop-down list.

422 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 The Define Messages dialog box appears when you click the Create/Modify Messages button.

In the Bookstore1GetPrice message definition used on both activities in both processes, the Send data is the ISBN, which is sent from the Get Bookstore1 Quote activity in the Book Dealer process to the current activity. The Receive data is the Bookstore1Price. Send and receive data parameters are message attributes. For more information, see Define Message dialog box in the iGrafx online help.

The terms Send and Receive are used from the perspective of the client initiating the message, so from the perspective of the Bookstore1 partner servicing the message it will “receive” the ISBN number, and must “send” the price back. The information on the On Completion task here represents the response carrying the price back to the client.

This simulation continues by collecting the data returned from the two separate price quotes by combining the two separate paths with a join, then sending the transaction to a decision step where the lowest book price is determined. The Book Dealer process completes by sending a book order to the vendor with the lowest price.

For more information on generating a message on completion of a task, see Message On Completion Option on page 450.

Defining Process Behavior 423

Broadcasting Messages

Broadcast messages are used to signal that something has happened that may be interesting to any transaction in the receiving partner. This type of message is not used to synchronize cooperating processes, but is more like a general purpose event sent from one partner to another. An example might be a StockTradingSuspended message meant to inform any transaction handling stock trades of the event. Contrast this with a TradeCompleted message that must apply to a single transaction in the client.

Because a broadcast messages is not received by a single transaction, it cannot expect a return value. The Receive Data list in the Define Messages dialog box is disabled when Broadcast Message is checked.

If you want to send a message that doesn’t require other activities to respond to or even receive the message, select the Broadcast Message check box in the Define Messages dialog box. All transactions at the receiving activity receive the broadcast message at simulation time, not just the one or more that were created by the same transaction in the sending process. The broadcast message does not throw an Undeliverable Message fault if no activity receives it.

Defining Activity Resources RequirementsA resource is labor, equipment, or other assets used at an activity to process a transaction see Resources on page 371.)

At each activity you specify the number, or count, of each resource that is required. For each transaction that enters the activity, these resources are subtracted from the total number of available resources for as long as the transaction uses them. The count can be an expression.

iGrafx 2006 includes a predefined labor resource type called Worker. By default, every activity in a process is assigned the Worker resource. Therefore, your model automatically has one worker resource defined. If an activity needs additional types of resources, you must first define the resource

424 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

and then assign it to the activity. You define resources using the Define Resources dialog box available by clicking Resources on the Model menu.

Use this dialog box to define the resource name, type, number available, schedule, cost, and overtime behavior. You can also use the Define Resources dialog box to remove an unused resource from your model.

Note

You cannot remove a resource that is assigned to any activity. You must remove the resource from all activities before you can remove it from your model. You cannot, however, remove the default Worker resource from your model.

Defining a New Resource

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources. The Define Resources dialog box opens.

Note

Under Existing Resources, the Worker resource is automatically defined and assigned a Labor resource type.

The Define Resources dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 425

2 Click Add.

3 In the Add New Resource dialog box, type a new name in the Resource Name field and click a Resource Type.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Define Resource dialog box, select the resource count (availability), schedule, cost, and overtime behavior.

6 Click OK.

Removing a Resource From a Model

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources. The Define Resources dialog box opens.

2 In the Existing Resources list, click a resource name.

3 Click Delete.

4 Click OK.

Note

These are basic examples of defined resource availability in a model.

In cases of multiple departments, or other advanced use of resources, see About Resource Pools on page 433.

426 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

After you define a new resource, you can assign it for use at an activity. Use the Resources page in the Properties dialog box to use a resource at an activity.

Use this dialog box to specify a resource for use at an activity, define the number of resources to use per transaction, the assignment type, value class cost category, wait options, resource behavior, and other specialized options (i.e., group options and department). You can also use this dialog to remove a resource from an activity.

Adding a Resource To an Activity

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Resources page.

3 Click Add. A new resource appears in the dialog box.

4 Select the resource type, assignment type, count, cost category, wait options, overtime options, and group options for the new resource.

5 Click OK.

The Resources page in the Properties dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 427

Removing a Resource From an Activity

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Resources page.

3 Click the resource line you would like to remove.

4 Click Delete.

5 Click OK.

Resource Assignment Type

When you specify a resource for use at an activity, you can identify its assignment type. The resource assignment type defines how the activity acquires and releases a resource. You can select one of the following assignment types:

• Activity - Every time a transaction enters the activity, the resource is used and released. The activity uses the resource for the single task.

• Acquire - Every time a transaction enters the activity, the resource is used and remains acquired by the transaction as the transaction moves to other activities. A resource remains acquired until

• The transaction leaves an activity that releases it.

• The transaction reaches the end of the process flow.

• The transaction is duplicated and the resource is released by other family members of the transaction.

• Release - A resource that was previously acquired is now released and can be used by other transactions.

Changing a Resource Assignment Type

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Resources page.

3 In the Resources area, click an assignment type for each resource desired.

4 Click OK.

Resource and Value Class Costs

When you define a new resource, you may also define the costs for using the resource. You can define costs for regular use and for overtime use of the resource. Regular use cost is defined by an hourly

428 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

rate, a cost per use, or both. Overtime use is defined by an hourly rate and a maximum number of overtime hours allowed per day. You define resource costs using the Define Resources dialog box available by clicking Resources on the Model menu.

When you specify a resource for use at an activity you can define how the resources costs are allocated to a value class category for the activity. You define cost allocations using the Resources page in the Properties dialog box. Resource costs can be allocated to one of the following categories:

• Task - The cost category is inherited from the activity’s task. For more information on tasks, see Task Cost on page 445.

• VA - Value-Added. Use of the resource contributes to the creation or delivery of a product or service.

• BVA - Business Value Added. Use of the resource does not contribute directly to the creation of a product or service but is necessary to the operation of the business.

• NVA - Non-Value Added. Use of the resource does not contribute to the product, service, or business.

Modifying a Resource Cost

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources. The Define Resources dialog box opens.

2 In the Existing Resources list, click a resource name.

3 In the Resource Cost area, type the resource’s modified hourly rate, per use cost, overtime hourly rate, and max hours per day.

4 Click OK.

Changing a Resource Value Class Cost Allocation

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Resources page.

3 In the Resources area, click a value class cost category for each resource desired.

4 Click OK.

Defining Process Behavior 429

Resource Schedule

A resource’s schedule defines the time the resource is either available for work or out of service. Any time outside of the schedule is considered to be inactive time and is a potential span for overtime. Every resource has its own schedule. You select a resource’s schedule using the Define Resources dialog box.

Selecting a Resource’s Schedule

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources. The Define Resources dialog box opens.

2 In the Existing Resources list, click a resource name.

3 Click a schedule in the Schedule list.

4 Click OK. For more information on schedules, see Working with Schedules on page 540.

Resource Behavior

Resource behavior determines how the model acts if a resource becomes unavailable, typically for scheduling reasons. It also determines how the model handles a resource that goes into overtime. You can select one of the following resource behaviors:

430 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Behavior At Acquisition If Becomes Unavailable If Overtime Allowed

Changeable Any available resource is used

Can be exchanged with another available resource of the same type.

If no other resources of this type are available for exchange and the activity allows ovetime, overtime is allowed for the resource up to the maximum set for the resource. When the maximum overtime is reached, the resource is exchanged for another resource with available overtime. This continues until there are no other resources of the same type with available overtime.

Dedicated Any available resource is used. A resource acquired from an unlimited resource pool cannot be used as a dedicated resource.

Cannot be exchanged when unavailable. The activity waits until the dedicated resource is available to finish processing the transaction.

If the activity allows overtime, then overtime is allowed until the maximum overtime for the resource is reached. The activity then waits until the resource comes into schedule again. Unlimited pool resources do not allow overtime.

Defining Process Behavior 431

Setting a Resource Behavior

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Resources page.

3 In the Resources area, click a resource behavior for each desired resource.

4 Click OK.

Department For the first activity in a department that a transaction encounters with Department specified, any available resource is used. If the transaction encounters in subsequent activities in the department with Department specified, the same resource used for the first activity is required.

Same as dedicated Same as dedicated

Overtime Dedicated

Any available resource is used

Same as dedicated Same as dedicated

Out of Service Any available resource is used

Behaves like a dedicated resource that accumulates time specifically as out of service.

Behaves like a dedicated resource for the purposes of overtime.

Behavior At Acquisition If Becomes Unavailable If Overtime Allowed

432 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Resource Wait Options

When a transaction waits to be processed at an activity, any resources acquired by the transaction can either wait or be temporarily released. Released resources will be automatically reacquired for transactions to finish processing. You set the wait option for all resources using the Resources page in the Properties dialog box. There are two wait options:

• Wait - The resource is not released while the transaction waits to be processed. Waiting time is accumulated for the resource.

• Don’t Wait - The resource is released and can work on other transactions while this transaction waits to be processed. When this transaction can be processed, a resource is automatically requested again.

Changing a Resource Wait Option

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Resources page.

3 In the Resources area, select the Wait check box to toggle the wait option.

4 Click OK.

About Resource Pools

Resources are allocated to, and acquired from, resource pools, which are groups of identical resources. The resources in a pool are allocated and acquired independently from other resources in other pools.

For each resource defined, you have the option of creating multiple resource pools that can be assigned for use by the same or different departments. This may be useful if, for example, resources used in one department have different costs or schedules than the same type of resource used in other departments. Since activities only request resources from pools associated with their own department, separate pools for each department insures there is no resource contention between different departments.

By default, iGrafx 2006 assumes that every activity in a process may need one worker resource to process a transaction. Therefore, each activity placed in the diagram specifies a single worker resource to be used. (This can be removed if desired.) In addition, your model automatically has one worker resource pool allocated for each department. This guarantees no resource contention between departments for workers.

For example, if you define a process with three departments, the process automatically has three worker resource pools containing one worker each. Additional resource pools are created automatically when you define a new department and place an activity in it. If you create a new type

Defining Process Behavior 433

of resource, a single pool is created for the new resource type for use by all departments. You can create additional resource pools if desired. In addition, pools can be shared different departments or even dedicated to specific processes.

When a transaction needs a resource at an activity, the pools associated with the activity’s department are searched for available resources. If multiple pools are available for the department, you can specify the order in which to search the pools. You can also specify the queuing rules in which transactions wait before their resource requests are processed by activities in the department. You can select one of the following queuing orders:

Adding a Resource Pool

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

2 In the Define Resources dialog box, click a resource name in the Existing Resources list.

3 Click Show Pools.

4 Click Add Pool.

5 Click OK.

This creates a new pool containing one resource of the type you selected in the Existing Resources list. The resource pool is not allocated to a department until you assign the resource to an activity.

Queueing Order Description

First In, First Out Transactions queue in the order that they arrive. (Default)

First In, Last Out Transactions queue in the reverse order of their arrival.

Min of Attribute Choose the transaction attribute that you want to queue by its minimum value.

Max of Attribute Choose the transaction attribute that you want to queue by its maximum value.

434 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Deleting a Resource Pool

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

2 In the Define Resources dialog box, click a resource name in the Existing Resources list.

3 Click Show Pools.

4 Click a pool name in the Resource Allocations list.

5 Click Delete.

6 Click OK.

Modifying a Resource In a Pool

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

2 In the Define Resources dialog box, click a resource name in the Existing Resources list.

3 Click Show Pools.

4 Click a pool name in the Resource Allocations list.

5 Click Modify.

6 In the Edit Cost/Count dialog box, change the resource count, cost, schedule, or overtime behavior.

Defining Process Behavior 435

7 Click OK.

Changing a Department’s Resource Pool Allocation

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

2 In the Define Resources dialog box, click a resource name in the Existing Resources list.

3 Click Show Pools.

This dialog box appears when you click the Show Pools button in the Resource Pools dialog box, click a name in the Departments Allocations list, and click Modify.

436 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

4 Click a department name in the Department Allocations list.

5 Click Modify.

6 In the Department dialog box, click a pool name in the Selected Pools list.

If the pool name is not already in the Search Order list, it is added to the list (allocated to the department). If the pool name is already in the Search Order list, it is removed from the list (deallocated from the department).

7 Select a pool in the Search Order list, then use the up or down arrows, or the First and Last buttons to set the order for searching the pools.

Defining Process Behavior 437

8 Select a resource acquisition rule from the Acquire Rule list.

• Default uses the search order to search pool units sequentially.

• Least Utilized uses the search order first and searches for the unit used the least amount of time during the simulation period to even out resource usage.

• Most Utilized uses the search order first and searches for the unit used the most amount of time during the simulation period to use fewer resource units overall.

9 Click a queuing method in the Queueing Method list.

This sets the queueing rules for the resources in the department.

10 Click OK.

Sharing a Resource Pool Between Departments

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

2 In the Define Resources dialog box, click a resource name in the Existing Resources list.

3 Click Show Pools.

4 Click a department name in the Departments Allocations list.

5 Click Modify.

6 In the Selected Pools list, click the name of the pool to be shared between departments.

Note

If the pool is already allocated to the department, you can skip step 6.

7 Use the First and Last buttons, or the arrow buttons, to set the order for searching the pools.

8 Click a queuing method in the list.

9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 for other departments that are to share the resource pool.

10 Click OK.

11 Click OK.

438 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining TasksTask data describes how an activity processes transactions. You define task data using the Task page in the Properties dialog box.

Using the Step tab of this dialog box you define the task type, duration, activity cost, value, capacity, schedule, overtime behavior, and repetition. The On Completion tab specifies how a task is handled when it exists the activity.

The Task page in the Properties dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 439

Task Type

You can set the task type for an activity to work, process or delay.

Task Duration

Duration applies to activities of type Work or Delay. For Work activities, duration specifies the amount of time the activity takes to process a transaction. For Delay activities, duration specifies the

Task Type Description

Work A Work activity has a specified duration (seconds, minutes, or hours, days, weeks, months, or years). By default, the duration is zero. Time spent in the work state is reflected in the Transaction Working Times statistics (see About Simulation Data on page 565).

Process A Process activity connects the current process diagram to another process diagram in the same document that runs as a subprocess or a concurrent process.

Delay A Delay activity delays transaction processing by a specified amount of time. This is similar to Work time except that the time is counted as Blocked or Inactive time (see Queueing Transactions at Activities on page 418).

440 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

amount of time the activity delays the processing of a transaction. You can specify duration as one of the following:

Specifying a Duration

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page.

3 On the Step tab of the Task page, click Work or Delay in the list.

4 Click Constant, Distributed, or Expression in the Duration list.

5 For constant durations, type a time increment, and click a time value in the list. For example, 2 hours.

6 For distributed durations, click Uniform or Normal in the list, type an increment in the Between and And fields, and click a time value in the list.

Duration Type Description

Constant Duration is the same for all transactions entering the activity.

Distributed Duration for transactions varies within a minimum and maximum time period (e.g., between 1 and 2 hours). Duration is distributed in one of two ways:

• Uniform - duration values within the minimum and maximum range have an equal chance occurring.

• Normal - duration values are distributed over the minimum or maximum time based on a normal or bell shaped curve.

Note

These two distributions are provided for your convenience.

You can use other distributions by creating an expression using the system defined distribution functions (see System Defined Functions in the iGrafx online help system).

Expression Durations for transactions are based on the value of an expression. The expression could be a constant, or a formula, or could make use of system or custom defined functions.

For example, to create a duration that is exponentially distributed around a mean of 5 minutes, the expression is: ExponDist(5)

Defining Process Behavior 441

7 For expression durations, paste an expression using the Expression toolbar.

8 Select the Repeat check box and click the Specify button to specify a repetition of tasks.

9 In the Repeat Details dialog box:

• Choose whether the repetition will be sequential (one at a time) or simultaneous (all at once).

• Choose to select the number of times to repeat the task and specify a repeat condition, such as do until the first 20 tasks are completed.

• Choose to test before the activity executes to complete one repetition, regardless of countorchoose to test after the activity executes to complete one repetition, test whether the condition is still true, then complete the next repetition, and so on.

10 Click OK.

Process Tasks

You can add hierarchy or concurrence to a process by using the Process task type. This connects the current process to another process in the same file. There are three types of process tasks:

Process Type Description

Subprocess Transactions are passed to the subprocess from an activity in a higher level process. The higher-level process waits while the subprocess handles the transaction. When it completes, the transaction returns to the original activity in the higher level process and continues. A subprocess can be called by more than one process.

Concurrent Process A duplicate of a transaction is passed to the concurrent process from an activity in a higher level process. The higher level process does not wait, but continues to process the original transaction while the concurrent process processes the duplicate transaction in parallel.

442 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Creating a New Process Using the Properties Dialog Box

1 Double-click any shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page.

3 On the Step tab of the Task page, select Process in the list.

4 Click the New Process button.

5 In the New Component dialog box, type a name in the Name field, and click OK.

6 Click the Properties button.

7 In the Process Properties dialog box, select one or more process behaviors such as Ad-Hoc, and click OK.

8 Select the desired start point. (see About Start Points on page 403). Start points are designated on the Inputs page of the Properties dialog box.

9 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.

Private Subprocess Similar to a Subprocess, in that a Subprocess completes and the flow returns to the process that called it. However, transactions entering the Private Subprocess are not affected by or interact with transactions from different high-level process.

Embedded An expanded subprocess contained within a shape in the current diagram. The process flow up to the container shape or Embedded subprocess is the parent process. The parent process waits while the Embedded subprocess handles the transaction. When it completes, the transaction outputs to the next activity in the parent process and continues.

Process Type Description

Defining Process Behavior 443

Creating a New Process Using iGrafx Explorer

1 On the File menu, click Components.

2 In the iGrafx Explorer bar, click the Components tab.

3 Right-click anywhere in the Components tab window, point to New, and click Process on the context menu.

4 In the New Process dialog box, type a name in the Name field, and click OK.

Calling a Subprocess, Concurrent Process, or Private Subprocess

1 Double-click any shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Task page.

3 Click Process in the list.

4 Click Subprocess, Concurrent Process, or Private Subprocess in the adjacent list.

5 Click a process name in the next list.

6 Click a start point for the process in the next list.

7 Click OK.

The iGrafx Explorer Components tab

444 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Viewing a Subprocess

Right-click the shape and select the process name from the context menu.

or

Press the Shift key and double-click the activity.

Note

For information on changing the appearance of a subprocess indicator or a shape with a subprocess, see Indicator Options on page 127.

Task Cost

The Cost for a task consists of its fixed cost and value class. Fixed cost is the cost associated with an activity for each transaction it processes. The default for fixed cost is 0. Value class defines categories for allocating and reporting an activity’s costs. There are three value class categories:

• VA (Value-Added) - The activity contributes to the creation or delivery of a product or service.

• BVA (Business Value Added) - The activity does not contribute directly to the creation of a product or service but is necessary to the operation of the business.

• NVA (Non-Value Added) - The activity does not contribute to the product, service, or business.

Setting a Fixed Cost and Value Class

1 Double-click the activity shape in your diagram.

2 In the Properties dialog box, click the Task page.

3 Under Activity Base, you may type a cost that is accrued each time a transaction is processed by the activity. The default is 0.

4 Click VA, BVA, or NVA in the Value list.

5 Click OK.

Task Capacity, Schedule, and Overtime Behavior

You can set the capacity of an activity to limit the number of transactions that it can process at one time. This limit is enforced even if the necessary resources and transactions are available. The default capacity is set to unlimited.

Defining Process Behavior 445

Task schedule defines the time frame in which the activity can process transactions. You can choose from the many schedules that are already defined, or create a new schedule. Although schedules can be applied to activities, they are more often applied instead to the resources used by the activities.

Overtime behavior specifies how the activity behaves if resources or the activity go out of schedule while the transaction is being processed. You can choose one of the following behaviors:

Excluding Departments from Task

There are often situations in which multiple departments work on the same task. You represent this in your diagram by drawing an activity shape that spans the department boundaries. For more information about excluding departments, see Excluding a Department on page 75.

However, in complex diagrams, there may be one or more departments in the span that do not participate in the task and therefore should be excluded from the task. To exclude a department from a task:

1 Double-click the activity shape that spans multiple departments.

2 In the Properties dialog box, click the Task page.

Behavior Description

Suspend The activity does not allow overtime. If a resource goes out of schedule, the activity stops its duration and restarts when the resource goes back in schedule. If the activity goes out of schedule, it stops its duration and restarts when the activity is back in schedule.

Don’t Start The activity does not start its duration unless it can process the transaction within the activity and resource schedule.

OK If Started The activity allows overtime if it has already started processing a transaction. New transactions are not started until both the activity and resources are in schedule.

Always OK Overtime is always allowed for this activity.

Finish Queue The activity allows overtime for transactions that are already in the queue waiting for resources. No new transactions are allowed in the queue until the resources go back in schedule.

446 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 On the Step tab of the Task page, click Exclude Departments button to open the Exclude Departments dialog box.

4 In the Departments list click a department name.

5 Click Yes. The department name moves to the Excluded list.

6 Repeat for each department to be excluded.

7 Click OK.

Defining On Completion Tasks

On Completion option Description

None No completion task defined.

Duplicate Transactions are duplicated and follow each path leaving an activity. For activities with multiple output paths, duplicate transactions are also duplicated (see Duplicating Transactions on page 401).

Duplicate By Member Transactions are duplicated into a count equal to the number of members of the type of a specified transaction attribute. As transactions leave the activity, a distinct value is given to each transaction. The duplicated transactions can later be joined by attribute member.

Discard Transactions, or all members of a transaction family, are discarded, do not leave the activity, and are not counted as completed in the final report statistics.

Unbatch Transactions previously batched are unbatched.

Defining Process Behavior 447

Duplicate On Completion Option

You can duplicate the transaction in the completion task of an activity to model work performed by different departments or resources or when a single transaction needs to represent multiple transactions to be processed (see Duplicating Transactions on page 401). The duplicated transactions are processed separately.

Duplicated transactions can be recombined by joining inputs at other activities. A join may collect the transactions by family so that only members of the same duplicated family are joined. This ensures that members of other families are not joined with the duplicated transactions.

Creating Duplicate Transactions On Completion

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the On Completion tab of the Task page.

3 In the list, click Duplicate,

4 Type a number or enter an expression in the Count field.

5 Click New Family to start a new family for duplicated transactions. When transactions that are members of an original family enter the activity, they become related to each other in the new family. Further, the transactions are no longer part of the original family when they leave the activity.

6 Click Apply.

Message The transaction generates a message to another process, carrying the values of any attributes specified by the message definition. The transaction itself is not affected.

Fault The transaction signals that a condition has occurred that prevents it from proceeding. By default, this causes the transaction to be terminated, but the signal can be intercepted by a parent process of the activity and corrective action taken.

Cancel The transaction cancels the business transaction that uses this activity.

Compensate The transaction signals that a compensation is required. Any associated compensating activity is run for activities that have already completed, in reverse order of completion. For example, a compensating activity might be issuing a refund on a cancelled order that was prepaid.

On Completion option Description

448 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Duplicate By Member On Completion Option

An alternate method for cloning is to duplicate the transaction into a count equal to the number of members of an attribute type. Each transaction created is assigned a unique member value. The duplicated transactions can later be joined by attribute member.

Discard On Completion Option

You can discard transactions in a process. For example, if a purchase order is rejected due to poor credit, the transaction can be discarded. Discarded transactions are not considered complete and do not appear in the final statistics. You can discard transactions at an activity based on the following conditions:

• Always - Any transaction entering this activity is discarded.

• Expression - As the transaction is exiting the activity, the expression is evaluated. If the expression value is True (non-zero) the transaction is discarded.

You can also choose one or both of the following options for discarding transactions and their family members.

• Discard Transaction - Discard this transaction.

• Discard Family Members - Discard all of the transaction’s family members.

Discarding Transactions On Completion

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page and click the On Completion tab.

3 In the first list, click Discard, and click Always or Expression in the second list.

4 Click the Discard Transaction and/or Discard Family Members check boxes.

5 Click the Apply button or click OK to close the dialog box.

Unbatch On Completion Option

When you select the Unbatch option, transactions that enter an activity as a batch collection are separated (unbatched) into their individual transactions before leaving the activity individually.

It is important to note that the activity that creates a batch collection does not have to unbatch the collection. A batch collection created at one activity may exit that activity as a batch and may pass through one or more activities as a batch before being unbatched in a subsequent activity.

Defining Process Behavior 449

When a batched transaction is unbatched, any resources acquired by the batch are shared by the original individual transactions. Also, each of the individual transactions retain their original attribute values. The unbatched transactions exit the activity in the same queue order as when they were originally batched.

Unbatching Transactions On Completion

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page and click the On Completion tab.

3 In the list, click Unbatch.

4 Click the Apply button or click OK to close the dialog box.

Message On Completion Option

The Message option causes the transaction leaving the shape to generate a message, which is a triggering event to a process in another partner. The message can result in the initiation or continuation of that process or an exception flow. It has no effect on the transaction itself.

Generating a Message On Completion

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page and click the On Completion tab.

3 In the list, click Message.

4 Click the Create/Modify Message icon to set up a message definition in the Define Message dialog box if you don’t already have the message defined in the Message drop-down list. Click OK to close the Define Message dialog box.

5 Choose the message to send from the drop-down list.

6 Choose a partner from the Partner drop-down list if you want to send the message to a specific partner.

7 Click the Apply button or click OK to close the dialog box.

Fault On Completion Option

Faults are used for handling exceptional conditions in the process. When you select the Fault option, transactions that leave the shape can be prevented from continuing through the process under certain circumstances and instead throw a fault. For example, a fault may be an event that requires special handling of a transaction through another process. The fault modeling causes the transaction to be discarded where it is and take an alternate path through the parent process.

450 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Throwing a Fault On Completion

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page and click the On Completion tab.

3 In the list, click Fault.

4 Click the Create/Modify Fault icon and set up the fault definition in the Define Fault dialog box if you don’t already have the fault defined in the Fault drop-down list.

5 Click OK.

6 From the Fault drop-down list, choose a fault to throw.

7 Choose the attribute value to throw with the fault from the Attribute drop-down list if the fault carries data.

8 Enter the conditional expression in the expression field if the fault should be thrown conditionally. By default, the fault is always thrown.

9 Click the Apply button or click OK to close the dialog box.

Cancel On Completion Option

The Cancel option indicates that a business transaction that the process is a party to is to be cancelled. It has no effect on the transaction itself.

Canceling Transactions On Completion

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page and click the On Completion tab.

3 In the list, click Cancel.

4 Click the Apply button or click OK to close the dialog box.

Compensate On Completion Option

The Compensate option is a triggering event that runs the compensation task for all activities that have already completed, in revers order of their completion. For example, if something prevents an order from being completed, a compensating task would be to cancel the order. The transaction does not continue until the compensating activities have completed.

Compensating Transactions On Completion

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Select the Task page and click the On Completion tab.

Defining Process Behavior 451

3 In the list, click Compensate.

4 Click the Apply button or click OK to close the dialog box.

Defining Activity OutputsActivity outputs are concerned with the output path, which is a directed connector line which a transaction follows when leaving an activity. An output path usually leads to another activity at which point it becomes an input path and the transaction becomes an input to the new activity.

Use the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box to specify the path a transaction will take when it exists an activity.

The Normal tab of the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box

452 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Activities may have one or more output paths through which a transaction may exit.You can specify options for selecting which output path a transaction exits.

All Output Option

The default output option is that transactions leave an activity through all of its output paths. If the activity has a single output path, then the transaction exits that path. If an activity has more than one output path, the transaction is duplicated into multiple transactions that proceed down the separate paths simultaneously (see Duplicating Transactions on page 401).

Normal Output option Description

All Transactions leave an activity following all output paths that exit the activity. Transactions terminate if there are no output paths for the activity. If there are multiple output paths, transactions duplicated into one transaction for each output path (see Duplicating Transactions on page 401).

Decision Transactions leave an activity following one output path based on certain decision criteria.

Named Outputs Transactions leave an activity following one or more output paths based on specified conditions. The output paths are Normal when drawn.

Defining Process Behavior 453

For example, the following figure shows the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box for an activity called Materials in stock. The activity has two output paths and the output option is set to All.

In this situation, a transaction that enters the activity is duplicated into two separate transactions that simultaneously exit the two output paths; one going to the Components collated activity and the other to the Folders prepared activity. These transactions proceed in parallel, but eventually must be joined back together.

454 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You can also explicitly duplicate transactions using the Duplicate or Duplicate Member On Completion Task options (see Duplicate On Completion Option on page 448).

Decision Output Option

A decision is an activity at which transactions can take one of several possible paths based on decision criteria that you set. The following are some important terms to remember for decision outputs:

• Decision Case- One of several possible decisions that can be selected at a decision activity. A decision case is selected based on a statistical distribution or the value of an expression.

• Decision Path - The output path a transaction follows based on the decision case.

Defining Process Behavior 455

The decision paths from a decision activity are usually labeled in the process diagram in accordance with the defined decision cases. The first path correlates to the first decision case (usually labeled No or False), the second path correlates to the second decision case (Yes or True), and so on.

You can also customize the labeling of decision paths in several ways:

• You can have multiple decision paths for a single decision case. For example, you could have two paths labeled Yes. In this situation, any transaction that satisfies the Yes decision criteria is duplicated and sent out both paths.

• A decision case does not have to have a decision path. For example, suppose you do not have a path labeled No. In this situation, any transaction that satisfies the No decision is discarded at the decision activity.

Decision activity with labeled decision paths

Decision activity with multiple Yes decision paths

Decision activity with unused decision case

456 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• You can have unlabeled decision paths. In this situation, the transaction is duplicated and a copy is sent out the unlabeled decision path. The other copy of the transaction is sent out the decision path of the decision case it satisfies.

You can specify one of two methods for determining which path to take:

• Statistical - Transactions are sent out each decision path based on a statistical percentage. That is, as transactions enter an activity, a certain percentage take each decision path (e.g., 50%-Yes/True, 50%- No/False).

• Expression - Transactions are sent out each decision path based on the value of an expression.

• Transactions entering an activity with two decision paths evaluate the expression. If the expression evaluates to 0 (No or False), the transaction selects the first decision path, otherwise the transaction selects the second decision path (Yes or True).

• In the case of more than two output paths, an expression value of 0 selects the first decision path, a value of 1 selects the second decision path, a value of 2 selects the third decision path, and so on.

• If the expression value is greater than the number of cases, the last decision path is selected.

• Non-integer values are truncated to the lower integer. For example, an expression with a value of 1.9 resolves to 1, in which case the second decision path is selected.

• If a type is used, the order of the members of the type correspond to the output paths. The first member corresponds to the first output path, the second member to the second path and so on.

Decision activity with unlabeled decision path

Defining Process Behavior 457

The label for each decision path is called Case Text. You can choose from the following Case Text choices to label your output paths:

• Yes/No - The number of cases is 2: Yes and No.

• True/False - The number of cases is 2: True and False.

• Other - You define the number of cases and the labels for each case.

• Type - The members of a type.

For more information on defining case text, see Working with Case Text on page 58.

The following figure shows the Normal tab on the Outputs page in the Properties dialog box for an activity called In Stock?. The activity has two output paths and the output option is set to Decision. The decision criteria is set to Statistical with each case set to 50%.

In this example, as transactions enter the activity, half are sent out the Yes decision path while the other half are sent out the No path.

The Outputs page in the Properties dialog box

458 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Creating a Decision

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Outputs page, then click the Normal tab.

3 In the first list, click Decision.

4 In the Case Text list, click a case text option.

5 Click either Statistical or Expression.

• For Statistical, type the desired percentage for each case.

• For Expression, use the Expression Builder to create a decision expression. If you select Expression, you can specify a default path for cases where expression is not deterministic.

6 Click Apply or click OK to close the dialog box

Named Output Option

A named output is similar to a decision, in that transactions can take one of several possible paths based on decision criteria that you set. The difference is that you can also specify a condition that will decide which path the output takes.

The output paths from a named output activity are usually labeled in the process diagram in accordance with the defined cases. The first path correlates to the first case, the second path correlates to the second case, and so on.

Named Outputs activity with labeled decision paths

Defining Process Behavior 459

Customizing Case Text

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Outputs page, then click the Normal tab.

3 In the first list, click Named Outputs.

4 In the Case Text list, click Other.

5 In the enabled fields, type your new case text. If you want to make cases conditional, select the Conditional text box for additional condition options.Click the Add button to create additional cases.

6 Click Apply or click OK to close the dialog box.

Note

You can also customize case text by creating a type. When you define a type, it appears in the Case Text list on the Outputs tab. Click the type to select the type members as case text.

Available Output Option

An available output is used with an event-based gateway in a BPMN diagram, but can also be used in a process diagram. When you specify the available output option, it causes the process to look ahead to the possible receiving activities and determine the first one that can accept a transaction based on whether input constraints are met. The input constraint is a condition that must be satisfied or an event that must occur, such as the receipt of a message, before the following activity can receive a transaction. For more information,see Defining Activity Inputs on page 403.

For example, if you are waiting to hear back from potential vendors before making a purchase and you have decided to give your business to the first vendor who calls, you may use the available output

460 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

option to model whether to use the first vendor who returns your call, or, if no vendors return your call within a set time period, proceed with a different course of action.

Activities receiving the transaction must meet one of the following conditions:

• Transactions collected at input with Gate By Expression, Gate By Time, or Gate By Message.

• No Inputs collection, no resources acquired, unlimited capacity, no schedule, and Task type is Delay with no repeat specified.

If neither of these conditions is met, the simulator gives an error at run time.

All input constraints are evaluated and executed at once. If no input is available, transactions are queued at the decision shape based on the Queuing Rule specified for the shape on the Inputs page of the Properties dialog box.

To specify the first available output option:

1 Double-click a shape to open the Properties dialog box. In the example above, you would double-click the Choose Vendor activity.

2 Click the Outputs page, then click the Normal tab.

3 In the first list, click Available.

4 Click Apply or click OK to close the dialog box.

Receiving shapes with more than one input will cause a simulation error.

Available Output activity with possible decision paths

Defining Process Behavior 461

Defining AttributesAn attribute is a variable used to communicate information and manage the flow of transactions through a process. Some common uses of attributes are:

• Setting the duration of an activity based on the specifics of a transaction.

• Controlling the flow of specific transactions through a decision output.

• Setting global controls that can affect multiple transactions or activities.

An attribute has four characteristics, its name, location, type, and value. The name must be unique for every attribute within a location. Location defines the scope of an attribute’s value.

The attribute type is the range of values that may be assigned to the attribute. In iGrafx, attribute values can be of type numeric or string, but they are initially numeric with a default value of zero. Attributes are dynamically typed, meaning that the type of an attribute can change at run time based on the type of the last operand assigned to it.

The value of an attribute can be assigned at a transaction generator (typically transaction attributes), at any specific activity, or by using the Initial Value options of the Define Attribute dialog box (typically used for scenario, process, or department attributes). Without specific initial value assignments, attributes are initialized depending on their type. Value attributes are initialized to zero, True/False attributes are initialized to False, Yes/No attributes are initialized to No, and member attributes are initialized to the first member in the member list.

Defining an Attribute

You define new attributes using the Add New Attribute dialog box.

The Add New Attribute dialog box

462 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 In the Define Attributes dialog box, click Add.

3 Use the Add New Attribute dialog box to define the attribute name, type, location, and initial values.

4 Click OK to return to the Define Attributes dialog box.

5 Click OK.

Assigning Attribute Values at an Activity

Attributes values can be assigned or changed at various points as a transaction is processed at an activity. You set attributes values at an activity using the Attributes page in the Properties dialog box.

The Attributes page is organized as a table. The rows of the table contain the attributes whose values are being set at the activity. The columns of the table let you specify location and name of the

The Attributes page in the Properties dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 463

attribute being set, and the desired value for that attribute. The first column lets you specify when the attribute value is set. The value can be set at one of the following times:

• Enter - As the transaction reaches the activity.

• Post Input - After collection.

• Pre Task - Prior to duration, but after all resources are acquired.

• Post Task - After duration, but before output.

• Exit - Activity complete.

Assigning a Value to an Attribute At an Activity

1 Double-click an activity shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Attributes page.

3 Click Add, and then click when the attribute is set (e.g., Enter, Post Input, Pre-Task, Post-Task, Exit).

4 In the Active column, click the Active check box to enable attribute assignment.

5 Click the adjacent Location column, and click a location name in the list.

6 Click the adjacent Name column, and click an attribute name in the list.

7 Click the adjacent Value column, and type or select the value for the attribute.

8 Click OK.

Deleting an Attribute From an Activity

1 Double-click an activity shape to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Attributes page.

3 In the Attributes page, click the row containing the attribute to be deleted.

4 Click Delete.

5 Click OK.

Priority and Preempt Transaction Attributes

iGrafx Process includes two predefined transaction attributes called Priority and Preempt. You can use these attributes to affect the flow of transactions through your process.

You can use the Priority transaction attribute to specify the order in which transactions are processed. When transactions are queued (for example, waiting for a worker or at a batch activity),

464 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

the highest priority transactions are always processed first. The Priority attribute may range in value between 0 and 127. The default value is 0, which is the lowest priority.

• A higher priority transaction is processed before all lower priority transactions that are waiting.

• Two transactions with the same level of priority are processed in the order set by the queueing rules (see Queueing Transactions at Activities on page 418).

• A higher priority transaction never acquires resources away from transactions that are already in process (acquired) unless preempt is set.

You can set the following values for the Priority transaction attribute:

• Constant - The value can be between 0 and 127 where 0 is the lowest priority. By default, transactions have a priority of 0.

• Expression - You can define the priority value with an expression that uses different attributes, functions, and arithmetic operators.

The Preempt transaction attribute is another attribute used to change the order in which transactions are processed. Preemptive transactions take resources away from other, non-preemptive transactions. They also work with the priority attribute to create two tiers of order.

• A preemptive transaction can acquire resources away from all equal or lower-priority transactions, even if the resource is already in use.

• If two transactions have the same priority, a preemptive transaction is transacted first.

• If two transactions have the same priority and are both preemptive, then the transactions are transacted in the queue order.

You can set the following values for the Preempt transaction attribute:

• Constant - Click True to turn on preemption or False to turn it off.

• Expression - You can define the preemptive value with an expression that uses different attributes, functions, and arithmetic operators. (The expression must return either True or False.)

You can assign the Priority and Preempt attributes to a transaction family. This extends the priority or preempt value to all members of the transaction's family. For example, in an Order Processing model, when the Sales department establishes a priority for an order, then all of the related family members (for example, the credit check and the work order) also receive the same priority value.

Defining Process Behavior 465

Duration and Attributes

Task duration, which specifies the amount of time an activity takes to process a transaction (see Task Duration on page 440), can be used to set the value of other attributes.

For example, suppose you have a variable duration on an activity (Between (5,15) minutes). Also, suppose you want to save in a transaction attribute whether this activity takes more than 10 minutes to process a particular transaction, because later you might make some decision based on this fact. You can set this separate transaction attribute equal to Duration, but only at the Post Task or Exit points. Prior to that Duration has the value of 0.

The following example shows the Attributes page for an activity where a transaction attribute called processtime is set to Duration upon Exit.

Note

To set an attribute to Duration, you must use an expression.

The Attributes page in the Properties dialog box

466 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Last Simulation Data

The Last Simulation page displays statistics about each activity in a process. This page contains a summary of several different types of statistics for each activity. Statistics are collected during a simulation run and are available only after a simulation has completed. You may view an activity’s statistics using the Last Simulation page in the Properties dialog box.

Note

This page contains a summary only. A simulation report contains a complete collection of an activity’s statistics.

General Data

The General page displays general information about the activity.

The General page in the Properties dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 467

The General page contains the following data fields:

Custom Data

The Custom Data page lets you set up and view custom data that you have defined for the model. Custom data is useful for capturing additional information about an activity that is not normally captured by iGrafx Process. Procedures for creating custom data are discussed elsewhere (see Adding Custom Data Fields to a Shape on page 203). You use the Custom Data page to define how the activity modifies the value of custom data.

Field Description

Name The Name field contains the name of the type of shape rather than a particular instance of the shape. For example, the name of a rectangular shape is normally Activity, while the name of a diamond shape is normally Decision.

Any change you make to the name of a shape applies only to that instance of the shape.

You can output this name with Export Table (Graphical/Object Name). For more information about exporting tables, see Exporting a Table on page 179.

ID The ID is a serial number that is assigned when the shape is created and is unique in the scope of the diagram, and in most cases, unique in the scope of a document. You cannot change the value of this field.

This number can be output with Export Table (Graphical/ObjectID) and can also be used as a shape identifier in Database Import.For more information about importing databases, see Database Files on page 183.

Note Click this button to display the Note dialog box to add a note to this shape. For more information about notes, see Working with Notes on page 85.

Resize Proportionally

When this box is checked, all sides of the shape maintain their proportions when you resize the shape.

Grow To Fit Text

When this box is checked, the shape automatically expands to hold any text that you type in the shape.

Container Shape

When this box is selected, you can create an embedded subprocess in the shape.

468 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

About Types

A type is a range of values used for attributes and functions. The type of an attribute specifies the valid range of values for an attribute. The type of a function specifies the valid range of input or output values for the function. Types are also used to create decision paths and as case text labels.

iGrafx Process includes the following standard types:

You can also create your own custom types as a Set of Members. A Set of Members may have a value that is one of the members of a defined set. For example, the YesNo and TrueFalse attributes types are both a Set of Members type with two members each.

A Set of Members type may contain as many members as desired, but member names may not begin with a number, or include a space or hyphen. Member names may not be used in two different sets, and members may not have the same name as any transaction attribute.

Use the Define Types dialog box to define new attribute types.

After you have defined a new type, you may use it in several ways. You may specify the type as decision case text, as the type of values an attribute may contain, or as the value accepted or returned by a function.

Type Description

Value Sets the value to any real number (to fifteen-digit precision) or expression.

YesNo has a value of either No (equal to 0) or Yes (1).

TrueFalse specifies that the attribute can either have a value of False (equal to 0) or True (1).

The Define Types dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 469

Defining an Attribute Type

1 On the Model menu, click Types.

2 Use the Define Types dialog box to define the attribute type name, type, and define its list of members.

3 Click Close.

Modifying an Attribute Type

1 On the Model menu, click Types.

2 In the Define Types dialog box, click an existing type name.

3 Modify the attribute’s member list.

Note

You cannot modify an attribute’s name. To rename an attribute, you must first delete the attribute and then add it with a different name.

4 Click Modify.

5 Click Close.

Deleting an Attribute Type

1 On the Model menu, click Types.

2 In the Define Types dialog box, click an existing type name.

3 Click Delete.

4 Click Close.

Working with Attributes Attributes are similar to programming variables and are used to communicate information and manage the flow of transactions through a process. Attributes have four characteristics:

Type Description

Location An attribute’s location defines the scope of the attribute’s value.

Type An attribute’s type is similar to a programming variable’s data type. It is the range of values that the attribute can assume.

470 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Attribute Locations

When discussing attribute locations, it is important to distinguish between the attribute name and the attribute value. All attributes are accessible by name from any activity anywhere in the model. However, the scope of an attribute’s value is limited to the boundaries defined by the attribute location. There are four valid attribute locations: Transaction, Department, Process, and Scenario.

Value An attribute’s value must be within the range of its type. Based on attribute values you can affect many aspects of the model including the flow of transactions through your model.

Name An attribute’s name uniquely identifies the attribute within its location.

Type Description

Location Description

Transaction The scope of the value of a transaction attribute is limited to the transaction itself. A change in the value of a transaction attribute for one transaction does not affect the value of the same attribute for other transactions.

Transaction attributes for transactions belonging to the same transaction family can be set to the same value simultaneously by using a special prefix before the attribute name (see Attribute Names on page 473).

Transaction attribute values can be set by generators as the transactions are introduced into the process, or at various points when being processed at an activity (see Assigning Attribute Values at an Activity on page 463).

Department The value of a department attribute is global within a department but is independent of the value of the same attribute in other departments.

If any activity in a department sets or changes the value of a department attribute, then the value is set or changed for all activities in the department. However, a change in a department attribute in one department does not affect the value of the same attribute in other departments.

You can set the initial value of a department attribute when you define it (see Defining an Attribute on page 472). You can also set or change the attribute value at various points when being processed at an activity.

Defining Process Behavior 471

Defining an Attribute

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 Click Add.

3 Use the Add New Attribute dialog box to define the attribute location, name, type, initial value, and (if applicable) the attribute department or process.

4 Click OK to return to the Define Attributes dialog box.

5 Click OK.

Process The value of a process attribute is global within a process but is independent of the value of the same attribute in other processes.

If any activity in a process sets or changes the value of a process attribute, then the value is set or changed for all activities in all departments in the process. However, a change in a process attribute in one process does not affect the value of the same attribute in other processes.

You can set the initial value of a process attribute when you define it. You can also set or change the attribute value at various points when being processed at an activity.

Scenario The value of a scenario attribute is global within a scenario but is independent of the value of the same attribute in other scenarios.

If any activity in a scenario sets or changes the value of a scenario attribute, then the value is set or changed for all activities in all departments in all processes in the scenario. However, a change in a scenario attribute in one scenario does not affect the value of the same attribute in other scenarios.

You can set the initial value of a scenario attribute when you define it. You can also set or change the attribute value at various points when being process at an activity.

Location Description

472 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Modifying an Attribute

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 In the Define Attributes dialog box, click an attribute name in the Existing Attributes list.

3 Click Modify.

4 Use the Modify Attributes dialog box, to change the attribute’s type or initial value, or add another initial value for a different department or process.

Note

You cannot change an attribute’s name or location.

5 Click OK.

Deleting an Attribute

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 In the Define Attributes dialog box, click an attribute name in the Existing Attributes list.

3 Click Delete.

4 Click OK.

Attribute Types

An attribute’s type is its range of values. You set the attribute’s type when you define the attribute (see About Types on page 469).

Attribute Names

Attribute names consist of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Attribute names are case sensitive and must be unique within each location.

Defining Process Behavior 473

An attribute prefix is assigned to all global attributes to indicate their location. You must enter the prefix when using the attribute name in an expression.

The special prefix F. (for example F.attribute_name) lets you assign a value to a transaction attribute for all members of a transaction family. A transaction family is created the first time a transaction is duplicated (see Transaction Families on page 402). If you do not use the F. prefix, only the value of the current transaction attribute is changed. The attribute for all other family members is not changed.

Attribute Values

There are several ways to set the value of an attribute:

• You can set the initial value of a global attribute when you first define the attribute. The initial value can be a constant or an expression (see Defining an Attribute on page 462).

• You can set the initial value for a transaction attribute on a generator which is part of the simulation environment. This is covered in a later chapter (see Setting Attributes With a Generator on page 515

• You can set or change the value of any attribute within an activity using the Attributes page in the Properties dialog box. You can set the attribute’s value at various points as the transaction is being processed at the activity (see Assigning Attribute Values at an Activity on page 463).

Working with FunctionsA function is a mathematical or statistical relationship that returns a value. A function may have zero, one or more input values, called arguments, but only one output value. The value of a function is calculated based on the value of its arguments (if any).

Type of attribute Prefix

Transaction attribute No prefix (for example attribute_name) T. is allowed and may appear in some circumstances (for example T.attribute_name).

Process attribute P. (for example P.attribute_name)

Scenario attribute S. (for example S.attribute_name)

Department attribute

D. (for example D.attribute_name)

474 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You can use a function any place in your process model where you need to set or change a value via an expression. For example, instead of setting an activity’s task duration to a constant value, you could create an expression that uses a function to vary the duration over a set of distributed values. Additionally, you could use functions to set or change attribute values. Functions are also convenient for creating a single place to change a value that may be used in multiple places.

iGrafx Process provides a robust set of built-in mathematical and statistical functions which are described in detail in System Defined Functions in the iGrafx online help system. You cannot modify these functions, but you can create your own custom functions.

User Defined Functions

You can use custom functions in the same manner as the system defined functions provided by iGrafx Process. You can create three types of functions:

• Distribution Function - returns a value statistically distributed over a range. A distribution function has no arguments. Distribution functions can be continuous or noncontinuous (see Distribution Functions on page 477).

• Mapping Function - matches one set of values to another. An argument is passed to the function which maps it to a new value and returns that value (see Mapping Functions on page 481).

Note

Creation of VBA functions and use of iGrafx objects as discussed in the following paragraph, requires advanced programming knowledge.

• Visual Basic for Applications - If you check this box for a function named, for example, F1, then whenever the expression evaluator needs a result for that function it fires the FunctionValue event on the Document object. That event takes the name of the function and its argument (if any) as parameters and returns a double value.

Defining Process Behavior 475

To create a new function you must first define it. Use the Add New Function dialog box to define a new function.

Use this dialog box to define the function name, type, and any arguments as described in the following table:

After you define a function, you then describe its behavior. The behavior of a function varies depending on whether it is a distribution function or a mapping function.

The Add New Function dialog box

Characteristic Description

Function Name The function name uniquely identifies the function. The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including underscore but not spaces.

Function Type The function type specifies the data type for the return value. There are three system defined types: Value, YesNo, and TrueFalse. You can also define your own types (see About Types on page 469).

Arguments A Distribution function has no arguments and, for continuous functions, returns a value proportionally within an interval you define, or for noncontinuous functions returns one of the discrete values you define.

A Mapping function has an argument. You specify the type of this argument passed to the function as well as the type of the value returned. You may also optionally specify text describing the argument to assist when building an expression (see The Expression Builder on page 486).

476 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Adding a Function

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Functions tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Functions.

2 In the Define Functions dialog box, click Add.

3 In the Add New Function dialog box, type a function name and select the function type.

4 For distribution functions, click No Argument.

5 For mapping functions, click Argument, type the argument text or name, and select the argument type.

6 Click OK.

Distribution Functions

A distribution function takes no arguments, but returns either a value that is statistically distributed over a range or one of the discrete values defined based on the Continuous check box (see the following Define Functions dialog box).

For example, you could simulate the receipt of customer orders from different regions of the country by defining a function called SetRegion which sets the value of a transaction attribute called Region. You could define the function so that 30% of the time it sets the attribute to Eastern, 45% of the time to Central, and 25% of the time to Western.

Defining Process Behavior 477

Use the Define Functions dialog box to define a distribution function.

When you create your own distribution function, you must provide the following information:

The Define Functions dialog box

Characteristic Description

Intervals The range of output values is divided into one or more sections called intervals. Each interval defines a percentage of time the function returns a value. The last interval always has an end value of 100 percent.

478 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

A function’s intervals always define the percentage of time that a value is returned. For example, if you divide a function into five equal intervals, each corresponding interval value has an equal (20%) chance of being returned by the function.

The actual value returned by a distribution function depends on whether the function is continuous or noncontinuous. For example, the following figure illustrates a continuous distribution function.

This function has three defined intervals. The intervals specify that 20% of the time the function returns a value between zero and five, 60% of the time it returns a value between five and ten, and

Continuous/Noncontinuous • Continuous function values are returned from a range of values.

• Noncontinuous function values are confined to the specific numbers defined. You use a noncontinuous function to return certain numbers or members of a type.

Note

If the function type is not Value, then the function is always noncontinuous.

Values Each interval has its own return value. For continuous functions the value delineates a range of values that are returned for an interval. For noncontinuous functions, the value is the specific value that is returned for an interval.

Continuous Distribution Function

Characteristic Description

Defining Process Behavior 479

20% of the time it returns a value between 10 and 20. By contrast, the following figure shows the same functions as a noncontinuous function.

In this case, the intervals specify that 20% of the time the function returns a value of five, 60% of the time returns a value of ten, and 20% of the time returns a of 20.

Most iGrafx non-trivial distributions are calculated by ranlib. The actual formula used is

min+(max-min)*genbet(A,B)

Defining a Distribution Function

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Functions tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Functions.

2 In the Define Functions dialog box, click an existing function name.

Note

The function must be previously declared to be a distribution function (see Adding a Function).

3 Specify the number of intervals.

4 For each interval, type a range and value.

5 Click the Continuous check box for a continuous function or leave blank for a noncontinuous function.

Note

This option only appears if the function return type is Value.

6 Click OK.

Noncontinuous Distribution Function

480 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Mapping Functions

A mapping function matches one set of values to another. The value of the argument passed to a mapping function dictates what value is returned by the function. For example, you could define a mapping function called GetPrice which returns the price of a part based on a part number.

Use the Define Functions dialog box to define a mapping function.

The Define Functions dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 481

When you create your own mapping function, you provide the following information:

The values returned by a mapping function depend on its input argument. For example, the following figure illustrates a mapping function whose argument value is a number.

This mapping function has three defined intervals. The intervals specify that if the input number is between 0 and 50, the function returns a value between 0 and 5. If the input number is between 50 and 100, the function returns a value between 5 and 15. If the input number is between 100 and

Characteristic Description

Intervals If the function argument is a number, you can specify intervals of input numbers that return specified values or ranges of values.

Intervals do not apply to mapping functions whose arguments are members of types (see Attribute Types on page 473).

Continuous/Noncontinuous If argument values are type Value and return values are type Value, the return values can be continuous or noncontinuous.

• Continuous function values are returned from a range of values.

• Noncontinuous function values are confined to specific numbers instead of a range. You use a non-continuous function to return specific numbers or members of a type.

Members and Values If the input argument is the member of a type, you specify the return value corresponding to each member.

Mapping function with number arguments

482 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

150, the function returns a value between 15 and 20. Note that while this function returns continuous values, you can define a mapping function to be noncontinuous.

By contrast, the following figure shows a mapping function in which the input arguments are members of the type YesNo.

In this case, the input to the function is one of the two members of the YesNo type: Yes or No. If the input argument is Yes, the function returns 1. If the input argument is No, the function returns 0.

Defining a Mapping Function

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Functions tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Functions.

2 In the Define Functions dialog box, click an existing function name.

Note

The function must be previously declared to be a mapping function.

3 If the argument type is a number, specify the number of intervals.

4 For each interval, type a range and value.

5 Click the Continuous check box for a continuous function or leave unchecked for a noncontinuous function.

Note

This option only appears if the function return type is Value.

Mapping function with type member arguments.

Defining Process Behavior 483

6 If the argument is a type, specify a value for each type member.

7 Click OK.

Working with ExpressionsAn expression is an arithmetic or logical statement used to assign a value. Any place in your process model where you need to set or change a value, you can use an expression. Expressions can be used to:

• Set initial attribute values.

• Change attribute values.

• Set a task durations.

• Define transaction queuing options (e.g., batch by expression).

• Define transaction output options (e.g., decision by expression, discard by expression).

Expressions have one of two formats:

1 To set an attribute using an expression, the format is:

attribute = statement

where attribute is any defined attribute (including task durations) and statement is a combination of attributes, functions, numbers, type members, and mathematical or logical operators. For example, the following expression:

priority = trunc(random()*5,0) uses the system defined random and trunc functions to set a transaction priority to an integer value between 0 and 5. You can use any system or user defined function in an expression.

2 To specify a value (e.g., Task Cost) using an expression, the format is:

statement

For example, on the Task page of the Properties dialog box in the Cost field, you can have the following expression:

S.ActivityCost

which sets the task cost of an activity to the value of a scenario attribute called ActivityCost which is initialized via the Attributes dialog box (see Defining an Attribute on page 472).

484 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You combine functions, attributes, numbers, and time members into statements using the following operators:

Operator Description

+ Added to

- Subtracted from

* Multiplied by

/ Divided by

= Equals to

! Not. (Logical negation)

< Less than

> Greater than

<= Less than or equal to

>= Greater than or equal to

& Logical AND. Both statements must be true to return True.

| Logical OR. Either statement can be true to return True.

% Modulus operator.Returns a remainder after a number is divided by a divisor.

() Parenthesis. Delineates arguments and sets order of precedence.

, Comma. Used to separate members of a list of arguments.

Defining Process Behavior 485

Expressions are evaluated according to the operators used and the placement of parentheses. Operations are performed from left to right in the following order:

iGrafx Process provides the Expression Builder to assist you in creating syntactically correct expressions.

The Expression Builder

The Expression Builder is a dialog box that lets you quickly paste in the components of an expression from the various predefined elements in your model. For example, you can define task duration, or input batching options using an expression.

Operator Description

() Parentheses.

*,/ Multiply, Divide

+, - Add, Subtract

<,>,<=,>= Comparisons

&, | Logical operators

The Expression Builder dialog box

486 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

With the expression builder you can either type an expression directly into the expression line, or use the dialog keys to paste elements into an expression. The following keys are available for pasting elements:

• Attribute - Opens the Paste Attribute dialog box to let you select from a list of defined attributes.

Operator Description

Paste Member. Opens the Paste Member dialog box letting you select a member from a list of defined types.

Paste Attribute. Opens the Paste Attribute dialog box letting you select from a list of defined attributes.

Paste Function. Opens the Paste Function dialog box letting you select from a list of defined functions.

Paste Operator. Opens the Paste Operator dialog box letting you select from a list of defined operators.

The Paste Attribute dialog box

Defining Process Behavior 487

• Function - Opens the Paste Function dialog box to let you select from a list of defined functions.

• Members - Opens the Paste Member dialog box to let you select a member from a list of defined types.

• Operators - Pastes the selected operator into the expression.

To build a correct expression, select the appropriate keys to paste desired elements into the expression line.

The Paste Function dialog box

The Paste Member dialog box

488 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining and Initializing a Scenario Attribute as an Expression

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 In the Define Attributes dialog box, click Add. The Add New Attribute dialog box opens.

3 Use the Add New Attribute dialog box to define the attribute name, type, Scenario location.

4 Click Expression and click in the expression field to open the Expression Builder.

5 Use the Expression Builder paste keys to add attributes, functions, members, and operators to your expression.

6 Click OK.

Modifying an Attribute’s Expression

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Attributes tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 Click an attribute name in the Existing Attributes list.

3 Click Modify to display the Modify Attribute dialog box.

4 If the attribute is not already an expression, click in the expression field to open the Expression Builder.

5 Use the Expression Builder paste keys to add attributes, functions, members, and operators to define or modify your expression.

6 Click OK.

Using Strings, Functions, and Arrays in Expressions

iGrafx allows the use of strings, or non numeric values, in expressions. In addition, special iGrafx String-type functions are available for helping compose expressions. iGrafx also allows the use of arrays in expressions for ease of identifying multiple values in a single variable.

The following discussion provides some overview and examples for using strings, functions, and arrays in expressions. For reference on Strings, see System Defined Functions in the iGrafx online help system.

For reference on Functions and Arrays, see the iGrafx Knowledge Base on the iGrafx web site.

Defining Process Behavior 489

About Strings

Strings follow the same generally accepted rules in iGrafx as in other computing environments. For example, they are always enclosed within a pair of double quotes ("for example").

About Functions

iGrafx offers several functions, available in the Paste Function dialog box, for manipulating strings in expressions. All functions except Find, FindNoCase, Compare, CompareNoCase, and GetLength return a string result.

Some functions are specially designed for testing the types of expressions and obtaining the ID numbers for activities, processes, and departments.

To use a function in an expression:

1 Open the Expression Builder. The Expression Builder is available from several points within iGrafx. One access point is through the Define Attributes dialog box. For example, you may choose to click the Attributes toolbar button, then add a new attribute with an initial value that is an expression.

2 Click the Paste Function Name icon. The Paste Function dialog box opens.

3 Click the String category, then click to select a function name.

4 Select the Paste Argument(s) check box and click OK. The function appears in the Expression Builder.

You can also use a CustomData function to derive the value of a custom data definition of an activity. For more information, see Using Custom Data-Related Functions on page 493.

See System Defined Functions in the iGrafx online help system for function definitions and syntax.

About Arrays

You can use arrays to create more powerful expressions that work harder for you with less coding required. In iGrafx, arrays are dynamically sized during simulation as you use them and do not require declaration. For example, x[0] starts an array and does not require a Dim x[10] to declare its parameters.

Some general rules apply when using arrays in iGrafx.

490 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Functions on Arrays

The following functions operate on arrays.

ArrayInit(AttributeName[, Value = 0])

This function sets all of the elements of the one- and two-dimensional arrays associated with AttributeName to Value, and returns Value as a result. Value can be of type numeric or string.

Rule Example

Array indices are enclosed in square brackets. T.attr[0]

Every attribute has an associated one-dimensional and two-dimensional array. The example shown represents 3 distinct values.

T.x, T.x[0], T.x[0,0]

Arrays can be indexed by a string. In the example, SkillLevel is an attribute and Worker1 is a textual index element in the array.

SkillLevel["Worker1"]

iGrafx allows array index values to be non integers; floating point values are not truncated. The example shown stores 3 distinct values into the array x.

x[0.5]=1, x[1.0]=2, x[1.5]=3

Individual elements of an array can be of type numeric or string, as can individual array indices.

x[1,1] = 1, x[2, "two"] = "two", x["three",3] = 3, x["four","four"] = "four"

To assign an element of an array, you select an attribute within a dialog box and then begin the expression with the array index. Selecting the attribute T.x and then specifying the expression [0]=1 sets T.x[0]=1.

Selecting the attribute T.shipped within a dialog box and then specifying [0] = shipped[0] + 1 as the expression means "add 1 to the value of shipped [0]"

You cannot assign to individual array elements within the Define Attributes dialog box, but you can initialize an entire array with the ArrayInit function.

see Using Functions on Arrays on page 491

Defining Process Behavior 491

Example

ArrayInit(T.x, -1) initializes all of the elements of both the one- and two-dimensional arrays of T.x to -1.

LoadCustomData(AttributeName, DefinitionName[, DefaultValue])

This function reads the values of a Custom Data definition into an array so you can index the values by activity ID.

First, if DefaultValue is specified, do an ArrayInit(AttributeName, DefaultValue). Then, for each activity with an activity ID <a> that has a value <v> for the Custom Data definition DefinitionName, AttributeName[<a>] = <v>. The function then returns the number of activities that had a value as a numeric result.

Example

LoadCustomData(S.Temperature, "Temperature", "n/a") is used to initialize the scenario attribute S.Temperature within the Define Attributes dialog box.

The process diagram has a Custom Data definition Temperature that is of type numeric. The following three activities within the diagram have the following values for Temperature:

• Activity1 Temperature is 32

• Activity2 Temperature is undefined

• Activity3 Temperature is 72

Once the LoadCustomData function has executed, S.Temperature[ActId()] returns 32 within Activity1, "n/a" within Activity2, and 72 within Activity3. The function returns the value 2, which is the number of activities that have a value for Temperature.

LoadCustomDataIndex(AttributeName,DefinitionName)

This function reads the values of a Custom Data definition into an array so you can index the activity IDs by value. This lets you use a Custom Data definition as a label so you can obtain the activity ID of one activity from another activity.

For each activity with an activity id <a> that has a value <v> for the Custom Data definition DefinitionName, AttributeName[<v>] = <a>. An error is reported if more than one activity has the same value. The function then returns the number of activities that had a value as a numeric result.

492 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Example

LoadCustomDataIndex(S.Room, "Room") is used to initialize the S.Room attribute within the Define Attributes dialog box. Following on the LoadCustomData example, let’s say there is also a Custom Data definition Room which is of type Text, and that:

• On Activity1, the value of Room is "Kitchen"

• On Activity2, the value of Room is "Attic"

• On Activity3, the value of Room is "Bedroom"

Once the LoadCustomDataIndex function has executed:

• S.Temperature[S.Room["Kitchen"]] = 32

• S.Temperature[S.Room[""Attic""]] = "n/a"

• S.Temperature[S.Room["Bedroom"]] = 72

LoadCustomDataIndex returns a value of 3, which is the number of activities that have a value for Room.

Using Custom Data-Related Functions

The CustomData(Definition[,ActivityID]) function returns the value of the specified Custom Data definition within an activity. The following examples refer to the LoadCustomData example (see Using Functions on Arrays on page 491):

CustomData("Temperature") within the activity Kitchen returns 32.

CustomData("Temperature", S.Room["Bedroom"]) within any activity returns 72.

Defining Process Behavior 493

494 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining the Simulation Environment 18After you create a process diagram and define its behavior, your next step is to prepare the model for

simulation.

To prepare a model for simulation, you must define a simulation scenario which describes the environment in which the simulation runs.

When you simulate a process, the iGrafx Process simulator uses information from the process model and the process scenario to run the process for a set amount of time. The output of the simulation run is a simulation report containing statistical results of the simulation.

Note

The tools you use to create a simulation scenario are the Model menu, Model toolbar, and Modeling Bar. These are referenced throughout this chapter.

For detailed information on these tools, see Toolbars in the iGrafx online help system.

Defining the Simulation Environment 495

What Happens During Simulation?When you run a simulation, generators introduce transactions into the process. The transactions flow along the directed connected lines of the model to activities. When transactions enter activities they may be held until the input conditions for the activity are met. Activities process the transactions, accumulate and report statistics, and then send the transactions along output paths based on the activity’s output criteria. The progress of a simulation displays in the Simulator Progress window.

The Simulator Progress window shows the elapsed time for the simulation, the percentage of the simulation completed, the total number of transactions introduced in the process, the number of transactions that have completed processing, the number of transactions that are currently active (processing) in the process, and the limit of the number of transactions allowed in the process.

Note

If the Simulator Progress window does not appear automatically, click Progress on the View menu.

The Simulator Progress window

496 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The simulation runs for a specified amount of time, or until all transactions have been processed. When the simulation ends, the results of the simulation are automatically displayed in the Report Window.

The Report Window contains several tabs that break out the accumulated simulation statistics into several categories. The contents of the Report Window are discussed in the next chapter. For more information about the Report Window, see Reviewing Simulation Results on page 563.

About ScenariosA scenario is a set of data describing the simulation environment. It includes the run setup, generators, resources, schedule definitions, and other simulation options. A simulation run uses one

The Report window

Defining the Simulation Environment 497

or more process diagrams in association with a single scenario. The combination of process diagrams and a scenario provides the environment within which to run a simulation.

You can have several scenarios in one file for running what-if simulations or variations of a process. Also, a simulation can use activities from more than one process and the results from multiple reports can be compared side-by-side.

Simulation Environment

498 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Scenario Window

You can view scenario information using the Scenario window.This window contains a section for each category of data in a scenario. Click a Plus button next to a category name to expand the information under that category. You can double-click specific entries in a category to display a dialog box for modifying scenario data.

The Scenario window

Defining the Simulation Environment 499

Viewing the Scenario Window

1 In the Explorer window, click the All Components tab.

2 If necessary, expand the scenario list by clicking the + icon next to Scenarios.

3 In the scenario list, double-click a scenario name to display the Scenario window.

When you run a simulation, the information in the process map is combined with the information in the scenario to create the simulation environment. The scenario contains the following information:

• Run Setup - Defines when simulations start and stop, directs how often to collect statistics and where to report them, and identifies any snapshots. For more information, see Run Setup on page 502.

• Generators - Defines generators that introduce activities into a process at defined starting points. For more information, see Using Generators on page 511.

• Resources - Defines any resources used by activities in the model. For more information, see Using Resources on page 533.

• Calendars - Defines schedules, events, days, and hours for the model. Resources, generators, and activities may be on schedules to control when processing occurs. For more information, see Using Calendars on page 534.

• Initialization - Describes the initialization of any global attributes in the model. For more information, see Defining Attributes on page 462.

• Functions - Identifies any functions that are used by the model. For more information, see see Working with Functions on page 474.

• Monitors - Defines any monitors that are placed in the model to collect statistics. For more information, see Using Monitors on page 544.

Working with Multiple Scenarios

You can define multiple scenarios for a single process model. The run setup, generators, resources, schedules, initialization, function definitions, and monitoring information apply only to a single scenario.

Multiple scenarios save time if you wish to make changes to scenario data between simulation runs. Rather than making changes to one scenario between simulation runs, you can define multiple scenarios each with its own scenario data, and then specify which scenario to use for a simulation. Creating two or more scenarios lets you easily compare the impact resulting from changing such things as the number or transactions or the value of an attribute.

500 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Creating a New Scenario

When you create a new process model it has, by default, a single scenario initialized with default data. To create a new scenario, perform the following steps:

1 In the Explorer window, click the Document Components tab.

2 Right-click in the Document Components area.

3 On the context menu, click New and then Scenario.

4 In the New Component dialog box, type a scenario name or accept the name provided.

5 Click OK.

You can also create a new scenario by copying and pasting an existing scenario:

1 In the Explorer window, click the Document Components tab.

2 If necessary, expand the scenario list by clicking the plus icon next to Scenarios.

3 In the scenario list, right-click a scenario name, and click Copy in the context menu.

4 Right-click In the Document Components area, and click Paste in the context menu.

Note

You can also copy scenarios between models. To accomplish this, perform the copy steps on the first model, open or view the file for the second model, and perform the paste steps.

Renaming a Scenario

When you create a new scenario, iGrafx 2006 normally supplies a default scenario name. You can provide a more meaningful name by renaming the scenario. To rename a scenario:

1 In the Explorer window, click the Document Components tab.

2 If necessary, expand the scenario list by clicking the+ icon next to Scenarios.

3 In the scenario list, right-click a scenario name and click Rename on the context menu. The scenario name is highlighted.

4 Type a new scenario name and press Enter.

Defining the Simulation Environment 501

Deleting a Scenario

1 In the Explorer window, click the Document Components tab.

2 If necessary, expand the scenario list by clicking the + icon next to Scenarios.

3 In the scenario list, right-click a scenario name and click Delete on the context menu. The scenario name is removed from the list.

Note

You can delete all scenarios from your model but you will no longer be able to simulate the model. You must have at least one scenario to simulate your model.

Run SetupBefore simulating your process you must define certain parameters that describe the simulation run. These parameters are known as Run Setup information and define the simulation’s time period, direct where to store simulation results, and identifies any snapshot data to collect. Run setup data is part of the scenario, and is viewable in the Scenario window.

You define Run Setup data using the Run Setup dialog box which is accessible using the Model menu.

The Scenario Window with Run Setup data

502 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining Simulation Time

Simulation time describes when the simulation run begins, when it ends, and what calendars apply to the simulation. You define simulation time parameters using the Simulation Time tab in the Run Setup dialog box.

Using this tab, you can define the simulation time, schedule, start time, end time, warmup time, and time conversion factors:

The Simulation Time tab in the Run Setup dialog box

Defining the Simulation Environment 503

Setup Data Purpose

Simulation Time

Simulation time describes how time is viewed by the simulator. You can select either compressed time or calendar time.

Compressed - A compressed simulation only runs the active time defined by the calendar. The time is described as being compressed because the simulator only runs during the time that activity occurs. In compressed time, the simulator doesn’t use true calendar time. It simplifies, or compresses, time into only simulating active time.

Calendar - A calendar time simulation uses a twenty-four hour clock and therefore simulates both active and non-active times in the schedule. This allows for regular activity time, overtime or multiple shifts.

Default Schedule

For simulations running in calendar time, the Default Schedule identifies the primary schedule used throughout the model. You can select from the predefined or user defined schedules.For more information about schedules, see Working with Schedules on page 540.

Any activity, generator, or resource that references the Default schedule uses the schedule identified here. This provides a central location where you can set and modify the model’s schedule.

Note

For simulations running in compressed time, Default Schedule does not apply.

Simulation Start

For simulations running in calendar time, Simulation Start defines exactly when the simulation begins running. You can specify:

By Weekday - The simulation starts on a specific day of the week. The default is Monday, but you can select any day of the week.

By Date - In calendar mode, you may indicate that the simulation starts on a specific date.

Note

For simulations running in compressed time, Simulation start does not apply. The simulation begins when the first transaction is introduced.

504 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Simulation End Simulation End defines exactly when the simulation stops running. You can specify:

Transactions complete - The simulation ends when all transactions have been processed.

Custom - The simulation ends after a specified period of time (e.g., days, weeks, hours, years). When you set a custom end time, transactions that are not completed when the end time is reached are not counted as complete in the report.

Warmup Time Specify a period of time to run the simulation before collecting statistics so that start-up data collection does not skew the overall results of your process analysis. If you use a warm-up period, be sure to extend simulation run time long enough for steady state data collection.

To specify a warm-up period, choose Custom from the drop-down list. You can choose to allow the simulation to warm up for days, weeks, months, or years for any value of time that is less than the simulation end time.

Time Conversion

Time conversion units specify the conversions of any unit greater than hours, for activities, generators, and, in the case of compressed time, report elements.

For compressed time simulations, the default time conversion units are 8 hours a day, 5 days a week, and 22 days a month. If you change these units, it may affect calculations of durations, interarrival generators, and report results.

For calendar time simulations, the standard time conversion units are 24 hours in a day, 7 days in a week. You can customize time conversion units for hours in a day and days in a week. If you change these units, it can affect calculations of durations and interarrival generators, but not report results. Report statistics are calculated using the standard time conversion units for calendar time models (24 hours in a day, 7 days in a week).

Setup Data Purpose

Defining the Simulation Environment 505

Setting Up the Simulation Time

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2 In the Run Setup dialog box, click the Simulation Time tab.

3 Select Compressed or Calendar for the simulation time.

4 For calendar time simulations, select a default schedule and start time.

5 For Simulation End, select Transactions Complete or Custom.

6 For calendar time simulations, select Standard or Custom time conversion units.

7 Enter any changes to the time conversion units.

8 Click OK.

506 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Initialization and Report Setup

When you run a simulation, statistics are gathered, categorized, and placed into a report. As part of the simulation’s run setup data, you can specify how the report is created. You do this using the Initialization/Reports tab in the Run Setup dialog box.

Note

The initialization and reports run setup data only defines how and when a report is created. Information on how to customize and use reports is covered later.

Before each simulation run, you can set the reports options to create a new report, append data to an existing report, or overwrite an existing report. You can create multiple reports by using a custom name and use them to compare the results of multiple simulation runs. Appending data to an existing report also allows you to compare data from multiple simulation runs.

The Initialization/Reports tab in the Run Setup dialog box

Defining the Simulation Environment 507

The following are the run setup options:

Setup Data Purpose

Reports Create New Report - For each simulation run, new statistics are generated and placed in the report specified by Report Name. If the report already exists, older statistics are overwritten.

Append to Report- For each simulation run, new statistics are generated and appended to the report specified by Report Name.

Replace Simulation Run - For each simulation run, new statistics are generated and replace the report specified by Report Name.

Report Name The default report name is Report1. You can select a name from the list or type in your own name.

Active Limit Active limit specifies the maximum number of transactions that can be processed concurrently during the simulation.

Sequence Number

Sequence number is used to control randomness in the simulation run.

Normally, if you run a simulation multiple times without changing the process map or scenario, the results are the same each time. This allows you to test your model independently of any sampling or randomness effects.

If you wish to control randomness in the simulation, change the sequence number before each simulation run. The results of the simulation vary based on the sequence number.

For example, with a sequence number of 1, the random times picked for an activity duration may cause queueing for a particular resource. However, in the same model, a sequence number of 2 may not cause the same level of queuing.

Thus it is important that you generate enough transactions to ensure that the results are not skewed by a small sample. It you are only processing a small number of transactions, then you can run multiple simulations with different sequences to increase your sample size.

508 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Setting Up the Reports

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2 In the Run Setup dialog box, click the Initialization/Reports tab.

3 Select Create New Report, Append to Report, or Replace Existing Report.

4 Type an Active Limit or accept the default of 5000.

5 Type a new Sequence value (for randomness only).

6 Click OK.

Defining Snapshots

Snapshots are reports of simulation data at intermediate points (between simulation start and end) during the simulation run. Normally, simulation data are reported only at the end of the simulation run, but you can use snapshots to view simulation data at one or more points prior to the simulation end. Snapshots are useful for monitoring and analyzing process results at various points in the process. You add, modify, and delete snapshots using the Snapshots tab in the Run Setup dialog box.

The Snapshots tab in the Run Setup dialog box

Defining the Simulation Environment 509

You can define multiple snapshots to occur at various points in the process simulation. You can define snapshots for specific points in time or upon the occurrence of specific events.

Defining a Snapshot

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2 In the Run Setup dialog box, click the Snapshots tab.

3 Select Scheduled Event or Specific Time.

4 For Specific Time, click Add, specify a time in the Set Snapshot Time dialog box, and click OK.

5 For Scheduled Event, select an event.

6 Click OK.

Modifying a Snapshot

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2 In the Run Setup dialog box, click the Snapshots tab.

3 Select Scheduled Event or Specific Time.

4 For Specific Time, click Modify, change the time in the Set Snapshot Time dialog box, and click OK.

5 For Scheduled Event, select an new event.

6 Click OK.

510 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Deleting a Snapshot

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2 In the Run Setup dialog box, click the Snapshots tab.

3 Select Specific Time.

4 Select a snapshot name, and click Delete.

5 Click OK.

Using Generators Generators introduce transactions into a process during a simulation. They may also be used to set the initial value of defined attributes. You can define multiple generators to introduce transactions at different rates and at different points in your process.

Note

A generator can only introduce transactions at one start point in your process. To introduce transactions at multiple points in your process, you must define multiple start points using the Inputs page on the Properties dialog box and use the Generators dialog box to define a generator for each start point that is to receive transactions.

Defining the Simulation Environment 511

There are six types of generators. The type of generator determines the method and rate for introducing transactions into a process.

iGrafx Process automatically creates a single Completion generator when you create a new process. By default, this generator is assigned to the start activity of the process. You can change its type or define more generators as needed.

Type of Generator Description

Completion A Completion generator introduces a set of transactions, into the process when the previous transaction set from that generator has completed processing.

Demand A Demand generator introduces a transaction to a start point every time a named resource is available in the department containing the start point.

Interarrival The Interarrival generator introduces transactions at a defined rate. You define the interarrival time and the number of transactions introduced each time.

Event The Event generator introduces transactions upon the occurrence of a specific time event (e.g., weekly).

Timetable The Timetable generator introduces transactions based on a table that specifies the number of transactions to be issued in each specified time interval.

Attribute Change The Attribute Change generator may introduce transactions when the specified attribute’s value is changed.

512 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Generators

You can view the Generators dialog box from these access points:

• Model menu

• Generators toolbar button on the Model toolbar

• Scenario window (from the Explorer bar, All Components view)

• Modeling bar, Generators tab (from the View menu, choose Model Bar)

• Generators button on the Inputs page of the Properties dialog box.

Use this dialog box to add new generators, delete existing generators, or modify existing generators. You can also set the generator type, start point, schedules, and transaction counts here.

The Generators dialog box

Defining the Simulation Environment 513

Viewing Generators Using the Menu or Toolbar

1 On the Model menu, choose Generators.or

On the Model toolbar, click the Generators toolbar button.

2 The Generators dialog box appears with all existing generators and their settings listed.

Adding a New Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click Add.

3 Select the start point and generator type.

4 Based on the generator type, set the appropriate options.

5 Click OK.

Deleting a Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, select a generator.

3 Click Delete.

4 Click OK.

Modifying a Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, select a generator you want to modify.

3 Use the dialog box to change the generator options.

4 Click OK.

Renaming a Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, select a generator you want to rename, and click Rename.

3 In the Generator Name dialog box, type the new generator name.

4 Click OK.

514 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Duplicating a Generator

1 In the Explorer bar, select the scenario that contains the generator you want to duplicate.

2 Expand the Generators section and select the generator you want to duplicate.

3 From the Edit menu, choose Copy.

4 From the Edit menu, choose Paste. The duplicated generator appears below the original generator.

Setting Attributes With a Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, select a generator.

3 Click the Attribute Initialization tab.

4 Click the button to define a new attribute. For information about defining attributes, see Defining an Attribute on page 462.

5 In the Attribute Initialization tab on Generators dialog box, click the Add button.

6 In the Location cell, select an attribute location.

7 In the Name cell, select an attribute name.

8 In the Value cell, type a valueorSelect a value from the drop-down listor

Click the Expression Builder tool, and use the Expression Builder to define an expression.

9 Click OK.

Defining the Simulation Environment 515

Defining Generators

The Generators dialog box contents are dynamic, and options change depending on generator type. All generator types have some common settings. They are:

To use an Excel spreadsheet for generator data, see Using External Data for Generators on page 531.

Options Description

Generator Type Specifies which generator type you are adding, or displays the generator type of an existing generator in the list of generators.

The Active check box indicates that transactions will be generated in the active scheduled simulation time.

Process Start Point By default, a generator begins at the start shape. You can define other start points by double-clicking a shape and setting the Start Point on the Inputs page of the Properties dialog box. Once you have defined another start point, you can indicate that the generator should introduce transactions to the new start point.

Active Indicates whether the generator is active during simulation.

Max Transactions Specifies the maximum number of transactions the generator may introduce into the process.

Stop After Specifies the period of time (from simulation start) to stop generating transactions.

Delayed Start Specifies the period of time (from simulation start) to delay before starting to generate transactions.

Limited Schedule You can use built-in schedules or define your own schedule to define when the generator is allowed to introduce transactions. This option is not available for the Event generator.

Schedules apply only when you run a simulation in Calendar mode (see Defining Simulation Time on page 503).

Transaction Suppression

No transactions are introduced during a time period in which this expression is zero (False).

516 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining a Completion Generator

Since a completion generator introduces transactions only when previously introduced transactions complete, it is useful for measuring minimum, unloaded, process cycle time. This is useful for ensuring that transactions follow expected paths.

For information about options common to all generators, see Defining Generators on page 516.

Note

You can set up a completion generator to introduce more than one transaction at a time. In this case, the generator introduces a set of transactions (specified by a Transaction Count), and does not introduce another set until all transactions of the previous set are completed.

To define a completion generator, you provide the following information:

Options Description

Transaction Count Specifies the numbers of transaction introduced at each generation.

• Transaction Count Each Generation - sets the number of transactions to be introduced at each generation.

• Different Initial Count - sets the number of transactions to be introduced at the first generation if the number is different from Transaction Count Each Generation.

Note

These values can be expressions and the Transaction Count Each Generation will be evaluated at each generation time.

Defining the Simulation Environment 517

Adding a Completion Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click Add.

3 Select a start point in the Process Start Point list.

4 For the generator type, select Completion and select or clear the Active check box to indicate whether the generator is active during simulation.

5 Enter a value or an expression to set the transaction count for each generation. You can also click the Expression Builder icon to open the Expression Builder to set the value for this field.

6 You may choose to select the Max Transactions, Stop After, Delayed Start, and Limited Schedule, and Suppress Transactions When Expression Is False check boxes to define values for these settings.

Note

To define attributes, see Setting Attributes With a Generator on page 515.

7 Click OK.

Defining a Demand Generator

A demand generator introduces transactions when the named resource becomes available, ensuring maximum utilization of the resource. It is useful for testing the capacity of a process.

For information about options common to all generators, see Defining Generators on page 516.

To define a demand generator, you provide the following information:

Options Description

Resource Specifies the resource for which the generator introduces transactions into the process when that resource is available.

518 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Adding a Demand Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click Add.

3 Select a start point in the Process Start Point list.

4 For the generator type, click Demand and select or clear the Active check box to indicate whether the generator is active during simulation.

5 Select a resource type.

6 You may choose to select the Max Transactions, Stop After, Delayed Start, and Limited Schedule, and Suppress Transactions When Expression Is False check boxes to define values for these settings.

Note

To define attributes, see Setting Attributes With a Generator on page 515.

7 Click OK.

Defining an Interarrival Generator

The interarrival generator introduces transactions at specified time periods and is one of the most common types of generators used. The interarrival generator is useful for modeling real-life behavior where there are regular or varying intervals between transaction arrival.

For information about options common to all generators, see Defining Generators on page 516.

Defining the Simulation Environment 519

To define an interarrival generator, you provide the following information:

Options Description

Interarrival Time Specifies the time period for introducing transactions into the process.

• Constant - transactions are introduced at a constant interval (e.g., every 10 minutes).

• Distributed - transaction introduction is varied over a time period (e.g., uniformly every 5 to 10 minutes).

• Expression - transactions introduction is varied over a time period determined by the value of an expression (e.g., an exponential distribution around a mean of 5 minutes).

Spread Specifies how the total transactions in a generation, specified by Transaction Count, are distributed over the interarrival period. (This applies only if Transaction Count is greater than one.)

• All at Start - all transactions are introduced at the beginning of the interarrival period.

• Evenly - transactions are introduced at uniform intervals over the interarrival period.

• Random - transactions are introduced at random intervals during the interarrival period.

520 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Adding an Interarrival Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click Add.

3 Select a start point in the Process Start Point list.

4 For the generator type, select Interarrival and select or clear the Active check box to indicate whether the generator is active during simulation.

5 In the Interarrival Time area, select a period type, interval, and spread.

6 Enter a value or an expression to set the transaction count for each generation. You can also click the Expression Builder icon to open the Expression Builder to set the value for this field. If you want to set a different transaction count for the first generation, select the Different Initial Count check box and enter a value or expression.

Active check box Specifies that the generator will generate a complete set of transactions even if part of the interarrival period falls into an inactive period of the schedule. However, if the whole interarrival period is inside an inactive period, this generation will be skipped; that is, no transaction will be generated for this interarrival period.

Transaction Count Specifies the numbers of transactions introduced during each interarrival period.

• Transaction Count Each Generation - sets the number of transactions to be introduced at each interarrival period.

• Different Initial Count - sets the number of transactions to be introduced at the first generation if the number is different from Transaction Count Each Generation.

Note

These values can be expressions and the Transaction Count Each Generation will be evaluated at each generation time.

Options Description

Defining the Simulation Environment 521

7 You may choose to select the Max Transactions, Stop After, Delayed Start, and Limited Schedule, and Suppress Transactions When Expression Is False check boxes to define values for these settings.

Note

To define attributes, see Setting Attributes With a Generator on page 515.

8 Click OK.

Defining an Event Generator

An event generator introduces transactions at the occurrence of a specific event. It is useful for introducing transactions into a process at specific times.

For information about options common to all generators, see Defining Generators on page 516.

To define an event generator, you provide the following information:

Adding an Event Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click Add.

Options Description

Event An event is a defined point in time such as Weekly, First of Month, Last of Month or multiple defined points in time, such as 9:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. You can use built in events, such as Every_Morning, or define your own events (see Working with Events on page 543.)

Transaction Count Specifies the number of transactions introduced for each event.

• Transaction Count Each Generation - sets the number of transactions to be introduced at each generation.

• Different Initial Count - sets the number of transactions to be introduced at the first generation if the number is different from Transaction Count Each Generation.

Note

These values can be expressions and will be evaluated at each generation time.

522 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

3 Select a start point in the Process Start Point list.

4 For the generator type, select Event and select or clear the Active check box to indicate whether the generator is active during simulation.

5 Select when the event will occur.

6 Enter a value or an expression to set the transaction count for each generation. You can also click the Expression Builder icon to open the Expression Builder to set the value for this field. If you want to set a different transaction count for the first generation, select the Different Initial Count check box and enter a value or expression.

7 You may choose to select the Max Transactions, Stop After, Delayed Start, and Suppress Transactions When Expression Is False check boxes to define values for these settings.

8 Click OK.

Defining a Timetable Generator

The Timetable generator introduces transactions based on a timetable. A timetable generator is useful for modeling real life behavior where transactions arrive at multiple and varying intervals.

For information about options common to all generators, see Defining Generators on page 516.

Defining the Simulation Environment 523

To define a timetable generator, provide the following information:

You define the timetable using the Modify Timetable button to open the Set Timetable dialog box. For example, the following dialog box shows a bar chart that defines the number of transactions introduced per day over a seven-day period. Use the mouse to drag and stretch the bars in order to set

Options Description

Timetable Specifies the number of transactions introduced at various time intervals. Click the Modify Timetable button to set these parameters in the Set Timetable dialog box.

• Total Span - the total period of time covered by the timetable.

• Time Resolution - the smallest time interval possible for this timetable.

Note

You can view the timetable as a bar chart or a table.

Spread Specifies how the total transactions, specified by Transaction Count, are distributed over each interval in the timetable if the Transaction Count is greater than 1.

• All at Start- all transactions are introduced at the beginning of the time interval.

• Evenly - transactions are introduced at uniform intervals over the time interval.

• Random - transactions are introduced at random intervals during the time interval.

Factor Multiply the number of transactions for an interval by this value to specify the number of transactions introduced in the interval. This may be an expression to create random variations for each time period or interval and provides convenient scaling for what-if investigations.

524 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

the number of transactions (see Manipulating Transaction Rates and Time Intervals for a Timetable Generator on page 527).

The Set Timetable dialog box - Bar Chart View

Defining the Simulation Environment 525

The following Set Timetable dialog box shows the same data in tabular form. You can use this format to enter data in each cell of the grid. Please note that this is not a spreadsheet, and you cannot copy and paste data into the cells.

Adding a Timetable Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click Add.

3 Select a start point in the Process Start Point list.

4 For the generator type, select Timetable and select or clear the Active check box to indicate whether the generator is active during simulation.

5 Click Modify Timetable.

6 Use the Set Timetable dialog box to define the timetable intervals, span, and resolution.

7 Click OK in the Set Timetable dialog box.

8 Choose the spread and set the factor.

The Set Timetable dialog box - Tabular View

526 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

9 You may choose to select the Max Transactions, Stop After, Delayed Start, and Limited Schedule, and Suppress Transactions When Expression Is False check boxes to define values for these settings.

10 Click OK.

Manipulating Transaction Rates and Time Intervals for a Timetable Generator

The Bar Chart tab in the Set Timetable dialog box contains editing features that let you quickly set and change transaction rates and time intervals. In most cases you use the mouse to select the transaction rate for a specific time interval. For example, the following time table shows a 5 day time period with different transaction rates for each day.

To set the transaction rate for a time interval, move your mouse until the cursor changes to a plus sign (+), then click the left mouse button in the time interval space at the desired transaction rate. To adjust the transaction rate for a time interval, click and hold the left mouse button in the time interval space, drag the cursor to the desired rate, and release the mouse button.

Sometimes you may want to set a constant transaction rate over a specified period of time. For example, the following timetable shows a 5 day time period with a constant transaction rate of 5 transactions per day.

Defining the Simulation Environment 527

To set a constant transaction rate across multiple time period, click and hold the mouse button at the desired rate in the first time interval, drag the cursor across the desired time periods, and release the mouse button.

You can split out time intervals from a group of intervals that have been set at a constant transaction rate. The following timetable shows the 5 day time period from the previous example, except that the transaction rate for the middle time interval has been adjusted to 6 transactions per day.

To split out the transaction rate for a time interval, click the left mouse button in the time interval space at the desired transaction rate. To adjust the transaction rate for the time interval, click and hold the left mouse button in the time interval space, drag the cursor to the desired rate, and release the mouse button.

You can also adjust the total time span and resolution of your time intervals. The following timetable shows a 6 day time period broken down into 8 hour intervals with varying transaction rates for each interval.

To change the time span, click a time span in the Total Span list, or type a number followed by units, For example, you may type 14d to get a 14-day span. To change the time interval resolution, click a resolution in the Time Resolution list.

528 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining an Attribute Change Generator

An attribute change generator introduces transactions when the specified attribute’s value is changed. This type of generator is useful for generating transactions based on model status, such as inventory level, instead of certain expected time events.

The Attribute Change generator will only take action on an attribute assignment (or change) when the simulation clock is ready to advance time. In other words, if multiple assignments are made to an attribute at the same simulation time (in zero elapsed time), only the last assignment made will be evaluated by the Attribute Change generator.

For information about options common to all generators, see Defining Generators on page 516.

To define an attribute change generator, you provide the following information:

Options Description

Generate when Scenario Attribute

• Scenario Attribute–Select a scenario attribute. A scenario-location attribute must be defined before it appears in the drop-down list. If you need to define a scenario attribute, from the Model menu, choose Attributes.

• Trigger Type–Triggers cause the Attribute Change generator to generate transactions. Trigger types are:

• Increases–When the value of the scenario attribute increases

• Decreases–When the value of the scenario attribute decreases.

• Changes–When the value of the scenario attribute increases or decreases.

• Assigned–A value is assigned to this scenario attribute, regardless of this whether this value is changed.

Defining the Simulation Environment 529

Adding an Attribute Change Generator

1 Click the Generators button on the Model toolbar.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click Add.

3 Select a start point in the Process Start Point list.

4 For the generator type, select Attribute Change and select or clear the Active check box to indicate whether the generator is active during simulation.

5 From the Generate when Scenario Attribute drop-down list, select a scenario attribute and the type of trigger that will cause the transaction to generate.

6 You may choose to select the Max Transactions, Stop After, Delayed Start, and Limited Schedule, and Suppress Transactions When Expression Is False check boxes to define values for these settings.

7 Click OK.

Initializing Attributes for Generators

The Attribute Initialization tab on the Generators dialog box is used to initialize Transaction attribute values of the generated transaction. The Attribute Initialization tab displays a table of attribute assignments which may be a Transaction, Scenario, Process, or Department attribute. Each assignment includes attribute Locations, Names, and Values.

Copy attributes from triggering transaction

The attribute of the newly generated transaction will have the same attribute value or values as the transaction that triggers the attribute change.

Transaction Count Specifies the number of transactions introduced during each generation.

• Transaction Count Each Generation–sets the number of transactions to be introduced at each generation.

• Different Initial Count–sets the number of transactions to be introduced at the first generation if the number is different from Transaction Count Each Generation.

Note

These values can be expressions and will be evaluated at each generation time.

Options Description

530 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You can add an assignment of an attribute, and choose the name of an attribute already defined. Each field contains a drop-down list of preset attributes defined. You can set the attribute value with an expression that will be evaluated during simulation.

To initialize an attribute for a generator:

1 On the Generators dialog box, click the Attribute Initialization tab.

2 Select the generator you want to initialize attributes for.

3 Click the Add button. Any attributes you have already created for the process diagram are

available. If you need to create new attributes, click the button.

Note

For information about creating attributes, see Defining an Attribute on page 462. For information about defining attributes, see Defining Attributes on page 462.

Using External Data for Generators

You can use the data in an Excel spreadsheet anywhere an expression may be used in the Generators dialog box. For example, Excel data may provide attribute values for each generated transaction, or to specify interarrival time periods in an Interarrival generator.

Data from an Excel spreadsheet is referenced row by row for each transaction generation. Columns can be conveniently mapped to the transaction attributes or may be used as an External Data

attribute designated as x.column_title in any expression within the Generators dialog box. You set up the generator to use an external data source using the External Data tab of the Generators dialog box.

To use an Excel document for generator data:

1 Create an Excel spreadsheet containing columns of data for each possible type of data you want to use in a generator.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click the External Data tab.

3 Select the Get Attribute data from external source check box.

4 Browse to the Excel file you want to reference.

5 If your Excel document contains multiple tables, choose the table from the Table drop-down list.

Defining the Simulation Environment 531

6 Select a setting from the Reread Data Whenever drop-down list.

• I Say To specifies that you will return to the dialog box and set another option to read the data from the file. Then you must click the Reread Now button to update the data from the file.

• Simulation Begins sets the generator to read from the file only once. The generator rereads the data from the file whenever simulation begins.

7 From the Select Rows drop-down list, select the order in which rows are read on the spreadsheet, one row per generation.

• Randomly indicates the generator will reference data from rows in random order.

• Randomly, no row reuse indicates the generator can reference data from rows in random order, but rows can only be referenced once in each simulation.

• Sequentially indicates the generator references data from the first row through the last in sequence.

8 From the When Rows Exhausted drop-down list, select an action to take when all rows have been read.

• Stop Generator specifies that the generator will stop generating transactions after all rows have been used or read, but simulation continues.

• Error, Stop Simulation specifies that if the generator attempts to reread additional rows after all rows have been used or read, simulation is stopped and an error message is posted.

• Recycle specifies that the generator will continue referencing the data table after all rows have been read.

9 If you want to define a new Type for non-numeric data, or assign table data to an attribute, select a column in the display window and click the Define Type or Assign to Attribute button.

Note

You will only be able to define a new Type for a column if no conflicting Type definitions already appear. The column will appear in bold if an attribute is already assigned. You can see and completely control the assignments on the Attributes page of the Properties dialog box.

10 If you want to use a column of data within the Generators dialog box, you may go to that expression and use the External Data location attribute that corresponds to the Excel column.

532 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using ResourcesA resource is a person, machine, or other asset. Activities may use resources to process transactions. iGrafx Process, by default, sets every activity in your process to use one worker resource to process transactions. You can define additional resources and assign them to activities in your process as needed. Or you can remove resources from activities altogether. You can view a list of available resources in the Scenario window.

Resources and Pools

Resources are assigned to a resource pool. A resource pool is a group of identical resources. The resources in a pool are allocated and queued independently from other resources in other pools. You set the order that multiple pools are drawn from and the sequence for transactions to enter the queue. Each pool has its own allocation of resources.

Defining and using resources and resource pools is covered in a previous chapter (see Defining Activity Resources Requirements on page 424.)

The Scenario Window with Resources

Defining the Simulation Environment 533

Using CalendarsCalendars define all of the timelines and events in your process model, schedules for activities, resources, and generators. They also define regular events that occur in your model. There are four components to a calendar.

• Schedules - A schedule is a list of active and inactive hours and days. You use schedule to specify when activities, resources, and generators are available.

• Events - An event is a periodic occurrence within your model. You apply events to activities to specify when something happens, or to control when snapshots occur.

• Days - A list of days specifies a span of days within a schedule (e.g., Weekdays, Weekend, Holidays).

• Hours - a list of hours specifies a span of hours within a day (e.g., Standard hours, night shift).

iGrafx Process provides predefined schedules, events, days, and hours which you can use as defined or customize to meet your needs. You can also define your own custom calendars. You can view the components of calendars under the Calendars heading in the Scenario window.

The Scenario Window with Calendars

534 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

About Schedules and Overtime

When you define a resource, you assign it a schedule. The schedule describes the time the resource is either available for work or out of service. Any time outside the schedule is considered to be inactive time and is a potential span for overtime. For example, a resource can be assigned to work during the standard shift. Any time before 8:00 am and after 5:00 pm is potential overtime.

A resource is assigned an overtime rate and a maximum amount of overtime that it can work. For example, if a resource has a maximum overtime of zero, the resource never works outside its schedule. If the maximum overtime is two, the resource is eligible to work two hours a day during its inactive hours.

Working with Days

Within a schedule, you can define which days are active and which are inactive. Active days are the days when an activity, resource, or generator is available. Use the Define Days dialog box to define a list of days.

The Define Days dialog box

Defining the Simulation Environment 535

When you are defining a set of days, you specify the day type and period. The day type specifies which days are in the set of days. For the day type you can choose one of the following:

• Selected days - selected from a calendar.

• First work day - the first work day of the period.

• Last work day - the last work day of the period.

The period defines how often the set of days repeats. For period, you can choose one of the following:

• Weekly - the days repeat every week.

• Monthly - the days repeat every month.

• Quarterly - the days repeat every 3 months.

• Every N weeks - the days repeat every N number of weeks.

• Calendar - You can select the days in the calendar control.

Defining Days

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

3 Click the Define button next to the Days lists.

4 In the Define Days dialog box, click Add.

5 In the Add New Day dialog box, type a name and click OK. The name displays in the Existing Days list in the Define Days dialog box.

6 In the Define Days dialog box, select the day type and period.

7 For a Selected Days type, use the adjacent calendar to select active and inactive days

8 For a Every N Weeks period, type the number of weeks in the Every Weeks box.

9 Click OK.

Note

Days displayed in green represent active time, days displayed in gray are inactive, and days displayed in red (composite schedules only) are specifically marked inactive by another schedule.

10 Click OK.

536 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Deleting Days

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

3 Click the Define button next to the Days lists.

4 In the Define Days dialog box, click a name in the Existing Days list.

5 Click Delete.

Note

You cannot delete days that are in use by a schedule. Before deleting days you must remove them from all schedules.

6 Click OK.

Defining the Simulation Environment 537

Working with Hours

Within a day, you can define sets of active and inactive hours. Active hours are the periods of time when an activity, resource, or generator is available while inactive hours are the periods when they are unavailable. You use the Define Hours dialog box to define a list of hours.

When you define days, you specify a set of time spans. Times spans consist of a start time and end time. You also define which time spans are active times and which are inactive times, and you specify whether inactive times are paid times. Paid times are periods in which costs still accumulate even though an activity or resource is inactive.

Defining Hours

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

3 Click the Define button next to the Hours lists.

4 In the Define Hours dialog box, click Add.

The Define Hours dialog box.

538 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

5 In the Add New Hour dialog box, type a name, and click OK. The name displays in the Existing Hours list of the Define Hours dialog box.

6 In the Define Hours dialog box, click a time span in the Time Spans list.

7 Use the scroll buttons in the Hours area to define the Start Time and End Time for the selected time span.

8 For inactive time spans, select the Out of Service Span check box.

9 For inactive time spans that are paid, select the Paid check box.

10 Click OK.

Deleting Hours

Note

You cannot delete hours that are in use by a schedule. Before deleting hours you must remove them from all schedules.

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

3 Click the Define button next to the Hours lists.

4 In the Define Hours dialog box, click a name in the Existing Hours list.

5 Click Delete.

6 Click OK.

Inserting a Time Span

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

3 Click the Define button next to the Hours lists.

4 In the Define Hours click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

5 Click a time span in the Time Spans list.

6 Click Insert.A new time span is inserted after the selected time span.

Defining the Simulation Environment 539

7 Use the scroll buttons in the Hours area to adjust the Start Time and End Time for the each time span.

8 For inactive time spans, select the Out of Service Span check box.

9 For inactive time spans that are paid, select the Paid check box.

10 Click OK.

Removing a Time Span

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

3 Click the Define button next to the Hours lists.

4 In the Define Hours dialog box click a schedule in the Existing Schedules list.

5 Click a time span in the Time Spans list.

6 Click Remove.

7 Use the scroll buttons in the Hours area to adjust the Start Time and End Time for the remaining time spans.

8 For inactive time spans, select the Out of Service Span check box.

9 For inactive time spans that are paid, select the Paid check box.

10 Click OK.

Working with Schedules

Schedules define the availability of activities, resources, and generators in your model by defining active and inactive periods for the component. An activity can only process transactions during the active periods specified by its schedule. A resource can only be used by an activity during the active periods defined by its schedule. A generator can only introduce transactions into a process during the active periods defined by its schedule.

You can use predefined schedules, edit predefined schedules, create new schedules, or combine existing schedules to create a composite schedule. A composite schedule is a combination of existing schedules, hours, and days.

Creating a composite schedule can save you time because it takes advantage of predefined components such as holidays. For example, a Swing_With_Holidays schedule is a composite schedule consisting of the Swing schedule with US_Holidays schedule excluded. When you create a composite

540 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

schedule, the days and hours form a mask or an overlay on the schedule, depending on whether the hours and days are active or inactive.

Defining a Schedule

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click Add.

3 In the Add New Schedule dialog box, type a schedule name (no spaces) and click OK. The name displays in the Existing Schedules list in the Define Schedule dialog box.

4 Use the Define keys to change the days and hours for the schedule.

Note

Days displayed in green represent active time, days displayed in gray are inactive, and days displayed in red (composite schedules only) are specifically marked inactive by another schedule.

5 Click OK.

Defining the Simulation Environment 541

Creating a Composite Schedule

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Schedules tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Schedules.

2 In the Define Schedule dialog box, click Composite.

3 In the Edit Composite Schedule dialog box use the Insert Day/Hours and Insert Schedule keys to add schedules, days, or hours to the composite schedule.

4 Use the Define keys to change the days and hours for the schedule.

5 Click OK.

Assigning a Schedule to an Activity

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Task page.

3 Click the Limited Schedule check box.

4 Click a schedule in the list.

5 Click OK.

Assigning a Schedule to a Resource

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Resources tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Resources.

2 In the Define Resources dialog box, click a resource name in the Existing Resources list.

3 Click a schedule in the Schedule list.

4 Click OK.

Assigning a Schedule to a Generator

1 In the Scenario or Generators window, double-click a generators entry.

2 In the Generators dialog box, click the Limited Schedule check box and select a schedule from the list.

3 Click OK.

542 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Events

You can use events to control inputs into an activity. All input collections to an activity can be controlled through events (see see About Input Collections on page 407). For example, when you specify that inputs to an activity be collected into a batch collection, you can also specify that the batch is allowed to enter the activity only when a specific event occurs (e.g., Batch by time - Every_morning).

Like schedules, you can use predefined events, edit predefined events, create new events, or combine existing events to create a composite event.

Defining an Event

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Events tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Events.

2 In the Define Event dialog box, click a schedule that is similar to the one you will be creating, and click Add.

3 In the Add New Event dialog box, type a schedule name and click OK. The name displays in the Existing Events list in the Define Events dialog box.

4 Use the Define keys to change the days and hours for the schedule.

Note

Days displayed in green represent active time, days displayed in gray are inactive.

5 Click OK.

Creating a Composite Event

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Events tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Events.

2 In the Define Event dialog box, click Composite.

3 In the Edit Composite Schedule dialog box use the Insert Day/Hours and Insert Schedule keys to add schedules, days, or hours to the composite schedule.

4 Use the Define keys to change the days and hours for the schedule.

5 Click OK.

Defining the Simulation Environment 543

Assigning an Event to an Activity

1 Double-click an activity to open the Properties dialog box.

2 Click the Input page.

3 Select the Collect Transactions at Input check box.

4 Click a queueing method in the list.

5 Click By Time in the list of input methods.

6 Click an event in the list of events.

7 Click OK.

Using MonitorsA monitor is a data collector. You place monitors on activities in your process diagram to collect data. The types of data collected by monitors include basic transaction statistics or the value of attributes at certain points. Monitors provide one method for you to validate a model by checking intermediate statistics. For example, you can place a monitor to tabulate the number or transactions that reach an activity. You can also use starting and ending monitors to gather data about a specific segment of the process flow. After you run a simulation, you can view the data collected by the monitor by adding a report element in the Report window (see About Report Elements on page 567).

When Monitors are Evaluated

Monitors are evaluated during simulation at the start of an activity. This affects monitor statistics because the activity containing the monitor is not included in the statistics. For example, if a monitor keeps track of basic statistics such as service time and busy time, it does not include time statistics for the activity on which the monitor is placed.

Viewing Monitor Statistics

After you have run a simulation, you can view monitor results in the Report window (see Reviewing Simulation Results on page 563) by adding a report element. The element can be added to any of the Report window tabs (e.g., the Custom tab). In the report element, you specify statistics specifically gathered by monitors.

Note

When working in tabular mode, activities with monitors placed on them have a monitor indicator displayed to the left of the activity.

544 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Working with Monitors

You can view a list of monitors in the Scenario window.

The Scenario Window with Monitors

Defining the Simulation Environment 545

The data collected by a monitor depends on the type of monitor you define. There are four types of monitors.

To use a monitor, you must first define it by specifying the monitor name and type.Then you specify the data to be collected by the monitor. Monitors can collect the following data:

• Count - the number of transactions at a specific point; how many transactions reach an activity.

Options Description

Individual Collects data only at a particular activity. An individual monitor is useful for keeping track of different counts, such as the number of transactions processed at an activity.

An individual monitor collects and reports statistics from the activity where a transaction is introduced into the process up to, but not including, the activity where the monitor is placed. This lets you gather data on transactions from their starting activity up to specific activities in the process.

Start A Start monitor marks the activity where the collection of data begins. You can use a Start monitor to begin collecting data at any activity in a process. (This is different from an Individual monitor which always collects data from the activity where the transaction is introduced.)

You use Start and End monitors in conjunction. Placing Start and End monitors on separate activities lets you collect statistics from the activity where the Start monitor is placed, up to, but not including, the activity where the End monitor is placed.

End An End monitor collects statistics on transactions beginning at the activity where a Start monitor is placed, up to, but not including the activity where the End monitor is placed.

You use Start and End monitors in conjunction. Placing Start and End monitors on separate activities lets you collect statistics from the activity where the Start monitor is placed, up to, but not including, the activity where the End monitor is placed.

Start and End A Start and End monitor marks the beginning for the collection of statistics and also collects statistics from previous Start monitors.

546 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• Basic Transaction Statistics - collects basic statistics either between two points or from the start point to the current monitor.

• Accumulated - a value that cumulatively increases every time a transaction passes through the activity. Options for accumulating data are:

• Always - data is always collected by the monitor.

• Expression - data is accumulated based on the value of an expression.

You can view, add, edit, place, and delete monitors using the Monitors tab in the Modeling bar.

The Monitors tab is organized as a table. Rows in the table represent the monitors in your model. The columns of the table represent the name, type, and placement of the monitor. Columns also identify any attributes the monitor collects data on, when to collect data, and from what point to begin data collection. The Monitors tab also includes command buttons to let you add, delete, find, place, and remove all monitors.

Additionally, the Monitors tab includes a special tool labeled Drop Activities Here to Create Monitors. This tool lets you add and place monitors at an activity by dragging the activity shape and dropping it on the tool (see Adding New Monitors on page 548).

The Monitors tab in the Modeling bar

Defining the Simulation Environment 547

Displaying the Monitors Tab

There are several ways to display the Monitors tab in the Modeling bar:

• On the Model menu, click Monitors.

• On the Model toolbar, click the Monitors tool.

• In the Scenario window, double-click a monitor entry.

• In the Model bar, click the Monitors tab.

Note

Each of the following procedures assumes that the Monitors tab is already displayed.

Adding New Monitors

There are two methods for adding new monitors to your model. You can add an unplaced monitor using the Add command or you can simultaneously add and place one or more monitors using the drag and drop method mentioned earlier.

To add an unplaced monitor, click Add in the Monitors tab. A new entry opens in the adjacent table. The Placed column for this entry contains the words not placed, meaning that this monitor is not placed at any activity. For information on placing a monitor at an activity, see see Placing a Monitor on page 549. To simultaneously add and place a monitor, perform the following steps:

1 In the Process window, click an activity shape to select it.

2 Place the cursor in the shaded region around the selected shape and click and hold the left mouse button.

3 Drag the shape to the Drop Activities Here to Create Monitors box in the Monitors tab on the Modeling bar.

A new monitor entry displays in the adjacent table. The Placed column for this entry contains the name of the activity that you dropped in the Monitors tabs.

4 Release the mouse button.

Note

To create and place monitors at multiple activities, Shift-Click each of the activity shapes to select them, then drag-and-drop the group of shapes into the Drop Activities Here to Create Monitors box Monitors tab. You will be given the option of creating one monitor placed at all of the shapes, or separate monitors placed at each shape.

548 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Placing a Monitor

A monitor must be placed at an activity in order to collect data. When you create a monitor using the Add command in the Monitors tab, the new monitor is not placed at any activity. To place the monitor at an activity:

1 In the Process window, click an activity shape to select it.

2 In the Monitors dialog box, click a monitor in the list.

3 Click Place.

The name of the activity displays in the Placed column of the selected monitor entry to indicate that the monitor is placed at that activity.

To place a monitor at multiple activities, Shift-click each of the desired activity shapes, select a monitor entry, and click Place. The Placed column of the monitor entry displays the number of placements for the monitor.

Finding Placed Monitors

A monitor may be placed at one or more activities. To find all of the placements of a monitor, click the monitor entry in the Monitors tab, and click Find. The activity shapes for each of the activities at which the monitor is placed are highlighted. The monitor indicator also appears on each shape with a monitor. You can change the display of the indicators using the Format Diagram dialog box.

Removing Monitor Placements

There are a couple of options for removing the placement of monitors at activities:

• To remove all placements of a monitor simultaneously, click the monitor entry in the Monitors tab, and click Remove All.

• To remove one or more placements of a monitor, click the monitor entry in the Monitors tab, click Find to highlight the activities where the monitor is placed, select one or more activities from which to remove the placement, and click Remove.

Note

Removing all placements of a monitor does not remove the monitor. You can still place it on other activities.

Defining the Simulation Environment 549

Editing a Monitor Entry

New monitor entries contain default settings. You can use the Monitors tab to change these settings to modify the settings for an existing monitor.

1 In the table area on the Monitors tab, click a monitor entry.

2 To change the monitor name, click the Name cell, click the Monitor name, and type a new name.

3 To change the monitor type, click the Type cell, and click a monitor type in the list.

4 To change the monitor placements, see Placing a Monitor on page 549.

5 To select an attribute for monitoring, click the Attributes cell, and click an attribute name in the list.

6 To change the start point for collecting data, click the From cell, and click an activity name in the list. (This applies to Start and Start and End monitors only.)

Deleting a Monitor

1 In the table area on the Monitors dialog box, click a monitor entry.

2 Click Delete.

This removes the definition and all placements of the selected monitor.

550 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 19

After you have created a process diagram, defined its behavior, and created a simulation scenario, you

are ready to run the simulation.

When you simulate a process, iGrafx Process uses information from the process model and the process scenario to simulate the process.

During the simulation run, statistics are gathered, categorized, and placed into a report. Simulation reports are invaluable aids in helping you analyze the performance of your process. With reports, you can compare results from multiple simulation runs to determine how changes in the process impact performance. You can also customize the look of your reports for presentation purposes.

Running a simulation

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 551

Running the SimulationAfter defining the scenario data, you are ready to run the simulation. Simulations run in one of two modes:

• Run - The simulation runs in the background. This is the fastest of the two modes, but it is not interactive.

• Trace - This mode is a simple form of animation. You can visually track the movement of transactions. This is the slower of the two modes, but you can interact with the model.

Using Run Mode

In Run mode, the simulation runs in background, so you cannot see or interact with the process as it is simulated. The Simulator Progress window displays the progress of the simulation and the results of the simulation appear in the Report window when the simulation completes.

Running a Simulation in Run Mode

On the Model toolbar, click the Start/Resume tool, or point to Run, and click Start on the

Model menu.

The simulation runs for a specified amount of time or until all transactions are processed. Normally, you will not need to stop a simulation in run mode. However, there may occasions, such as errors in the model, that cause the simulation to not terminate. In this case you may need to stop the simulation.

Stopping a Simulation in Run Mode

On the Model toolbar, click the Stop tool, or point to Run, and click Stop on the Model

menu.

552 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using Trace Mode

Trace mode graphically animates a simulation by showing the flow of transactions through a process diagram. The shapes for each activity change color as transactions move through them. Trace mode lets you troubleshoot a model by watching the transactions in the trace window.

In trace mode you can do the following:

• Visually track how a process diagram is simulated.

• Use colors to display the state of activities.

• Set pause points that let you run the simulation to a given point where you can then examine the status of individual settings.

• Evaluate an expression in the context of the pause point, and display its value.

• Change the value of an attribute while paused.

• Perform what-if analysis by viewing or setting the value of transaction and global attributes during the simulation.

• Visually track transaction paths.

• Trace a simulation in normal (graphical) or tabular view.

The Trace Window

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 553

The Trace Environment

Several tools are available to help you run a simulation in trace mode. They appear only when you set your model for trace mode. The following tools are available:

• The Control menu

• The Trace Toolbar

• The Transactions window

• The Attributes window

The Control Menu

The Control menu appears automatically when you set trace mode. The control menu lets you set and remove pause points, set scenario attribute values, and change trace color values. The following commands appear on the Control menu.

Command Purpose

Set Attribute Lets you set the value of an attribute

Set Pause Point Sets a pause point at a selected activity.

Delete Pause Point Deletes the pause point at the selected activity.

Delete All Pause Points

Removes all pause points from the model.

Trace Colors Lets you change the Trace Animation colors.

554 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Trace Toolbar

The Trace toolbar also appears automatically when you set the trace mode. This toolbar contains a set of tools that let you control the flow of transactions during simulation.

The Trace toolbar provides the following tools:

The Transactions Window

The Transactions window is available in simulation trace mode and lets you view transaction status and data while the simulation runs. You can also view and modify the state of transaction attributes.

The Trace Toolbar

Tool Purpose

Trace Update Speed This slide bar lets you control the speed of the transactions through the process. Move the slide left to slow the transactions, right to speed up the transactions.

Start/Resume Lets you start the simulation or resume the simulation after a pause.

Step Lets the simulation move one step at a time. Click to move to the next step.

Pause Pauses the simulation. Click Resume to continue simulation.

Stop Halts the simulation run. Different from a pause in that you must restart the simulation from the beginning.

Go to Pause Runs the simulation until it encounters a pause point. Click Go to Pause or Resume to resume the simulation.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 555

To view the window, click View on the menu bar and then click Transactions. The window is organized into two panes. The left pane of the window is the Transaction pane.

The Transaction pane is arranged in rows and columns. Each transaction is on a separate row along with the current state of the transaction and a unique id number. The column headings for the pane include the names of the transaction attributes assigned to the transaction. To modify a transaction attribute, double-click on the cell you want to modify and use the Set Value dialog box to modify the attribute.

The right pane of the Transactions window displays resource information for each transaction.

The Transactions pane of the Transactions window

The Set Value dialog box

The Resource pane of the Transactions window

556 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Attributes Window

The Attributes window is also available in simulation trace mode. It displays and updates the values of global attributes as the simulation runs. To view the window, click View on the menu bar and then click Attributes.

Running a Simulation in Trace Mode

To run a simulation in Trace mode, you must first set the model in Trace mode and then run the simulation. The model will stay in trace mode until you set it to Run mode.

Setting Trace Mode

On the Model toolbar, click the Trace tool, or point to Run, and click Trace on the Model

menu. The Control menu and Trace Toolbar appear.

Clearing Trace Mode

On the Model toolbar, click the Trace tool, or point to Run, and click Trace on the Model

menu. The Control menu, Trace Toolbar, and Transactions window disappear.

The Attributes window

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 557

Running Trace Mode

On the Model toolbar, click the Trace tool, and then click the Start/Resume tool on the

Trace toolbar, or point to Run, and click Trace on the Model menu, and then click the Start/

Resume tool on the Trace toolbar.

When you initiate a simulation run in trace mode, the activity shapes in your model begin to change colors to reflect the flow of transactions through the activity. The following are the default colors used to represent the state of a transaction:

Color Meaning

Green The transaction is moving. It is either entering or leaving an activity.

Blue The transaction is doing work in an activity and is consuming time or is about to consume time.

Red The transaction is blocked either at a Delay activity, waiting for a synchronization event, or is capacity limited.

Yellow The transaction is waiting for resource that is in schedule, but is not available (the resource is already acquired).

Grey The transaction is waiting on the schedule. The schedule has entered an inactive period, so the transaction is waiting for the schedule to enter an active period.

558 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Changing Trace Colors

1 On the Control menu, click Trace Colors.

2 In the Trace Colors dialog box, click a color for each state in the lists.

3 Click OK.

Setting Pause Points

A simulation runs for a specified period of time or until all transactions are processed. However, you can cause a simulation to pause by inserting pause points into the process. Pause points cause the simulation to pause at a specific activity. Pause points are useful for examining the state of a process at various points in the simulation. To set a pause point in your model:

1 Select an activity in your model.

2 On the Control menu, click Set Pause Point.

3 In the Set Pause Point dialog box, click a Pause condition in list.

The Trace Colors dialog box

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 559

4 For expressions, use the expression builder to enter an expression.

5 For a count, type the value in the Count text box.

6 Select the Active check box to activate or deactivate the pause point. (The simulation will not pause if the pause point is inactive.)

7 Click OK.

Pause point indicators appear on activities on which they are set in Trace Mode. You can change the display of these indicators using the Format Diagram dialog box.

When the simulation encounters a pause point it pauses until you resume it. You can set up a pause point so that the simulation always pauses at the activity or pauses based on the value of an expression or the value of a counter (e.g., every fifth transaction). You can insert multiple pause points in your process. The pause points display in the Pause Points window.

This window lists the state of all of the pause points in your model. To display the Pause Points window, click Pause Points on the View menu.

Note

You can manually pause a simulation by clicking the Pause tool on the Trace Toolbar.

Removing a Pause Point

1 In the Pause Points window, select a pause point.

2 On the Control menu, click Delete Pause Point.

Removing All Pause Points

On the Control menu, click Remove All Pause Points.

The Pause Points window

560 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Resuming a Process After a Pause

On the Trace toolbar, click the Start/Resume tool, or point to Run, and click Start on the

Model menu.

You can deactivate pause points without removing them from your model. A simulation will not pause at a deactivated pause point. You can also reactivate pauses points that have been deactivated. To activate a pause point, select the Activate check box on the Set Pause Points dialog box. To deactivate a pause point, clear the Activate check box on the Set Pause Points dialog box.

Randomizing Simulations

iGrafx Process provides a unique tool to help you vary the sequence number across a set of simulation runs, giving results very similar to the random factors occurring in real-world processes. If you have quantities in your model which use random distributions, durations that are “Uniform” or “Normal”, or expressions with a specific distribution function, randomizing is the best way to avoid simulating the same random numbers over and over.

The iGrafx simulator uses the same random numbers by default to simplify your model creation. The Randomized Simulations wizard, which randomizes the simulations for you, should be used after you create and test a model, much like you would when running a normal simulation. You can view the data created by the simulations in both report and tabular form. For example, look at a Report generated from a simulation that does contain random distributions. Running the same simulation over and over still gives you just one variable:

To better understand how your model might respond to random variability in the inputs and parameters you should run several simulations with different random numbers. In the above example the Randomize Simulations wizard was used to run five different simulations, showing that the number of transactions completed by the model varies a relatively small amount over five different random number “streams.” Assuming completed transaction count is of concern to you for this model, it is relatively insensitive to expected (modeled) random variation in the data, a desirable result.

The Count for the Cost-Transaction Statistics remains 228 each time you run the simulation.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 561

For a better sampling of real-world processes, you could use the Randomized Simulations wizard to run 5 simulations, each using a different random number to change the count in the above example:

Using the Randomized Simulations Wizard

1 On the Model menu, point to Run, and click Randomize Simulations.

2 In the Randomized Simulations wizard, click Next.

3 In the next wizard panel, type the number of simulations you want to run in the Simulations text box.

4 Select Yes or No for generating reports or wanting a tabular results window. If you do want a tabular results window, you need to select the data and, if necessary, change the order of the columns in the next two wizard panels. Click Next.

5 In the final wizard panel, select if you want to run the simulations now and not save it, run the simulations now and save it for later, or just save it for later. Click Finish.

The Count for the Cost-Transaction Statistics has five different variables---one for each simulation.

562 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Reviewing Simulation ResultsA simulation report automatically appears upon successful completion of a simulation run. You can also access simulation reports using the Components tab in the Explorer bar.

To view a report, click the Components tab in the Explorer bar, and select All Components. In the Reports list, double-click a report name to display the report.

The Components tab with Reports

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 563

The Report Window

The Report Window automatically opens each time a simulation completes. The window contains the statistical results of the latest simulation run.

A simulation report consists of several pages of data organized by statistics type. Each category appears as a tab on the Report Window. The simulation report consists of the following categories of statistics:

The Report window

Report Tab Purpose

Time Contains statistics that measure time during the simulation. Statistics show overall transaction times, and times categorized by department, process, and activity.

Cost Contains statistics about costs related to transactions, activities and resources.

Resources Contains statistics related to resource utilization, resource time categorizations, and activity and resource costs.

Queue Contains statistics collected when transactions waited for processing at activities. Transactions may queue due to resource, inputs collection, or other constraints.

564 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The statistics on each report page are further organized according to categories as follows:

• Transaction Statistics - Data accumulated for each transaction that completes processing.

• Resource Statistics - Data accumulated for each resource used in the process.

• Activity Statistics - Data accumulated for each activity in the process.

• Monitor Statistics - Data accumulated for each monitor defined in the process.

• Custom Statistics - Data collected for each user defined statistic.

To view a report page, click the tab corresponding to a statistics category.

About Simulation Data

The result of a simulation run is a collection of simulation data. You can output the simulation data from each simulation run to a separate report or append the data to an existing report. You can also assign a unique name to the simulation data.

Using the simulation name, you can also replace existing simulation data in a report, or delete simulation data from a report.

Custom You can use this page to create a custom page of statistics. You can define new statistics to appear on this page, or copy and paste statistics from any of the other pages to this page.

Default This is a button rather than a tab. It appears when you change any of the default report elements. You can return any page of the report to its default settings by selecting the tab and clicking Default.

Simulation data sorted by simulation name

Report Tab Purpose

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 565

Naming Simulation Data

1 On the Report menu, click Simulation Data.

2 In the Simulation Data dialog box, click a name in the Simulation Names list.

Note

The Simulation Names list is a list of default simulation names. These names are assigned to each simulation run in the order shown. The following steps let you override the default names.

3 Click Name.

4 In the Name Simulation Data dialog box, type a new simulation name.

5 Click OK.

6 Click OK.

Deleting Simulation Data From a Report

1 On the Report menu, click Simulation Data.

2 In the Simulation Data dialog box, click a name in the Simulation Names list.

3 Click Delete.

Note

Deletion of simulation data is undoable.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Close.

Replacing Existing Simulation Data In a Report

1 On the Model toolbar, click the Run Setup tool.

or

On the Model menu, click Run Setup.

2 In the Run Setup dialog box, click the Initialization/Reports tab.

3 Click Replace Simulation Run.

4 Click a name in the Simulation Name list.

5 Click OK.

Note

The selected simulation data is replaced on completion of the next simulation run.

566 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

About Report Elements

Simulation data is organized into pages by type. Each report page, except the Custom page, contains one or more report elements. A report element is a collection of related simulation statistics represented in a table or a graph.

Report elements are the basic building blocks of a simulation report. You can customize your simulation reports by editing the report elements. You can add new report elements to a report and modify the structure and format of each report element. The Edit Report Element dialog box lets you edit report elements. To view this dialog box, double-click a report element, or right-click a report element, and click Edit Element on the context menu.

Use this dialog box to add, modify, or remove statistics from a report element and to change the format and structure of a report element. You can also use the dialog box to filter statistics by departments, processes, snapshots, or other criteria such as resource name. The Edit Report Element dialog box contains four tabbed pages: Statistic, Structure, Filter, and Format.

Note

Many of the names of statistics are abbreviated in the dialog boxes.

For a list of statistics, their names, and abbreviations, see Simulation Statistics on page 582.

A report element

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 567

The Statistic Tab

Use the Statistic tab to specify which statistics appear in the report element. You can add, modify, or remove statistics from the selected report element.

The Edit Report Element dialog box - Statistic tab

568 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Statistic tab contains the following elements:

Element Purpose

Statistics Category Lets you select the category of statistic for the report element. Choose from Activities, Resources, Transactions, Custom statistics, or Monitors (if defined).

Single/Multiple Lets you specify whether to display a single statistic from the selected category or multiple statistics from the category.

Statistics list Lists the statistics that comprise the selected statistics category.

• For single statistics, lets you select the statistic to appear in the report element.

• For multiple statistics, use the Add, Delete, Modify, All, and Remove All buttons to determine which statistics appear in the report element.

Title Lets you define your own title for the report element.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 569

The Structure Tab

Use the Structure tab to define row and column labels for the statistics that appear in the selected report element.

The Edit Report Element dialog box - Structure tab

570 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Structure tab contains the following elements:

The Filters Tab

The Filters tab lets you further refine your data selection such that it can be displayed in a resource element. For example, suppose you would like to view selected resource statistics, by resource, and by department. Since this involves three data elements (resource statistics, resource, and department), and since a report element is normally a two-dimensional table, this data cannot be viewed in a single resource element.

Element Purpose

Column Labels Lists the labels that appear at the top of each column of the report element. The list depends on the type of data that is in the model.

• Simulations - Lets you choose from the available sets of simulation data.

• Snapshots - Lets you choose from the available snapshots.

Row Legends Lists the labels that can appear at the beginning of each row of the report element. The following labels are available depending on the category of the report data:

• None - Only the row is displayed.

• Processes - The rows are displayed by process.

• Departments - Rows are displayed by department

• Activities - Rows are displayed by activity and can be displayed hierarchically and with department names.

Hierarchical - Activities are listed in hierarchies.

Show Dept. Name - department names appear as part of the activity label.

• Simulations - Rows are displayed by simulations.

• Resources - Rows are displayed by resources.

• Pools - Rows appear in order of resource pools.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 571

One way to view this data would be to define multiple report elements that show resource statistics by resource per a single department. To do this you would use the Filters tab to filter the data by department.

The filtering options appearing on this Filters tab vary depending on the data you select. For some data, filtering in not necessary so no filtering options appear on the tab.

Resource statistics per resource, filtered by Department

The Edit Report Element dialog box - Filters tab

572 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Filters tab contains the following elements:

Element Purpose

Department Lets you choose whether a single department or all departments are included in the report element. (Pick a single department by name.) This option is available only if there is more than one department in the model.

Processes Lets you choose whether a single process or all processes are included in the report element. This option is available only if there is more than one process in the model.

Activities Lets you choose whether a single activity or all activities are included in the report element. (Pick a single activity by name.)

Resource Lets you choose whether a single process or all processes are included in the report element. This option is available only if there is more than one resource in the model.

Pools Lets you choose whether a single resource pool or all resource pools are included in the report element. (Pick a single pool by name.) This option is available only if there is more than one resource pool in the model.

Simulation Lets you choose whether a single set of simulation data or all simulation data sets are included in the report element. This option is available only if there is more than one set of simulation data in the model.

Snapshots Lets you choose which snapshot to include in the data for each statistic. This option is only available if snapshots have been created.

The Start At option lets you choose which snapshot to begin including data into each cell. You can use this feature to look at only data after a certain amount of start-up time. This option is only available if snapshots have been created.

The Cumulative option lets you view cumulative snapshot data from a specified starting point.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 573

The Format Tab

Use Format tab to sort the statistics in the selected report element, and to specify time units, number formats, and other display options.

The Edit Report Element dialog box - Format tab

574 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

The Format tab contains the following elements:

Element Purpose

Sorting The sorting format determines the order of the rows.

The statistic(s) in the current report element determines the order that the columns of data are sorted in. For example, for the statistic # of Transactions, the columns are sorted in the order of the number of transactions.

Columns can be ordered numerically or alphabetically in ascending or descending order.

Time Unit Lets you set a specific time unit or use an automatic unit. An automatic time unit is calculated to the largest reasonable time unit, given the data.

Max Number of Rows The maximum number of rows in a report element can be limited or unlimited. This option, combined with the above sorting capability, makes it easy to view a subset of relevant activities.

If the rows are limited, the number of displayed rows is shown in the title of the report element, for example, 10 of 225 rows.

Number Format Lets you select the degrees of precision for displayed numbers. A default number format is calculated to the largest reasonable number format. For example, a number format of 0.##### might display.00350 whereas a number format of 0 produces <1.

Tabular or Graph Lets you choose whether to display the report element as a table or a graph. A tabular report element contains only text; a graph contains graphics.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 575

Adding a Report Element

1 Right-click the Report window, and click Add Element on the context menu.

2 In the Statistics dialog box, click a statistics category and choose whether to display a single statistic or multiple statistics from the category.

3 For single statistics, click a specific statistic; for multiple statistics, use the Add and Remove buttons to add or remove specific statistics from the report element.

4 Type a title for the report element, and click Next.

5 In the Structure dialog box, define column labels and row legends for the statistic.

6 Click Next.

7 Click the Filters tab and select a filtering option, if applicable.

8 Click Next.

9 In the Formats dialog box, define how to format and sort the statistics.

10 Click Finish.

Editing a Report Element

1 In the Report window, double-click a report element.

or

Right-click the report element, and click Edit Report on the context menu.

2 In the Edit Report Element dialog box, click the Statistics tab.

3 Click a statistics category and choose whether to display a single statistic or multiple statistics from the category.

4 For single statistics, click a specific statistic; for multiple statistics, use the Add and Remove buttons to add or remove specific statistics from the report element.

5 Type a title for the report element, if desired. Otherwise a default label is supplied.

6 Click the Structure tab, and define column labels and row legends for the statistic.

7 Click the Filters tab, and select a filtering option, if applicable.

8 Click the Formats tab, and define how to format and sort the statistic.

9 Click OK.

Note

You can view added report elements without rerunning the simulation. However, if you change the process map or scenario, you must run the simulation again to view the new results.

576 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Defining Custom Statistics

You can further customize your simulation report by defining your own custom statistics and placing them in your report. Custom statistics can be combinations of standard statistics or expressions. Custom statistics are updated and calculated automatically with each simulation run. You use the Custom Statistics dialog box to define custom statistics.

The Custom Statistics dialog box contains a list of the custom statistics you have defined. Use this dialog box to add new custom statistics, modify existing custom statistics, or delete previously defined statistics. The Custom Statistics dialog box displays the Edit Custom Statistics dialog box when you choose to add new or modify existing custom statistics.

The Custom Statistics dialog box

The Edit Custom Statistics dialog box

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 577

Use this dialog box to name your statistics and select a statistic category. Based on the category, you can choose or define the statistic. Categories for custom statistics are:

• Transaction - Lets you choose from a list of available transaction statistics (see Transaction Statistics on page 582). For example, TotalOrders equals the number of transactions that complete.

TotalOrders = Completion Count

• Resource - Lets you choose a resource and a statistic from a list of available resource statistics (see Resource Statistics on page 591). For example, InUse equals the time busy for resource named Laser.

InUse = Laser Time Busy

• Monitor - Lets you choose a monitor and a statistic from a list of available monitor statistics. For example, Total Count equals the number of transactions that have come through a monitor.

TotalCount = Pass Count

• Expression - Lets you define expressions to create new statistics. For example, if the wage rate is $15 per hour, then you use the following expression.

Wage = 15 * Hours(Time)

When defining expression statistics, click the icon to open the Expression Builder.

The Edit Custom Statistics dialog box with the Expression option enabled

578 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Use the Expression Builder to combine attributes, functions, members, and other customs statistics to create an expression for the new custom statistics (see Working with Expressions on page 484).

Note

Custom statistics do not automatically appear in your simulation report. To add a custom statistic to a report, you must add a report element to a report page.

Creating Custom Statistics

1 On the Report menu, click Custom Stats.

2 In the Custom Statistics dialog box, click Add.

3 In the Edit Custom Statistic dialog box, type a name to describe the statistic.

4 Select Transaction, Resource, Expression, or Monitor.

5 Select a statistic, or for expressions, use the Expression Builder to define an expression.

6 If desired, click Hidden to toggle the hidden option.

Note

Unless you specify hidden, the definition of the custom statistic appears on the Custom tab in the Report window.

7 Click OK.

Modifying Custom Statistics

1 On the Report menu, click Custom Stats.

2 In the Custom Statistics dialog box, select a statistic by name, and click Modify.

3 In the Edit Custom Statistic dialog box, enter any modifications to the statistic.

4 Click OK.

Deleting Custom Statistics

1 On the Report menu, click Custom Stats.

2 In the Custom Statistics dialog box, select a statistic by name, and click Delete.

3 Click OK.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 579

Adding a Custom Statistic to a Report

1 Right-click the Report window, and click Add Element on the context menu.

2 In the Statistics dialog box, click Custom Stats in the Statistics Category list.

3 Click Single or Multiple.

4 Click Next.

5 In the Structure dialog box, define column labels and row legends for the statistic.

6 Click Next.

7 In the Filters dialog box, select whether to filter the statistic by department, process, or snapshot.

8 Click Next.

9 In the Formats dialog box, define how to format and sort the statistic.

10 Click Finish.

Logging Transactions

iGrafx Process includes a statistics-gathering simulation and reporting mechanism called Log Transactions. The function behind Log Transactions is two-fold:

• As a simulation tool, Process gathers statistics about your Process as a whole. Log Transactions takes this one step further by gathering statistics about each INDIVIDUAL transaction that passes through the Process.

• By gathering individual transactions through the Log Transactions mechanism, you can study the data to see how your Process responds to the transaction load you put on it.

Log Transactions reporting helps you measure time-dependent behavior of completed transactions when you log the simulation time that a transaction took to complete. You can use this information to identify which processes or transactions need to be modified to improve overall results.

Analyzing time dependent statistics like resource utilization, cycle times, and queue lengths using the Log Transactions wizard can help you analyze how individual transactions vary from the averages that the Report shows. The report, on the other hand, can be used to see how the process responds to the transactions put through it.

580 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Log Transactions Wizard

The Log Transactions wizard produces a table of data with one line per transaction event. You can output this table to either a text file or tabular results window. The first page of the wizard lets you specify where the data goes, in what format, and what you can open it with. The tabular result output lets you see the data as it is being produced.

Note

There is a limit to the number of lines that appear in the tabular result window. This output also dramatically slows the simulation so it is best to use it only to validate the results you want before doing the final run to a log file.

The second page of the wizard lets you specify what transaction data you want to log. Depending on what types of objects you have in your Process, you can select from a wide variety of data types to log. By default, the Transaction ID is generated. When you select the checkboxes for the transactions you would like to see the outputs for, you will see that the subnodes beneath the selected parent node are automatically selected as well.

The third page of the wizard lets you edit or rearrange the rows for each output column. The first column is the heading generated in the first line of the output. You can edit the rows by double- clicking the heading you want to change, or by clicking Edit Name. Also, you can change the order the columns are output by reordering the rows. To reorder, click the row header button and drag it up or down, or use the arrow controls located to the right of the table to move it up or down.

Logging Transactions Using the Log Transactions Wizard

1 On the Model menu, point to Run, and click Log Transactions.

2 On the first page of the wizard, click the Next button.

3 On the second page of the wizard, choose an output type in the Choose Output Type list.

4 In the File Name field, browse for an existing file name. If you type in a file name, you must include the full path.

5 Select the check boxes for Including Headers or opening with a spreadsheet application if desired.

6 Click the Next button.

7 On the third page of the wizard, select the check boxes for the statistics or data you want to log, and click the Next button.

8 On the fourth page of the wizard, edit or reorder any columns you feel necessary, and click the Next button.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 581

9 On the fifth page of the wizard, choose to log data when the transaction completes, log data when the transaction ends, or customize the data logged. If you select the Customize option, you can choose to log data for an event when that event occurs. Click the Next button.

10 On the final page of the wizard, choose to run Log Transactions now and don’t save, run Log Transactions now and save, or just save it for later.

11 Click the Finish button.

Simulation StatisticsThe following section lists the statistics gathered and reported during a simulation run. Statistics are listed by category. Each individual statistic is listed with the name in bold with its abbreviation following.

Transaction Statistics

Transaction statistics are used to analyze the time and cost of transactions in the model. Transaction statistics are calculated only for transactions that finish processing, either by completing the flow through the process map or by reaching an activity that has no further connections.

In the default Report window, both the Time and Cost tabs have report elements containing transaction statistics. (Remember that you can also add your own report elements to any tab or create additional reports.)

Note

Only completed transactions are included in transaction statistics.

If a model uses multiple processes to create hierarchy, the transaction statistics, by default, combine the results of all processes. For example, the transaction count is equal to the total number of transactions in all processes. You can change the row legends of the report element to view the results of a specific process.

582 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Transaction Formulas

The following calculations are available in many of the transaction statistics.

• Total (Tot)–The combination of all of the completed transaction statistics. If you apply a filter to the statistic, then only specific, completed transactions are counted.

• Average (Avg)–The total divided by the count of completed transactions. If you apply a filter, then only specific, completed transactions are counted (same as totals).

Transaction Count

• Total # Transactions (#Trans)–The number of transactions that have completed the process. This doesn’t include the transactions that are still in the process when the simulation ends. Even if a transaction leaves and re-enters a department, it is counted only once in the department’s total.

Transaction Time Statistics (Time Tab)

The time that a transaction spends being processed can be categorized as either working, waiting for resource time, blocked time, or inactive time.

• Working Time (Avg Work, Tot Work)–The time spent in working for the duration of an activity.

• Waiting for Resource Time (Avg Res Wait, Tot Res Wait)–The time a transaction spends at an activity waiting for a resource that is currently busy with another transaction or out of service.

• Blocked Time (Avg Block, Tot Block)–The time a transaction spends blocked at an activity. This can occur when an activity batches by time or by gate, during a Delay duration, or when a capacity limit is reached. Blocked time does not include any time spent waiting for a resource at an activity.

• Inactive Time (Avg Inact, Tot Inact)–The time a transaction spends at an activity waiting because the necessary resources or the activity are not in schedule (i.e., inactive).

• Cycle Time (Avg Cycle, Tot Cycle)–The wall clock time that it takes a transaction to complete. This is a combination of working time and waiting time.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 583

The cycle time calculation depends on whether the model uses compressed or calendar time. For more information on simulation time, see Defining Simulation Time on page 503. For example, using calendar time mode, a car (transaction) enters an Automobile Repair Center at 4:00 pm. It takes two hours to complete the transaction, but the mechanic leaves at 5:00 pm and comes back in at 8:00 am. Also, the mechanic is busy with other things until 9:00 am. The cycle time, therefore, is eighteen hours (two hours working, one hour waiting for resource and 15 hours inactive).

• Service Time (Avg Serv, Tot Serv)–The actual amount of time that the transaction is being processed. This is a combination of working time, waiting for resource time, and blocked time, but not inactive time.

For example, in the Automobile Repair Center example, the service time is three hours (two hours working and one hour waiting).

Note

In a compressed time model, cycle time and service time are the same thing.

• Waiting Time (Avg Wait, Tot Wait)–The wall clock time that a transaction waits to be processed.

Tot Wait = Tot Res Wait + Tot Block + Tot Inact

For example, in the Automobile Repair Center example, the waiting time is 16 hours (one hour waiting for resource and 15 hours inactive time).

584 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• Service Waiting Time (Avg Serv Wait, Tot Serv Wait)–The time that the transaction waited while being processed (not inactive).

Tot Serv Wait = Tot Res Wait + Tot Block

For example, in the Automobile Repair Center example, the service waiting time is one hour (one hour waiting for resource).

About Joined Transactions

When transactions join, special logic is applied to normalize the time statistics. In other words, the times for the transactions must be merged in a way that makes sense for a single transaction.

The joined transactions are compared two at a time and the statistics for the transaction with the largest cycle time are used. If the transactions have equal cycle time, then largest service time is used. If this is equal, working time is used. If this is equal, resource waiting time is used. And if this is equal, blocked time is used.

Transaction Cost Statistics (Cost Tab

As discussed in previous chapters, transaction costs are accumulated as each transaction passes through activities. The cost is a combination of fixed costs and resource costs for the activity.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 585

The transaction costs can be categorized in several ways, as value type (VA, BVA, or NVA), resource types (Labor, Equipment, or Other), or time (Standard or Overtime). Fixed activity costs are added into the “Other” resource costs.

You can click to select different combinations of the costs when you insert a cost statistic, as shown in the following illustration.

Note

A transaction can accumulate costs in two value-types for the same activity if the fixed cost has a different category than a resource being used at that activity.

The value-type costs are divided as follows:

• VA (Avg VA Cost, Tot VA Cost)–Costs that are marked as Value Added (to the process).

• BVA (Avg BVA Cost, Tot BVA Cost)–Costs that are marked as Business Value Added (to the business but not the process).

• NVA (Avg NVA Cost, Tot NVA Cost)–Costs that are marked as Non Value Added.

The resource-type costs are divided as follows:

• Labor Cost (Avg Lbr Cost, Tot Lbr Cost)–The cost of labor resources that the transaction used.

• Equipment Cost (Avg Eq Cost, Tot Eq Cost)–The cost of equipment resources that the transaction used.

• Other Cost (Avg Oth Cost, Tot Oth Cost)–The cost of other resources and fixed activity costs. This includes:

• Fixed activity cost.

586 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• Other resources. This is the cost of resources categorized as “Other” in the resource definition.

• Other costs. These are for unmodeled resources or department breakdown for cross-department activities.

The time costs are divided as follows:

• Standard (Avg Std Cost, Tot Std Cost)–The cost of resources working within normally scheduled hours. If no overtime is worked, then total cost equals standard cost.

• Overtime (Avg OT Cost, Tot OT Cost)–The cost of resources working overtime.

Activity Statistics

Activity statistics are used to analyze the behavior of transactions being processed at activities.

In the Report window, the Time, Cost, Resource, and Queue tabs have report elements containing activity statistics.

Each row of the report element is identified by the text label of the activity, with or without a department name. For example, an activity labeled “Prepare report” can appear in the report element as “Prepare report” or “Dept. 1 - Prepare report.”

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 587

The order of the activities in a report element is affected by whether the report element is sorted and whether the element is hierarchical. If it is sorted, you can choose the sorting format. If the element is hierarchical, the activities in each process are sorted separately. Otherwise, the regular sorting format is used.

Formulas

The following calculations are available in many of the activity time and queue statistics.

• Total (Tot)

For time or cost statistics, the total is the sum of time or costs accumulated by the transactions that have completed for each activity. For count statistics, the total is the number of transactions that have been counted at each activity. If you apply a filter to the statistic, then only specific completed transactions are counted.

• Average (Avg or Tavg)

For time or cost statistics, the average (Avg) is the total time or costs divided by the number of completed transactions for each activity. For count statistics, the two types of average are Avg and Tavg.

• Avg is the observation-based average. This is the sum of the value of the statistic, when observed, divided by the number of observations taken.

• Tavg is the time-weighted average. This is the average after weighting each count based on the amount of time that the observed count occurred.

For example, consider a simulation model where one transaction waits for an hour, and another transaction arrives after that hour and waits for 15 minutes before both transactions are processed at the elapsed 1.25 hours. The average (Avg) wait count is 1 observed waiting, plus 2 observed waiting, divided by the 2 observations, for an average of 1.5. Written as an equation, this is (1 + 2)/2 = 1.5. When we consider the time-weighted average (Tavg) wait count, we have 1 waiting for 1.25 hours, plus 1 waiting for 0.25 hours, divided by the total time of 1.25 hours, for an average of 1.2. Written as an equation, this is (1.25 + 0.25)/1.25 = 1.2.

For the average, we recommend that you use the time-weighted average (Tavg) when it is available.

• Maximum (Max)

The highest number accumulated for the statistic at any one point in time, i.e., the “high-water mark”.

588 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• Minimum (Min)

The lowest number accumulated for the statistic at any one point in time.

Activity Time Statistics (Time Tab)

Activity times are similar to transaction times, except the times are calculated for each activity as transactions are processed. The time statistics are cycle time, working time, waiting time, waiting for resource time, blocked time, inactive time, and service waiting time.

For example, in the following report element, basic time statistics are displayed by activity.

Activity Cost Statistics (Cost Tab)

Activity costs are similar to transaction costs, except the costs are calculated for each individual activity as transactions are processed. An activity can accumulate costs categorized by value type, by resource type, and by standard or overtime.

Activity Queue Statistics (Queue Tab)

• Total #Waiting Transactions (Tot #Wait)–The total number of transactions that had to wait to be processed by the activity. This is a combination of the total count spent waiting for resources and total blocked count.

Tot #Wait = Tot #Res Wait + Tot #Block

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 589

• Time-Weighted Average Wait Count (Tavg#Wait)–The average number of transactions waiting at the activity based on the amount of time that the observed count of waiting transactions occurred.

• Average #Waiting Transactions (Avg #Wait)–The average number of transactions that were waiting to be processed at the activity, at any one point in time that any transactions were waiting. (In other words, this is the average length of the line if there is a line at all.)

• Maximum #Waiting Transactions (Max #Wait)–The highest number in the queue, or the largest number of transactions that were waiting to be processed by the activity at any one point in time.

• Total # Transactions at Activity (Total#AtAct)–The total number of transactions that were in the activity, in any state (work or waiting), during simulation.

• Time-Weighted Average # Transactions At Activity (Tavg#AtAct)–The average number of transactions in an activity at any point in time during simulation.

• Maximum # Transactions At Activity (Max#AtAct)–The highest number of transactions at/in an activity at any point in time.

• Maximum Capacity Used (Max Cap Used)–The largest number of transactions processed in the activity at any one time.

• Transaction Completed Count (Count)–The number of transactions that completed being processed by the activity.

• Total #Transactions that Waited for Resources (Tot #Res Wait)–The total number of transactions that waited to be processed by resources at the activity.

• Time-Weighted Average # Transactions Waiting for Resources (Tavg Res Wait #)–The average number of transactions waiting for a resource at any given time.

• Total #Transactions Blocked (Tot #Block)–The total number of transactions that had to wait to be processed by the activity because of a blocking condition. A blocking condition can occur when an activity batches by time or by gate, during a Delay activity, or when the activity reaches capacity limits.

• Average Resource Waiting Time (Avg Res Wait)–The average amount of time that transactions waited for resources.

• Average Blocked Time (Avg Block)–Average amount of time transactions were blocked at the activity due to input or capacity constraints.

• Average Inactive (Avg Inact)–Amount of time transactions were waiting due to resources or activity being out of schedule.

590 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Resource Statistics

Resource statistics are used to analyze data that has been collected about resources, including workers and other resources that you have defined.

In the Report window, the Cost, Resource, and Queue tabs have report elements containing resource statistics.

Formulas

The following calculations are available in many of the resource statistics.

• Total (Tot)

For time and cost statistics, the total is the sum of time or costs accrued by the resource. For count statistics, the total is the number of transactions that have been counted for the statistics for the resource.

If you apply a filter to the statistic, then only specific things such as departments, resources or pools are counted. For example, totals that are filtered by department only include processing time that occurred in the department.

• Average (Avg or Tavg)

For time and cost statistics, the average (Avg) is the total time or costs divided by the count of resources. Count and utilization statistics are Avg and Tavg.

• Avg is the observation-based average. This is the sum of the value of the statistic, when observed, divided by the number of observations taken.

• Tavg is the time-weighted average. This is the average after weighting each count or utilization based on the amount of time that the observed count or resource usage occurred.

For example, consider a simulation model where one transaction arrives and does not wait before being processed by a resource for 2 hours. After 1 hour of processing, another

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 591

transaction arrives and waits for an hour for the resource, before being processed for 2 hours. The total elapsed time is 4 hours. The average (Avg) wait count is 1 observed waiting, divided by the 1 observation, for an average of 1.0. Written as an equation, this is 1/1 = 1. When we consider the time-weighted average (Tavg) wait count, we have 1 waiting for 1 hour, divided by the total time of 4 hours, for an average of 0.25. Written as an equation, this is 1/4 = 0.25.

If you apply a filter, then only specific departments, resources, or pools are counted.

• Maximum (Max)

The highest number accumulated for the statistic at any one point in time, i.e., the "high-water mark".

• Minimum (Min)

The lowest number accumulated for the statistic at any one point in time.

Resource Time Statistics (Time Tab)

• Workers (Count)–The total number of workers for one or all departments.

During simulation, a resource can always be classified as busy, out of service, idle, or inactive. You set how a resource “spends” its time when you specify how activities acquire and use it, for how long, and by its schedule.

The sum of a resource’s time equals the total elapsed time of the simulation.

• Busy Time (Avg Busy, Tot Busy)–The time that a resource spends working, i.e., processing a transaction. This time is paid.

Also see the following discussion on the two subsets of busy time: waiting versus non-waiting time, and standard time versus overtime.

• Out of Service Time (Avg OOS, Tot OOS)–The time that a resource is active but unavailable to process transactions. A resource can also be acquired by an activity as out of service. Out of service time can be paid or unpaid, depending on how the time span is defined in the resource’s schedule.

592 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• Idle Time (Avg Idle, Tot Idle)–The time that a resource spends available for use but not currently processing a transaction. This time is paid.

• Inactive Time–The remaining time when a resource is out of schedule. This time is unpaid.

Subsets of Resource Busy Time

• Resource Waiting Time and Non-Waiting Time (Avg Res Wait, Tot Res Wait)–The time that a resource spends waiting. This occurs when an activity processing a transaction acquires a resource with the Wait option, and the transaction must wait for some reason (for example, waiting for another resource, or the transaction incurs blocked or inactive time).

Tot Busy = Tot Res Wait + (Total resource non-waiting time)

• Resource Standard Time and Resource Overtime (Avg OT, Tot OT)–The time that a resource spends in standard time or overtime. A resource is in overtime if an activity acquires a resource and requires that it finish processing the transaction even though the resource should go out of schedule (become inactive) prior to finishing.

Tot Busy = (Resource standard time) + Tot OT

Combinations of Resource Times

• Resource Utilization (Res Util%)–The percentage of scheduled active time (when a resource should be in schedule) that a resource is busy but not out of service:

Res Util% = Tot Busy / ((Tot Sched) - (Tot OOS))

The total scheduled active time is calculated by figuring the total number of hours during which the resource is scheduled to be active during the entire simulation. For example, assume a simulation runs for two calendar days using the Standard schedule. This creates 18 hours scheduled active time and two hours out of service time (lunch breaks) for a total of 16 hours. If the total busy time for a worker is eight hours, the resource utilization is 50%.

Non-Waiting Resource Utilization (NW Util%)–The percentage of scheduled active time (when a resource should be in schedule) that a resource is busy but not waiting or out of service.

NW Util% = ((Tot Busy) - (Tot Res Wait)) / ((Tot Sched) - (Tot OOS))

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 593

If the worker in the previous example has accrued two hours waiting for another resource, then the non-waiting resource utilization is 37.50%.

Note

It is possible to get over 100% resource utilization because overtime can cause busy time outside of the scheduled active time.

Resource Cost Statistics (Cost and Resource Tabs)

The costs associated with a resource are specified when you define a resource and at the point in time when an activity uses a resource.

The resource paid times are divided into the following categories.

• Resource Standard Paid Time–A resource’s normally scheduled hours. This includes busy time, out of service time (but only if it has been marked paid in the schedule) and idle time.

Resource standard paid time = Tot Busy + Tot OOS (paid) + Tot Idle

• Resource Overtime (Avg OT, Tot OT)–The amount of time that a resource worked overtime.

A resource’s cost is the combination of standard cost, overtime cost, and any per use costs.

• Standard Cost (Avg Std Cost, Tot Std Cost)–The cost of the resource working during standard hours. This is the result of multiplying the resource’s standard paid hours by the hourly rate that is specified in the resource definition. (See above for the definition of resource standard paid time.)

Tot Std Cost = (Resource standard paid time) * (Resource’s standard hourly rate)

• Overtime Cost (Avg OT Cost, Tot OT Cost)–The cost of the resource working during overtime. This is the result of multiplying the overtime hours by the overtime hourly rate of the resource.

Tot OT Cost = Tot OT * (Resource’s overtime hourly rate)

594 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

• Use Cost (Avg Use Cost, Tot Use Cost)–The per use cost is determined by the number of transactions that are processed. The cost is incurred whenever an activity uses the resource, either as “Acquire” or “Activity,” to process a transaction.

Tot Use Cost = (Number of times the resource is used) * (Resource’s per use cost)

Resource Queue Statistics (Queue Tab)

These resource queue statistics are used to examine the behavior of transactions requesting the use of resources at activities.

Note

The difference between a resource queue and an activity queue is that a resource queue is created when transactions are waiting for a resource. Activity queues are created when transactions wait at an activity to be processed.

• Total # Trans (Count)–The number of requests of this resource queue from transactions.

• Total # Waiting Trans (Tot#Wait)–The number of requests of this resource queue that cannot be serviced (e.g., all resources busy) causing the transactions to wait.

• Maximum Number of Waiting Transactions (Max Wait#)–The highest number in the queue, or the largest number of transactions that were waiting for a resource at this queue at any one point in time.

• Average and Time-Weighted Average Number of Waiting Transactions (Avg Wait#, Tavg#Wait)–This is the average or time-weighted number of transactions that were waiting at the queue at any one point in time, when any were waiting.

• Transaction Waiting Time (Avg Wait, Tot Wait)–The time that transactions waited for resources from this queue, including all transactions that didn’t wait (i.e., their waiting time was zero). For example, if two transactions waited 10 minutes and two other transactions didn’t wait, then the total transaction waiting time is 20 minutes and the average transaction waiting time is 5 minutes.

• Average Non-zero Transaction Waiting Time (Avg NZ Wait)–The average time that transactions that waited for resources from this queue, not including any transactions that didn’t wait (i.e., all waiting times are greater than zero). In the above example, the average non-zero transaction waiting time is 10 minutes.

Simulating the Process and Viewing the Results 595

596 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 20

iGrafx® Process™ for Six Sigma is a powerful process analysis and improvement solution designed

specifically with the needs of the Six Sigma professional in mind. iGrafx Process for Six Sigma is built on and contains all the functionality of iGrafx Process. Here are just some of the ways that different Six Sigma professionals can use iGrafx Process for Six Sigma:

In any Six Sigma project, you need to gain a deep understanding of your process to achieve your defined objectives and the potential returns from Six Sigma. iGrafx Process for Six Sigma enables you to easily gain this understanding in a methodical fashion.

This documentation addresses the features of Process for Six Sigma created specifically for the Six Sigma professional and assumes a working knowledge of process mapping, modeling and simulation. For more detailed discussion and instruction on process modeling and simulation, refer to the iGrafx® 2006 Process User Guide.

DOE and Simulation MethodologyCreating a process map and model for use in Design of Experiments (DOE) is an iterative process. Since you can only map what you know, which initially may be very little, you must follow a methodology that lets you map and model the process as you understand it and then implement control points that you can tune during DOE. The methodology is outlined in the following steps:

Level Tasks

Champions Project selection; Project review.

Master Black Belts Project management; Project selection; Project review.

Black Belts Conducting and managing projects; DOE and process analysis.

Green Belts Creating process maps and adding process parameters to the model.

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 597

598 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

1 Map and model your process

a. Gather process data.

b. Use Fit Data to improve accuracy in your model.

2 Validate your process map and model

a. Conduct simulations.

b. Use Log Transactions to validate behavior.

c. Compare report data with operational data.

3 Baseline the AS-IS process

4 Prepare the map and model for RapiDOE

a. Modify the process flow to illustrate alternatives.

i. Map the alternative paths.

ii. Insert a decision shape as the control point for the alternative paths.

iii. Define a custom type to enumerate the alternative paths.

iv. Create a scenario attribute to the decision shape.

v. Add the scenario attribute to the decision shape.

b. Modify the process parameters

i. Identify activity level experimentation factors.

ii. Create scenario attributes for use in activity expressions.

iii. Insert scenario attributes in appropriate activity level expression.

c. Ensure that result variables exist

i. Check if report element exists for the result in which you are interested.

ii. Define custom statistics or scenario attributes for measured results are needed.

5 Conduct RapiDOE

a. Choose appropriate factors.

i. Scenario attributes to control process flow.

ii. Resource counts.

iii. Generator interarrival times.

iv. Scenario attributes to control activity.

b. Choose appropriate results

i. Transaction statistics.

ii. Scenario attributes.

iii. Custom statistics.

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 599

6 Create the TO-BE process map and model

a. Eliminate non-optimal path alternatives.

b. Replace scenario attributes in activity expressions with optimal values.

The Six Sigma MenuiGrafx® Process™ for Six Sigma adds a new menu to the iGrafx Process main menu. Use this menu to execute the new Six Sigma commands described below.

Note

You can also display the Six Sigma toolbar by using the Toolbar command on the View menu.

Process AnalyzerThe Process Analyzer feature lets you perform various calculations for paths through a process, for an entire process, or for all processes in a document such as would appear in a document with at least one sub process. The calculations depend upon data supplied about activities in the process such as task yield or number of defects a task generates.

Six Sigma Command Function

Analyses Define or Edit static analyses to perform on your process or paths through it.

View Process Analyzer

Displays the Process Analyzer window.

Fit Data Use your own empirical data to improve the accuracy of your model.

RapiDOE Automatically run multiple experiments and export results to supported, external statistics applications for detailed analysis.

Log Transactions Lets you log individual transaction statistics to a text file, Microsoft® Excel, or supported, external statistics applications to help validate your model or for further analysis.

Export Reports Lets you export report elements to an external application or file for further analysis.

600 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

You can create new analyses, edit existing analyses, delete analyses, export analyses to an external file, and import analyses from an external file. After setting up and running an analysis, use the Process Analyzer window to view the results. To view the Process Analyzer, perform the following steps:

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click View Process Analyzer.

2 In the left pane of the Process Analyzer window, click the + sign to expand a level.

3 Double-click a Path or Department to display associated activities in the right pane of the window.

Note

Selecting a Path, Department, or Activity also highlights the corresponding portion of the process map.

4 To add analysis data, click the appropriate cell in the right pane of the window and type your data. The left and right panes of the window display the analyses that you set up earlier.

The left pane of the Process Analyzer window is a tree display that gives several views of the active document. Use this pane to view the defined processes, paths, departments, and analyses.

The Process Analyzer Window - Left Pane

The right pane displays the activities of objects and the value of the variables used to calculate the analyses displayed in the left pane. Use this pane to enter data for each of the analysis variables. Clicking a task in the right pane highlights it in the process map.

Defining a New Analysis

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click Analyses.

2 In the Analysis Manager dialog box, click New.

3 In the Analysis dialog box, type a name for your analysis in the Name field.

4 In the Description field, type a brief description of the analysis.

5 Select a calculation in the Calculate the list.

6 Select a variable in the of the variable list. If the one you need does not exist, type it in the text box.

7 Click a check box for one or more of the following analysis levels:

• Each path - calculates analysis at the path level.

• Entire process - calculates analysis at the process level.

• Entire document - calculates analysis at the document level while considering process and subprocesses.

8 Click the appropriate option to specify how to handle undefined variables in a path.

9 Click OK.

The Process Analyzer Window - Right Pane

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 601

Editing an Existing Analysis

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click Analyses.

2 In the Analysis Manager dialog box, select an analysis name in the Analyses list.

3 Click Edit.

4 Make your desired edits in the Analysis dialog box.

5 Click OK.

Deleting an Existing Analysis

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click Analyses.

2 In the Analysis Manager dialog box, select an analysis name in the Analyses list.

3 Click Delete. The analysis is removed from the Analyses list.

Importing an Analysis

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click Analyses.

2 In the Analysis Manager dialog box, click Import.

3 Use the Import Analyses dialog box to locate an analysis file.

Note

iGrafx analysis files end with the .xml extension.

4 Click OK. The imported analysis appears in the Analyses list of the Analysis Manager dialog box.

Exporting an Analysis

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click Analyses.

2 In the Analysis Manager dialog box, click Export.

3 Use the Export Analysis dialog box to locate the destination for the analysis file.

4 Type the export file name.

5 Click OK.

602 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Fitting Data

The Fit Data feature improves the accuracy of parameter values in your model by helping you find a standard statistical distribution that generates random numbers distributed similarly to data you have measured. Often parameters in a process model are modeled as random variables. For instance, the time it takes to perform some activity is typically not constant each time it is performed, and it is often not possible to know the exact formula to use when computing the time based on other parameters. Sometimes a statement like “it takes somewhere between 5 and 15 minutes” is accurate enough for a particular parameter.

However, there are usually parameters in a model that influence the results strongly and for these you may want more accuracy. If you are modeling an existing process, one option for these parameters is to take many sample measurements, for instance the time it takes to complete an activity for each “transaction” that encounters it. You could use these measurements directly in the model, perhaps using user-defined Functions, but then you would forever be simulating one historical scenario and would get no information about how your process would handle a different set of values in a different order.

A better approach is usually to determine a standard statistical distribution that generates random numbers that match the measured data reasonably well. That way you can vary the random number generator in iGrafx® Process™. By doing this, you can see how your model responds to differing values in a different order where those values are still distributed in the same way as the measured values.

iGrafx Process does not do data fitting (parameter estimation) itself, but depends upon a supported, external statistics application such as JMP or MINITAB. You can do the fitting yourself completely within the statistics application, but the Fit Data feature makes it somewhat easier to determine the expression you need to put into your Process model. Also, some people find the Fit Data feature more convenient to use for this specific purpose.

After you have some measured data stored in your statistical application you can use Fit Data to find a supported random distribution that generates data SIMILAR to the data you already have. You can “eyeball” the graphs to make your own inferences about which distribution fits best, and study the goodness-of-fit measure from the statistics application that is displayed in the Fit Data dialog box. After you have determined the best distribution, click the appropriate row in the table, and click Copy. Your expression is now copied to the Clipboard for pasting in an expression for the parameter. For example, you can copy the expression in the Duration field on the Task tab in the Properties dialog for an activity.

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 603

Note

MINITAB computes an Anderson-Darling goodness of fit statistic for the Normal, Weibull, LogNormal and Exponential distributions. For more on the Anderson-Darling test see http://www.itl.nist.gov/div898/handbook/eda/section3/eda35e.htm and the MINITAB StatGuide. In general, the lower this value is the better the distribution fits the data, but the interpretation of the value is distribution dependent -determining whether a particular value for this statistic is significant at a given confidence level depends upon the distribution as well as the number of data values. Because of this you should rely on your visual interpretation of the curves as well as the statistic in making your judgment about which distribution to use. Experience with the statistic suggests that for large values of N, a few hundred datapoints or so, the agreement between the statistic and visual interpretation is quite good. However, you should think of the Anderson-Darling statistics displayed in the dialog as a clue, not an answer.

JMP computes different goodness of fit measures which are as follows:

• Normal Distribution - Shapiro-Wilk Test (if n < 2000) or Kolmogorov-Smirnoff_lillifors Test (n >= 2000)

• Weibull Distribution - Cramer-von Mises W Test

• LogNormal Distribution - Kolmogorov's D Test

• Exponential Distribution - Kolmogorov's D Test

iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma supports the following distributions for Fit Data:

• Uniform

• Normal

• Exponential

• LogNormal

• Weibull

To help you choose the best distribution, select or clear the Plot check boxes and click which graph to show from the list---PDF, CDF or Residuals:

• Probability Density Function -The graph of "frequency" (how often the number will be this value) on the y axis and the value itself on the x axis.

• Cumulative Distribution Function -This is the integral of the PDF. It shows the probability that a random value from the distribution will be less than the value on the x-axis. The y-axis ranges from 0 to 1.

• Residuals -The difference between the probabilities calculated by the CDF for the distribution and the probabilities computed from the measured values.

604 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Fitting Data To Parametric Distribution

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click Fit Data.

2 In the Choose Data dialog box, select a worksheet in the Open Worksheets list.

3 In the Available Columns list, select a column of data.

Note

Do not choose a column containing non-numeric data or having fewer than five data points. Also, columns containing negative data cannot be used in the Weibull and Exponential distributions.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Distributions dialog box, select the Plot check boxes for the distributions you would like to show on the graph. The data is plotted in the lower window of the dialog box.

6 Click the distribution in the upper table that best fits your data. The expression appears under the Copy button.

7 Click Copy. You can now paste the expression into the desired expression field.

RapiDOERapiDOE lets you conduct experiments within your model in a fraction of the time it would take to conduct the same tests in an operational environment. With RapiDOE you can conduct full factorial testing versus the common fractional factorial in an operational environment since experiments in the simulator are free.

Before conducting experiments on your model using RapiDOE, you need to prepare it for automated simulation. Key to this preparation is placing control points at the appropriate locations in your process to modify the metrics for experiment purposes. After the model has been set up, RapiDOE lets you adjust the control points and measure the results of that process configuration.

This method is different than conducting simulations without RapiDOE. Without the benefit of RapiDOE, there is no automated method of changing process parameters or flow. So, you do not need to create control points on your process. You directly modify the factor whose impact you wish to study. Although this may sound and is simple enough on a very small scale, you can easily conduct a five-factor, two-level test with four replications (128 experiments) in a few seconds or minutes (depending on your model) with RapiDOE. Without RapiDOE, each of those 128 experiments needs to be set up manually, thereby increasing the overall time it takes to conduct the experiments as well as the potential to introduce numerous areas of data entry error.

Within your process, there are two areas where you can adjust behavior – the process flow and the process parameters. Changes to the process flow effect the paths that a transaction takes while moving through the process. For example, in a manufacturing process, you may want to measure the

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 605

effect on number of defects vs. cycle time of a process that de-burrs every unit after a weld vs. a process that does not de-burr after a weld.

Changes to the process parameters change how a process operates. For example, you may want to measure the effect on order cycle time under different resource counts and order volumes. In this case, you would modify the resource count as well as the interarrival time for the transaction generator.

In both of these cases you need to implement the control points which you can change to represent different values or behaviors. In iGrafx Process for Six Sigma, control points are implemented through the use of decision shapes and scenario attributes.

Controlling Process Flow

Controlling the flow through RapiDOE requires a five step setup:

1 Define the alternative paths within your process map.

2 Insert a decision shape between the alternative paths.

3 Define a custom type to enumerate the alternative paths.

4 Create a scenario attribute to control transaction flow.

5 Add the scenario attribute to the decision shape specifying which path should be taken during the experiment

Step 1: Defining Alternative Paths

In most cases, there may only be two alternative paths a transaction can take although there is no reason why you cannot define more than two. The first step is to generate these different paths on your map and enter the modeling data for each task. These paths are illustrated in a parallel fashion or in some cases, one path may be a subset of another path with some of the activities bypassed.

Step 2: Inserting a Decision Shape

Next, insert a decision shape at the point where the alternative paths diverge. From a visual perspective, the activity preceding the decision shape is the last activity common to each path. The

606 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

outputs from the decision shape lead to each of the alternative paths as shown in the following example.

Step 3: Defining a Custom Type

A type is used within an attribute to define its range of values. It is a Number or a Set of Members. For RapiDOE, for nearly all cases, you create types that are Sets of Members. By creating a custom type for the scenario attribute that controls the process flow, you are able to easily identify what the alternative paths are by name on the process map as well as through the RapiDOE dialog box.

As an example, assume you create a type called Path which has as its members the values: North, South, East and West. When you create the decision shape and connect it to the four alternative paths, the connectors are labeled North, South, East and West. In RapiDOE, when you select the associated scenario attribute as a factor, you can define the possible experiment values as either North, South, East and West.

To define an attribute type, perform the following steps:

1 In the Model menu, click Types.

2 In the Define Types dialog box, type a name.

3 Move the cursor into the Members section, click the left mouse button, and type each of the members, pressing the Enter key after each member.

4 Click OK.

To delete a type, select the type, and click Delete in the Attributes dialog box. To modify an existing type, perform the following steps:

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 607

1 On the Model menu, click Types.

2 In the Define Types dialog box, select the type in the Existing list, and click Modify.

3 In the Members list, edit the members as desired.

4 Click OK.

Step 4: Creating a Scenario Attribute

Scenario attributes are available to all activities in all departments and all processes. Scenario attributes have the prefix “S” and appear as “S.name” where “name” is assigned by the user. iGrafx Process for Six Sigma contains attributes other than scenario attributes (transaction, process and department attributes), however, only scenario attributes are used during RapiDOE so they are discussed here. To create a scenario attribute perform the following steps:

1 On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 In the Define Attributes dialog box, click Add.

3 In the Add New Attribute dialog box, set the Location to Scenario.

4 Type a name for the attribute (the name must be less than 32 alphanumeric characters and can contain an underscore character but no space or hyphen).

5 Click a type for the attribute.

Note

You may use one of the built-in types (Number, YesNo, TrueFalse) or a user defined type (most likely the one you created in the previous step).

6 Click OK.

To delete an attribute, select the attribute, and click Delete in the Attributes dialog box.

To modify an existing scenario attribute, perform the following steps:

1 On the Model menu, click Attributes.

2 In the Define Attributes dialog box, click the Scenario Location.

3 Click an attribute in the Existing list, and click Modify.

4 Click on a new type in the scroll list, and click OK.

5 Click OK.

608 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Step 5: Adding the Scenario Attribute To the Decision Shape

Steps 1 and 2 set up the process map from a visual perspective, and steps 3 and 4 set up the process model from a metric perspective. Step 5 brings the map and model together. To add a scenario attribute to the decision shape, perform the following steps:

1 On the Edit menu, click Properties.

2 In the Properties dialog box, click the Outputs tab.

Note

You may need to scroll right or left using the arrows on the upper right portion of the dialog to see the Outputs tab.

3 In the Case Text field, select the type you created earlier.

4 In the field that contains values of Statistical and Expression, click Expression.

5 Click in the expression window that opens.

6 When the Expression tool appears at the bottom of the screen, click the Paste Attribute button.

7 Click the Scenario Location option.

8 Click an attribute in the Attribute list, and click OK.

9 Click OK.

After completing these steps, you can select the attribute in the RapiDOE dialog and specify the settings for a DOE.

Modifying Process Parameters

RapiDOE lets you modify the values of certain process parameters. Some of these require additional setup to your model while others modify standard model metrics.

Resource Allocations

Using RapiDOE, you can define the number of resources available in a particular resource pool. RapiDOE automatically reads your model’s resource allocations and enables them as experimentation factors through the RapiDOE dialog box. No additional setup is required.

Generator Interarrival Time

Using RapiDOE, you can define the rate at which transactions enter your process. RapiDOE automatically reads your model’s generators and enables them as experimentation factors through the RapiDOE dialog box. No additional setup is required.

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 609

Activity Level Metrics

Activity level metrics are those that define how a particular activity functions. Define the attributes which you use through RapiDOE to modify your model. The activity level locations where attributes are used are:

Scenario attributes and custom types are described in detail in the previous section. Creation, definition, and use of scenario attributes for activity level metrics are the same as for the decision shape. To design and run an experiment, perform the following steps.

1 On the Six Sigma menu, click RapiDOE. The RapiDOE dialog box opens.

2 In the Available Factors box, click the box next to the factor category to display the list of factors for that category.

3 Select at least two factors by clicking the check box next to the factor name. When you select a factor, columns appear that let you change the high and low values during the experiment. You can also change the report header for the factor.

4 To conduct other than a 2-level test, perform steps 5 through 8. Otherwise, skip to step 9.

5 Click Options to display the JMP Options dialog box.

6 Click General Factorial, and click OK. A #Levels column opens in the RapiDOE dialog box.

7 Type the number of levels for the desired factors.

Note

If an attribute has a type (e.g., YesNo), you cannot enter more levels than the type has members.

8 Type the value for each level.

Properties Dialog Tab Potential Expression Location

Inputs Collection Transaction at Input by Expression

Collection Transaction at Input by Counts

Resources Acquisition count

Attribute Already Defined Attributes

Task Duration

Cost

Outputs Flow decision criteria

610 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

9 In the Response box, click the box next to the response category to display the list of responses for that category.

10 Select at least one response by clicking the check box next to the response name. When you select a response, a column appears that lets you customize the report header for the response.

11 In the Replications box, type the number of replications for the experiment.

12 Optional step: Click Reset to clear your selections and re-enter them.

13 Click OK. The factors and responses are exported to MINITAB to design the experiment set. After the experiments are designed, they automatically import to iGrafx Process for Six Sigma.

14 In the Run Experiment dialog box, click Start. The Simulator Progress dialog box opens. As the simulations run, calculated response values are placed in the appropriate columns of the Run Experiment dialog box. When the experiments complete, the JMP Data Table Name dialog box opens.

15 Type a worksheet name and click OK. The data is exported to a JMP worksheet where you can conduct detailed statistical analysis on the simulation results.

Logging TransactionsiGrafx Process for Six Sigma includes a statistics-gathering simulation and reporting mechanism called Log Transactions. The function behind Log Transactions is two-fold:

• As a simulation tool, Process for Six Sigma gathers statistics about your Process as a whole. Log Transactions takes this one step further by gathering statistics about each INDIVIDUAL transaction that passes through the Process.

• By gathering individual transactions through the Log Transactions mechanism, you can study the data to see how your Process responds to the transaction load you put on it.

Log Transactions also makes it easier to measure time dependent behavior of completed transactions statistics since one the qualities you can log is the simulation time that the transaction completed. Since Processes and the transactions that go into them are symbiotic, it is important to see how they work together or, more importantly, how you can modify one or the other to improve the overall results.

Analyzing time dependent statistics like resource utilization, cycle times, and queue lengths using the Log Transactions wizard can help you analyze how individual transactions vary from the averages that the Report shows. The report, on the other hand, can be used to see how the process responds to the transactions put through it.

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 611

Log Transactions Wizard

The Log Transactions wizard produces a table of data with one line per transaction event. You can output this table to either a text file or tabular results window. The first page of the wizard lets you specify where the data goes, in what format, and what you can open it with. The tabular result output lets you see the data as it is being produced.

Note

There is a limit to the number of lines that appear in the tabular result window. This output also dramatically slows the simulation so it is best to use it only to validate the results you want before doing the final run to a log file.

The second page of the wizard lets you specify what transaction data you want to log. Depending on what types of objects you have in your Process, you can select from a wide variety of data types to log. By default, the Transaction ID is generated. When you select the check boxes for the transactions you would like to see the outputs for, you will see that the subnodes beneath the selected parent node are automatically selected as well.

The third page of the wizard lets you edit or rearrange the rows for each output column. The first column is the heading generated in the first line of the output. You can edit the rows by double- clicking the heading you want to change, or by clicking Edit Name. Also, you can change the order the columns are output by reordering the rows. To reorder, click the row header button and drag it up or down, or use the arrow controls located to the right of the table to move it up or down.

Logging Transactions Using the Log Transactions Wizard

1 On the Model menu, point to Run, and click Log Transactions.

2 In the first panel, click an output type in the Choose Output Type list.

3 In the File Name field, type a new file name or browse for an existing one. If necessary, click the check boxes for Including Headers or opening with a spreadsheet application.

4 Click Next.

5 In the second panel, click the parent node checkbooks for the statistics or data you want to log, and click Next.

6 In the third panel, edit or reorder any columns you feel necessary, and click Next.

7 In the fourth wizard panel, select if you want to log data when the transaction completes, log data when the transaction ends, or if you want to customize the logging of data. If you select Customize, another wizard panel lets you select events for data to be logged when that event occurs. Click Next.

8 In the final wizard panel, select if you want to run Log Transactions now and not save it, run Log Transactions now and save it for later, or just save it for later. Click Finish.

612 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Export Report You can export selected report elements from a simulation run to any of the following external files:

• Text file (tab delimited)

• Excel Worksheet

• MINITAB Worksheet

Exporting Report Elements To An External File

1 In the iGrafx report window, select a report element.

2 On the Six Sigma menu, click Export Report.

3 The Choose Destination dialog box, select an export file type in the Export to list.

4 Use the Save As dialog box to specify the location to export your report.

5 Type a file name.

6 Click OK.

Using iGrafx Process 2006 for Six Sigma 613

614 iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Index

Symbols

#Trans 583, 595.igx 327

A

about 119activation 4

finishing after installation 4from the installation wizard 4from the reminder dialog box 5recommended method 4

activitiesabout 369attributes

assigning values at 463deleting 464

cross-department 74delay duration

about 383specifying 383

events 544in process diagrams 368inputs

specifying 403output data

about 385decision data 385

queueing transactions 418resource data 380resources

adding to 427defining 424removing from 428

schedules 542statistics 587task

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

cost 445defining 439duration 440type 440

task data 381value class

about 384assigning 384viewing 384

work durationabout 382specifying 383

activity 363, 365multi-instance 364parallel 364

activity boundary 362Add License Keys dialog box 5, 7Add Link dialog box 113, 114, 116adding

departments 36multiple items 29text

about 31in shapes 31

ad-hoc 366ad-hoc task 353aligning objects 92approval groups

adding an approver 266choosing 266creating 263editing 263managing 263named 266private and named 266

artifact 361association 361attachment points

about 25attributes

615

about 462, 470activities

assigning values at 463deleting 464

defining 462, 472deleting 473duration and 466initializing for generators 530location 471modifying 473modifying with an expression 489name 473Preempt 464Priority 464scenario 530setting with generator 515type 473value 474

automatic recovery 49automatic routing 57Available Working Time 332Average number of waiting transactions 590,

595Avg #Wait 590Avg Block 583Avg Busy 592Avg Cycle 583Avg Eq Cost 586Avg Idle 593Avg Inact 583Avg Lbr Cost 586Avg NZ Wait 595Avg OOS 592Avg OT 593, 594Avg OT Cost 594Avg Oth Cost 586Avg Res Wait 583, 593Avg Serv 584Avg Serv Wait 585Avg Std Cost 587, 594Avg Use Cost 595Avg VA Cost 586Avg Wait 584, 595

616

Avg Wait# 595Avg Work 583

B

basic diagramsabout 21creating 22

batching inputs 409Blocked time 583

total number of transactions 590border patterns

text area 32boundary event 362boundary events 352BPMN

activities in 353activity 345compliance with standard 349correct by construction 360correct-by-construction 359default template 349error 350event 345fault 350features 350flow objects 347gateway 345gateways 347graphics in 345modeling error check 359pools 33

representing external business partner 357

using 357terminology 361what is 345

BPMN diagramsadding to a document 349connector lines in 359converting process diagrams to 361

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

creating 349differences from process diagrams 348gateways in 355real-time error checking 359shapes in 350

BPMN events 350supported in iGrafx 350

BPMN Guide 346, 356using 356

BPMN standard 345bpmn.org 345business transaction 366Busy time 592BVA

cost 586by expression 365

C

calendars 534callout 361callout lines 109

connecting to a shape from a graphic 109formatting 110

cancel 365cancel on completion 447cancel transactions on completion

about 451how to 451

cause and effect diagramsabout 21adding arrows to 322cause and effect menu 320cause and effect toolbar 321creating 317draw tool 321editing 321exporting FMEA diagrams 324laying out 324Lean process analysis and 343printing 324

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

removing arrows from 322tools 318what is an FMEA diagram 324working with text 323

certificate 273child department 362child departments 241closing a diagram 48combining objects 97compensate on completion 447

about 451how to 451

compensation 362compensation task 353Completion generator 517Connect Closed command 97Connect Open command 97connection lines

attaching graphics to 62connector line 364

adding text to 67dashed 364

connector linesabout 55adding manual connectors to 71arrow format 69arrows 69automatic routing 57connecting to a different shape 27crossover style 69deleting 28direction of 26editing 66formatting filled 70intersections and skips 68modifying 27moving to a different point 28multiple destinations 26reversing ends between shapes 67selecting 27vertex 56width and color 69

constrained activity 365

617

container shape 362Convert To dialog box 191copying

about 45correct by construction 360cost

about 372Costs

activity 589resources 594transaction 585

Count, statistic 592creating

basic diagram 22organization chart 22process diagram 22

Current-state map 341current-state process map 343custom data 468

importing 186custom statistics

about 577adding to report 580creating 579deleting 579modifying 579

cutting 45Cycle time 583

D

Data Department Dictionary departmentsinserting into a diagram 243

data dictionary 240, 242data exporting 341days

about 535defining 536deleting 537

decision casedefault 58

618

moving text 61multiple outcomes 60

decision case text 58decision outputs 346default text 162deleting

about 45connector lines 28preset text style 163text 158

Demand generator 518department 364

child 362floating 363

Department Data Dictionary 240, 242adding departments to 242adding entries 242deleting from departments 242displaying 242renaming in departments 243

Department Manager 37departments

about 368activity spanning 74adding 36adding to the Department Data Dictionary

242changing appearance of 39changing name height or width 44changing names of 37changing resource pool allocation 436child 36, 241deleting from the Department Data

Dictionary 242excluding from cross-department activity

75excluding from tasks 446floating 33, 36, 345global 36, 241growing 43in BPMN diagrams 348lanes 33managed

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

viewing processes that use 243managed by Department Data Dictionary

243managing in Process Central 240moving 40nested 33parent 364renaming 37renaming in the Department Data

Dictionary 243sharing resource pools 438

diagramsas iGrafx components 22basic

about 21creating 22

cause and effectabout 21

closing 48, 49exporting 178IDEF0 charts

about 21organization charts

about 21creating 22

placing shapes in 23printing 48, 167, 169process

about 21creating 22

savingabout 48new 49unnamed 49

working with 111digital signature 273disabled license keys 8discard transactions 447discard transactions on completion

about 449hot to 449

Disconnect command 97distance line 333

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

distribution functionsabout 477

DMAIC model 341document 327documents

as files 22creating new 112, 113managing as a web project 174opening 112, 113output format 171printing 48, 167Process Central 113publishing 171publishing a web project 174publishing for Microsoft Word 173publishing slide presentations 173sending as an e-mail attachment 178working with 111

Dragging and Dropping, OLE objects 193drawing

lines to connect shapes 25duplicate transactions by member 447duplicate transactions by member on completion

about 449duplicate transactions on completion 447

about 448how to 448

duplicating transactions 401

E

embedded subprocess 353embedding

objectsusing drag and drop 192

enabled license keys 8end monitor 545enterprise models 289enterprise objects 289entity 364Equipment, as resource

619

cost 586error 363error checking 359event 365Event generator 522events 350

about 543assigning to activity 544borders of different types 350boundary 345, 352composite, creating 543defining 543intermediate 352

examplerenege 354

Excel spreadsheetfor generator input 531

exception 362exception flow 345, 346, 354, 371exiting iGrafx 50expanded embedded subprocess 362expanded subprocess 362Export Diagram dialog box 178Export Report

about 613external files 613

Export Table dialog box 179, 180exporting 178

diagrams 178tables 179, 181

changing the field view 180exporting diagrams and tables 178exporting to Excel 341expression 365Expression Builder 486expressions

about 484Expression Builder 486modifying an attribute 489

620

F

families of transactions 402family 364family member 364fault 363fault on completion 447

about throwing 450how to throw 451

fieldsabout 81, 387adding or displaying 81advanced shape field options 84choosing location 389displaying with shapes 205moving in or around a shape 82

filelinking to a shape 116

filescreating 111database

importing custom data in 186importing 182

database 181, 183FlowCharter 182older versions 181Optima! 181Visio 181

opening 111fill patterns

text area 32filtering report elements 571Fit Data

about 603distributions 603graphs 603

Fixed costresource 594

floating department 363flow

message 364flow container 363FMEA diagrams

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

about 324footers

about 119Format Diagram dialog box 162functions

about 474adding 477distribution

about 477mapping

about 481defining 483

user defined 475

G

Gallery 52gateway types 355gateways

decision or fork behavior of 355gating inputs 414general data 467generators

about 511adding 514Attribute Change 511attribute change

adding 530attributes

initializing 530Completion 511completion

about 517adding 518

defining 516Attribute Change Generator 529Completion generator 517

deleting 514Demand 511demand

about 518

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

adding 519duplicating 515Event 511event

about 522adding 522

external data for 531Interarrival 511interarrival

about 519adding 521

modifying 514renaming 514schedules 542setting attributes with 515Timetable 511timetable

about 523adding 526changing rates and intervals 527

viewing 514working with 513

Generators dialog box 516global 241goals 289graphic 361

adding text to 106converting to a shape 109drawing 105moving 106reshaping 108resizing 107rotating 107

graphic toolbars 104graphical object 361graphics 62

attaching on lines 62connecting to lines 62disconnecting from lines 63reattaching to lines 63

Group command 97grouping inputs 416grouping shapes and lines 91

621

H

headers 119hierarchy

about 389viewing 390

hoursabout 538defining 538deleting 539time span

inserting 539removing 540

HTML 171

I

IDEF0 chartsabout 21

Idle time 593iGrafx Licensing dialog box 4, 8igxsuperuser 256importing

files 182custom data in database 186database 181, 183FlowCharter 181, 182iGrafx 181Optima! 181Visio 181

text 33Inactive time 583independent subprocess 363indicators

for container shapes 348for messages 348for subprocesses 348hiding for notes 85

individual monitor 545input collections 407inputs

622

batching 409defining 403gating 414grouping 416input collections 407joining 409, 413

Insert Object dialog box 190intelligent shapes 52Interarrival generator 519intermediate event 362intermediate events 352Intersect command 97

J

Java applets 171join at end 363Join command 97joining

inputs 409, 413transactions 400

L

Labor, as resourcecost 586

lane 362, 364parent 364

lanes 357layout page 117Lead Time 332Lean

current-state map 341process improvement 341process map 341value stream map 341

Lean Dataexport 341

Lean map propertiesformatting 332

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Lean methodology 341Lean Six Sigma 341Legend 208license keys 4

adding 6, 7disabling 6enabling 6, 8managing 6managing multiple 8removing 6

line library 63, 64, 65restoring a deleted item 66toolbar image for 65

line styles 63lines

about 26adding graphics 65adding styles 64and text 153callout 109connecting to a different shape 27custom 64default setting 99deleting 28detaching text from 158drawing to connect shapes 25editing styles 64grouping with shapes 91modifying 27moving to a different point 28multiple destinations 26phase 77preset style

adding 102choosing, renaming, deleting 103creating 102

routing 55selecting 27, 28

Linkingcontrolling OLE objects 195OLE objects 194shapes 113to Excel Spreadsheets 193

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

to Word Documents 193linking

and subprocesses 114shapes to a file 116shapes to a repository file 116shapes to a web page 116shapes to other diagrams 114

Linksediting 194

Links dialog box 192loop 353, 364

M

mapping functionsabout 481defining 483

margins 119Max #Wait 590Max Cap Used 590Max Wait# 595Maximum capacity used 590Maximum number of waiting transactions,

statistics 590Maximum number waiting 595measurements 289message 365message flow 364message on completion 447

about generating 450how to generate 450

modifyingconnector lines 27

monitorsabout 544adding 548deleting 550editing 550end 545finding placed 549individual 545

623

monitors tab, displaying 548placing 549removing placed 549start 545start and end 545statistics 544when evaluated 544working with 545

movingconnectors lines to a different point 28departments 40multiple shapes 25shape 24

multi-instance activity 364

N

New command 113note window 84

deleting text in 85opening 85

notes 84, 85attaching to a shape 85displaying ToolTips for 85hiding indicators 85printing 85

NW Util% 593

O

objectsembedding

using drag and drop 192enterprise 289linking 289sharing 289

OLE Objectscontrolling links 195converting embedded 192creating links 194

624

editing embedded 192embedding into diagrams 193inserting new 191using the Paste Special command for 193viewing as an icon 195

Open command 112Optima! 181ordering objects 96Organization Charts

addingassistant 296coworkers 298data fields 303manager 297subordinate 297

assistantabout 296adding 296converting to subordinate 305

branchabout 298collapsing or expanding 304moving to new supervisor 300repositioning 299sending to new diagram 305

convertingassistant to subordinate 305subordinate to assistant 305

coworkersabout 298adding 298

creatingorganization charts using the File menu

295organization charts using the Welcome

dialog 295Data Editor

dialog box 311tool 311

data fieldsabout 302adding 303arranging 303

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

editing 303exporting organization data

about 306to a database 309to a spreadsheet 308to a text file 307

importing organization dataabout 306from a database 308from a spreadsheet 308from a text file 306from Outlook 309

layoutapplying style to entire chart 304changing style for workgroup 304cleaning up 305

managerabout 297adding 297

movingbranch to new supervisor 300repositioning branch 299repositioning shape 299shape left or right 302shape to new supervisor 300

OrgChart Builderdialog box 310tool 310

shapeabout 298changing sizing 305changing spacing 305moving left or right 302moving to new supervisor 300removing 302repositioning 299

subordinateabout 297adding 297converting to assistant 305

toolData Editor 311OrgChart Builder 310

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

organization chartsabout 21creating 22

Out of service time 592Outline command 97output data

about 385decision data

about 385defining percentages 385

outputsall option 453available option 460decision option

about 455creating 459

named output optionabout 459case text 460

Overtimeresource costs 594

P

pageorientation 117paper size 117scaling 117

page breaksviewing 169

Page layout 117page numbers

viewing 170Page Setup 117

Footer tab 119Header tab 119Options tab 120

Page Setup dialog box 117, 169Margins tab 119Page tab 117

parallel activity 364

625

parallel task 353parent department 364parent lane 364parent pool 364Pareto charts

Lean process analysis and 343partner 364Paste Special command

using for OLE objects 193pasting

about 45pause points

removing 560resuming after pause 561setting 559

permissions 256phase lines 77

deleting 78formatting 77inserting 77labeling 78

phasescoloring 78

pick chartsLean process analysis and 343

pool 363parent 364

pools in BPMN diagrams 357Preempt attribute 464Preset Text Style 163preset text style

deleting 163Print Components dialog box 169Print dialog box 168, 170printing 167, 170

about 48book mode 120canceling 170choosing components for 48diagram 48document 48for book binding 120frame around diagrams 120

626

large diagrams 120notes 120page order for poster mode 120poster mode 120troubleshooting 170

Priority attribute 464Process

data 377hierarchy

about 389viewing 390

mappingabout 367

modelingabout 369environment 374simulation environment 374

simulation 393window 375

processcopying

between documents 392within a document 392

creatingExplorer Bar 391Task tab 391

deleting 392renaming 391start points 403tasks

about 442creating, iGrafx Explorer 444creating, Properties dialog box 443

Process Analyzerabout 599deleting an existing analysis 602dialog box 599editing an existing analysis 602exporting an analysis 602importing an analysis 602

Process Centralannotations

adding 279

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

deleting 281editing 280using 278

documentsabout 224adding to a repository 224approving 259, 270checking into a repository 228checking out from a repository 226copying items to a document 232nominating for approval 267rejecting 259removing from a repository 225sharing items between documents

233undoing the checkout of an item 227viewing in a repository 225what happens after approval 273what happens after nominating for

approval 267Explorer Bar

refreshing 220showing 220

filesadding external files to a repository

229adding multiple files to a repository

230folders

about 235adding a document to a folder 235adding current document to a folder

235moving a document to a folder 235

historyabout 236viewing 236

itemsabout 231copying to a document 232sharing between documents 233

labelsabout 238

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

assigning a label 238assigning from the History dialog box

239deleting 239viewing 240

linksabout 243managing 227navigating diagram links 245to external files 245to internal documents or files 246to other diagrams 244

propertiesabout 246viewing an item’s properties 247

queriesabout 246, 248customizing the query results display

251defining a query 250editing a query 250removing a query 250

renamingabout 228changing the name of a diagram or

component 229changing the name of a document,

folder, or file 228repositories

about 218, 221adding external files to a repository

229adding multiple files to a repository

230changing properties 224closing 224loading 223unloading 223

securityapproving documents 259, 270assigning permissions 256assigning roles 256certificates 273

627

default roles 253digital signatures 273inherited roles 253nominating documents for approval

267permissions 254rejecting documents 259rights management 251roles 252special users 255vote 269voting log 268voting signature 273voting to-do 270what happens after a document is

approved 273what happens after nominating a

document for approval 267versions

about 235creating a new version based on an

older version 237creating a new version of a document

236viewing a specific version of an item

238working directory, changing 227

Process Central documentopening 113

Process Central propertiescustom repository item properties 247

process diagramsabout 21activities in 368converting to BPMN 361creating 22managing 390start points in 403viewing hierarchy 390

Process Guide 372process instance 364

BPMNtransactions in 347

628

process property 365process terminology mapping 361processes

independentflows between 357

Properties dialog box 114about 377, 397Attributes tab 463BPMN page 346Custom Data tab 468General tab 467Inputs tab 403Outputs tab 385Process Guide 372Resources tab 381, 424Summary tab 467Task tab 382, 439viewing 378

Publish Web Project dialog box 175publishing 171

for use in Microsoft Word 173slide presentations 173web page 171

publishing a web project 174

Q

querycopy results 250print results 250

Queueaverage waiting 595maximum waiting 595total request count 595total requests waited 595total waiting 595

R

RapiDOE

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

about 605add a scenario attribute to the decision

shape 609controlling process flow 606creating a scenario attribute 608defining an attribute type 607designing and running an experiment 610modifying an existing scenario attribute

608modifying an existing type 607Modifying process parameters 609

Activity level metrics 610Generator interarrival time 609Resource allocations 609

redoing 45change default 45

renaming preset text style 163renege 354renege example 354Report

window 376report element

about 567adding 576editing 576

filters 571format 574statistics 568structure 570

Report window 564reports

about 395report element

about 567editing 567

Requestsaverage waiting 595maximum waiting 595total count 595total waited 595total waiting 595

requirements 289Res Util% 593

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

resource dataabout 380viewing 381

resource poolsabout 433adding 434changing department allocation 436deleting 435modifying 435sharing between departments 438

Resourcesbusy time 592idle time 593out of service 592overtime costs 594standard costs 594utilization 593waiting time 593

resourcesabout 371, 533assignment type

about 428changing 428

behaviorabout 430setting 432

costabout 428changing 429

defining 424defining new 425pools

about 433adding 434deleting 435modifying 435

removing from model 426schedule

about 430assigning to 542selecting 430

statistics 591wait options 433

629

rights 256risks 289roles 256rotating objects 95rotating shapes and text 165rule 365run mode 552run setup

about 502defining simulation time 503defining snapshots 509initialization and report setup 507

running a simulationabout 552run mode 552trace mode 557

S

savinga diagram 48automatic recovery 49new diagram 49unnamed diagram 49workspace 49

Scenariowindow 376

scenariosabout 497calendars 534creating 501deleting 502generators

about 511duplicating 515renaming 514working with 513

monitorsabout 544working with 545

multiple 500

630

renaming 501resources 533run setup

about 502defining simulation time 503defining snapshots 509initialization and report setup 507

window 499schedules

assigning toactivity 542generator 542resource 542

composite, creating 542days 535defining 541events 543hours 538overtime 535working with 540

selectingcancelling 31multiple items 29removing items from selection 31shapes or lines 28

sequence flow 364Service time 584Service waiting time 585setting Lean map properties 332shape field

deleting 84Shape Library 162

adding default modeling properties 89adding shapes 88adding text layouts 89adding VBA code 89arranging shapes in 91changing default formats and fields 89duplicating a shape in 91editing connect points between 89editing shapes in 89removing shapes from 88toolbox toolbar 88

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

shape libraryabout 87

shape numberschanging format for 81hiding 79setting default format for 80showing 79showing or hiding 79

shape stylepreset

choosing, renaming, deleting 101shapes

adding secondary text areas 164adding shadow or 3D effect 73adding to the Shape Library 88and graphics 103and text 152automatic routing 57BPMN 350changing border 72changing fill 72changing size of 41Connect Shapes command and 57connecting 56container 345default setting 99deleting secondary text areas 164detaching text from 158displaying fields 205displaying property data 387evenly spacing 94fitting to text 68formatting 72Gallery 52grouping with lines 91including field description with 83intelligent 52library 87linking to a file 116linking to a repository file 116linking to a web page 116linking to diagrams 113linking to files 113

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

linking to other diagrams 114linking to repositories 113linking to web pages 113making the same size 93moving 24moving connection to 66moving fields 82moving multiple 25numbering 79placing 51placing in diagrams 23preset style

adding 101creating 101

properties 377removing from the Shape Library 88renumbering automatically 80renumbering manually 80replacing 67reversing line ends between 67rotating with text 165selecting 28setting spacing between 71spacing options between 71

simulationdata

about 565deleting from report 565naming 565replacing existing 565

environmentabout 394, 495

how it works 393reports 395results, reviewing 563run mode 552running 393, 552trace environment 554trace mode 553, 557viewing results 393what happens during 496

SIPOC diagram analysis 342Slice command 97

631

snapshotsdefining 509, 510deleting 511modifying 510

spacing objects evenly 94SPC charts

Lean processes and 344start and end monitor 545start monitor 545start points

about 403defining using a generator 404locating 407

Statisticsabout transactions 582average waiting 595blocked time 583cycle time 583inactive time 583maximum capacity used 590maximum waiting 595resource busy time 592resource idle time 593resource out of service time 592resource utilization 593resource waiting time 593service time 584service waiting time 585total request count 595total requests waited 595total waiting 595transaction averages 583, 588, 591transaction cost 585transaction count 583transaction totals 583, 588, 591waiting for resource time 583waiting time 584working time 583

statisticsabout 582activity

about 587cost 589

632

formulas 588queue 589time 589

customabout 577adding to report 580creating 579deleting 579modifying 579

resourceabout 591busy time, subsets 593cost 594formulas 591queue 595time 592time, combinations 593

transactionabout 582cost 585count 583formulas 583joined, about 585time 583

strategies 289subdepartments 241subprocess 362

ad-hoc 366calling 444embedded 353expanded 362expanded embedded 362independent 363linking to 114viewing 445

Summary 208summary data 467superuser account 256SVG 171

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

T

tablesexporting 178, 179, 180, 181modifying predefined sets 181removing columns 181reordering columns 180saving predefined sets 181

Takt Time 332task data

about 381delay duration

about 383specifying 383

value classabout 384assigning 384viewing 384

viewing 382work duration

about 382specifying 383

taskscost

about 445defining 439duration

about 440specifying 441

excluding departments from 446on completion

defining 447process

about 442creating, iGrafx Explorer 444creating, Properties dialog box 443

type 440text

addingabout 31in shapes 31

adding to a shape 164aligning blocks of 164

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

applying preset stylepreset text style 163

areaabout 32anchoring 32borders and fill patterns 32creating 32

attaching to a line 157attaching to a shape 157bullets and 160changing size of 43creating preset style 163decision case 58default style 161deleting 158deleting from a shape 164deleting preset text style 163detaching from a shape or line 158editing 159format 159importing 33in diagrams 152in shapes 31, 152line spacing 161moving 156on lines 153orientation 165preset style 161renaming preset style 163rotating 165selecting 155setting defaults 162

text blocksaligning 164

Timeblocked 583cycle 583idle 593inactive 583out of service 592resource busy time 592resource waiting 593service 584

633

service waiting 585waiting 584waiting for resource 583working 583

timeabout 371

time spaninserting 539removing 540

timeline 332Timeline display 332timer 365Timetable generator 523token 364tokens 347toolbars

Toolbox 23Toolbox toolbar

placing a shape with 23placing multiple instances of one shape

with 23using 23

Tot #Block 590Tot #Wait 589Tot Block 583Tot Busy 592Tot Cycle 583Tot Eq Cost 586Tot Idle 593Tot Inact 583Tot Lbr Cost 586Tot NZ Wait 595Tot OOS 592Tot OT 593, 594Tot OT Cost 594Tot Oth Cost 586Tot Res Wait 593Tot Res Work 583Tot Serv 584Tot Serv Wait 585Tot Std Cost 587, 594Tot Use Cost 595Tot VA Cost 586

634

Tot Wait 595Tot Wait# 595Tot Work 583, 584Total #Res Wait 590Total transaction waiting time 595trace environment

about 554attributes window 557control menu 554transactions window 555

trace modeabout 553clearing 557pause points

removing 560resuming after pause 561setting 559

running a simulation in 557setting 557trace colors, changing 557

transaction 366family 364

transaction attribute 365Transactions

average number of waiting 590costs 585count 583maximum number of waiting 590

transactionsabout 370duplicating 401families 402flow constraints 402joining 400more on 400statistics 582

troubleshootingprinting 170

typesabout 469defining 470deleting 470modifying 470

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

U

unactivated iGrafx product use 4unbatch transactions 447unbatch transactions on completion

about 449how to 450

undoing 45change default 45

Ungroup command 97Utilization, resource 593

V

Value addedcost 586

Value stream effectiveness 343value stream map 327viewing

about 47best fit 47increasing or reducing the view 47page breaks 169page numbers 170

Visio 181voting 273VSM 327

W

Waiting for resource time 583Waiting time 584, 593web page

linking to a shape 116web project

creating 175updating 177

Welcome dialog box 112windows

iGrafx 2006 User Guide

Attributes 557Process 375Report 376Scenario 376, 499Transactions 555

work balancing graph 334Work Balancing Graph display 332Worker

custom statistic 592Working time 583workspace

saving 49

635

636

iGrafx 2006 User Guide